International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




        1. International Business: Meaning And
                          Scope

  Interdependency is a natural phenomenon; nations, living beings and
  companies cannot totally depend on themselves. It is the major driving
  force for international business.



Learning value:
This chapter covers the essential aspects,

   1.   Definition of international business
   2.   Emergence of developing nations in international business
   3.   Motives of international business from companies and nations
   4.   Fundamental differences between Domestic and International business
   5.   Few successful organizations in Domestic & International business

International business: Meaning and Scope
 In the post independence era, more than half-century Indian entrepreneurs
concentrated on domestic operations and a surplus production was exported.
The physical movement of goods, called EXPORT cannot represent
International business. International business is defined as “any commercial
transaction-taking place across the boundary lines of a sovereign entity”. It
may take place either between countries or companies or both. Private
companies involve themselves in such transactions for revenue, profit and
prosperity. If governments are involved, they need to maintain their image,
dependency and economic growth. Sometimes economic ties are
strengthened through such transactions. These transactions include
investments, physical movements of goods and services, transfer of
technology and manufacturing. Today every company, whether small or
large, single entity or partnership, joint stock or government owned, is
determined to expand internationally. Earlier the slogan “export or perish”
has now become “internationalize or perish”.
                                       1
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



International business has a wide spectrum of activities beyond mere
exports. Currently Indian corporate acquire and takeover companies
elsewhere. They invest a huge sum to find a right location for cost-effective
production base. They are on the lookout for right joint-venture partners.
Hence International business operations extend their dimensions.

The future success of company will depend upon its operations in many
other countries through investment, manufacturing and marketing and not
only on the revenue generated indigenously. In the same way nations
success will depend on the businessman operating successfully in other
countries and establishing their credentials there. In the 1950’s and 60’s,
companies form United States built business operations throughout the
world and brought image to the nation. In 1970’s and 80’s, Japanese
electronics and automobile companies made great revolution everywhere in
the world.

Why should we study International business?
Three decades ago very few companies ventured in to international arena,
and most of them restricted themselves to physical movement of goods and
services i.e. exports and imports. Restrictions, regulations and other barriers
prevented them to take risks. Today, the whole world is open. Duties, license
quotas and other investment limitations have gradually been eliminated.
Anyone can do business in any part of the world. Risk factors are properly
analyzed and evaluated and information about them is abundant. The
aspiring international businessman can go to anywhere and explore
opportunities.

In such a situation few key factors like finance flow or investment is a great
force. To manage business internationally the right human resource is
necessary and to manufacture goods, right technology is a pre-requisite.
There should also be sizeable market to generate revenue. To manufacture
goods in any country, raw material, components, consumables and capital
items are required. Easy access to all the above is as easy as domestic
procurement today. Hence scope of international business is widened.




                                      2
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



   COMPANY                                               OVERSEAS
   COUNTRY OF                                            OPERATION
     ORIGIN                KEY FACTORS




                               FINANCE

                               HUMAN
                              RESOURCE

                           TECHNOLOGY

                              MATERIAL



REFORM PROCESS
Almost all countries are reforming their economy by LPG i.e. Liberalization,
Privatization and Globalization. Many South East Asian nations, China,
South Korea and a few Latin American countries were quick to introduce the
reform process. India too, injected new vigour in to its economy and
industry by introducing an open door policy, eliminating licenses, replacing
foreign restrictions by other models and in general liberalizing procedures. It
is clear that through reforming process, manufacturers in India are required
to increase the production capacity and divert products to various
destinations. Companies with surplus money should invest in different
countries with motive of getting higher returns on their investment. Every
business house such as Tatas, Birlas, Mittals, Mallayas have begin their
aggressive operations abroad.


                                      3
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



STRENGTH OF HUMAN RESOURCES
Countries like India have been endowed with efficient technical and non-
technical human resources. Companies with their origin in India have proved
themselves all over the world specially information technology, steel,
healthcare, garments and jewellery.

Today international business is growing at a fast pace. Countries, which until
now did not ventured in to the international arena and untapped markets
have emerged as potential ground for business. Latin America, sub-Saharan
Africa and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) are favourite
destinations of future prosperity. Trade policies announced by various
governments in the world are positive, proactive and pragmatic. Autocracy,
authoritarianism and despotism are disappearing in all parts of the world.
International bodies, such as World Trade Organisation strongly advocate
elimination of barriers.

It is mandatory for professionals to understand the whole network of
political, legal, competitive and socio-cultural aspects wherever the business
is setup. When E-Merck set up a business unit in India, there was a need for
five hundred professionals who understood drug price control order, in-
process control system, food and drug administration and legal procedures,
not only in India but in all countries in South Asia, Middle East and Africa.

Hence, there will be an unprecedented demand for trained professional in the
field of international business to handle business, investment, manpower,
technology, services and marketing. To operate effectively, managers must
understand modes, functions, means, environments, growth opportunities
and risk factors. To this end they need to have access to a strong information
base. To integrate all resources and produce a cost-effective product it in to
revenue a strong professional force is directly involved at all stages. Thus a
large force of trained manpower is required to handle future international
business in all countries. Proper understanding of culture, economic
indications, infrastructure, cost of operation, political scenario and working
condition will make effective manager in international business in any
country.



                                      4
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



    REASONS TO ENTER INTERNATIONAL
                BUSINESS
All organizations, irrespective of their size, are keen to enter in to
international business. Established companies are expanding their business.
Many countries encourage trade, and removal of strangulating trade barriers.
It motivates companies to aggressively multiply their targets. The
governments of various countries are also determined to make their
economy grow through international business that has therefore become a
inevitable part of their economic policy. The objective behind international
business can be looked at:

   1. From an individual company’s angle.
   2. From the government angle.

From an individual company’s angle

   1. Managing the product life cycle:

      All companies have products, which pass through different stages of
      their life cycles. After the product reaches the last stage of the life
      cycle called the declining stage in one country, it is important for the
      company to identify other countries where the whole cycle process
      could be encashed. For example, Enfield India reached maturity and
      declining stage in India for the 350 cc motorcycle. The company
      entered Kenya, West Indies, Mauritius and other destinations where
      the heavy engine two-wheeler became popular. The Suzuki 800 cc
      vehicle reached the last stage of its life cycle in Japan and entered
      India in the early 1980’s, where it is still doing good business today.
      HP laptops are moving all the developing countries the moment they
      reached maturity in the U.S. market.

   2. Geographic expansion as a growth strategy:

      Even if companies expand their business at home, they may still look
      overseas for new markets and better prospects. For example, Arvind
      mills expanded their business by either setting up units or opening

                                      5
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


  warehouses abroad. Ranbaxy’s growth is mainly attributed to
  geographic expansion every year to new territories. Arabindo Pharma,
  Cipla and Dr. Reddys follow the same.

3. The adventurous spirit of the younger generation

 The younger generation of business families has considerable
 International exposure. They are willing to take risks and challenges
 And also create opportunities for their business. Laxmi Mittal has
 Emerged as the steel king of the world and Vijay Mallya of the UB
 Group took a major risk in setting up operations in South Africa.
 Kumar Birla expands to Australia and Europe through acquisitions.

4. Corporate ambition:

  Every corporate in the country has strategic plans to multiply its sales
  turnover. In case some of the ventures fail, others will offset the losses
  because of multi-location operations. For example, Coco Cola is still
  to day not earning any profit in a number of countries. But this will
  not affect the company because more than a hundred countries are
  contributing to offset losses. Kellogge cannot think of profits in India
  for further five years. They are ambitious to be visible and then
  revenue.

5. Technology advantage:

  Some companies have outstanding technology through which they
  enjoy core competency. There is a need for such technology in all
  countries. Biocon, Infosys, Gharda chemicals are known for their core
  competency in biotechnology, IT and pesticides respectively and a
  huge demand exists throughout the world for their technology.
  Thermax, Ion Exchange, Bharat Heavy Electricals and Larsen &
  Toubro have marched ahead in International business.

6. Building a corporate image

  Prior to profits and revenue generation, many companies first build
  their corporate image abroad. Once the image is built, generating
  revenues is a comparatively easy task. Samsung and LG built their

                                   6
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


  image in India for the first three years and generation of revenue and
  profits has been considerable, as they have expanded to semi-urban
  and rural India as well. Today their market share and penetration
  levels have gone far ahead of other players in India.

7. Incentives and business impact

  Companies, which are involved in international business, enjoy fiscal,
  physical and infrastructural incentives while they setup business in the
  host country. The Aditya Birla Group enjoyed such incentives in
  Thailand and Indonesia. All such incentives contribute to the company
  to enjoy multiple advantages like economies of scale, access to import
  inputs, competitive pricing and aggressive promotion.

8. Lobour advantage

  Many companies have a highly productive lobour force. Their unique
  skills may not be available throughout the world. Manufacturing units
  in India have consistently performed well, whether in a diamond
  industry, handicraft, woodwork or leather. Companies nurture the
  skills of the artisans and win world markets. Knitwear, handlooms,
  embroidery, metal ware, carpet weaving, cashew processing and
  seafood call for cost-effective lobour force. India is endowed with
  such skills.

9. New business opportunities

  Many companies have entered in to business abroad, seeing unlimited
  opportunities. National foreign trade policy emphasizes focus
  markets. Enormous amount of growth potential is untapped in Latin
  America, Sub-Saharan Africa, CIS countries and China.

10. Emergence of SEZ’S, EOU’S, AEZ

  Current approvals of Special economic zones, Agrizones and
  Technology parks by Ministry of Commerce & Industry give new
  dimensions to international business. The companies setting up units
  in SEZ’s enjoy innumerable benefits and competitiveness.


                                  7
                                                  Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



From a Government Angle

 1. Earning valuable foreign exchange

   Foreign exchange earning is necessary to balance the payments for
   imports. India imports crude oil, defense equipments, essential raw
   materials and medical equipments for which the payments have to be
   made in foreign exchange. If the exports are high and imports are low
   it indicates a surplus balance of payment. On the other hand if imports
   are high and exports are low it indicates an adverse balance of
   payment, which all economies would want to avoid. A vast majority
   of the nations in the world are facing adverse balance of payment.

 2. Interdependency of nations

   From time immemorial, nations have depended on each other. Even
   during the era of Indus valley civilization, Egypt and the Indus Valley
   depended on each other for various items. Today, India depends on
   the Gulf regions for crude oil and in turn the Gulf region depends on
   India for tea, rice etc. Developed countries depend on developing
   countries for primary goods, whereas developing countries depend on
   developed countries for value added finished products. No single
   country is endowed with all the resources to survive on her own.

 3. Trade theories and their impact

   The theories of absolute advantage, comparative advantage and
   competitive advantage, which have been propounded by classical
   economists, indicate that a few nations have certain advantages of
   resources. The resources may be in the form of labour or
   infrastructure or technology or even a proactive policy of the
   government. Such theories are remaining foundations till today, for
   international business practices with few changes and trends.




                                  8
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



4. Diplomatic relations

  Diplomacy and trade always go hand in hand. Many sovereign nations
  send their diplomatic representatives to other countries with a motive
  of promoting trade besides maintaining cordial relations. Indian
  diplomats in Latin America have done a remarkable job of promoting
  India’s business in the 1990’s. Indian embassies and high
  commissions in all the countries around the world play a catalytic role
  of promoting trade and investment.

5. Core competency of nations

  Many countries are endowed with resources, which are produced at an
  optimum level. Such countries can compete well anywhere in the
  world. Rubber products from Malaysia, knitwear from India, rice from
  Thailand and wool from Australia are a few illustrations. Competing
  with a focused competency in any major resource or technology gives
  core competency status. India’s core competency in IT is known
  throughout the world.

6. Investment for infrastructure


  Over the years all countries have invested huge amounts of money on
  infrastructure by building airports, seaports, economic zones and
  inland container terminals. If the trade activities do not increase, the
  country cannot recover the amounts invested. Hence, the government
  fixes targets for every infrastructure unit and time frame to achieve it.
  Economies like Mauritius, Hong Kong, Singapore, Malta and Cyprus
  invest in trade related infrastructure in order to elevate themselves to
  be foreign trade oriented economies. Infrastructure and international
  business are the two eyes of a growing economy.

7. National image

  A new era has emerged from conquering countries by sword to
  winning it by trade. A businessman gives priority to the image of the
  country he belongs to. We come across products with labels such as

                                  9
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


      “made in China” and “Japan” & “made in India”. Businessmen from
      India, China and Japan bring credentials to their country. When
      L.N.Mittal operaters in Indonesia or Kazakhstan or Trinidad he is
      perceived by the people as Indian. The stigma cannot be detached.

   8. Foreign trade policy and targets

      All developing countries announce their trade policies. A clear road
      map is drafted and given to promotional bodies so that timely
      implementation is possible. Every trade policy in India, in the past had
      its agenda and action plans right from import control order in 1947.
      All the trade policies had three fold objectives in their agenda-
      production promotion and competitiveness.

   9. National targets

      By the year 2010, India aims to have a 2% share of the global market
      from the current level of 1%. By the year 2009-10, our trade status
      should cross $ 500 billion.

   10. WTO and international agencies

The apex body of world trade, the WTO, a free, transparent and regulatory
body upholds provisions related to the elimination of tariffs and non-tariff
barriers. The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development
(IBRD), popularly called the World Bank extends financial assistance on a
soft loan basis in order to assist developing countries in their infrastructure
and industrial development. The International Monetary Fund (IMF)
maintains currency stability in various countries through regulatory
mechanisms. Many more organizations like International Maritime
Organization,     International     Standard    Organization,     International
Telecommunication Union, International Civil Aviation Organization are
major catalysts to promote trade between nations. Over the past few years
their role in promotion of trade, especially amongst developing economies is
unprecedented.




                                      10
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



Fundamental differences between DOMESTIC BUSINESS
  OPERATIONS AND INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
                    OPERATIONS


 Many well-known business units are highly successful in their home
countries. However, they are not able to face the challenges abroad. On
the other hand there are organizations that do very well in international
business but they lose out in local arena. There are a number of
organizations that do business, both domestic and international,
successfully, by properly allocating right resources in right countries.
These organizations are quick to see the advantages and disadvantages
involved in both operations. If business is slow in the home country, they
concentrate more on international business, and if risk is high in
international business they focus their attention on the domestic front.
Understanding differences and deciding policies and strategies enable
organizations to succeed or fail.

There are certain similarities between domestic and international business
in terms of broad objectives and goals of the company, namely:

1. Generating revenue- either by creating opportunities or by
   optimizing strengths
2. Corporate image building
3. Customer satisfaction and building loyalty as patronage buyers
4. Carrying out their operations respecting and adhering to local
   regulations
5. Generation of employment opportunities
6. Both are subject to a set code of conduct and ethics that includes
   corporate governance.
7. Mass production through cost reduction and achieving economies of
   scale
8. Building a strong network in order to make product and services
   available in any part of the nation or world
9. Adapting new standards and change in style and function.

At the same time, there are major macro level differences. These are
analyzed below, under various parameters.

                                  11
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



     DOMESTIC BUSINESS VERSUS INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS

                           Domestic Business                     International Business
  Dimension
                             Operations                               Operations
                                                            The environment is not fully known.
                     The economic, political, legal,
                                                            Innumerable hidden factors which may
   1.Environment     socio-cultural, competitive and
                                                            emerge any time to pose as problems.
                     technology environments are known
                                                            They will lead to pitfalls.
                                                            Only long term planning and strategy
                     Can be worked out for short terms
2. Plan and strategy                                        will work. Strategic inputs are required
                     and carried forward to long term
                                                            in multiples.
                     The maximum domestic competitive
   3. Competitive                                           International competitive forces play a
                     forces operate and one can
   forces and their                                         vital role and its difficult to understand
                     understand their movements as they
       intensity                                            their motive and movement
                     are visible
                     Local currency is used for
                                                            Transactions are carried out in various
                     transactions.     Costing,    pricing,
                                                            currencies. Fluctuations in cross
                     revenue and margins are computed
 4. Currencies and                                          currency movement and associated risks
                     in a single currency. Volatility may
  their movements                                           are common. Currency fluctuation
                     have a minimum impact in business
                                                            influences pricing and costing and
                     in short term. One can overcome
                                                            investment decisions.
                     easily.
                     Comparatively one can predict Very difficult to predict and risks may
                     future risks and shocks and they will crop up at any time, due to the political
  5. Business risks
                     not have a major impact on the situation, the society itself and several
                     businesses with strong background.     unknown factors.
                     It is reasonable and easy to conduct Very expensive and difficult to conduct.
                     business research, demand analysis Reliability        criteria     depends     on
     6. Research
                     and customer surveys. It is also individual countries and there is no
                     reliable.                              uniformity in the output and findings.
                     Due to past laurels and established
                                                            Multilingual, multi-strategic and multi-
                     systems, corporates can succeed
                                                            cultural human resources and they
                     even if the human resources have
7. Human resources                                          should be able to withstand large risks.
                     minimum skills and knowledge.
                                                            Every individual is profit center, hence,
                     Team commitments is evaluated and
                                                            accountable.
                     appraised
                     Narrowed down to work in a single
                                                            Broadened to cover many countries and
 8. Organizational country with a steady growth
                                                            geographic and cultural diversity may
vision and objective objective. Each one will understand
                                                            influence the vision and objective.
                     the vision and objective easily.
                     Adapted to the local environment, as Varies from country to country subject
    9. Product and   per the requirements of the domestic to regulations. This is especially true for
         usage       customers affordability, beliefs, consumer           &       medicinal     items.
                     values, cultural elements and buying Standardization, adaptability, usage

                                           12
                                                             Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                       behavior.                                  pattern & warranties are parts of product
                                                                  International regulations and host
                       Only local regulations are fully
                                                                  country regulations are applicable.
                       applicable to conduct business.
                                                                  Advanced countries impose strict
 10. Legal aspects     There is minimum adherence to
                                                                  regulations compared to LDCs. Strict
                       international regulations related to
                                                                  adherence to contractual obligations is
                       IPR.
                                                                  common.
                       Depending on the size of the               All overseas operations except exports,
                       business one can start with a              call for huge investments to set up and
11. Investment and     minimum investment. Involvement            expand the business in many countries.
     Sourcing          of regulatory bodies is minimal.           Special regulatory bodies are involved
                       Individual ability and repayment           in the process since foreign currency is
                       terms determine the funds.                 transacted.
                       A majority of companies use cost           Companies use marginal cost pricing or
12. Pricing strategy   plus margin pricing or competitive         transfer pricing or competitive pricing to
                       pricing.                                   succeed.
                                                                  Government or market practice governs
                       The business house can use its
                                                                  the distribution channel. Cash and carry,
 13. Distribution      discretion to select any channel to
                                                                  shopping malls and mail order services
     channels          reach the customer. No restriction
                                                                  are becoming popular in international
                       exists here.
                                                                  business.
                                                                  Different countries have different
                       Advertising, personal selling and
                                                                  restrictions.        For        example,
                       other promotional methods are not
                                                                  advertisements for liquor and cigarettes
  14. Promotion        restricted through strict legal
                                                                  are not permitted in some countries and
                       framework if they are not socially
                                                                  campaigns using female models are
                       objectionable.
                                                                  banned in others.
                                                                  International players with advanced
                       Domestic players are involved in all
                                                                  technology and systems are involved.
   15. Logistics       the activities. The cost of logistics is
                                                                  Proportionately, the cost is low for
                       very high locally.
                                                                  physical movements.


    Some business groups like Adanis started only overseas operations
    without any linkage with domestic operation right from the beginning.
    Tata group established a good name at home country and gradually
    moved to other countries. For companies in IT, such as Wipro or
    Infosys, the major focus is on overseas operations. All the companies
    cited as examples above are successful in their own right, but the
    strategies and operation systems differ from country to country.

    Organizations like RELIANCE INDUSTRIES have inherent strength in
    indigenous business such as completing the project prior to stipulated
    time. This experience enables the company to grab any business

                                             13
                                                                  Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


opportunity in petrochemicals around the world and build reputation.
Gammon India, IRCON (Indian Railway Construction), Larsen &
Toubro (L&T) and Sapoorji Pallonji are successful due to their
meticulous way of understanding both operations.




                               14
                                                Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




 2.Methods of Entry in International Business

   For every human being or business unit, the origin is one,
   but, the laurels are built in multiples and that too, in
   various destinations. The vision, business models, right
   decisions and proper implementations have created
   business enterprises in the and in the contemporary world.


Learning value

International business provides a wide range of advantages and
opportunities. Companies in developing and less developed countries
operate through physical exports, whereas those in advance countries
operate through joint ventures, collaborations, franchises and other
methods. Firms would prefer to go international only if the benefits
surpass anticipated risks, and they carry out an in-depth analysis before
entering international business. Generally, they give serious
consideration on the following aspects:

     a.   Current and potential size of the market.
     b.   Level of completion for a specific product or service
     c.   Economic growth of the country and reform process
     d.   Purchasing power of the people
     e.   Political and legal environments and their impact in business
     f.   Infrastructures like banking, insurance, port facilities etc
     g.   Socio-cultural background of the country
     h.   Availability of technical and non-technical work force
     i.   Foreign exchange reserve and repatriation facilities




                                  15
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


DIFFERENT MODES OF ENTRY IN INTERNATIONAL
                BUSINESS

1. EXPORTS

  Export deals with physical movement of goods and services from one
  place to another through a customs port followings the rules of both
  the country of origin and country of destination. Depending upon the
  involvement of the exporter, exports can be classified as direct or
  indirect. Direct exporters export their goods and services in their own
  name and the buyer directly remits proceeds, in a proper manner and
  through a proper channel. The proper channel means that the
  remittance is made through the banking channel in the currency,
  which is quoted in the invoice, and the proper channel means that the
  goods are legally exported through a customs port.

  Indirect exporters supply goods to direct exporters. Lack of expertise,
  international contacts and manpower cause them to depend upon
  direct exporters. Farmers rarely export grains on their own. Artisans
  cannot develop international contacts to clinch business deals.
  Therefore, they become indirect exporters. Their products are to other
  countries but not in their names.
  Exporters can be classified in several ways:

  1. Depending upon the size of business, they are classified as small
     and large exporters. Current national trade policy provides
     incentives and facilities to promote both small & large exporters in
     different ways that are status holders due to their performance in
     earning foreign exchange.
  2. Depending upon the product lines exported, they are classified as
     single product and multiple product line
  3. Depending upon their legal status, they are classified as
     proprietary, partnership, private limited and public limited
     companies
  4. Depending upon the destination of their exports, they are classified
     as single destinations or multi destination exporters. Nowadays, the
     majority of the companies adopt the philosophy of multi product,
     multi location, multi strategic, and multi dimensional operations.


                                 16
                                                  Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                5. Depending upon the frequency of their exports, they are classified
                   as occasional exporters and dynamic exporters.


                                           EXPORT
                                        INVOLVEMENT




                     DIRECT                                        INDIRECT
                   EXPORTERS                                      EXPORTERS


           Own name and beneficiary                          Not on there own name but
                                                             supply to direct exporters


                                      CLASSIFICATIONS




        SIZE           PRODUCT           LEGAL             DESTINATION             FREQUENCY
                         LINE            STATUS



                                     PARTNER                PUBLIC
                                       SHIP  PVT LTD         LTD
SMALL          LARGE            PROPRIETARY                               OCASSIONAL          BRISK




           SINGLE              MULTI
          PRODUCT             PRODUCT                 SINGLE            MULTIPLE




                                              17
                                                               Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


2. INTERNATIONAL LICENSING


 International licensing is an agreement between the licensor and the
 licensee over a period of time for the use of brand name, marketing,
 know-how, copyright, work method and trade mark by paying a
 license fee. For example, British American Tobacco Company
 (BATS) has given licenses in many countries for the manufacture of
 their brand of cigarettes “555”. In India, ITC is the licensed producer
 of “555”.
 Pepsi cola licensed to Heineken of the Netherlands giving them the
 exclusive right to produce and sell Pepsi cola in Netherlands. The
 licensor has minimum involvement in day-to-day functions. Therefore
 the returns are also comparatively low. Licensing specifies the
 territory as well as period. The licensor gives such permission after
 establishing such a command-able position globally. It has a brand
 command.

              Licensing Concept and Practice

                             Licensor                        Country A




 License Fee


                                                             Country B
                             Licensee
               Manufacture           and      Market

              One or more countries as per agreement




                                18
                                                 Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                               Licensing Process
                PROVIDE THE RIGHT TO
                  USE INTELLECTUAL                      RECEIVES ROYALTY
LICENSOR        PROPERTY AND BRAND                           MONEY
                        NAME




               USE THE INTELLECTUAL                   PAYS ROYALTY TO THE
LICENSEE       PROPERTY TO PRODUCE                     LICENSOR FOR USING
              PRODUCTS FOR SALE IN HIS              INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
                COUNTRY AND BRAND                       AND BRAND NAME


      3. FRANCHISING

      Franchising is a form of licensing wherein the franchiser exercises more
      control over franchisee. The franchiser supplies the main part of the
      product, and provides the following services to the franchisee:

      1.  TRADEMARKS
      2.  OPERATING SYSTEMS
      3.  PRODUCT, &
      4.  BRAND NAME
                                   Company support systems like advertising,
      training of employees, quality assurance are also involved in franchising.
      McDonald, Dairy Queen, Domino’s Pizza and KFC are the known
      franchise brands. NIIT & Aptech have appointed franchisees in Africa,
      south East Asia, Gulf countries and China. Hotels like The Hilton and
      Marriott are well known operators in hotel sector. Jatia’s in India are the
      national franchisees of McDonalds. All the investments on premises, HR,
      operations and promotions are totally borne by the franchisees.

      In practice the franchiser is determined to maintain a standard throughout
      the world in terms of quality brand logo and symbol. But the product is
      adaptable depending on the socio-cultural background of the country.
      McDonalds sells BEEF BURGERS in Russia & VEG BURGERS in
      India.

                                        19
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R.creator with
                                                      Well-known Chandran
                                                      brand      command       can
                                                      become strong franchiser
                    FRANCHISE
                        R                            En cashes on the past &
                                                     present efforts

FRANCHISEE
   FEE                  SELECT



                    FRNCHISEE                           Invests on all the
                                                           resources

  Sometimes the franchisers initiate the process where the economy is on
  boom. In many developing nations, franchisees initiate the process and
  they are forced to bear all the expenses.

  4. CONTRACT MANUFACTURING

  Many companies outsource their products and concentrate mainly on
  marketing operations. Contract manufacturing is the strategy of
  identifying a manufacturing unit to produce items at a competitive price
  in any part of the world. Nike is procuring its athletic footwear in a
  number of factories in South East Asia. Mega Toys is sourcing from
  China. Hundreds of international companies with their origin in European
  countries have selected manufacturing centers in India, China and South
  East Asia. Mark and Spencer, J.C. penny, Target and H & M have
  contract manufacturing arrangements in many parts of the world.
  Contract manufacturing with a dimension in the service sector offer
  ample opportunities for Indian companies in the form of BUSINESS
  PROCESS OUTSOURCING (BPO) and KNOWLEDGE PROCESS
  OUTSOURCING (KPO).

  All the developed nations are becoming end user of outsourced products
  and services of developing nations.




                                   20
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran
                A well-known marketing company


Supply                        Selects


                 Manufacturers- China/India/SEA


5. CONTRACT MARKETING

All the companies, which are strong in production, may not have equal
marketing strengths. However, they may be comfortable dealing with
marketing outlets around the world such as TESCO, Maeys, ‘K’ Mart,
Wal-Mart and Spinneys. Such manufacturing units enter in to a
marketing agreement and concentrate more on production at lower costs.
Thermax, Ion Exchange and Supreme industries have selected marketing
firms in other countries, which have a good background with technology
support. Majority of technology-based companies essentially have to
identify competent organizations with marketing infrastructure to
aggressively promote their products or projects. Many Indian companies
are contract marketers for Germany based medical equipments, dental
care items and hearing aids. Their contractual obligations include
TARGETS & TERRITORIES.

                   A well-known manufacturer in India



                                 Selects


                     Marketer in GCC with technical
                                support


                    Territorial rights with commitment




                                 21
                                                  Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   6. MANAGEMENT CONTRACTS

Companies with a low level of technology and managerial expertise may
seek the assistance of foreign countries. A management contract is an
agreement between two companies whereby one company provides
managerial and technical assistance for which proper monetary
compensation is given, either as a flat lump sum fee or a percentage on the
sales or a share in the profits.
                                 Delta airlines, Air France and KLM offer such
services in developing countries. Exxon is a major operator in Gulf region in
the field of oil exploration.

   7. JOINT VENTURE

VENTURE ORIGINATES FROM ADVENTURE, which means NEW,
either market or technology or environment.
A joint venture is a binding contract between two venture partners to set up a
project either in home country or host country or a third country. In this case
both parties are committed to joint risk taking and joint profit sharing. For
example, The Taj group of hotels has a joint venture in Russia for setting up
Five Star Hotels. Mahindra & Mahindra has recently entered in to a joint
venture with Renault to manufacture cars.

    Partner one from                                Partner two from
       Country A                                       Country B


                                    New
                                   Venture


                            Joint commitment

A large number of joint ventures have been miserable failures in the past. In
the initial stage every venture promises excellent opportunities to both the
venture partners. However, when the operation actually starts, certain
functional level grievances and issues become inevitable. Therefore, it is

                                      22
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


absolutely necessary for both the venture partners to understand all the
aspects of management, investment and regulations of the countries where
they operate. The business units should have clear guidelines and operation
manuals wherein the role of every one should be clearly defined.
Hence, a joint venture is nothing but a “marriage binding” between two
partners from different backgrounds with an understanding, commitment and
mutually rewarding experience to work together.

   8. COLLABORATION

While a joint venture deals with the project in totality, in financial terms and
the proportionate partnership commitments, Collaboration deals with only a
part of the functions. For example Bajaj Auto has technological
collaboration with Kawasaki of Japan, who offers the technology for two
wheelers. Others well known technological collaborations are Ind-Suzuki,
Kinetic-Honda and Hero-Honda. All the developing countries encourage
technology collaborations. The investors in the US, Japan, Germany and UK
enjoyed the fruits by offering technical expertise to the developing nations.
The world famous Kellogg Business School has collaborated with the Indian
school of business (ISB) in Hyderabad, by offering teaching methodology.
Likewise, there may be financial collaborations, HR collaborations, systems
collaborations and strategic collaborations. The common term used for
collaboration is TIE-UP.

   9. FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT

The flow of funds from one destination to another is called investment.
Companies, which are constantly involved in international business, invest
their money in manufacturing and marketing bases through ownership and
control. Kellogg, Pepsi, Coca Cola and the Hyatt group of hotels are willing
to invest even if the profits are expected after a long gestation period.
Currently every developing country is formulating strategies by offering
ample amount of incentives to attract investments.




                                      23
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran
                                           Any Country



Investor                      Money                    Projects/Technology/
                                                              Trade

                                    Short term/Long
                                          term
                 ROI


Foreign firms adopt certain methods as mentioned below:

   a. They control the operations through subsidiaries to achieve strategic
      synergies.
   b. They have control through technology, manufacturing expertise,
      intellectual property rights and brand name.
   c. One permanent person or a team in the country of operation is
      appointed to monitor day to day operations.

The most attractive part of the operation is the direct investment, which
contributes to optimization of resources in the host country, generating
employment opportunities and enhancing the standard of living in the host
country. The other major developments, which have taken place during the
past two decades, are exposure of the host countries to advance technology
and quality products. It is boon to the host country since capital is great
resource it is coming through investment.
The main disadvantages are lack of clarity of repatriation of profits,
imposition of restrictions by host countries and elimination of small and
medium industries due to the financial power of the investor. A number of
South American countries like Argentina and few South East Asian nations
like Indonesia fell pray to the dominant forces of overseas investors. They
feel that the old colonialism may re-emerge through investments.
Generally, a foreign investment takes place on full swing in developing
countries only in the past two decades. China, Taiwan, India, Brazil,
Argentina and other developing countries have started attracting huge
foreign investments. If it takes place in specific sectors like infrastructure,
mining, marine technology and agro processing, it is highly beneficial to
both the host country and investor.



                                      24
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   10. MERGERS AND ACQISITIONS

In this case the company in the host country selects a foreign company
merges itself with it. The foreign company acquires the control of
ownership. This mode of entry gives an outstanding competitive edge over
others. Such companies strengthen their international manufacturing
facilities and marketing network. Proctor & Gamble entered Mexico and
became leaders in five years by acquiring Loreto. Tata bearing acquired
Metal Box in India. It is an easy and fast method since the cost of acquisition
is comparatively low. At the same time the disadvantages are:
           a. It is a complex task involving banks, lawyers, bureaucrats and
              obviously politicians.
           b. The host countries may impose restrictions on acquisitions.
           c. The labour problem is a big challenge to acquisitions specially
              in developing countries where unemployment is a critical issue.

The global STEEL-KING L.N.Mittal was successful right from the first
acquisition of steel mill in Indonesia. Many other acquisitions followed in
Trinidad, Kazakhstan, Hungary and others. The recent Aditya Birla Group
Company Hindalco acquisition of Novelis has strengthened its production
synergy and market access for non-ferrous category in the international
market.

   11. TAKE-OVERS

This is a strategy whereby a company identifies a healthy unit with strong
brand name and network and brings it under the management of another unit
in order to become a leader in the field and guarantee success. Since there
may be many parties wanting to takeover a well-known company,
competition becomes inevitable. It is obvious that only one entity will win
and the winner has to withstand hostilities. Therefore, the process is called a
“hostile take over” and the winner is called the “take over tycoon”. Well-
known examples are the Hindujas who took over Ashok Leyland and
Uniliver who took over Brook Bond and Lipton. Take-over is also on
different levels, such as company takeover, business takeover, product
takeover and brand takeover. Some takeovers in the past have made many
corporate success stories. For example, Uniliver’s take over of Brook Bond
and Lipton enhanced its position as a leader in the tea industry in India.
Always takeovers cost more as compared to acquisition but probability of
success is high.
                                      25
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                 FOREIGN ENTRY DECISION FOR MNCs

                 Exploit competitive advantage
                    through entry abroad




Produce at Home and                     Produce Abroad
      Export




    Licensing or Management                  Maintain Control over
            Contracts                           assets abroad




            Majority or Wholly owned                      Joint Venture
                     affiliate




        Build from scratch                      Acquire or
                                             Merge or Takeover



  For all the decisions the company has to analyse the opportunities and risk
  factors, future potential and long term prospects available in the destination.
  Once the entry is wrong, a major pitfall occurs in one country of the entry
  level, it may cause a major damage to the company. Entry of ENRON in
  INDIA was one such incident one cannot forget.




                                        26
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


12. TURNKEY PROJECTS

A turnkey project is a contract under which a company is fully involved
from concept to completion. It covers right from supply of manpower,
capital, and erection of plant, installation and commissioning up to the trial
operation of a project. The turnkey project contractors either get a fixed fee
or the cost plus profits are collected over a period of time. Today,
infrastructure projects like power plants, airports, refineries, railway lines,
highways and dams are undertaken on a turnkey basis. Bechtel, Brown
Bovery, Hyundai, Mitsubishi, L&T and Daewoo are turnkey contractors for
international projects. They use terms like BOT (Build, Operate and
Transfer) and BOOT (Build, Own, Operate and Transfer) depending upon
the level of involvement and obligations. Whenever turnkey project
contractor is capable of cutting costs on material and manpower or finances
or speed of completion: every component increases profitability.




                                      27
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


  Mode of Operation and Benefits to International Companies

                         EXPORTS


                     EXPORT PROCEEDS



                       JOINT VENTURE



                   PROFIT SHARE/DIVIDEND



                   ACQUISITION/TAKE OVER



                    PROFIT REPATRIATION
  HOME                                                      HOST
COUNTRY                                                   COUNTRY
(SENDER)           LICENSING/FRANCHISING                 (RECEIVER)


                 LICENSE FEE/FRANCHISE FEE



                     TURNKEY PROJECT



                       PACKAGE DEAL



                            FDI



                   RETURN ON INVESTMENT

                             28
                                              Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


 13. COUNTER TRADE

 In all the above operations, foreign exchange is necessary for transactions.
 For exports, the supplier gets the proceeds in foreign exchange. For joint
 ventures, profits are shared in foreign exchange. For international licensing,
 the license fee is paid in foreign exchange. The current challenge to many
 international business organizations is to get payments in foreign currency.
 A vast majority of the countries in the world do not have the necessary
 reserves of foreign exchange to remit. However they can still be actively
 involved in international business, by using COUNTER TRADE
 mechanism. Counter trade came in to existence in the absence of foreign
 exchange reserves in a country. Sometimes the country is not willing to pay,
 though foreign exchange reserves are with it. Such unwillingness will lead to
 non-repatriation of payment. Ultimate solution is to enter in to counter trade
 practices.
            Counter trade can be classified in to three categories:
            1. Pure Barter
            2. Buy Back
            3. Counter Purchase



                              Counter Trade




Pure Barter                         Buy Back                            Counter
                                                                        Purchase


Product to                        Buy from the                        Change of
 product                         host partner in                     destinations
exchange                         setting up unit                      till finding
                                                                        FOREX

                                      29
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Pure Barter

In this system goods and services are mutually exchanged between two
countries depending upon their bargaining strength. A country with surplus
products can finalize deals with another country that has a shortage of the
same range of products. At the same time, the second country may have a
surplus of a different range of products, which are in short supply in the first
country. Hence, both countries can exchange their products by fixing a price
in advance for a given period of time. This age old system that was prevalent
during the era of ancient civilizations is being practiced currently. The Indus
Valley supplied timber for maritime activities to Mohenjadaro and Harappa.
The same practice has re-emerged with sophisticated pre fixation of value.
Pure barter is defined as “the mutual exchange of goods and services
between two countries depending upon their bargaining strength, in order
that both the countries enjoy the benefits”.
                       For example Russia supplied newsprint and crude oil
to India for decades, and in turn India supplied tea, garments, medicines and
tobacco products to Russia at a comparatively low price, thus enabling both
countries to enjoy the advantages.

Buy Back

A buy back is an arrangement by which the home country representative sets
up a project in the host country, which does have sufficient foreign exchange
reserves to fully pay for the project to the supplier. The project amount is
partially paid in foreign exchange and the remaining amount is paid in kind.
Usually, the home country representative comparatively at low price
purchases the end product of the same project. This can be marketed in the
home country or it could even be diverted to a third country in order to
maximize the profit margin. Buy back arrangements have become popular
since many turnkey project contractors get greater benefits by marketing the
end product in any part of the world at a higher margin. Bharat Heavy
Electricals (BHEL) sets up projects in other countries. Partially it gets the
payment in foreign exchange. For the balance amount it takes back tankers
from the host country and markets them in any other country and also brings
them back to India to sell at a higher price. Such deals enable the home
country businesses to get international exposure very fast. The host country
is an ultimate beneficiary since the project is locate in and owned by it. At


                                      30
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


the same time, it need not have to pay the full sum of money necessary to
invest in the project.



COUNTER PURCHASE

This is a method, wherein company A from country A supplies product X to
country B. Country B, which has a surplus of product Y, compensates by
supplying it to company A, which finds a market for e product Y, say
country C. Country C sells a product Z to a country D, which has sufficient
foreign exchange to pay for it. Country D can then pay country C, and
finally country A collects payment routed through company B and C. Thus
purchasing takes place against supply until a country, which has sufficient
foreign exchange reserves is found. He transaction.
             Many multinationals use this system to make large amounts of
money at every stage of For example, Pepsi International supplies rice to
South Africa from India. From South Africa it procures steel equivalent to
the amount of rice collects and supplies it to Ghana. From Ghana, it procures
coffee and cocoa equivalent to the steel imports and sells them to Canada,
which has sufficient foreign exchange reserves to pay for them. By
appointing one representative or employee the company can carry out
routine functions deals in the Far East are Marubeni Corporation, Mitsubishi
and Majuko.
             The age-old economic theory of inter-dependency of nations has
been redefined with the counter purchase mechanism. Today, to trade with
other countries, it is not necessary that the country in question has to have
sufficient foreign exchange reserves. Without foreign exchange reserve one
can continue trade.
             The model on the next page shows the benefits that both the
home country and the host country enjoy on successful completion of the
transactions undertaken. Today, anyone can do business with any country.
Foreign exchange as a medium of transaction had a dominant role in all the
countries in the past. Due to counter purchase mechanism very few countries
with foreign exchange reserve can comfortably contribute to international
business.




                                     31
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




 3.Key Factors Influencing International Business
   Analyzing similarities and dissimilarities prevalent in countries
   gives wisdom; selecting a country for business enkindles spirit
   and minimizing risks knocks the door of success.


Learning value:

This chapter highlights the major factors influencing the direction of
international business;

   1.   Importance of environmental factors
   2.   Economic environment
   3.   Social environment
   4.   Political environment
   5.   Cultural environment
   6.   Technological environment
   7.   Legal environment
   8.   Competitive environment


A pilot has to check the atmosphere prior to take-off and landing his aircraft.
A sailor has to understand waters & before sailing peacefully.
A farmer has to plant seeds depending on the nature of the soil and
monsoon.

On the same line, an international business entry or operation depends upon
multiple environmental factors. They may change the direction, strategy and
every moment of international business operations.

Prior to going deep in to the topic, we can ask ourselves few questions and
seek answers.




                                      32
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




   a. Why ENRON could not succeed in India?
   b. What is the major hindrance for success of Kellogg in
      India?
   c. Why KFC has not made any break through in India as it
      did in other countries?
   d. What made Whirlpool & Caterpillar stop business in India?

An international marketer is required to understand, evaluate and work out
various parameters before venturing into any country. These Parameters are
called environmental factors and they determine the direction and purpose of
the international business operation. Many decisions depend upon
environmental factors right from selection of the country, location of the
plant, liaison with the government, and entry of investment from local
bodies, product launch, channel management, promotion and opening of
outlets. The first challenge for an organization is to navigate from its home
country to the host country. Thereafter it has to develop a proper system so
that the venture is successful in the host country; learn all about the
regulatory bodies both in the host country and home country; understand the
customer’s changing tastes and attitude towards foreign goods and finally
obtain revenue and make the business effective with right people.

A majority of the multinational corporations and large business houses
appoint a team of experts who are specialists in economies, political science,
sociology, industrial psychology and policy matters, to advice the
management on its strategic decisions. These experts are called risk analysts.
Prior to entry or investing millions of dollars, the experts gather all the
relevant information about the country and interpret those facts to facilitate
the company. By such risk analysis, companies can safeguard themselves
from future dangers. The major risks are:
1. Political
2. Economic
3. Exchange
4. Socio culture
5. Financial
6. Legal
7. Technological
8. Competitive

                                     33
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


9. Infrastructural and
10. Labour.

An organization can overcome the effects of all the risks by taking into
account the different environmental factors.
Since the home environment is known, one can understand and overcome
the pitfalls in the event that any action goes wrong. The international
business related environments vary from continent, country to country and
even from region to region. A detailed and comprehensive analysis of such
fast changing environment is essential for formulating business strategies.
Even well known companies with financial power, advance technology and
an efficient management team have failed in other countries. Examples are
the Enron project which did not take off in India; American style of
managing a sales force which never worked for Procter and Gamble in
Japan; the multilayer marketing technique of Amway, which did not work in
South Korea and Kentucky Fried chicken and McDonald’s hamburgers,
which failed in Brazil and Tashkent respectively. Thus, it is important for a
company to have an international team to design strategies to suit varying
environments of different countries.
In this chapter we discuss the environmental factors relevant to international
business. The economic environment, political environment, cultural
environment, technological environment, legal environment and competitive
environment play a vital role in determining an international business
operation. Certain environments are quite conducive to a company at the
time of entry and later on they may pose major challenges. Argentina
attracted huge investments before 2000. After 2002, they became
detrimental to innumerable organizations. Hence environmental factors
could be stimulant or detrimental. If it is stimulant, the business will
flourish. But if it is detrimental, then the company has to be cautious.


ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT:

The economic environment can be classified into three categories:

   a) Economy in the home country
   b) Economy in the host country
   c) Economy at a global level.


                                     34
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   a) Home country Economy

Since 1940, hundreds of MNCs from the USA have ventured abroad, with
the support of their home country. After 1990, many Indian companies
started venturing into sub-Saharan Africa, South East Asia and Latin
America due to the liberal policies adopted in India.

  In order to encourage the business community to venture overseas, it is
necessary for a country to have liberal economic and trade policies.


   1. Economic policies

The country’s economic policies are formulated and the targets are fixed
looking at business opportunities in other countries. It is made simpler for
businessmen to invest or set up units abroad.

   2. Trade and commercial policies:

The trade policy is announced by the ministry of
commerce and industry and the target for
nSational foreign trade is fixed. All the
promotional bodies are geared to achieve the
target. Many incentives are held out to overseas
companies, so that they set up operations in the
home country through local partners, Indonesia,
Thailand and Brazil extend all facilities in their
home country to promote their nationals.
   3. Promotion and regulatory measures:

The home country should take the opportunity to do business abroad. It can
do this by being proactive, encouraging persons to take risks and extending
fiscal and promotional support. If restrictions are imposed and bureaucratic
hurdles are encountered at all stages the business community will not think
                                    35
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


of taking any risks. By removing exchange control restrictions and draconian
codes of business and providing an environment conductive to foreign trade,
small countries like Malta, Cyprus and Mauritius have today transformed
themselves into foreign trade economies.

   b) Host Country Economy.

When a firm from one country enters any other country, the following major
criteria are taken into account:
    1. Size of the market
       Many multinational firms are thinking of entering India, China, Brazil
       and Indonesia, because of their large potential markets. Coca cola,
       Pepsi, Hewlett Packard and Samsung are looking to India as a future
       destination keeping in mind the size of population which represents
       the size of the market.
    2. Gross Domestic Product (GDP)
       GDP is an indicator o the health of the economy; it also determines pr
       capita income. A country with a high GDP is an attractive destination
       for any international businessman. If a constant growth rate is
       maintained, such a country would always be a magnet for investors.
       Thailand, Malaysia and Indonesia were attractive during the 1990’s
       due to a very high growth rate in GDP, until the currency crisis
       affected their economies.

   3. Industrialization
      Many firms in the developing world were interested in entering into
      Europe or the USA. The recent trend amongst companies in India is
      towards Latin America specially, Brazil, Argentina, Chile. This is due
      to the industrialization program, which is taking place in these
      countries. It is obvious that industrialization brings about prosperity
      and affluence.



   4. Banking
      Banking is the only channel through which remittances take place,
      and hence is a major infrastructure for international business.
      European, American and far East economies have highly effective
      banking systems. Sub –Saharan Africa and commonwealth
      Independent states (CIS) are not able to provide good banking
                                     36
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   services to the international business community. Thus, a firm which
   enters Africa or the CIS countries has to necessarily depend on other
   countries for banking services.

5. Purchasing Power
   Another major determining factor for any international business unit
   is whether the people can afford to buy for a product is low. In other
   countries like Saudi Arabia, both the income and willingness to pay
   for the product are high. In the Scandinavian countries the per capita
   income is very high and they are ready to pay a premium price for
   highly sophisticated items. However, the low population is a limiting
   factor.

6. Foreign Exchange
   Another determining factor in international business is whether
   tforeign exchange facilities are available transactions. Although more
   than 70% of the countries in the world do not have foreign exchange
   reserves, the majority of them are becoming liberal in transacting
   foreign exchange as a long term strategy for their future economic
   development. Against this, some countries with surplus foreign
   exchange reserves do not permit free movement of the currencies.
   Such countries that have restrictions in repatriation of foreign
   exchange will not be attractive to international business firms.
   Therefore, countries with sufficient foreign exchange reserves, a
   liberal policy on repatriation and which have a demand for the
   products and services are an ideal destination for any company to do
   international business.

7. Income Levels
   Economies are classified into low income and high income
   economies. Industrialized nations are high income economies and
   enjoy a high per capita income. Companies manufacturing or
   marketing premium quality or high technology products have an easy
   entry into such advanced countries with the proper strategies.
   Developing countries, which are the low income economies, are price
   sensitive. Many of them are under pressure from high population,
   unemployment and lack the vision to industrialize fast. Still they need
   only primary goods and rated one amongst less developed countries.
   Differences in the income levels may limit the involvement and
   investments. Sometimes, in a densely populated country, a small
                                  37
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   percentage of the population can afford to buy premium products.
   Since this does not represent the purchasing power of the whole
   country, the revenue is minimum.

8. Economic diversity
   In the same country, a few urban centers may offer outstanding
   business opportunities, while in remaining areas there is no demand at
   all. Nairobi I Kenya, Lusaka in Zambia, Johannesburg in South
   Africa, Sao Paulo in Brazil and Casablanca in Morocco are cities with
   the highest purchasing power and demand for refrigerators, air
   conditioners, TV sets etc. However in other parts of the country, there
   is hardly any opportunity to do business. In Madagascar, despite the
   fact that it is a highly resourceful country, one can not get even the
   basic item for survival, exept in two cities, Tamatave and Antamarino.




c) ECONOMY AT A GOBAL LEVEL

Besides the home country and the Host country, there are certain other factors, which

can influence the pattern of international business. Organizations such as the World

Trade Organization, World Bank, International Monetary Fund, Asian development

bank and the organization of petroleum Exporting countries (OPEC) can affect

international business. The preferential treatment given to the members of NAFTA,

ASEAN, the European Union and COMESA can have a negative impact on the trade

between outside cartels and non-members. When shipments move from one

destination to another, there are transit ports which charge huge sums as surcharge or

transit charges.




                                        38
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT

The social environment encompassing religious aspects, language,
customs, traditions and beliefs, influences buying consumption habits.
Many companies face failure in foreign countries, due to their inability to
understand the socio cultural environment. For example whenever any
company establishes business in some African countries, the local
population expects that many jobs will open up for them. Very few
countries perceive tat they may be exploited.
          Due to the entry of foreign firms the economic and hence the
social environment of an area can completely change. An example is
southern China, which has completely changed to an affluent society due
to the fact that almost 2000 companies get their products manufactured in
coastal south China.

      1. National Taste
         In Thailand, People prefer black shampoo; Nestle brews
         different varieties of instant coffee because people in those
         countries have different tastes, uncommon in other countries.
         Green is the favorite color of all the Arab countries; Red is still
         widely used in Russia, in banners, posters, and hoardings
         although communism is in no way relevant to modern Russia.

      2. Language
         Cross culture and cross border operations call for necessary
         language skills, e.g. South Koreans have learnt Indian
         languages to operate in India. One can see this in Hyundai or
         LG factories in India.

                Companies also have to change their brand names and
         slogans in different countries. In Japan, General Motor’s slogan
         “body by fisher” means “corpse by fisher”, and Pepsi Cola
         slogan “come alive” means come out of the grave. Prior to
         promoting the brand, one has to take into account the socio-
         cultural background of a specific nation and different
         interpretations of a name in the local language.

      3. Values and beliefs


                                  39
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   It is also important for companies to understand the significance
   of different designs and colors in different countries. For
   example, blue is perceived as feminine in Holland and
   masculine in widen. Green is favorite color in the Muslim
   world, but is associated with illness in Malaysia although it is a
   Muslim country. White indicated death in china and Korea but
   it is the color of bridal dresses in Europe. Red is associated with
   danger in many countries but it is a favorite in Russia.
                Another example is ‘swastika’, which is considered
   sacred in India, but has completely different connotations in the
   west.

4. Demography
   A number of demographic factors such as age, sex ratio, family
   size and occupation influence the business of many companies.
   Different companies concentrate on different segments. For
   example, Barbie generates huge revenues through the children’s
   segment of affluent countries.

5. Literacy rate
   Countries with a high literacy rate experience a better standard
   of living. Here the need is for standardizes goods, supported by
   technical services. For a country with an educated population,
   the amount of training required for the staff will be far less than
   in the case of the country which has a low literacy rate. This is
   an important factor, as it influences the cost incurred. The ame
   argument holds in the case of educating the consumer about the
   products manufactured.
6. Female Workforce
   The most spectacular change that has taken place in the current
   era is the empowerment of women throughout the world. In
   China, Indonesia, Russia and Thailand, women are major
   contributors to the GDP. With economic independency, women
   no longer have to depend on men to make decisions about what
   to buy; they can make their own decisions about whether to
   purchase any consumer product or durable. Delux, a well
   known brand of paint in Europe was promoted through
   campaigns directed at women, because it was felt that women
   have an aesthetic taste for colors in the household paint
   segment. The performance of the i-pod of Apple hit the roof in
                            40
                                             Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


         terms of revenue generation due to female customers. The
         female work force is very strong in various sectors in many
         countries. Examples are: Indian women in IT enabled services
         and handicrafts, Chinese women in the soft toys and ceramics
         and Indonesian women in garments and paper work, who have
         brought great success to their countries.

      7. Double Income Families
         As the household income increases, the demand for the number
         of products increases proportionately. This is specially true for
         packaged food items, electronic gadgets, household appliances,
         health equipment, Japanese entertainment electronics and
         French perfumes dominate in the whole of Europe and North
         America. Pizza Express, McDonald and Kentucky Fried
         Chicken invariably rule the households of double income
         families throughout the world.

      8. Impulse buying
         Benefit oriented buying is taking place everywhere. Pre-
         planned shopping and scheduled purchases are gradually going
         away. Throughout the world, people need instant items. They
         see, ask and buy. It is a major challenge to international
         businessmen to provide benefits to lure impulse buying.


         POLITICAL ENVIRONMENT.

         The political environment in international business operates in
         different dimensions:

      1. The home country political environment;
      2. The host country political environment, and
      3. The global political environment.

1. Home Country Political Environment
   In an ideal world, one would not normally expect domestic policies to
   affect the firm’s international activities. Some countries like the USA
   encourage their organization to establish activities abroad, especially
   in their core competency fields. Japan encouraged their electronics
   and auto companies to spread their activities outside Japan. Domestic
                                  41
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   firms that continue to invest and manufacture abroad while ignoring
   their home country are often accused of creating domestic
   unemployment problems and may be subject to political pressure,
   from the government. Indian government encourages business houses
   to go and perform outside in steel, healthcare, mining, textile and
   automobile.

2. Host Country Political Environment
   If the actual benefits of foreign firms are shared in terms of
   employment, taxes and social security with the locals, political
   atmosphere tends to be hospitable. If it is felt that the foreign firms
   contribute nothing to the well being of the nation, it may produce a
   hostile reaction from the business community and labor organization,
   which in turn puts pressure on the government. In extreme cases, this
   may lead to either political turmoil or the appropriation of the assets
   of the foreign firm.
          Mc Donald had to face a change in the ruling party, in Israel.
   When the National Religious Party (NRP) came into the power it
   demanded that McDonald should change its practices or be shut
   down.

3. Global Political Environment
   This may be describes as the combined politics of the home country,
   the host country and the other countries in the world.
          Multilateral agreements between international organizations,
   such as GAAT, the UNO and the Commonwealth, may constitute an
   impediment to free trade as well as to the nature and scope of the
   operation of international firms. Embargos, Cartels, free trade pacts
   and customs’ unions allow a few nations to enjoy competitive
   advantages, whilst others lose their business prospects. However,
   there may also be advantages, e.g., the commonwealth generalizes
   Systems of Preferences (CWGSP) offers good opportunities to all
   commonwealth countries to supply and receive goods and services at
   concessional rates, which ultimately give them a competitive edge
   over non-commonwealth nations.
          Global politics can influence business in vastly varying ways.
   For example the economic embargo on Iraq by the Security Council
   of the United Nations in 1991 meant that conducting trade with that
   country was illegal for all international firma. Another example is
   China Ordering Microsoft to stop selling. “Windows 95” as it
                                  42
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


contained politically offensive material including phrases like
“communist bandits”. Microsoft agreed to change the material for re-
entry.




CULTURAL ENVIRONMENT

      The cultural environment for international business refers to the
      set of factors which shape the material and psychological
      development of a nation and represents the primary influence
      on individual lifestyle, attitude, pre-deposition and behavior as
      consumers in the market. The most important task of
      international business is to identify relevant similarities and
      differences among countries, and means and methods to match
      the organization’s culture with that of the country of its
      operation. For example, when Toshiba gained 100 percent
      ownership of Rank-Toshiba in the Plymouth all the managers in
      charge learnt the British Style of working.
           Working it is the operation of a business or dealing with
      customers one cannot overlook cultural elements. The
      performance of a company in the international arena partly
      depends on how well the strategic elements fit into the culture
      of the host country. Culture may be described as the totality of
      the complex and learned behavior of members of a given
      society. Elements of culture include beliefs, art, morale, code of
      conduct and customs. Culture has the following three
      characteristics:
           - It is learned: acquired by people over time through
               their membership in a group that transmits culture from
               generation to generation.
           - It is interrelated: i.e. one aspect of the culture is
               connected with another part, e.g. religion and marriage,
               or business and social status.
           - It is shared: i.e. tenets of a culture extend to other
               members of the group.




                               43
                                                Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   Culture is perhaps one of the most important determinants of
   human behavior. Food habits, social class, the family system,
   community units and other cultural and sub-cultural elements
   influence the process of decision making in day to day dealings
   and the buying habits of customers.
         Thus, there is a need for cross-cultural understanding
   because of the significant differences in attitude, belief,
   motivation, perception and life styles between nations. For
   example, branded products will move fast in Europe and
   America, but Africans perceive branded products as being very
   expensive.

   The Influence Of Culture On International Business

1. The Utility value of a product may differ considerably from
   country to country because of differences in beliefs, values and
   lifestyles. Fast foods, such as Kentucky Fried Chicken,
   McDonalds, hamburgers and pizzas are more popular in
   modern societies than in traditional societies. Similarly,
   branding and packaging are very susceptible to cultural bias.
2. Products are launched in markets on the basis of either
   perceived or real utility value. Products from certain parts of the
   world such as Western Europe, Japan and United states
   command premium prices in developing countries because it is
   felt that they are of better quality than locally manufactures
   products. They have a higher value.
3. Culture is perhaps the most powerful influence in determining
   the acceptability of advertising copy, design and other elements
   in various countries. Advertisements released in France may not
   be acceptable in the United Kingdom. Many advertisements
   acceptable to the other pats of the world will not be accepted in
   the Saudi Arabia. Liquor advertisements are prohibited in many
   countries.
4. Holidays in different countries vary on religious grounds.
   Friday is a holiday in the whole of gulf region. In China, the
   offices and factories are closed for a week for the New Year
   celebrations. For companies having firms in different countries,
   it is therefore impossible to impose the rule of common
   business practices everywhere, as productivity would be very
   low during festive days. Any strict implementation of company
                            44
                                             Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


            policy will have direct repercussions, which may even lead to
            closure of the business in different countries.
         5. Local norms and practices may affect certain distribution
            strategies. Eating in public places during Ramadan days is
            prohibited in Muslim countries. Therefore, eateries are not
            opened during the day at this time. In Spain, mail order
            shopping is very popular, whereas in the US and Europe chain
            stores are preferred, and door-to-door delivery is common in
            many Scandinavian countries. Shopping malls are coming up in
            urban India faster than in any other country in the world. Still
            small traditional shops near hometown are perceived as
            trustworthy suppliers when the customers need groceries.


 TECHNOLOGY ENVIRONMENT

Technology and its applications are key factors in determining the
international competitiveness of a firm in conducting international business.
Multimedia using Pentium 4 is common in advanced countries whereas it
will take at least another five years to introduce such products in Africa.
Leadership in technology is achieved and maintained through a consistent
program of intensive research and development, which can be very
expensive. Only those companies that are able to maintain their
technological activities will remain competitive.
    A Company may invest millions of dollars in R&D, despite the fact that
the projected revenue in the home country would be very low. However
other countries will generate huge revenues over a period of time. The
Hoffkins, Bio Rad, Genen technology and Pfizer are examples of institutions
and firms, who are investing huge sums of money in R&D, because they are
sure of their returns on their investments over a period of time. In the late
20th century, Asian tigers, Japan, South Korea, Hong Kong, Singapore and
Taiwan achieved a miraculous success due to their investment and
implementation of the technology policies in specific sectors.
     Few countries, such as Japan for electronic equipment, Germany for
medical equipment, and the USA for pharmaceuticals have remained leaders
in their fields for decades. Other countries have remained behind them. The
time between the innovation and its adoption and its adoption may vary from
country to country. Innovating countries are few. Following countries are
many. Technology leaders encash on skimming pricing strategies, wherein
the margins are huge. Eriksson, Nokia, Motorola and LG have been
                                     45
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


successful since they manufactured cell phones. Currently, the business
opportunities exist in every country in the world. The people around the
world are adaptable to the technology too. While technology innovation is
adaptable to the masses, the companies involved in such business prosper.
Today Hewlett Packard, Fujitsn, Apple, Samsung and Lenova compete
against each other by educating the workers on using their laptops and
launch their new versions everywhere.


LEGAL ENVIRONMENT :

This relates to the laws and regulations governing the conduct of business
activities in the country. Before entering any country, firms avail of the
services of local legal firms to understand business interpretations pertaining
to labor legislations, taxes, environment, pollution, investment, distribution,
contracts, logistics etc. The international legal environment has three
aspects:

   a) Home country laws
   b) Host country laws
   c) International laws.

 a) Home Country Laws
    These deal with two important issues:
      i)    Conduct of the firm in the domestic territory.
      ii)   Trade with the other countries

For international operators, the home country laws are not stringent. They
are more of facilitating or regulating in nature, but not controlling in normal
practice.

 b) Host country laws
    These include investment regulations, tariffs and duties, anti-dumping
    regulations and protection of local industries from unfair competition
    from industrialized countries. Tariffs and duties are used to discourage
    imports of non-essential products in order to conserve foreign exchange
    and maintain a favorable balance of trade and to generate revenue.
    Seven advanced countries impose laws against developing countries.
    Super 301 against Indian nylon skirts imposed by USA as inflammable
    fabric and ban on Indian sea food by Europe are the examples.
                                      46
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



c) International Laws
   These comprise treaties, conventions and agreement between nations,
   and have basically the same standing as laws. They are particularly in
   areas relating to patents and trademark protection and privacy laws.
   One has to understand the broad provisions of UN resolutions, and
   multilateral trade agreements such as the WTO. Disputes are solved by
   different means. Food and drug administration, health regulation,
   registration formalities are judiciously implemented in international
   business operations. Investment restrictions in some sector, promotion
   in others and the role of regulatory authorities are part of legal
   environment. For example, Nigerian government nationalized the assets
   of British petroleum, when it was revealed that the company as selling
   Nigerian crude oil to South Africa, despite an embargo.

   COMPETITIVE ENVIRONMENT:

   Competition is a threat imposed by an environment, which may effect
   or hamper or challenge the operation of an international business firm.
   Competition either could be from the firm’s home country or host
   country or third country. Some times product related competition may
   crop up through substitutes or low cost production process or
   technology or cost reduction through economies of scale. The current
   international business operation has to encounter competition as various
   levels such as entry, operation, production, administration, human
   resource, technical resource, and financial resource. Distribution and
   logistics.
           Motorola had to face the face the competition from Nokia, soon
   Nokia concentrated in fast growing markets of India and China
   resulting the follower became leader in the world. Cuba based White
   Spirit Company; Havana club entered very late in the field and
   surpassed the erstwhile leader like Smirnoff.
           Tusker and Phoenix – the major beer brands in COMESA
   countries (Common Market for East and South Africa) have been
   overtaken by King Fisher after UB group took over National Breweries
   of South Africa.
         For international companies, facing competition is a way of life. According to
 them, competition keeps their mind alert, quality war is inevitable. Beyond theoretical
 models, they believe in learning competitiveness in streets, countries and production
 centers. They consolidate competitive advantages and succeed. Hyundai motors in

                                         47
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


        India, Honda motors in Europe and Tata Motors in Africa withstood all the
        competitive forces and succeeded.




      FACTORS INFLUENCING INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS




   ENTITY            ENVIRONMENT                   ACTIVITIES                        END
                                                                                    RESULT



                          Economic
                                                   Manufacturing
                           Political

INTERNATIONAL
     FIRM                   Social
                                                      Investment

                           Cultural                                                 International
                                                                                    Destinations

                            Legal                      Trading


                         Technology



                         Competitive                  Marketing




                                              48
                                                                Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




            4.FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT


 Financial resource is crucial, time bound and critical. If it is not
 available in right time from anywhere, the probable results are
 bankruptcy, decline and loss of status whether it is a nation or
 company or individual.


Learning value:
   1. Meaning and correct trends of FDI
   2. Benefits to host countries through FDI

   3. Destinations of FDI flow

   4. Criteria of attracting FDI

   5. Major challenges for FDI in various countries

Definition and Importance
Investment is “the flow of funds one destination to another”, for any activity,
including industrial development, infrastructure and manufacturing. When
the investment goes from the home country to another country it is defined
as ‘investment outflow’ and when the foreign investment comes from other
countries to home country it is termed as ‘investment inflow’. Both inward
and outward movements are encouraged in majority of the countries.

      All developing countries produce primary goods, and to exploit them
financial resources are necessary. Developed countries are also in need of
FDI for further development of technology and modernization.

      The current Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) is related to investment
in developing countries and Less Developed Countries (LDCs) require huge
investments in other activities, such as infrastructure, healthcare, housing,
power generation etc.

                                      49
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


      With the liberalization of the Indian economy, a large Indian market is
being opened up to foreign investors. Practically, FDI represents foreign
assets in domestic structures, equipment and organizations. It does not
include foreign investment in the stock markets. Foreign direct investment in
useful to a country if the focus is more on projects rather than investments in
the equity of companies because equity investments are potentially “hot
money” which can leave at the first sign of trouble. South Korean, South
African and Argentinean crisis were partially due to such problems.

      When a firm invests directly in facilities in a foreign country it is said
to be FDI. It involves the active control of the investment not really
determined by level of stock ownership. Many multinational enterprises
become involve in FDI with the ultimate objective of reaping short term as
well as long term benefits. Ownership may become transnational, i.e.,
ownership in more than one country. Factors influencing FDI are related to
increasing business opportunities across national borders and their
involvement could be in the following functional areas.

•   Production

•   Marketing / services

•   Research & development

•   Raw materials or other resources

    The parent company has direct managerial control, but the degree of
    control may depend on the type of country and company policy. Prior to
    their investment decisions it is necessary to carry out risk analysis and
    interpretations of the same. MNCs do not develop blind faith in any
    country. A team of experts analyse risks carefully and invest gradually.

CHARACTERISTICS OF FDI
FDI is an activity by which an investor, who is resident in one country,
obtains a lasting interest in, and is a significant influence on the management
of an entity in another country. This may involve either creating an entirely
new enterprise, so-called “Greenfield” investment or, more typically,
changing the ownership of existing enterprises via mergers and acquisitions.
Other types of financial transactions between related enterprises, like
reinvesting the earnings of the FDI enterprises or other capital transfers, are
also defined as foreign direct investment.
                                       50
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




                           1. POLITICAL RISKS
                           2. ECONOMIC RISKS


                       INVESTMENT PATTERNS
•   Follow Competitors – Oligopolistic industries and interdependence of a
    few major competitors force a strategic approach of following
    competitors:

    American Motor Company (AMC) invested in Shanghai Motor Company
    in China. All others were on bee line including Japanese and South
    Korean companies besides other American companies.

•   International Product Life Cycle – Reduces cost by shifting production to
    developing countries. Essel Propack moved to China for instance.

•   Location – Specific advantages make FDI easier than exporting or
    licensing. Mahindra tractors are manufactured in North America.
                                     51
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


•   Contract manufactures – brings down the cost of manufacturing and also
    contributes to consolidate competitive sourcing and competing in world
    market. Honda motors manufactures its vehicles in Europe.

•   Assured return on investment – R & D centres and futuristic projects
    enable the investor to achieve great success through high revenue. Roseh
    products invest huge money in Genentech in California to get innovative
    products to their outlets around the world.

    More than two thousand multinational from the USA and Europe have
invested in Chinese Special Economies Zones and Export Processing Zones.
Indonesia, Thailand, Philippines and Malaysia have also now become
attractive destinations. In Latin America, Brazil, Argentina and Columbia
are also attracting huge investments. Malta, Cyprus, Panama, Mans Island
and Mauritius are growing only through Foreign Direct Investment, either in
manufacturing, trading, or any other form. The reputation of such
destinations depends on their ability to attract investments through their
policies and hassle-free industrial climate.

BENEFITS AND COSTS OF FDI

Benefits for Host Countries
•   Capital: Multinational enterprises invest in long-term projects, taking
    risks and repatriating profits only when the projects yield returns.

•   Technology: Technology effects emerge especially when the
    liberalization of investment flows drives a more rapid rate of technology
    development, diffusion and transfer. Such processes may involve the
    transfer of physical goods and/or the transfer of knowledge. A vast
    majority of economic studies dealing with the relationship between FDI
    on the one hand and productivity and economic growth on the other
    hand, have found that technology transfer through FDI has contributed
    positively to productivity and economic growth in host countries.

•   Market access: Investors can provide access to export markets. The
    growth of exports itself offers benefits in terms of technological learning,
    competitive stimulus, etc. They can transform normal customers to
    intellectual customers.

•   Increase in domestic investment: The increase in FDI inflow is associated
    with a manifold increase in the investment by national investors.
                                       52
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


•   Export promotion: It seems that FDI could be related with export trade in
    goods, and the hosting country can benefit from an FDI-led export
    growth.

•   Generating employment: It leads to generation of both direct and indirect
    employment opportunities in the host country.

•   Infrastructure: In order to facilitate and enable the investors perform well,
    the host country studies other competitive destinations and enhance the
    level of infrastructure to match the requirements of the investors. India’s
    silver valley in Bangalore, Hitch city in Hyderabad and Tidel Park in
    Chennai have revolutionized the areas through connectivity.

•   Social effects: Closed economies have started to liberalize their economy
    through market reforms that are favourable to foreign investors through
    privatization, property rights and liberal labour policies. Society at large
    gets the benefit while employment, infrastructure, literacy and health care
    are bound to improve as an impact of FDI inflow.

•   Formation of Clusters: Group of similar projects and manufacturing
    centres are formed in a specific location by way of providing common
    production , R&D, training and pollution control system to group
    competing companies. In Italy, Brazil and India, such clusters have made
    wonders.

•   Spillover: Statistical evidences exist across the world to show that FDIs
    have a number of spillovers. Business history is replete with examples
    where persons trained in companies started their own ventures and
    became successful leaders in their respective fields. Silicon Valley in the
    U.S. provides many examples of such spin-offs. Intel is a spin-off of
    Fairchild. The main competitor to Intel today is its spin-off. Even in
    India, the machine tool industries of Ludhiana and Bangalore are spin-
    offs of yesteryears’ popular companies like SKF, Bosch or MICO.

Cost for the Host Country

•   The investing companies may not serve the host country’s interests.

•   There is an outflow of earnings as they are repatriated to their home
    country.

•   Import of substantial inputs from the country of the investor.

                                       53
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


•   Hiring expatriate managers for management positions

•   The investing country has controlling technology, for which it charges a
    huge technology fee.

•   FDI can even wipe out the local firms. Infant industries and other home
    industries may suffer if they cannot compete. Home country producers do
    not have money power or technology to withstand the onslaught of the
    investors.

Benefits for Home Country
•   Inwards flow of earnings on a long term basis.

•   High salaries for employees.

•   Exposure to foreign market.

Costs for the Home Country
•   Initial capital outflow is extremely large.

•   Exports may decrease.

•   Imports may increase if FDI is intended to serve the home country.

•   Employment loss to the home country population.

•   Profits are repatriated abroad. They may not stay in the country for
    reinvestment.

•   Major tax heavens will enjoy the money at the cost of home country.

MOTIVATIONS FOR FDI
•   Exporting may not be feasible with high transportation costs and trade
    barriers.

•   Companies, with operations only in the home country, have limited scope
    for prosperity and in order to grow fast investing in fertile grounds
    outside is a strategic move.

•   Ownership advantages are used to benefit from global expansion.


                                        54
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


•   Location specific advantages are important at the time of selecting right
    destination:
    1. Availability of low cost labour force.

    2. Natural resources available in abundance and do not deplete.

    3. The cost incurred in research and development can be recovered at the
       earliest by identifying a suitable location.

    4. The cost of transportation and logistics is low in the specific as well as
       neighboring countries.

STRATEGIES FOR FOREIGN INVESTORS TO INVEST IN INDIA
      There are several strategies by which foreign enterprises could be
lured to set up Indian operations. Broadly, entry strategies for such
organistions may be classified into two major types:-

    1. A foreign investor may directly set up its operations in India through a
       branch office, a representative office, a liaison office or a project
       office to carry out business.

    2. It may do so through and Indian arm i.e. through a subsidiary
       company set up in India under Indian laws.

    3. It may invest in business units in SEZs and EOUs.

      Generally, the second option of setting up operations through an
Indian arm is advisable, especially if the investment is large. A foreign
company is one which has been incorporated outside India and conducts
business in India. These companies are required to comply with the
provisions foreign companies can set up their operations in Indian by
opening liaison offices, project offices and branch offices. Such companies
have to register themselves with the Registrar of Companies in New Delhi,
within 30 days of setting up business in India.

Liaison Office/Representative Office
A foreign company can set up a liaison or representative office in India to
test the Indian market. Once it is convinced about the potential of the Indian
market, it can then bring in greater investment. There are, however, certain
limitations regarding the type of work which can be done through a liaison
                                        55
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


or representative office. A liaison office is not allowed to undertake any
business activity in India and therefore cannot earn any income in India. The
role of such office is thus limited to collecting information about possible
market opportunities and providing information about the company and its
products to prospective Indian customers.

       The Foreign Investment Promotion Board of the Reserve Bank of
India is a regulatory body governing such operations. Foreign investors are
required to follow the basic procedures prior to opening such offices.
Permission is initially granted for a period of three years, and may be
extended from time to time.

Project Office
Foreign companies planning to execute specific projects in Indian can set up
temporary project/site offices for the purpose. Specific approval from the
RBI is required for setting up a project office, which is generally given for
Government approved projects, but the RBI can give approval for setting up
project offices even for executing private sector projects. Approval for
setting up project offices is specific to a particular project that is to be
executed and lasts only till the completion of the project.

Branch Office
The Government has allowed foreign companies engaged in manufacturing
and trading activities abroad to set up branch offices in India for the
following purposes:-

1. To represent the parent company/other foreign companies in various
   matters in India e.g. acting as buying/selling agents in India.

2. To conduct research work in the area in which the parent company is
   engaged, provided the results to the research work are made available to
   the Indian companies.
3. To undertake export and import trading activities.

4. To promote possible technical and financial collaborations between the
   Indian companies and the overseas companies. A branch office is not
   allowed to carry out manufacturing activities on its own but is permitted
   to subcontract them to an Indian manufacturer.


                                     56
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Permission for setting up branch offices is granted by the Reserve Bank
of India on a case-to-case basis. The RBI normally considers the
operating history of the applicant worldwide and its proposed activities in
India for granting the approval.

Through an Indian Arm
The entry strategies through an Indian entity are given below. The Indian
entity may be a subsidiary of the foreign company in India or it may be
joint venture.

As an Indian company
A foreign company can commence operations in India through
incorporation of a company under the provisions of the Indian
Companies Act, 1956. Foreign equity in such Indian companies can be
up to 100% depending on the business plan of the foreign investor
subject to the prevailing investment policies of the Government and
receipt of requisite approvals. For registration as an Indian company and
its incorporation, an application has to be filed with the Registrar of
Companies. Once a company has been duly registered and incorporated
as an Indian company, it will be subject to the same Indian laws and
regulations that are applicable to other domestic Indian companies.

Joint venture with an Indian partner
Foreign companies can set up their operations in India by forging
strategic alliances with Indian partners. Setting up operations through a
joint venture may entail the following advantages for a foreign investor:-

1. Established distribution/marketing set up of the Indian partners.

2. Available financial resources of the Indian partner.

3. Established contacts of an Indian partner, which help the process of
   setting up operations.

Wholly owned subsidiary company
The other investment option open to foreign investors is the setting up of
a wholly owned subsidiary. This implies that the foreign company can
own 100% shares of the Indian company. All such cases are subject to
prior approval from the Foreign Investment Promotion Board (FIPB).
                                  57
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   The FIPB considers cases on a flexible basis and grants permission for
   100 percent ownership based on the following criteria:-
   1. Where only a “holding” operation is involved and all
      subsequent/downstream investments to be carried out would require
      prior approval of the Government;

   2. Where proprietary technology is sought to be protected or
      sophisticated technology is proposed to be brought in.

   3. Where at least 50% of the production is to be exported.

   4. Proposals for consultancy.

   5. Proposals for power, roads,           ports    and     industrial    model
      towns/industrial parks or estates.

   6. Business units in SEZs, AEZs, Techno-Parks and EOUs:

      The investor who invests to setup units in the above categories does
      not need mandatory permission from Foreign Investment Promotion
      Board of Reserve Bank of India. It is called automatic route. Such
      units can enjoy 100% profit repatriation to their home countries.

STRATEGIES FOR INDIAN INVESTORS TO INVEST IN FOREIGN
COUNTRIES
     Foreign Investment through GDRs (Global Depository Receipts),
ADRs (American Depository Receipts) and FCCBs (Foreign Currency
Convertible Bonds).
       Foreign Investment through ADRs and GDRs and FCCB’s is treated
as Foreign Direct Investment. Indian Companies are allowed to raise equity
capital in the international market through the issue of GDRs/ADRs/FCCBs.
These are not subject to any ceilings on investment. An applicant company
seeking the Government’s approval in this regard should have a consistent
track record of good financial performance for a minimum period of 3 years.
This condition can be relaxed for infrastructure projects such as power
generation, telecommunication, petroleum exploration and refining, ports,
airports and roads.

       There is no restriction on the number of GDRs/ADRs/FCCBs to be
floated be a company or a group of companies in a financial year. The
                                     58
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


reason for this is that a company engaged in the manufacture of items
covered under automatic route is likely to exceed the percentage limits under
automatic route, whose direct foreign investment after the proposed
GDRs/ADRs/FCCs is likely to exceed 50 percent / 51 percent / 74 percent as
the case may be. There are no end-use restrictions on GDRs/ADRs/ issue
proceeds, except ban on investment in real estate and stock markets. The
FCCB issue proceeds need to conform to external commercial borrowing
end use requirements. In addition, 25 percent of the FCCB proceeds can be
used for general corporate restructuring.

Use or GDRs
The proceeds of the GDRs can be used for financing capital goods imports,
capital expenditure including domestic purchase/installation of a plant,
equipment and building and investment in software development,
prepayment or scheduled repayment of earlier external borrowings, and
equity investment in joint ventures and wholly owned subsidiaries, in India.

Restrictions
However, investment in stock markets and real estate will not be permitted.
Companies may retain the proceeds abroad or may remit funds into India in
anticipation of the use of funds for approved end uses. Any investment from
a foreign firm into India requires prior approval of the Government of India.

FDI POLICY
The Government has put in place a liberal, transparent and investor-friendly
FDI policy, wherein FDI up to 100% is allowed on the automatic route in
most of the sectors except in:

•   Activities that attract industrial licensing.

•   Proposals where the foreign collaborator has previous/existing ventures
    in India.

•   Proposals for acquisition of shares in an existing Indian company in
    favour of non-residents.

•   Activities where the automatic route is not available under the notified
    sectoral policy.


                                         59
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Salient Features of FDI Policy
In view of sectoral policies, security concerns and other strategic
considerations, restrictions, such as equity cap, divestment condition,
minimum capitalization and lock-in period have been imposed of FDI in a
few sectors, which are given below.

1. Agriculture and plantations excluding tea plantations.

2. Real estate business excluding integrated township development.
    However, NRI/OCB investment is allowed for real estate business.

3. Retail trade in any form.

4. Lottery, betting and gambling activities.

5. Security services.

6. Atomic energy.

Non-resident Indians’ Scheme
The general policy and facilities for Foreign Direct Investment as available
to foreign investors/companies are fully applicable to NRIs as well. In
addition, the Government has extended some concessions for NRIs and
Overseas Corporate Bodies in which NRIs have invested more than 60%.
These include:

•   NRI/OCB investment in the real estate and housing sectors up to 100%:

•   NRI/OCB investment in the domestic airline sectors up to 100%;

•   NRI/OBC investment up to 74% in the banking sector.
    Since 2001, the investments of NRIs in India have grown 20% every year
    till 2007 due to liberal policies. Few NRIs from the Middle East and
    Europe invest in huge amounts in real estate and SEZs. The confidence
    level has increased on India amongst NRIs resulting huge investments in
    India.




                                      60
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


FDI Policy Initiatives
The FDI policy is reviewed on an ongoing basis and suitable
liberalization measures are taken. Some of the main initiatives
undertaken are mentioned below:

•   Issue of equity shares has been allowed against a one-time fee or
    royalty and External Commercial Borrowings received in convertible
    foreign currency, subject to meeting all tax liabilities and procedures.

•   The policy governing the payment of royalties under foreign
    technology collaboration has been further liberalized by allowing all
    companies, who have entered into foreign technology agreements, to
    pay royalties on the automatic route to the extent of 8% on exports
    and 5% on domestic sales without any restriction on the duration of
    the royalty payments. This is irrespective of the extent of foreign
    equity in the shareholding.

•   The foreign investment in the banking sector has been further
    liberalized by allowing a FDI limit in private sector banks up to 74
    percent under the automatic route including investment by FIIs.

•   The foreign banks regulated by a banking supervisory authority in the
    home country and meeting the Reserve Bank’s licensing criteria have
    been allowed to hold 100 percent paid up capital to enable them to set
    up a wholly-owned subsidiary in India.

•   FDI up to 100% has been permitted in printing scientific and technical
    magazines, periodicals and journals subject to compliance with all
    legalities and with the prior approval of the Government.

•   FDI up to 100% has been permitted on automatic route on marketing
    of petroleum products, subject to the existing sectoral policy and
    regulatory framework in the oil marketing sector.

•   FDI up to 100% has been permitted on automatic route in oil
    exploration in both small and medium sized fields subjects to, and
    under the policy of the Government on private participation in:

    1. Exploration of oil.

    2. The discovered fields of national companies.

                                   61
                                                    Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


•   FDI up to 100% has been permitted on automatic route for petroleum
    product pipelines subject to, and been permitted for Natural Gas/LNG
    pipelines with prior Government approval.

•   100% FDI is permitted in any venture related to Special Economic
    Zones and 100% export oriented units either as a developer or as a
    unit holder or service provider. The same scheme is applicable to
    agricultural zones and technology parks.

Country-wise distribution of approvals
In terms of the quantum of investment, Mauritius with 22.61% of the
total approvals is the highest, followed by the U.S.A. (12.62%), the
Netherlands (9.78%), the U.K.(8.28%), Japan (5.68%), Singapore
(3.59%), Germany (3.53%), Hong Kong (1.64%), Switzerland (1.39%)
and Belgium (1.27%). Other countries constitute the remaining 29.61%
of approvals.

Sectoral distribution of approvals
Drug & pharmaceuticals sector has a major share of the approvals
followed by the services sector, both financial & non-financial, electrical
equipment including computer software & electronics, the food
processing industry, telecommunications and automobiles. All put
together account for 60%. Other sectors account for 40% of the
approvals.

Country-wise distribution of approvals
In terms of quantum of investment, Mauritius with 24.10% of the total
approvals is the highest, followed by the U.S.A. (12.53%), Singapore
(11.955%), U.K. (7.93%) and U.A.E. (3.52%). Other countries constitute
the remaining 39.97% of approvals.

State-wise distribution of approvals
The choice of location of projects depends on the commercial judgment
of investors and is based on factors such as market size and growth
potential, availability of skilled man-power; availability and reliability of
infrastructure facilities; fiscal and other incentives provided by State
Governments. The Central Government supplements the efforts of the
State Government by providing fiscal incentives for investments in the

                                   62
                                                    Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   infrastructure sector as also high priority industries such as information
   technology, through specific schemes such as the Growth Center
   Schemes. Transport Subsidy Schemes, New Industrial Policy for the
   North-East and other hill States, Electronics Hardware Technology Park
   (EHTP), Software Technology Park (STP), Export Promotion Zones
   (EPZs), Special Economic Zones (SEZs). Maharashtra, Delhi, Tamil
   Nadu, Karnataka, Gujarat, Andhra Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, West
   Bengal, Orissa and Uttar Pradesh accounted for a major portion of FDI
   investment approvals during the cumulative period i.e. from August 1991
   to March 2004.

FDI Promotion Initiatives
Several steps have been initiated during the year to facilitate increased FDI
inflows, which include, inter alia, the following:

   •   On the policy front: While our FDI policy is already very liberal, it is
       being further progressively liberalized. Equity caps in the banking
       sector, the petroleum sector and printing of scientific/technical
       magazines/periodicals & journals have recently been raised as a
       measure of further liberalisation of policy.

   •   On the investment promotion front: The Government organized
       “Destination Authority has been actively involved to ensure speedy
       resolution of investment related problems, which has been widely
       acknowledged as an effective problem-solving platform.

   •   On the competitiveness issue: The Government has received reports
       on various studies on current potential and risks involved in various
       business activities in India. Different sectors with competitive
       advantages have been enlisted to attract foreign investment.

   •   An exclusive website is hosted by the promotion authorities is
       comprehensive and informative with online chat facilities. About
       2000 investment related queries were replied to during the year.

   •   The Committee on Reforming Investment Approval and
       Implementation Procedures submitted its reports on simplification of
       investment procedures. Steps have already been initiated to implement
       these recommendations. The Department is coordinating with other
       ministries to implement the same at all levels in the Central
       Government.
                                      63
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


•   Every state government takes a major initiative like Vibrant Gujarat to
    bring all the investors around the world and show cause their
    advantages and encourage them to invest.

The advantages of India as an investment destination rest on a number of
factors, which include a large and growing market; world-class scientific,
technical and managerial manpower; cheap labour; an abundance of
natural resources; a large English speaking population; independent
judiciary, etc. This has now been recognized by a number of global
investors who have either already established a base in India or are in the
process of doing so. Ongoing initiatives such as further simplification of
legislation, de-licensing, setting up of regulatory authorities such as
Central/State Electricity Regulatory Commissions, etc. is expected to
provide the necessary impetus to increase FDI inflows in the future.
   Inflows of FDI would depend on domestic economic conditions and
the FDI policy, world economic trends, and strategies of global investors.
The Government, on its part is fully committed to creating strong
economic fundamentals and an increasingly proactive FDI policy regime.

   The positive efforts of the Government to improve the investment
climate, including sustained improvement of infrastructure, have led to
renewed optimism about India as an emerging investment destination.

    Criteria considered by investors prior to selecting a destination.

1. Political stability and a strong policy to protect investors.

2. Safety and security for life, money and output.

3. Investment protection through legal provisions.

4. Good governance as compared to other countries.

5. Proactive government        policies    and    implementing       authorities,
   bureaucrats.

6. Continuous infrastructural development..

7. Banking system with updated technology.

8. High productivity of the labour force and unhindered working
   conditions.
                                    64
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


9. Clear and simple tax procedures without any ambiguity.

10. Availability of raw material, components and consumables.

11. Hospitable society, especially secular approach towards investors.

12. Demand for the products the investor manufacturers.

13. Ample potential opportunities for products in the neighboring
    countries.
Even though the developed and developing countries are extending
schemes of tax holidays and many other incentives, very few countries
are capable of attracting FDIs. Still, China is an attractive destination
because it ranks on a higher scale as compared to others on all the
parameters mentioned above. India, could not attract an expected
investment in the last and early part of current decade though the scenario
is changing gradually now.

The reasons are:
1. Poor infrastructure, which does not match international standards.

2. Political instability, but now it is not a major constraint.

3. High levels of corruption, which are deep-rooted at all levels.

4. Bureaucratic red tape, which the investor does not have to face in
   other destinations in the world.

5. Interpretation of policies and their implementation are quite complex.

6. Heterogeneous society with different states, cultures and languages.
7. Inordinate delay in projects.

8. Draconian labour legislation.

9. Lack of transparency in regulatory bodies.

10. High cost of production due to expensive power and other inputs and
   transportation.



                                    65
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




                   5.OFFSHORE BANKING

No other resources will be effective in the absence of financial
resources and that too, at the right time. Non-availability can
cause major damage to international operations. The purpose
of offshore banking is to provide international business firms
funds at cheaper cost, at a high place and at right time.



Learning value:

After completion of the chapter the reader will learn:

   1.   Concept and practice of offshore banking
   2.   Operation mechanism of offshore banks
   3.   Attractive centres for offshore banks
   4.   South East Asian offshore banks
   5.   Initiatives in India for offshore banking

Any international business unit, whether manufacturing or trading is always
looking for funds for their operations. Every company cannot take funds
from its home country due to strict regulations or interest cost or taxes.

All over the world the business community is in search of locations where
their investments are safe and the funds can be taken out without any
barriers and invested comfortably for any ventures in any part of the wo9rld.
Currently, Mauritius, Malta, Panama, Man’s Island, Cyprus, Seychelles and
Hawaii are a few centres attracting offshore banks. Since 2003, the
Government of India has permitted banks to set up offshore banking
operations in Special Economic Zones. Hence, the system of offshore
banking has become part of international business.
Offshore banks are banking units set up by foreign banks in territories where
the restrictions and regulations are limited and the intervention of the
country of location is minimal. Offshore banking units bring foreign
                                      66
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


currency funds from non-residents and the international money market, and
invest them in the host country or in projects set up by the host country in a
third country. In short, it is a hassle free and safer banking system for saving
and borrowing funds for business.

ESTABLISHMENT OF OFFSHORE BANKING UNITS

The origin of offshore banking units can be traced to the growth of financial
activity in tax havens. A “tax haven” is a place where non-residents can
receive income or own assets without paying high taxes. Some such places
are Bahamas, Bermuda, Hong Kong, the Netherlands, Panama and
Switzerland.
Some features of these tax havens are:
   1. Low rate or complete absence of income tax on foreign investment
       and income.
   2. High degree of economical and political stability and a political
       system, which directly or indirectly encourages and fosters business
       activity at the center.
   3. Strict and well enforced rules of banking secrecy.
   4. Absence of exchange control
   5. Availability of supporting infrastructure such as an efficient
       communications and transportation network.
   6. Presence of well developed legal system and professional accounting
       expertise.
   7. Investor’s confidence due to past credential.
   8. No incidence of violence or criminal activities.

These features encourage various types of business operations some of
which are bona fide but most of them generate what has been termed as
‘dirty offshore funds’.

OPERATIONS OF OFFSHORE BANKS

Offshore banking centres are an integral part of the foreign currency
markets. Therefore, the operations of banking units set up at these centers
comprise foreign currency transactions, in the form of accepting and placing
of funds in foreign currency outside the country of issue. The functional
offshore centers engage in the issue and placement of foreign currency
certificates of deposits, loan/credits and bonds.

                                      67
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


       These centers contribute to the economic development of the host
country in the following ways.
1. The offshore banking units can raise foreign currency loans and bonds
   for the host country at reasonable interest rates, due to their connections
   with well known international banks These foreign currency funds can be
   lent to the host countries or invested in onshore projects or even projects
   in a third country. Indirectly, the host country gains better access to
   international capital markets.
2. The functional offshore centers contributes to the foreign exchange
   income of the host country through local operating expenditures, such as
   rent paid on leased property, salary paid to local staff, and license
   fees/taxes recovered from the offshore units.
3. The presence of functional units speeds up the communication and
   transport network in the host country, which helps to upgrade local skills
   and technology and constitutes productive assets to the host country.
4. The onshore banking industry in the host country is compelled to
   improve its efficiency and skills in order to retain its competitive edge.
5. The local staff employed at the centre develops sophisticated
   international banking skills and this pool of highly trained personnel can
   be brought in to the host country to attain a faster growth level.

    Once an offshore centre consistently offers an attractive package of
incentives, the above benefits will accrue to the host county, which will be
able to induce more and more reputed foreign banks to set up banking units
in its territory.

ROLE OF OFFSHORE BANKS AND INVESTMENTS

In today’s highly integrated global network international Offshore Financial
Centers (OFCs) have come to play a vital role in facilitating investment
worldwide. An offshore centre exists for comfort and convenience. OFCs
are jurisdictions where offshore banks are exempted from a wide range of
regulations, which are normally imposed on onshore institutions. Specially,
deposits are not subject to statutory reserve requirements. Bank transactions
are mostly exempted from tax or treated under a favourable fiscal regime
and they are free of interst and exchange control restrictions. In many cases,
offshore banks are exempted from regulatory scrutiny with effect to liquidity
or capital adequacy.
An important activity in OFCs is offshore banking, which is the cross border
intermediation of funds and provisions of services by banks residing in
                                     68
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


OFCs to non-residents. Offshore banking is an increasingly attractive
alternative to heavily regulated financial markets of emerging economies.
They exploit the risk return trade off by being more profitable than onshore
banks and in many instances they have more leverage.

OFFSHORE BANKING – METHOD OF OPERATION

Offshore banks deal mostly with other financial institutions and transact
wholesale business in currencies other than that of the country hosting the
OFC. Offshore banking is carried out typically through offshore
establishments that are offshore branches. Offshore branches are legally
indistinguishable from parent banks onshore, which facilitate intra-branch
transfers. Offshore activities may also take place through what are called
parallel-owned banks. These are banks established in different jurisdictions
having the same owner(s), but at the same time they are not subsidiaries.

       Offshore banks are mainly engaged in three types of transactions;
Foreign currency loans and deposits, the under writing of bonds, and Over
the Counter (OTC) trading in derivatives for risk management and
speculative purposes. Foreign currency transactions form the bulk of
offshore banking operations. They include transactions between banks and
original depositors, between banks and ultimate borrowers, and between
banks themselves on the inter bank market. Underwriting of bonds floated in
international capital markets is also a significant part of offshore banking
activities.

OFCs IN DEVELOPED COUNTRIES AND EMERGING
ECONOMIES

In the developed countries, OFCs appear to be losing their attractiveness and
appeal for financial institutions, which are operating in liquid, increasingly
competitive and well-regulated financial markets. With competition under
prudential supervision and capital account convertibility being increasingly
adopted, the distinction between onshore and offshore banking is
progressively disappearing in industrialized countries.

In Aisa, offshore interbank markets developed after 1968 when Singapore
lauched the Asian Dollar Market (ADM) and introduced the Asian Currency
Units (ACUs) and Japan established the Japanese Offshore Market (JOM).

                                     69
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


The ADM was an alternative to London Eurodollar market for the
investment of oil surpluses from Indonesia and Malaysia and ACUs enabled
local banks to engage in international transactions under a favourable tax
and regulatory environment.


OFFSHORE FINANCIAL CENTRES IN SINGAPORE,
MALAYSIA AND MAURITIUS

Singapore

Singapore is an established financial centre. The financial service sector is
supported by sound economic and financial fundamentals and attractiveness
as a base for financial institutions. This has been aided by its geographical
location in a fast growing area that bridges the gap between the time zones
of the North American and European financial markets, political and
financial stability, a skilled labour force and significant government
incentives.

Singapore is the fourth largest foreign exchange trading centre in the world,
the fifth largest trader in derivatives and the ninth largest offshore lending
centre. The Asian Dollar market (ADM) in one of the premier offshore
banking centres in Asia. The STOCK Exchange of Singapore (SES) is a
leading stock market in Asia, and the Singapore International Monetary
Exchange (SIMEX) has grown into one of the world’s leading derivatives
exchanges.

There are three categories of commercial banks in Singapore:
I. Full banks       II. Restricted banks    III. Offshore banks

      Full banks are allowed to carry out the full range of banking services
under the Banking Act. Restricted banks may engage in the same range of
domestic branch and cannot accept Singapore dollar savings accounts and
Singapore dollar fixed deposits of less than Singapore $ 250,000 from non-
bank customers.

       In 1973, with a view to facilitate Singapore’s goal to become an
international financial centre through the entry of more foreign banks,
another category of same opportunities as the full and restricted banks in

                                     70
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


business transacted, their scope of business in the Singapore dollar retail
market is slightly more limited. In the domestic market, offshore banks
cannot accept any interest-bearing deposits from persons other than
approved financial institutions, nor can they open more than one branch. By
the end of November 1998, there were 104 offshore banks in Singapore, all
of which were branches of foreign banks. By 2003 the number of banks
crossed 120.

       In Singapore, offshore banking is carried out by separate book-
keeping entities known as Asian Currency Units. ACUs do not have the right
to incur assets and liabilities in Singapore dollars but can engage in all types
of banking transactions in other currencies. Various incentives have been
given to encourage the development of ACUs, the most important of which
is that ACUs face a tax on profits of only 10% compared with the standard
corporate rate of 27% and are not subject to reserve and liquidity
requirements. ACUs have functioned in the region primarily as a centre for
routing capital from markets in Europe, North America and the Middle East
to the fast growing regions of Asia.

Important measures to promote offshore banking in Singapore include:

• 1973 – Offshore banking licenses issued to seven foreign banks;
  corporate tax of ACU on interest earnings from overseas loans reduced
  from 40% to 0%; interest received by non-resident holders of approved
  Asian dollar bonds exempted from tax.
• 1976 – Non resident deposits with ACUs and approved Asian dollar
  bonds held by non-residents exempted from Singapore estate duty.
• 1979 – Income earned from offshore general reinsurance business
  granted 10% concessionary tax rate.
• 1980 – Stamp duty on ACU offshore general reinsurance business
  granted 10% concessionary tax rate.
• 1980 – Stamp duty on ACU offshore loan agreements and Asian dollar
  bond certificates abolished.
• 1983 – ACUs granted 5 year tax holiday for all income derived from
  syndicated offshore loans arranged in Singapore.
• 1989 – A concessionary 10% tax rate was granted on income from
  international oil trading activities.
• 1990 – Monetary Authority of Singapore (MAS) raised the ceiling on
  foreign ownership of shares in local banks to 40% from 20%.

                                      71
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


• 1992 – Stock Exchange of Singapore (SES) granted membership to seven
  foreign brokerage houses, allowing them to trade directly on the local
  market.
• 2002 – Offshore transactions became equivalent to domestic transactions.
• 2006- offshore banks started investing huge money in other Asian
  countries like India, Sri Lanka, Indonesia, Thailand and Vietnam.

With a view to creating a more level playing field for local and foreign
banks, the maximum limit for offshore banks for Singapore dollar credit
facilities at any one time to non-bank residents was raised from S$ 200
million to S$ 300 to S$ 1 billion, with a view to boosting Singapore as a
financial centre. In 2004, many of the investors and joint venture partners
avail of offshore facilities to invest in the mega projects of South Asia and
South East Asia.

Malaysia

Malaysia established an International Offshore Financial Centre (IOFC) in
Labuan in 01991. The Offshore Banking Act 1990 provides a regulatory
framework for offshore banking operations in Labuan. As confidentiality is
the hallmark of an offshore financial centre, an offshore bank has to
maintain strict secrecy in the affairs of its customers. Offshore banks are
expected to observe a strong self-regulatory code of conduct which places
emphasis on ‘knowing your customer.’
       The Labuan Offshore Financial Services Authority (LOFSA)
established in 1996, is the single regulatory authority with the following
roles and functions:

• To be responsible for setting national objectives, policies and priorities
  for the orderly development and administration of the Labuan IOFC.
• To be responsible for the promotion and development aspects and
  recommend new measures to the government to speed up growth and
  development of the Labauan IOFC.
• To supervise the activities and operations of the offshore financial service
  industry in Labuan and to process applications to conduct business in the
  Labuan IOFC, specially in offshore banking, offshore insurance and
  insurance related business, offshore trust and fund management,
  incorporating and registering of offshore companies as well as for setting
  up of Labuan trust companies.

                                     72
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


• To administer and enforce offshore financial services legislation and
  work with the offshore players in Labuan to promote offshore financial
  services.

The Labuan IOFC operates in a free exchange control environment.
Offshore companies are given a non-resident status for exchange control
status. Offshore companies can continue to transfer funds freely to and from
their accounts outside Malaysia without approval from the central bank of
Malaysia. The foreign currency accounts held with the offshore banks are
not considered as external accounts and are not subject to exchange control
measures. The offshore banks are also allowed to issue financial and non-
financial guarantees to residents in Ringgit. They can receive fees and
commissions related to guarantee in Ringgit. The holding requirement of one
year is not applicable to assets in Ringgit held in collateral by the offshore
banks for credit facilities granted to residents. The payments of existing
loans and guarantees in foreign currency by Malaysian residents to the
offshore banks do not require prior approval from the Central Bank.
       In Labuan no tax is imposed on the income of offshore companies that
are non-trading companies, and offshore trading companies enjoy a low tax
regime with a rate of only 3% of their net income of RM 20,000 (USD
8000). Other benefits and incentives include:
• No tax on offshore companies carrying out offshore non-trading activities
    such as holding of securities, shares, immovable properties and taking of
    loans and placing of deposits.
• No withholding tax for dividends paid by an offshore company,
    distribution from an offshore trust, royalties received from an offshore
    company by a non-resident, interest earned on deposits with offshore
    banks, and interest earned on loans to Malaysians.
• No inheritance, death, or estate duty.
• Exemption from paying stamp duty on all offshore business transactions.
• Double tax treaty agreements signed with over 40 other countries and
    investment guarantee agreements with 50 countries.

Mauritius

Mauritius is fast becoming an international financial and business centre.
Offshore transactions are normally conducted with non-residents and in
currencies other than the Mauritius Rupee. Mauritius has focused its
offshore business on specific areas such as investment funds, investment
holdings and international trading. The island is becoming an attractive
                                     73
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


destination for offshore fund structuring and investment vehicles. Mauritius
enjoys international exposure as a domicile for emerging market funds, and
is being considered as a gateway for investment into India, the Indian sub-
continent and the African region.

In 1989, offshore banks were allowed to be set up in Mauritius and
subsequently the incorporation of offshore companies was allowed. In 1992,
the offshore financial services sector was officially set up with the
proclamation of two acts of parliament, namely the Mauritius Offshore
Business Activities Act and the Offshore Trusts Act.
       Offshore business can be conducted through the follo9wing entities:
an ordinary status company, an international company, a trust, or a
partnership. The Mauritius Offshore Business Activities Authority
(MOBAA), set up in 1992 under the Mauritius Offshore Business Activities
(MOBA) Act 1992, is entrusted with the task of licensing, supervising and
developing non-banking offshore business in Mauritius. The MOBA Act
1992 sets out the broad parameters for the conduct of offshore business.
       An offshore business activity is defined as an activity carried on from
within Mauritius with non-residents and in foreign currencies. The MOBA
Act of 1992 provides fro a whole range of approved offshore activities
which include Offshore Funds Management; International Financial
Services; Operational Headquarters; International Consultancy Services,
Shipping and Ship Management; Aircraft Financing and Leasing:
International Licensing and Franchinsing; International Data Processing and
Information Technology Services; Offshore Pension Funds; International
Trading; International Employment Services; International Assets
Management; and Offshore Insurance.
   Currently, eleven offshore banks of international standing operate in
Mauritius. Both the volume and range of business undertaken by offshore
banks have registered sustained progress. Various factors have registered
sustained progress. Various factors have contributed to the attractiveness of
Mauritius as an OFC which include:
• Exemption from compliance with the Exchange Control Act.
• Freedom to conduct all legitimate banking and other financial business
   with non-residents.
• Exemption from credit, interest rates and other restrictions normally
   applied to business of domestic banks.
• Low income tax rate of 5 percent on all offshore profits.
• Free repatriation of profits without further taxation.


                                     74
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


•   Exemption from stamp duty on documents relating to offshore business
    transactions.
•   Exemption from stamp duty on documents relating to offshore business
    transactions.
•   Exemption from customs duty on imported office equipment.
•   No withholding tax on interest payable on deposits raised from non-
    residents by offshore banks.
•   Double taxation avoidance treaty with a number of countries.
•   Expatriate staff is subject to a concessionary personal income tax rate.
•   No estate duty or inheritance tax is payable on the inheritance of shares
    in an offshore entity.
•   No capital gains tax.

OFFSHORE FINANCIAL CENTERS AND IMPLICATIONS
FOR INDIA

A synthesis of the role and evolution of OFCs in select countries, their
operative mechanisms, regulatory framework and privileges delineated in
the preceding sections highlight various factors that contribute to the
attractiveness of OFCs, Certain common facilities/exemptions/concessions
have been worked out to form offshore banking in India.
       With the Government having announced the policy of promoting
Special Econ9mic Zones (SEZs) which would, inter alia, serve to attract
world class investors, and at the same time contribute towards the country’s
export efforts, it is pertinent to take into account the factors highlighted
above that have contributed to successful OFCs around the world. This is
very important, as it is necessary to create a policy environment relating to
finance and banking which is conducive as also internationally competitive.
The main requirements of such a policy are given below.
• Conducive fiscal regime, such as minimal taxation or low tax jurisdiction
    with an extensive web of bilateral tax treaties; no income tax, capital
    gains or wealth taxes on individuals, stamp duty, customs duty, estate
    tax, inheritance tax, etc.
• No withholding of income tax on non-resident depositors in OFCs.
• Stringent banking secrecy rules.
• Absence of exchange control or minimal control.
• Exemption from several prudential regulations including reserve
    requirements limitations on investments, limitations on acquisitions of
    immovable property, etc.

                                     75
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


• Minimum formalities for incorporation.
• Adequate legal framework that safeguards the integrity of principal agent
  relations.
• Conducive regulatory framework – a separate banking act to provide a
  regulatory framework covering the operations of banks and financial
  institutions in the SEZs. For instance, the Offshore banking licence for
  the setting up of a branch or subsidiary.

Offshore Banks:
Regulatory Framework in Selected Offshore Financial Centres.

    Offshore     Activities
                                 Prudential         Tax              Role of
    Financial       and
                                Regulations      Privileges         Regulators
     Centre     Restrictions
                                                                 Offshore
                                                                 banks are
                                                                 under the
                                                               oversight of
                                                               the offshore
                Both private
                                                                  Finance
                 and public
                                                                Committee
                 companies
                                                             chaired by the
                may operate
                                                             Governor with
                onshore and
                                                             representatives
                offshore. All                   No taxes are
    Anguilla                       N/a                          of both the
                    four                            levied
                                                              Government
                  domestic
                                                                and private
                 banks offer
                                                                sector. The
                  offshore
                                                                  Eastern
                  banking
                                                                 Carribean
                  services.
                                                              Central Bank
                                                                 does not
                                                              supervise the
                                                                 offshore
                                                                  sector.
                  Offshore    Minimum            Offshore        Offshore
                banks may be    paid in        banks have a      banks are
Antigua &
                   legally   capital is US         50 year    regulated by
Barbados
                 established  $ 1 milion.      reprieve from the Supervisor
                  under the   Licensing           taxes on      of Banking
                                      76
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


          international    includes    profits. There       and Trust
            Business     information are no income         Corporations
          Centre (IBC)         on      capital gains,        and the
           Act (1982) shareholders,       or other          Ministry of
             and are    directors, and wealth tax on         Finance.
           defined as   officers with   individuals.
          corporations satisfactory                        The Eastgern
           licensed to evidence that                        Caribbean
            carry out      the latter                      Central Bank
             banking       have the                          does not
           business in    necessary                        supervise the
           currencies     education                          offshore
           other than         and                             sector.
             those of    experience,
             Caricom      and recent
                           financial
                         information
                             on the
                          applicant.

                           Offshore
                          banks must
                            submit
                           quarterly
                          returns and
                           an annual
                        audit must be
                        submitted to
                        the Inspector
                          of Banks in
                         the Ministry
                          of Finance,
                        which has the
                           ability to
                           carry out
                             onsite
                          inspection.
           Deposits         Locally                          Offshore
                                         Taxation is
Bahrain    from non     incorporated                      banks must be
                                          minimal
             bank       offshore and                      licensed by the
                               77
                                                Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


             institutions        onshore                  BMA, which
             are allowed      banks must                         also
             only if they      follow the                   supervises
              are atleast     same rules.                     them. A
            equivalent to       Offshore                       deposit
            US$ 50,000.       institutions                   insurance
               Offshore      are required                  scheme is in
            banks cannot      to disclose                  place for all
            extend loans       fully their                 commercial
             to residents      ownership                    banks. The
            of Baharain;        structure.                BMA has the
            cannot offer    They are sub                     ability to
               current         subject to                provide lender
              accounts.          regular                     of the last
                                reporting                resort (LOLR)
                            requirements                    facilities to
                                  to the                 onshore banks
                                Baharain                   are excluded
                               Monetary                    from LOLR
                               Authority                      support.
                             (BMA) on a
                                monthly,
                               quarterly,
                             semiannual
                              and annual
                                  basis.
                               Prudential
                            requirements
                              are applied
                                   on a
                            consolidated
                                  basis.
             Typically         ACUs are      ACU are     ACUs must be
              offshore      exempt from      taxed at a  licensed by the
             banking is          several   concessionary MAS, which
              operated         prudential    rate of 10   also supervise
Singapore
              through        regulations,     percent           them.
               Asian         most natbly      (normal    Inspections on
             Currency         the reserve  corporate tax   the accounts
               Units        requirements     rate is 26    of the ACUs
                                  78
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


    (ACUs).        (normally 6     percent).  are carried out
   These are       percent) the  There is no    on a regular
 operational         minimum     withholding basis. There is
 units whose       liquid asset or income tax     no formal
function is to           ratio      on non         deposit
    conduct      (normally not     resident       insurance
  business in      less than 18     ACUs       scheme. The
    the Asia           percent)  depositors.      MAS has
     Dollar      limitations on                ability to act
market. ACU       investments,                  as lender of
 may also be      limitation on                 lasat resort,
 operated by     acquisition of                   but not an
    onshore        immovable                   obligation to
 commercial       property and                do so. In 1996,
  banks and        some of the                  the Banking
   merchant      limitations on                    Act was
   banks. In            credit                  amended to
 these cases,         facilities               allow foreign
  ACUs are          (limits to a               regulators to
     distinct           single                   inspect the
  accounting     borrower and                  Singaporean
     entities     related party                 branches of
  separately        or parties)                 banks under
 licensed by           Foreign                       their
the Monetary         ACUs are                     oversight.
 Authority of       required to
  Singapore          provide a
     (MAS)           guarantee
ACUs accept          from their
 deposits and           parent
 make loans        institutions
   in foreign         ensuring
  currencies       liquidity on
     and are        demand to
  prohibited          the ACU
 from doing       should it run
    business             into
denominated        difficulties.
in Singapore         ACUs are
dollars. They       required to
                       79
                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


             cannot accept       provide
             time deposits       detailed
              of less than      financial
                   SGD       statements to
                 250000;     the MAS on
                  operate      a monthly
                  savings         basis.
                 account;
               have more
                 than one
              location (no
                branches)
              Total credit
               facilities to
                Singapore
                non-bank
                customers
              must be less
             than SGD 50
                  million


          India as offshore banking, an emerging sector

The concept and practices are not new to Indian banks. Indian public sector
banks such as Bank Of India, State Bank Of India, Punjab National Bank
and Bank Of Baroda already had operations in other countries. They have
developed systems and expertise to handle offshore operations. The
customers, both investing and borrowing segments are also aware of the
mechanism. But in real terms, the awareness has been created while news
items started appearing on overseas banking units (OBU) could be set up in
special economic zones (SEZ) without mandatory requirements of SLR
(Statuary Liquidity Ratio).




                                    80
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




                     6. Essentials of Trade Finance


       “Means and methods of transaction determine perfection.
        No one can claim that his business is
        successful until a complete receipt of money is ensured for his
       business.
        deal, through proper channel and right currency
  Learning Value:

  On going through this chapter the reader will learn certain essential
  aspects of transaction either export or import or investment.

   •      Foreign exchange transaction.
   •      Exchange rate mechanism fro merchant trade.
   •      FEMA on international trades
   •      UCPDC and its essential provisions
   •      Safe and secured transaction through Letter of Credit.

        Different countries have different currencies. All the
currencies are neither equivalent in value nor stable. Whether the
company is involved in trading or manufacturing or investing there is
a need for expertise in managing currencies at all the stages of
operation.

Exchange Rate is defined as the rate at which one currency is
exchanged for another currency.
Foreign Exchange trading is a sale or purchase of one currency and
traded with another.




In a foreign exchange transaction:


                                         81
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


      • The transaction is always talked of from the banks point of
        view.
      • The item referred to is the foreign currency.

When we say “Purchase” we mean (buying rate):

      • The bank has purchased and
      • It has purchased foreign currency.

Similarly, “Sale” means (selling rate):

      • The bank has sold and
      • It has sold foreign currency.

   Direct Quotation: A given number of units of domestic currency
per unit of foreign currency, e.g., $1 = Rs.40.00. With effect from 2nd
August 1993 direct quotations are being used in India.

  Indirect Quotation: A given number of foreign currency per unit
local (domestic) currency, e.g., Rs.100 = $2.5.

Two-Way Quotation

The foreign exchange quotation by the bank has two rates- one at
which quoting bank is willing to buy and the other at which it is
willing to sell. For example US $1 = Rs.45 – Rs.45.20.
       Here, the bank will enter into purchase transaction at Rs.45.00
and sell transaction at Rs.45.20. Hence the principle in case of direct
quotation is BUY LOW & SELL HIGH. From the Ads point of view,
conversion of foreign currency on behalf of an exporter into Indian
Rupees would be a purchase transaction, and conversion of domestic
currency into foreign currency on behalf of an importer would be a
sale transaction. Likewise, outward remittance would involve sale of
foreign currency while inward remittance would involve purchase of
foreign currency. In case of Indirect Rate Quotation the principle is
BUY HIGH & SELL LOW.

Types of Exchange Rates


                                          82
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Ready of Cash: Refers to transaction to b settled on the same day
e.g., transaction done on 3rd June to be settled on 3rd June.
Tom: Refers to transaction where delivery of foreign currency to be
done on the next day tomorrow, e.g., transaction done on 3rd August to
b settled on 4th August.
Spot: Refers to transaction where delivery of foreign currency to be
done on the second working day (day after tomorrow) from the date of
contract e.g., transaction done on 3rd June to be settled on 5th June.
Forward: Refers to transaction where delivery of foreign currency to
take place on a date farther than the spot date e.g., transaction done on
3rd June to be settled on any date after 5th June, normally.
Cross Rates: If the quotation for a particular currency is not
available, we can obtain it through the rate of that currency, of which
the rate is available.
Value Date: The date on which payment, delivery of funds or an
entry to an account becomes effective.

Cover Rate and Base Rate

The rate at which the banks can cover the merchant transactions in the
inter-bank market without any profit or loss is called the Cover Rate.
That is, the rate at which the bank can buy the dollars to cover import
transactions in US$ and the rat at which it can sell the Dollars to cover
an export transaction in Dollars is called the Cover Rate.
       The base rate is arrived from the cover rate after allowing for
some cushion for adverse movement of the rates. In practice there are
instances where the cover rate and the base rate are the same.

Fixed and Floating Exchange Rates
      • In a fixed exchange rate regime, the rate of the domestic
      currency vis-à-vis a foreign currency is fixed. In Hong Kong
      the HK dollar rate is fixed i.e. $1 = HK$ 7.80. In case of higher
      demand of the foreign currency viz. the dollar, the central bank
      of the country sells dollar from its reserve to maintain the rate.
      • In a floating exchange rate regime, the rate of the domestic
      currency vis-à-vis foreign currency depends on supply and
      demand and market forces. Most major currencies viz. US
      Dollar, British Pound, Euro Japanese Yen etc. are floating ones.

Principle Types of Merchant Rates
                                          83
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



As mentioned above, in a purchase transaction the bank buys foreign
currency from the customer and pays him in rupees. Some
transactions result in the bank getting the foreign exchange
immediately, while some involve delay in getting the foreign
exchange.
        Depending upon the time of realization of foreign exchange by
the bank, two types of buying/selling rates are quoted in India.

      • TT buying rate is applied when the transaction does not
        involve any delay in realization of foreign exchange by the
        bank i.e. the nostro a/c of the bank has already been
        credited. For example, purchase of drafts, MT’s, TT’s etc.
        and/or cancellation of drafts sold earlier.
      • Bills buying rate is applied when a bill is purchased. The
        proceeds will be realized by the bank after the bill is
        presented to the drawee and he makes payment. The rate is
        loaded with transit/usance period interest.
      • TT selling is applied when the correspondent bank’s account
        is credited immediately. For example, issue of drafts, TT’s
        drawn on a correspondent bank and/or cancellation of
        foreign exchange purchased earlier.
      • Bills selling rate is used for all other transactions involving
        handling of documents by the bank e.g. payment against
        import bills etc.




    SELLING                                  TRANSACTIONS

                                        84
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


     RATES
                               A. Outward remittance in foreign currency
                                           (TT,MT, PO,DD)
                                    B. Cancellation of purchase, e.g.
 TT Selling Rate
                                     •     Bill purchased returned unpaid.
   Exchange
                                       •     Bill purchased transferred to
    Margin:
                                              collection amount.
   0.125% to
    0.150%                               •    Earlier inward remittance
                                     (converted into rupees) is refunded to
                                              the remitting bank.
                             C. A forward purchase contract is cancelled.
                             Transaction involving transfer of proceeds of
 Bill Selling Rate
                                              import bills.
     Exchange
                             {Even if proceeds of import bills are remitted
      Margin:
                              in foreign currency by way of DD, MT, TT,
    0.175% to
                              PO, the rate to be applied is the Bill Selling
      0.200%
                                    Rate(and not TT Selling Rate)}.
  Foreign – TCs/
 Currency Notes                            At the option of Ads.
   Selling Rates
 BUYING RATES                              TRANSACTIONS
                             A. Clean inward remittance (PO, MT, TT, DD)
 TT Buying Rate                  for which cover        has already been
   Exchange                          credited to Ads account abroad.
    Margin:                  B. Conversion of proceeds of instruments sent
   0.125% to                                  for collection.
    0.180%                    C. Cancellation of outward TT, MT, PO etc.
                               D. Cancellation of a forward sale contract.
                              A. Purchase / Discounting of Bills and other
 Bill Buying Rate
                                               instruments.
     Exchange
                                B. Where banks has to claim cover after
      Margin:
                                                 payment.
    0.125% to
                              C. Where drawing bank at one centre remits
      0.150%
                                  cover for credit to a different centre.
  Foreign-TCs /
 Currency Notes                            At the option of Ads.
  Selling Rates

Persons residing in India:
                                      85
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Section 2 of FEMA, 1999 defines the term resident in India as a
person residing in India for more than 182 days during the course of a
financial year.

Persons residing outside India:
Section 2 of FEMA, 1999 defines person residing outside India as a
person who is not resident in India (NRI).
Non-resident Indians generally fall under one of the following broad
categories:

      • Non-Resident Indian (NRI)

      • An NRI is a person holding an Indian passport:
          o Who has gone abroad for a gainful employment or
             business or vacation, or for any other purpose
             indicating an indefinite period of stay outside India.
          o Who are working abroad on foreign assignments-
             persons employed by IMF/IBRD/UNO/UNESCO etc.
             or who are employed in Central/State Government
             and Public Sector Undertakings and deputed abroad
             on temporary period.

      • Persons of Indian Origin (PIO)

           o For the purpose of being eligible for the facilities of
              opening and maintenance of various types of bank
              accounts and making investments in shares and
              securities in India, a PIO means a citizen of any
              country other than Bangladesh or Pakistan, if:
      • He held an Indian passport at any point of time, or
      • Whose parent/s or grand parent/s was citizen of India
        (undivided India), or
      • Spouse of a non-resident Indian.

Overseas Corporate Bodies (OCBs)

Overseas firms, trusts or companies, predominantly owned by non-
resident Indians are called Overseas Corporate Bodies. The level of
ownership of NRIs in such bodies should be minimum 60%, by one or

                                        86
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


more NRI owners. The facilities for investment into India, granted to
OCBs were almost similar to those granted to individual non-resident
Indians.
         However, with effect from 16.08.2003, OCBs have been
completely derecognized as an investor class by the RBI. Now they
are not allowed to make fresh investments in India.

Correspondent Banking

Nostro Account: A foreign currency account maintained by a bank in
India with a bank abroad. “Our account with you”. E.g., State Bank of
India, Kolkata.
Vostro Account: A rupee account of a foreign bank with an Indian
bank. “Your account with us”. E.g., Citibank’s rupee account with
State Bank of India, Kolkata.
Loro Account: A bank’s account with another bank. “Their account
with you”. E.g., Citibank’s HK $ account with Hong Kong Bank,
Hong Kong.
Mirror Account: These are dummy accounts maintained by banks to
know the actual position of their accounts with the foreign
correspondent banks. We may call it a pass-book of our accounts
maintained with the correspondents.
Escrow Account: These accounts are maintained by citizens outside
the country or by the citizens residing outside the country, but
accounts maintained in the parent country. These accounts are being
maintained exclusively for business purposes and like current
accounts, do not carry any benefit of interest, overdrafts etc. Basically,
such accounts are opened to carry merchant trading activity with prior
approval from the RBI and general transactions are not permitted.




International Organizations as facilitators of International
Business:
      International Organizations like the World Bank were set up to
maintain orderly international financial conditions and to provide
capital and advice for economic development, particularly of
developing countries. International Business Organizations are
required to understand the system and lending criteria of such
                                          87
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


institution, so that it would be easy to avail their funds to develop
business.

World Bank Group
     • International Development Association
     • International Finance Corporation
     • Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency


Other International Organizations
     • International Monetary Fund
     • Bank of International Settlements
     • Asian Development Bank
     • African Development Bank

Asian Clearing Union
     • Established in 1974
     • Members- Central Banks of India, Iran, Bangladesh, Nepal,
     Pakistan, Sri Lanka and Myanmar (Burma).
     • To provide facility to settle payments for current
     international transactions.
     • Promote use of participant’s currencies in current
     transactions.
     • Promote monetary cooperation.
     • Exempted categories:
               Travel between India and other countries.
               Foreign trade financed by World Bank, ADB etc.
               Payments between India and Nepal, Pakistan and Iran
            individually.
     • With effect from 1.1.1996, 1 A.C.U. $ = 1 U.S. $.
     • ACU accounts are settled at the end of every two months.
     • The balance outstanding in ACU Vostro account with the
     Authorized Dealers is subject to CRR and SLR.

Offshore Banking Unit (OBU)
An Offshore Banking Unit (OBU) of a bank is a deemed foreign
branch of the parent bank situated within India, and shall undertake
international banking business involving foreign currency
denominated assets and liabilities. The Reserve Bank of India (RBI)
                                       88
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


has given permission to certain select banks in India, fulfilling certain
criteria, to set up OBUs in “Special Economic Zones” (SEZ), for
facilitating exports from India. Offshore Banking Units can accept
Multi Currency Deposits from NRIs and Eligible Resident Indians as
per FEMA. Companies/Units within the “SEZs” in India as well as
companies outside “SEZs” as per existing FEMA guidelines can go
for Multi Currency Borrowing from OBU.

E-Money India
This is a completely online mode of sending money from US to India.
Any person/organization who wishes to make a payment (in foreign
currency) to an individual/organization in India (in Indian rupees) can
use e-Money India. The customer needs to follow three simple steps
to send money to India:
       • Register on the e-money India site by providing elementary
       details.
       • Provide his bank details.
       • Provide the receiver’s details in India.
Presently, a customer can make an inward remittance in US Dollars
only for family maintenance, purchase of property, investments, or
transfers to NRE accounts.
       Remittances from foreign tourists visiting India and trade-
related remittances can also be sent. The remittance will be delivered
to his/her beneficiary’s doorstep as a locally payable demand draft or
deposited directly into the receiver’s account in India in Indian
Rupees only.




LETTER OF CREDIT: Short term transactions for goods and
services.
The concept:
   In simple terms, a letter of credit is an undertaking by a bank to
make a payment to a named beneficiary within a specified time,
against the presentation of documents which comply strictly with the
terms of the letter of credit.
      A letter of credit is opened by an importer (applicant), to ensure
that the documentation requested reflects and proves that the seller has
                                          89
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


performed under the requirements of the underlying sales contract, by
the exporter by making them conditions of the letter of credit (N.B.
The sales contract is not an inherent part of the Letter of Credit,
although the Letter of Credit may contain a reference to such
contract). For the exporter, a letter of credit, apart from cash in
advance, is the most secure method of payment in international trade
as long as the terms of the credit are met. The following diagram
shows those involved in a Letter of Credit transaction:




              Issuing Bank                                         Advising/
                                                                  Confirming
                                                                    Bank




                Importer               Underlying                    Exporter
               (Applicant)              Contract                   (Beneficiary)



    Its main advantage is providing security to both the exporter and
the importer. The security offered, however, comes at a price and
must be weighed against the additional costs resulting from bank
charges.
The exporter must understand the conditional nature of the letter of
credit and the fact that payment will not be made unless the terms of
the credit are met precisely.
      When an exporter asks for payment by letter of credit, he is
transferring the risk of non-payment by the buyer to the issuing bank
                                       90
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


(and the confirming bank if the letter of credit is confirmed),
providing the exporter presents the required documents in strict
compliance with the credit.
   An importer should only be thinking of opening a letter of credit of
his country’s exchange control regulations require it or if his supplier
insists upon it. It is worth noting that over 50% of letters of credit are
rejected on first presentations, which can cause expensive delays for
both the exporter and importer. Up to one half of these rejections
could have been avoided if more care was taken to ensure the credit
properly represented the sales contract.
      Exporter will need to be certain that it is necessary to use a letter
of credit. Typical considerations include:
       • Is it a legal requirement in the importing country?
       • What is the value of the order will the bank charges be out
       of proportion to the value?
       • ‘Always Traded This Way’ always using letter of credit for
       a particular customer or region without periodically re-
       assessing the reasons for requesting this method of payment.
       • What is the credit rating of the importer and are they a new
       customer or has a trading relationship already been established?
       • What is the country risk of the issuing bank? Would a
       confirmed letter of credit be more suitable?
       • What is the standing of the issuing bank? Would a
       confirmed letter of credit be more suitable?
       • What is the usual practice in trading with that country and in
       that particular commodity?
       • Are there any other measures that could be taken to protect
       the exporter such as credit insurance?
       • Insistence by a Credit Insurer to trade on letter of credit
       terms with buyers in certain markets.
       • Recommendation by banks who may advise that the best
       method of payment is a ‘confirmed irrevocable letter of credit’
       irrespective of the country, strength of issuing bank and without
       much regard to the value of the consignment.
       • Strategic decision made by the exporter however, this
       strategy should be flexible to adapt to the changing risk profile
       of both the country and the buyer.
             It is important to remember that all parties in the letter of
credit transaction deal with documents, not goods.

                                           91
                                                            Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



Types of Letter of Credit (L/C)

Revocable: A revocable letter of credit can be amended or cancelled
at any time by the importer without the exporter’s agreement unless
documents have been taken up by the nominated bank. Little
protection is offered to the exporter with a revocable credit and they
are rarely seen.
Irrevocable: An irrevocable letter of credit can neither be amended
nor cancelled without the agreement of all parties to the credit. Under
UCP 600, all letters of credit are deemed to be irrevocable unless
otherwise stated. Here, the importer’s bank gives a binding
undertaking to the supplier provided all the terms and conditions of
the credit are fulfilled.
Unconfirmed: An unconfirmed letter of credit is forwarded by the
advising bank directly to the exporter without adding its own
undertaking to make payment or accept responsibility for payment at a
future date, but confirming its authenticity.
Confirmed: A confirmed letter of credit is one in which the advising
bank, on the instructions of the issuing bank, has added a confirmation
that payment will be made as long as compliant documents are
presented. This commitment holds even if the issuing bank or the
buyer fails to make payment. The added security to the exporter of
confirmation needs to be considered in the context of the standing of
the issuing bank and the current political and economic state of the
importer’s country. A bank will make an additional charge for
confirming a letter of credit.
         Confirmation costs will vary according to the country
involved, but for many countries considered a high risk will be
between 2%-8%. There also may be countries issuing letters of credit
which banks do not wish to confirm they may already have enough
exposure in that market or not wish to expose themselves to that
particular risk at all.
Standby Letter of Credit: A standby letter of credit is used as
support where an alternative, less secure, method of payment has been
agreed. They are also used in the United States of America in place of
bank guarantees. Should the exporter fail to receive payment from the
importer he may claim under the standby letter of credit? Certain
documents are likely to be required to obtain payment including: the
standby letter of credit itself; a sight draft for the amount due; a copy
                                         92
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


of the unpaid invoice; proof of dispatch and a signed declaration from
the beneficiary stating that payment has not been received by the due
date and therefore reimbursement is claimed by letter of credit. The
International Chamber of Commerce publishes rules for operating
standby letter of credit ISP98- International Standby Practices.
Revolving Letter of Credit: The revolving credit is used for regular
shipments of the same commodity to the same importer. It can revolve
in relation to time or value. If the credit is time revolving once utilized
it is reinstated for further regular shipments until the credit is fully
drawn. If the credit revolves in relation to value once utilized and paid
the value can be reinstated for further drawings. The credit must state
that it is a revolving letter of credit and it may revolve either
automatically or subject to certain provisions. Revolving letters of
credit are useful to avoid the need for repetitious arrangements for
opening or amending letters of credit.
Transferable Letter of Credit: A transferable letter of credit is one
in which the exporter has the right to request the paying, or
negotiating bank to make either part, or all, of the credit value
available to one or more third parties. This type of credit is useful for
those acting as middlemen especially where there is a need to finance
purchases from third party suppliers.
Back to Back Letter of Credit: A back to back letter of credit can be
used as an alternative to the transferable letter of credit. Rather than
transferring the original letter of credit to the supplier, once the letter
of credit is received by the exporter from the opening bank, that letter
of credit is used as security to establish a second letter of credit drawn
on the exporter in favour of his importer. Many banks are reluctant to
issue back-to-back letters of credit due to the level of risk to which
they are exposed, whereas a transferable credit will not expose them
to higher risk than under the original credit.
Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credit
(UCPDC): Most letters of credit are subject to UCP 600 which are the
universally recognized set of rules governing the use of the
documentary credits in international trade. UCP were originally
formulated in 1993 by the International Chamber of Commerce (ICC)
and last updated in 2003 ICC publication. All definitions and general
documentary requirements referred to in this briefing are in
accordance with UCP 600 unless otherwise stated (it should be
remembered that in some instances this may differ from national law).


                                           93
                                                            Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


SITPRO would only recommend using letters of credit which are
subject to UCP 600.
          It is important to negotiate, at contractual stage if possible,
which party will bear bank charges. It is worth remembering that on a
small transaction these may be totally out of proportion and if these
costs are not included in the pricing any profit may be completely
eroded.

Essential checks when the Letter of Credit is received
Even when the above steps are followed, it is essential to check the
Letter of Credit as soon as it is received. The following is a checklist
to be reviewed immediately on receipt of a Letter of Credit.
       • Is the credit subject to UCP 600?
       • Are there any terms or conditions within the credit which
       cannot be met? If so immediate arrangements must be made
       with your importer for the credit to be amended.
       • Can the goods be shipped within the period set by the Letter
       of Credit?
       • Do any documents need to be legalized?
       • Can the mode of transport specified be used?
       • Can shipment be made from the port/airport specified?
       • Are the prices correct?
       • Do the credit terms confirm with the underlying sales
       contract?
       • Are drawings under the credit negotiable or payable in the
       exporter’s country rather than abroad?
       • Are the description, price and quantity of the goods are in
       accordance with the terms of the contract? (Remember that
       under-drawing a credit may sometimes cause problems, e.g., if
       trade discount has been forgotten when the opener instructed
       his bank).
       • Are the insurance requirements of the credit acceptable?
       • Can the required documentation be obtained?
       • If part shipments and trans-shipment of goods are
       prohibited, can the full quantity of the goods be exported on a
       vessel direct from the port of loading to the port of destination?
       • Can the goods be shipped within the period specified and
       documents presented to the bank within 21 days from the date


                                          94
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


      of shipment (unless a shorter time is stipulated) but, I any case
      before the credit expires?

Checklist for preparing documents
Amount Payable:
     • Do not overstate of the amount to be drawn as this could
     lead to the rejection of documents when presented.
     • The words “circa” or “about” relating to the quantity or unit
     price of the goods or to the amount of the credit allow a
     tolerance of 10% either way.
     • Unless a credit stipulates that the quantity of the goods
     specified must be exceeded nor reduced, a tolerance of 5%
     either way is permissible, always providing that the total
     amount of the drawings dos not exceed the amount of the
     credit. However, this tolerance does not apply when the credit
     specifies quantities in number of packing units or individual
     items.

Shipment:
     • Can specified shipping documentation can be obtained?
     • If the seller is chartering a vessel or shipping on deck, does
     the credit specifically permit such methods?
     • Do the ports of shipment and discharge, if specified, conflict
     with the price quotations?
     • If partial shipment or transshipments have to be made, does
     the credit allow this? Any installments not shipped within a
     stipulated period will effectively cancel the credit.
     • Is the time available for shipment sufficient and the period
     allowed for presentation of documents after shipment also
     sufficient?
     • If a credit on a day when banks are not open, the validity is
     usually extended to the next working day. However, this does
     not apply to the stipulated time after shipment allowed for the
     presentation of documents, usually 21 days.

Individual Documents

Draft: The draft must be drawn by the beneficiary on the party
specified in the credit or as requested by the advising bank. It must be

                                         95
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


drawn in accordance with the terms of the credit. One should check
that it is:
        • Correct in words and figures.
        • Drawn payable at sight or sometimes at a given future time.
        • Clause in accordance with the credit terms.
        • Correctly dated.
Bill of Lading: It is a transport document issued by the shipping
company to prove that the consignment has left the port of despatch.
A traditional bill of lading has a threefold purpose:
        • Formal receipt by the ship owner for goods.
        • Evidence of the contract of carriage.
        • Document of title to goods.
They should:
        • Be issued by a shipping company or its accredited agent.
        • Not be issued by a forwarding agent nor under a charter
            unless specifically authorized by the Letter of Credit.
        • Be shipped on board, unless the credit provides otherwise.
        • Bear a proper amendment, duly dated and signed by the
            shipping company, if a “received for shipment” item has
            been converted into a “shipped” document. The same
            applies to any other alteration.
        • Be in a complete set (unless otherwise indicated in the Letter
            of Credit) with any required number of non-negotiable
            copies, each negotiable copy being signed by the shipping
            company.
        • Be free from any detrimental clauses added by the shipping
            company indicating damage to goods or packing.
        • Cover an ocean voyage. Bills of lading evidencing shipment
            by a local vessel are not normally acceptable if
            transshipment is not allowed.
        • Bear a precise notation concerning payment of freight, i.e.
            either “freight paid” or freight payable at a given
            destination.
        • Bear goods description either in general or particular terms:
            however, the wording chosen must not conflict with the
            credit or other documents.
        • Bear shipping marks, number of packets and weights,
            consistent with all other documents. In particular, car should
            be taken that details on the bill of lading (often the last
                                          96
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


          document to become available) do not contradict details
          typed on earlier documents.
      •   Show ports of shipment and discharge in agreement with
          credit terms.
      •   Be endorsed on the reverse if made out to the shopper’s
          order.
      •   Be presented within the time limit specified in the credit for
          presentation of documents. If no such period is stipulated,
          banks will refuse documents presented later than 21 days
          from the date of the bill of lading.
      •   Must bear a shipment date on or before the last stipulated
          shipment date but, in any event, within the validity of the
          credit.
      •   Unless otherwise stipulated in the credit, banks will accept
          short form bills of lading issued by shipping companies or
          their agents or combined transport bills of lading issued by
          shipping companies or their agents.

Insurance Documents
Check that:
The extent of the cover agrees precisely with the credit terms, bearing
in mind that Institute Cargo Clauses (all risks) do not always cover
special risks.
The date of the insurance document is not later than the shipment date
or, if dated after shipment, it bears a clause to the effect that cover
commences not later than the date of shipment.
Claims are payable in the place specified in the credit.
The amount payable in the accordance with the credit terms plus any
specified percentage and is in the currency of the credit.
Marks, weights and description of the goods agree with the bill of
lading and all other documents.
The policy or certificate required by the terms is signed by the
insurance company, agents or underwriters and endorsed as necessary.
Cover is not by means of a broker’s cover note, unless this is specified
in the credit.
Any insurance policy or certificate made out to the order of the
shippers has been blank endorsed.

Invoice

                                         97
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Check that:
     • These have been completed by the exporter in the name of
        the importer unless the credit specifies otherwise.
     • Totals of all invoices agree with the amount of the drawing.
     • Prices and shipment terms (FOB and CIF etc) agree with the
        credit.
     • If a combined invoice and certificate of origin is called for,
        the certificate of origin is duly completed and signed.
     • If invoices have to be visaed, this has been done by the
        authority stipulated in the credit. Also remember the time
        lag between forwarding documents to a consulate and their
        return.
     • The full and exact description of the goods as shown on the
        credit appears on the invoice and that the quantity and
        specifications are as called for. If goods are described as
        being “……in accordance with Performa invoice
        number……dated…..” this can reduce superfluous, error-
        producing, detail.
     • There are no additional goods, charges or deductions not
        authorized in the credit. However, a deduction of normal
        trade discount is allowed as long as the final amount is
        correct-neither overdrawn nor under drawn.
     • If both an invoice and a packing list are called for, no
        “combined invoice and packing list” should be offered. An
        appropriately detailed extra invoice may often satisfy the
        packing list need, if suitably headed.
     • Performa invoice numbers or references numbers are
        required by the credit are shown.
     • Marks and weights net unless the credit states otherwise,
        number of cases and name of vessel agree with the bill of
        lading and other documents.




Certificate of Origin


                                       98
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


An exporter’s own certificate on a separate sheet is acceptable unless
the credit states otherwise.
Check that:
All details quoted, shipping marks and description of goods, agree
with the Letter of Credit, bill of lading and other documents.
The certificate does not conflict with other documents with regard to
value and country of origin.

Weight Note/List
Check that:
     • Certificates of weight must bear an authorized signature of
     the person/firm/company issuing the certificate in the detail
     required.
     • If a weight lists is called for by the credit, this requires the
     individual weight of each parcel or package together with the
     total weight.
     • If a weight note is called for by the credit it can merely state
     the weights concerned in general terms, perhaps one total.

Other Documents which provide evidence of the movement of
goods
Airway Bill or Air Consignment Note:
      • These should be issued and stamped by an airline on
      standard forms and should appear to be the original for the
      shipper, usually in 3 copies, this shows: name of consignee,
      goods, which must agree with the credit and all other
      documents, flight number and date, freight paid or to be paid at
      destination again in accordance with the terms of the credit.
      • Ensure that the correct copy is submitted, bearing a clear
      reception stamp with signature of the carrier or his agent.
      • Airway bills issued by freight forwarders and referred to
      master Airway Bill are not acceptable unless a certificate is
      presented stating that the forwarders are acting as agents for the
      carriers.




                                         99
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



Parcel Post Receipt
Check that:
     • The receipt shows evidence of dispatch to the party named
     in the credit.
     • The Post Office stamp shows a dispatch date on or before
     the last stipulated date for shipment.
     • The credit does not call for postal dispatch on a FOB basis;
     these are not acceptable as postal charges to destinations have
     to be prepaid.

Forwarding Agent’s Receipt
It is very important to establish at the outset whether there’s a
requirement for:
      • A forwarding agent’s receipt showing goods received for
      shipment or;
      • A forwarding agent’s receipt showing goods received and
      dispatched, as in the case of the CMR note. Normally, one set
      of documents accompanies the goods on this type of journey.

INCOTERMS- A GENERAL GUIDE
A set of common and understandable terms with commitment
amongst the business community is to be implemented by every entity
in trading such as, shipper, receiver, shipping company, banker
clearing houses and insurance company.
        Incoterms are a set of rules for the interpretation of the most
commonly used trade terms in international trade- International
Commercial Terms. They were first published by the International
Chamber of Commerce (ICC) in 1936 and since then have been
updated I 1953, 1967, 1976, 1980, 1990 and the current revision 2000.
   Parties to a contract are often unaware that there are different
trading practices in their respective countries, for example, FOB for
an American company may have a different meaning than FOB for a
UK trader. This can lead to misunderstanding and, in the worst
scenario, costly litigation. Incoterms set out to avoid this problem by
giving a set of standard rules that are recognized throughout the
world.
       The basic purpose of each Incoterm is to clarify how functions,
costs and risks are split between the buyer and seller in connection

                                        100
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


with the delivery of the goods as required by the sales contract.
Delivery, risks and costs are known as the critical points. Each term
clearly specifies the responsibility of the buyer to the other extreme
where everything is fundamentally the responsibility of the seller.

The Obligations of the Seller and Buyer
The main purpose of Incoterms is to clearly set out the obligations of
the seller and the buyer in relation to the delivery of the goods and the
division of functions, costs and risks related to the delivery. The way
this is presented in each Incoterms is under ten clauses each for the
seller and the buyer, where each clause on the seller’s side “mirrors”
the obligations to contract for carriage and insurance and clause B3
deals with buyer’s obligations to contract for carriage and insurance.

Incorporating Incoterms
It is important to ensure that where the protection of Incoterms is
intended to be incorporated into a contract of sale that an express
reference to the current edition of Incoterms is always made. For
example, it is not enough to quote just “FOB Southampton” but
instead “FOB Southampton Incoterms 2000” should be used.
   Alternatively, suitable wording can be included in the contract
stating that the contract is subject to Incoterms 2000. However, if this
is the case, you should be careful to ensure that standard contracts,
and any other standard paperwork mentioning Incoterms, are updated
to quote “Incoterms 2000” rather than Incoterms 1990.
      Failure to incorporate the correct version of Incoterms could
result in dispute as to which version is intended or indeed, if
Incoterms were intended to be incorporated at all.

The Incoterms
The thirteen Incoterms are split into four distinct groups:

Group E- where the goods are mad available to the buyer at the
seller’s premises;
Group F- where the seller must deliver the goods to a carrier
appointed by the buyer;
Group C- where the seller must contract for the carriage of the goods
without assuming risk of loss of, or damage to the goods or additional
costs due to events occurring after shipment;


                                         101
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Group D- where the seller has to bear all costs and risks required to
bring the goods to the place of destination.
 The following is a list of all of the Incoterms, the group to which they
belong and a brief outline of responsibilities under that Incoterm.
However, it should be remembered that this is just a brief outline and
is not a substitute for reading and understanding Incoterms 2000 itself.
Additionally it has been noted whether the term is suitable for any
mode of transport or just conventional maritime and inland waterway
transport.

Group E Departure
EXW- Ex Works (named place) (any mode of transport).
The seller must place the goods at the disposal of the buyer at the
seller’s premises or another named place not cleared for export and
not loaded on any collecting vehicle.

Group F Main Carriage Unpaid
FCA- Free Carrier (named place) (Any mode of transport).
The seller must deliver the goods, cleared for export, to the carrier
nominated by the buyer at the named place.
FAS- Free alongside Ship (named port of shipment) (Maritime and
inland waterway transport only).
The seller must place the goods, cleared for export, alongside the
vessel at the named port of shipment.
FOB- Free on Board (named port of shipment) (Maritime and inland
waterway transport only).
The seller delivers the goods, cleared for export, when they pass the
ship’s rail at the named port of shipment.

Group C Main Carriage Paid
CFR- Cost and Freight (named port of destination) (Maritime and
inland waterway transport only).
The seller delivers the goods when they pass the ship’s rail in the port
of shipment and must pay the costs and freight necessary to bring the
goods to the named port of destination. The buyer bears all additional
costs and risks after the goods have been delivered (over the ship’s
rail at the port of shipment).
CIF- Cost, Insurance and Freight (named port of destination)
(Maritime and inland waterway transport only). The only obligations
are the same as under CFR with the addition that the seller must
                                         102
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


procure insurance against the buyer’s risk of loss of, or damage to the
goods during carriage.
CPT- Carriage Paid to (named place of destination) (any mode of
transport).
The seller delivers the goods to the nominated carrier and must also
pay the cost of carriage necessary to bring the goods to the named
destination. The buyer bears additional costs and risks after the goods
have been delivered to the nominated carrier.
CIP- Carriage and Insurance Paid To (named place of destination)
(any mode of transport).
The obligations are the same as under CPT with the addition that the
seller must procure insurance against the buyer’s risk of loss of, or
damage to the goods during carriage.

Group D Arrival
DAF- Delivered at Frontier (named place) (Any mode of transport).
The seller must place the goods at the disposal of the buyer on the
arriving means of transport not unloaded, cleared for export but not
cleared for import, at the named point and place at the frontier.
DES- Delivered Ex Ship (named port of destination) (Maritime and
inland waterway transport only).
The seller delivers when the goods are placed at the disposal of the
buyer on board the ship, not cleared for import, at the named port of
destination.
DEQ- Delivered Ex Quay (named port of destination) (Maritime and
inland waterway transport only).
The seller delivers when the goods are placed at the disposal of the
buyer, not cleared for import, on the quay at the named port of
destination.
DDU- Delivered Duty Paid (named place of destination) (any mode of
transport).
The seller must deliver the goods to the buyer, not cleared for import,
and not unloaded at the named place of destination.
DDP- Delivered Duty Paid (named place of destination) (any mode of
transport).
The seller must deliver the goods to the buyer, cleared for import, and
not unloaded at the named place of destination.
       As can be seen, this list runs from the term where the buyer has
most of the responsibility (EXW) through that where the seller has the
majority of the responsibility (DDP). It is worth noting that in
                                        103
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Incoterms 2000 the only term that requires the buyer to clear the
goods for export (including obtaining any export license necessary) is
EXW and the only term that requires the seller to clear the goods for
import (including obtaining any import license necessary)is DDP.

UCPDC ICC (2007) – 600 – IMPORTANT PROVISION

Background
In May 2003, the International Chamber of Commerce (ICC)
authorized the ICC Commission on Banking Technique and Practice
to bring a revision of the Uniform Customs and Practice for
Documentary Credits. The commission has framed ICC-600 which
will be applicable from 1st July 2007.

Meaning
The Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credit (UCPDC)
is a set of rules on the issuance and use of letters of credit. It is being
utilized by bankers and commercial parties for more than 175
countries.

Essential Articles for Trading Operations
Article 2: Definitions of advising bank, applicant, confirmation,
beneficiary etc. As per the definition of credit, credit is an
arrangement which is irrevocable and constitute a definite undertaking
of the issuing bank to honour a complying presentation. Means there
is no revocable credit.
Article 3: Interpretations of various commonly used words in credit
are given. Important of which is that if on or about or similar will be
interpreted as a stipulation that an event is to occur during a period of
5 calendar days after the specified date, both start and end dates
included.
Article 4: A credit by nature is a separate transaction from the sale or
other contracts on which it may be based. Banks are in no way
concerned or bound by such contracts even if any reference is given in
the credit.
Article 5: The bank deals in documents and not with goods, services
or performance to which the documents may relate.
Article 6: A credit must state availability of the bank, expiry date and
place of presentation.


                                          104
                                                            Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Article 7: Issuing Bank undertaking for making payment as per terms
of LC or reimbursing to nominated bank having made the payment by
way of negotiation as per the terms of LC.
Article 8: Confirming Bank undertakings for reimbursement to
another nominated bank that has honored or negotiated a complying
presentation.
Article 14: A presentation must be made by or on behalf of the
beneficiary not later than 21 calendar days after the date of shipment
but not later than the expiry date of the credit. Further, a nominated
bank acting on its nomination, a confirming bank, if any, and the
issuing bank shall each have a maximum of 5 banking days (7 in
earlier UCP - 500), following the day of presentation to determine if
presentation is complying. This period is not curtailed or otherwise
affected by the occurrence on or after the date of presentation of any
expiry date or last date for presentation.
Article 20: Clause in Bill of Lading stating that the carrier reserves
the right to transship will be disregarded.
Article 22: In case of Charter Party Bill of Lading, banks will not
examine the Charter Party contract, even if they are required to be
presented by the terms of credit.
Article 23: In case of air transport document indicating that
transshipment will or may take place is acceptable, even if credit
prohibits transshipment.
Article 28: If there is no indication in the credit of the insurance
coverage required, the amount of insurance coverage must be at least
110% of the CIF or CIP value goods.
Article 29: If the expiry date of a credit or the last day for
presentation falls on a day when bank is closed for reasons other than
Force Measures (Article 36), the expiry day / presentation day will b
extended to the first following banking day. But the latest date for
shipment will not be extended as a result of this.
Article 30: If the word ‘about’, ‘app’ etc is mentioned in the credit it
will be construed as + or – 10% for amount and + or – for quantity.
The tolerance of 5% in quantity is allowed even if partial shipment is
not allowed.
Article 31: Partial drawings or shipment are allowed.
Article 33: A bank has no obligation to accept a presentation outside
its banking hours.
Article 36: Force Majeure- A bank assumes no liability or
responsibility for the consequences arising out of the interruption of
                                        105
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


its business by acts of God, riots, civil commotions, insurrections,
wars acts or terrorism, or by any strikes or lockouts or any other
causes beyond its control. A bank will not upon resumption of its
business, honour, or negotiate under a credit that expired during such
interruption of its business.
Article 38: For the purpose of this article, transferable credit means a
credit that specifically states that it is transferable. A credit may be
transferred in part of more than one second beneficiary provided
partial drawings or shipments are allowed. But a transferred credit
cannot be transferred at the request of a second beneficiary to any
subsequent beneficiary i.e. it can be transferred only once.

International business organizations are relocating their
manufacturing units. Destinations are changing for their goods.
Companies like Mitsubishi and support their goods through ship
liners. Obviously, trade finance transactions are integral parts of
their business.




                                        106
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



       7.MULTINATIONAL CORPORATIONS

 The world is my playground; Playing is my duty. No barriers or
 obstacle is known to me. Let me play everywhere and anywhere and
 at any time.
 Going and performing in any part of the world is fundamental
 principle of an MNC.


Learning value:
On going through the chapter, reader will

   1. Understand the concept of MNCs.

   2. Role of Head-Quarters and subsidiaries in the current scenario.
   3. Basic philosophy of MNCs.

   4. Risk analysis of MNCs.

   5. Criticism of MNCs and few illustrations.

THE CONCEPT
If we ask any employee of a multinational company in a developing country,
he is proud of his status, sense of achievement and affluence as compared to
his peers. The system, style, technology and working style elevate his
position little higher than others.

What is Multinational Corporation?
“The multinational is a business unit which operates simultaneously in
different parts of the world. In some cases the manufacturing unit may be in
one country, while the marketing and investment may be in other countries.
In other cases all the business operations are carried out in different
countries, with the strategic head quarters in any part of the world.” For
example, the Manhattan based company, Colgate Palmolive Inc., which
manufactures and markets dental care, health care, hair care and skin care

                                    107
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


products, in more than 120 countries. Procter and Gamble, based in
Cincinnati also has similar product lines and operates in more than 150
countries. Their logo, symbol, products and brands are easily identified in
the malls, outlets and media.

        There are multinationals that have a total turnover exceeding the GDP
of many small or less developed nations. The Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing Company, called for short, 3M, have more than a thousand
product lines. The top three multinationals in the world today could combine
to purchase a small nation. Few multinationals in the total employee force
that is larger than the population of a country and my even have the power to
bring down governments. Therefore, multinationals have money power,
muscle power, managerial power, technology power and political power
through which they influence many economies in the world.
      At one time American based multinationals rules the world. Today,
many Japanese, Korean, European and Indian multinationals have spread
their wings in many parts of the world. Few nations have created specific
product based MNCs such as General Motors, Ford Motors and AMC in
case of U.S.A and Sony, Sharp, Hitachi and Casio incase of Japan.

Germany concentrated on technology based items like dental equipments
and telecommunications. From the centre they started moving to various
countries and established their empires.
      The strategic nerve centre is the company’s headquarters, where major
decisions are taken and policies are formulated. The main roles of a typical
multinational at headquarters are:

1. Strategic role: It is a policy making entity for operations worldwide.

2. Execution: Decisions on implementation of policies, methods and means
   of operations, in different countries.

3. Control: Since the operations are vast it is necessary to maintain control
   over global strategic, costs, systems and operations.

All the three roles are played by the head quarters after completing major
five pre-requisites:
   1. The business opportunity has been explored in a specific area.


                                     108
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   2. Sufficient investment has been made in tangible and intangible assets.

   3. The production facility has been already developed.

   4. The key persons are taking responsible positions.

   5. The location is ideal and conducive for further expansion.




      Every multinational has to operate through its satellite units in many
countries, called subsidiaries. Therefore, multinationals have headquarters
and a number of subsidiaries that are scattered throughout the world.
       As an expansion process, few multinationals are fast expanding their
operations in developing countries. While doing so the headquarter is
involved in a serious risk analysis and finally select the country where they
are comfortable to do business. At the headquarters, the experts from
political science, economics, accountancy, sociology and diplomacy are
advising the top management on different issues prior to entry into any
country. The entry decision is crucial for any MNC and it is an outcome of
many brains and not a daring decision of a single mind.


                                    109
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


      A typical multinational operates as per the following model:




                                HEADQUARTERS




                  S1          S2            S3              S4




      In most cases the power rests with the main company at its head
quarters. However, a few multinationals do give considerable powers to their
subsidiaries. Currently, multinationals are motivated solely by revenue
wherein profits are the main criteria.




CLASSIFICATION OF MULTINATIONALS



                                    110
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


      Depending upon the relationship between the headquarters and
subsidiaries, multinationals can be classified into three broad categories:




1. Pyramidal Model Multinationals




                                     HQ
                                  (STRONG)




             S1           S2          S3               S4           S5




      A pyramid indicates a broad bottom and narrow top. According to the
typical pyramid model, the multinational operates as follows:

a) It has strong headquarters and weak subsidiaries.

b) All decisions are made at the headquarters and imposed on the
   subsidiaries,


                                    111
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


c) Major decisions related to new product development, plant location and
   managerial decisions are taken only at the headquarters. At times, the
   head-quarters may be quite autocratic towards its subsidiaries.

d) They may be quite old fashioned in their day-to-day functioning.

e) They do not bring sentiments and emotions for the local population into
   their dealings.

f) They exercise complete control in their deals.

g) They run their business through power.
   Sympathy, compassion and human approach are generally far off in their
approach. Lower is the prime motive in their style. Age old colonialism and
imperialism got percolated to follow such style.

   Due to rigidity in their style of functioning, such organizations may invite
opposition from citizens in developing countries at any time. Fortunately,
such multinationals changed became adaptable to local environment.
   2. Umbrella Model Multinationals


                                     HQ




           S1          S2                           S3            S4




      Here the headquarters acts as a facilitator. Such MNCs believe in

a) Mutual exchange of knowledge and technology.

                                     112
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


b) Constant motivation of subsidiaries.

c) Building an image for both headquarters and the subsidiary.

d) Harmony between employees at different levels, and between employees
   and employers.

e) High respect for the sovereignty of the county where they operate.

    Such organizations are concerned about their image, goodwill and
reputation. For them doing business is a way of life. They invite
representatives from the subsidiaries to the headquarters for strategic
decisions. They do not practice favoritism, nepotism, parochialism and racial
superiority. Merit is the only consideration for growth and career
enhancement. An Indian is the CEO of Mc.kinsey, Afghani is the head of
HR in Yahoo, Indonesian is the research head in Biorad and Indian woman
is heading Pepsi world-wide operations.

3. Inter-conglomerate Multinationals

Conglomerate indicates grouping of business activities aiming at high profits
and revenue generations, whether it is related to existing core business or
not. Inter –conglomerate multinationals are aggressive in expansion and
achieving a high turnover. Such multinationals enter into any business where
the profits are exponentially high. They generally do not consider any other
aspect, except high profits, as a performance indicator.




                                    113
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




                                   INVESTMENT




                                     PROFITS
                                      HUGE
                                     REVENUE




                                                             EXPANSION
             HIGH RATE                                          AND
             OF RETURN
                                                            AGGRESSION




a) High profit motivation.

b) They do not restrict themselves to their core competency.

c) A ‘hire and fire’ policy is very common.
d) They set high targets for themselves.

e) No social consideration in the country of their operation.

f) Growth, expansion, takeovers and aggression are constant endeavours.

  The investments are high and are made with expectations of high returns,
which will be used for aggressive expansion, diversification and takeovers?


                                     114
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   Although multinationals can be classified on the above basis, today the
classification is not rigid. Hence, multinationals have become flexible over
the past two decades. As the indigenous forces become strong in any
developing country, the pure pyramidal model will not work. Organizations,
which work under a pure umbrella model cannot generate sufficient revenue
to sustain itself and it is also difficult for such organizations to face stiff
competition. Organisation, which functions under the inter-conglomerate
model, cannot focus only on profit, considerations for social causes and
sensitivity towards the host country have to be maintained or else the
nationals in the host country pose major challenges and pull down the
operations.

Classification of Multinationals Depending upon their Origin


                            CLASSIFICATION BASED ON ORIGIN




  ETHNOCENTRIC   REGIO-CENTRIC   CONTINENTAL   POLYCENTRIC      TRANSNATION AL      GLOBAL

   Succeed at     Understand      Focus on      Group the          Facilitate     Cross the
    home and       complete          one       requirement       accessibility   borders and
   spread with   background       continent    of the whole           to           serve the
      home       and focus on        and        continent         customers      customers at
    influence      a specific    strengthen    and provide                        door steps
                     region                    product and
                                                 services




                                         115
                                                              Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


1. Ethnocentric: Such multinationals concentrate more on their place
   of origin. Since they understand their own socio-cultural background
   it is easy for them to succeed in their home country. Instead of taking
   high risks in other countries they first succeed in their home country
   and then slowly more abroad with few changes in the product and
   mode of functioning. Mitsukoshi Super Market practices ethnic touch
   of Japan in its malls wherever it operates.

2. Regio-centric: Few multinationals focus their activities only in a
   particular region like South East Asia or the Gulf region. There are
   certain practices that are uniform in nature in a specific region, and
   hence they succeed. A region covers many nations; hence the
   organization operates in all parts of the region to get the title
   ‘multinational’. “Continent”, the French super market chain has an
   influence in the whole of Indian ocean rim countries.

3. Continental: There are multinationals that are very successful in
   particular continent for their specific product ranges. The cost of
   storing and warehousing can be brought down if the product is
   distributed in the whole continent. There are hundreds of
   multinationals doing exceedingly well only in Europe, but are not able
   to face cross-cultural challenges in other continents. Therefore, they
   remain as continental multinationals. TESCO serves the whole
   European continent by understanding the need of every European
   community.

4. Polycentric: The majority of multinationals have to simultaneously
   enter different countries. It is not possible to adopts a ‘wait and watch’
   policy to enter different countries and commence operations. Once a
   company invests in an innovation, it has to spread its activities
   everywhere, otherwise it will lose the opportunity, and competitors
   will step in to get the business. Therefore, companies like Proctor &
   Gamble, Unilever, Sony, Electrolux, Henkel and Colgate-Palmolive
   are present in almost every part of the world.

5. Trans-national: Multinational like Hewlett Packard has set up sub-
   head quarters close to the subsidiaries for easy accessibility. The sub-
   headquarters are located in Singapore or Hong Kong but the main
   office remains in California. The trans-national multinationals sole


                                   116
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


      problems arising from nearby countries through their sub-headquarter.
      It is serving the purpose of administrative convenience.

   6. Global organizations: These organizations have a physical
      presence in other parts of the world and cater to customers in different
      countries through standardized products by consolidating resources
      from any part of the world. Today, every company dreams of
      becoming a global company. Companies shift their manufacturing
      bases to more profitable locations, open up warehouses in special
      economic zones and train people to be multilingual, multi-strategic
      and multi-functional in order to manage the business successfully.

      The difference between polycentric and global multinationals is that
      the latter is very closed to customer and does not give extra weight-
      age to the headquarters. Global orgainsations take into account
      customer tastes and preferences. They employ cost cutting techniques
      and are able to provide customers with good quality, low-priced items.
      They have enormous respect for the country in which they operate and
      integrate themselves into the society.

BASIC PHIPLOSOPHIES OF MULTINATIONALS
      MNCs will always look out for opportunities. They carry out risk
analysis, and send their personnel to learn and understand the business
climate. They develop expertise in understanding the culture, politics,
economy and legal aspects of the country that they are planning to enter.
They look at the global, rather than only local potential. The essential
element that distinguishes the true multinational is its commitment to
manufacturing, marketing, developing R&D, and financing opportunies
throughout the world, rather than just thinking of the domestic situation.

   STRUCTURE OF MULTI-NATIONAL CORPORATIONS

MNCs can be categorized in 3 main structures:

   1. Attachment of Subsidiaries with General (or Top) Management of
      the Parent Company and with the CMD

   2. Creation of an International Division


                                     117
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   3. Putting in place Group Structure

   1. Attachment of Subsidiaries with Top Management of the
                            Group



                         Top
                      Management




Financial                 Asian                           American
Division/               Subsidiary                        Subsidiary
Planning                 Division                          Division
Division



 No discrimination between various departments of the organization and
 foreign subsidiaries.




                                  118
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


2. Organizations with an International Division


                                Parent
                               Company



                   International      MARKETING
  FINANCE            Division                                       HR



      FINANCE          MARKETING                     HR


3. Creation of a Group Structure

  Organization according to functions
  Organization according to products
  Organization according to geographical zones
  Mixed organization




                               119
                                                 Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




 3.1 FUNCTIONAL ORGANISATION


                          Top
                       Management


   Marketing                Finance                              HR



       COUNTRY A       COUNTRY B                    COUNTRY C




 3.2 PRODUCT ORGANISATION


                        CMD



PRODUCT A            PRODUCT B                            PRODUCT C


 PRODUCTION        MARKETING                    FINANCE




        ASIA            EUROPE                       AMERICA

                            120
                                              Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




  3.3 Organization according to Geographical Zones


                                    CMD


       ASIAN           AMERICAN             AFRICAN               EUROPEAN
      DIVISION          DIVISION            DIVISION               DIVISION



           PRODUCT A          PRODUCT B            PRODUCT C



                 PRODUCTION                MARKETING


  3.4 MIXED ORGANISATION


                                 CMD

      PRODUCT A               PRODUCT B                            INDIA


USA       EUROPE           AFRICA


                                   PRODUCT            PRODUCT             PRODUCT
                                      A                  B                   C



                                  121
                                                    Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Some of characteristics of MNCs are
Mode of Transfer ( as per convenience)
An MNC has considerable freedom in selecting the financial channel
through which funds or profits or both are moved. For example, patents and
trademarks can be sold outright or transferred in return through contractual
binding or royalty payments. Similarly, the MNC can move profits and cash
from one unit to another by adjusting transfer prices on inter company sales
and purchases of goods and services. MNCs can use these various channels,
singly or in combinations, to transfer funds internationally, depending on the
specific circumstances encountered.

Timing Flexibility
Some of the internationally operating companies have to comply with strict
payment schedule; others can be accelerated or delayed. MNCs can extend
trade credit to their other subsidiaries through open account terms, say from
90 to 180 days. This gives a major leverage to financial status. In addition,
the timing for payment of fees and royalties may be modified when all
parties to the agreement are related. In the same way while price of raw
material is low then they can procure a huge quantity and stock for usage.

Value addition through tax reduction
By shifting profits from high-tax to low-tax nations, MNCs can reduce their
global tax payments. In additions, they can transfer funds among their
various units, which allow them to circumvent currency control and other
regulations. Cyprus, Panama and Malta are safe destinations for such
operations.

STRATEGIC APPROACH TO MULTINATIONALS
In order to explain new and potentially profitable projects, a good
understanding of multinational strategies is necessary. The three broad
categories of multinationals and their associated strategies are examined
below.

A. Innovation Based Multinationals
Firms such as IBM, Philips and Apple create barriers to entry for others by
continually introducing new products and differentiating existing ones, both

                                     122
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


domestically and internationally. Firms in this category spend large amounts
of money on R&D and have a high ratio of technical to factory personnel.
Their products are typically designed to fill a need perceived locally that
often exists abroad as well. In the field of chemical and pharmaceuticals
Hopkins and E. Merck adopt the same strategy.



B. The Mature Multinationals
The principal approach in such firms is the presence of economies of scale.
It exists whenever there is an increase in the scale of production, marketing
and distribution costs could be increased in order to retain in existing
position or more aggressive. The existence of economies of scale means
there are inherent cost advantages of being large. The more significant these
economies of scale are, the greater will be the cost disadvantage faced by a
new entrant in the same field in a given market. Philip Morris, Toshiba and
Whirlpool are falling under this category.

   Reduction in promotion costs
   Some companies such as Coca Cola and Proctor & Gamble take
   advantage of the fact that potential entrants are wary of the high costs
   involved in advertising and marketing a new product. Such firms are able
   to exploit the premium associated with their strong brand names. MNCs
   can use single campaign and visual aspects in all the countries
   simultaneously with different languages like Nestlé’s Nescafe.

   Cost advantage through multiple activities
   Other firms take advantage of economies of scope. Economies of scope
   exist whenever the same investment can support multi-profitable
   activities, which are less expensive. Examples abound of the cost
   advantages of producing and selling multiple products related to common
   technology, production facilities and distribution network. For example,
   Honda has increased its investment in small engine technology in the
   automobile, motorcycle, lawn mower, marine engine, chain saw and
   generator business. Mitsubishi enjoys this advantage of steel trading, lifts
   and escalators, vehicles and power generation.

C. The Senescent Multinationals

                                     123
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   There are some product lines where the competitive advantages erode
   very fast. The strategic followed in such cases are given below.
1. One possibility is to enter new markets where little competition currently
   exists. For example Crown Cork & Seal, the Philadelphia-based maker of
   bottle tops and cans, reacted to the slowing of growth and heightened
   competition in business in the United States by expanding overseas. It
   sets up subsidiaries in such countries as Thailand, Malaysia, Zambia and
   Peru, estimating correctly that in these developing and urbanizing
   societies, people would eventually switch from home grown produce to
   food in cans and drinks in bottles.

2. Another strategy often followed when senescence sets in is to use the
   firm’s global scanning capability to seek out lower cost production sites.
   Costs can then be minimized by integration of the firm’s manufacturing
   facilities worldwide. Many electronics and textile firms in the US shifted
   their production facilities to Asian locations such as Taiwan and Hong
   Kong, to take advantage of the lower labour costs.

REASONS FOR THE GROWTH OF MNCs
1. Non-transferable knowledge

It is often possible for an MNC to sell its knowledge in the form of patent
rights and to license a foreign producer. This relieves the MNC the need to
make foreign direct investment. However, sometimes an MNC that has a
production process or product patent can make a larger profit by carrying out
the production in a foreign country itself. The reason for this is that some
kinds of knowledge cannot be sold and which are the result of years of
experience.
2. Protecting Reputations

Products develop a good or bad name, which transcends international
boundaries. It would be very difficult for an MNC to protect its reputation if
a foreign licensee does an inferior job. Therefore, MNCs prefer to invest in a
country rather than licensing and transfer expertise, to ensure the
maintenance of their good name.
3. Building Reputations



                                     124
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Sometimes, MNCs invest to build their image and reputation rather than
protect their reputation. This motive is of particular importance in the case of
foreign direct investment by banks, because in the banking business an
international reputation can attract deposits. If the goodwill is established the
bank can expand and build a strong customer base. Quality service to a large
number of customers is bound to ensure success. This probably explains the
tremendous growth of foreign banks such as Citibank, Grind lays and
Standard Chartered in India and other developing countries.

4. Protecting Secrecy

MNCs prefer direct investment, rather than granting a license to a foreign
company if protecting the secrecy of the product is important. While it may
be true that a licensee will take precautions to protect patent rights, it is
equally true that it may be less conscientious than the original owner of the
patent.

5. Product Life Cycle theory and impact

It has been argued that opportunities for further gains at home eventually dry
up. To maintain the growth of profits, a corporation must venture abroad
where markets are not so well penetrated and where there is perhaps less
competition. This hypothesis perfectly explains the growth of American
MNCs in other countries where they can fully exploit all the stages of the
life cycle of a product. A prime example would be Gillette, which has
revolutionized the shaving systems industry. HP laptop, Sony Walkman and
Xerox face various stages of their life-cycle in their home country.

6. Availability of Capital
The fact that MNCs have access to capital markets has been advocated as
another reason why firms themselves move abroad. A firm operating in only
one country does not have the same access to cheaper funds as a larger firm.
However, this argument, which has been put forward for the growth of
MNCs, has been rejected by many critics.

7. Invest and prosper “out” and not “in”

The strategic motive for making investments has been advocated as another
reason for the growth of MNCs. MNCs enter foreign markets to protect their
market share when this is being threatened by the potential entry of
indigenous firms or multinationals from other countries. Fast growing
                                      125
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


countries like India and China give a great boost to MNCs originated in U.S,
Japan and Europe.
8. Avoiding Tariffs and Quotas

MNCs prefer to invest directly in a country in order to avoid import tariffs
and quotas that the firm may have to face if it produces the goods at home
and ship them. For example, a number of foreign automobile and truck
producers opened plants in the US to avoid restrictions on selling foreign
made cars. Automobile giants like Fiat, Volkswagen, Hyundai, Honda and
Mazda are entering different countries around the world not with the
products but with technology and money.

9. Symbiotic Relationships

Some firms have followed clients who have made foreign direct investment.
This is especially true in the case of accountancy and consulting firms. Large
US accounting firms, which know the parent companies’ special needs and
practices, have opened offices in countries where their clients have opened
subsidiaries. These US accounting firms have an advantage over local firms
because of their knowledge of the company and because the client may
prefer to engage only one firm in order to reduce the number of people with
access to sensitive information. Templeton, Goldman Sachs and Ernst and
Young are moving with their clients even to small countries like Panama,
Mauritius, Malta and Sri Lanka.

MULTINATIONALS:                 CREATURES                OF         MARKET
IMPERFECTIONS
Broadly, two kinds of imperfections are relevant.

1. Structural imperfections: These may be natural or manmade.
   Government regulations on investment, taxes and subsidies, capital
   markets and monopoly aspects create imperfections. This kind of
   imperfection is now disappearing from industrial countries, but is still
   appearing in developing countries.

2. Imperfections in transactions and markets: Uncertainty in delivery, the
   volatility of exchange rates; the difficulty that customers face in
   evaluating unfamiliar products; the costs of negotiating deals, economies
   of scale in production, purchasing, research and developments and

                                     126
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   distribution give advantages to existing firms and impose barriers against
   newcomers.
   Due to these and other imperfections, firms locate their production and
other operations internally. As these market imperfections disappear, the
importance of MNCs may diminish. The days for this may not be far off due
to the international apex body, WTO and its regulatory norms are strictly
implemented in near future.



TRANSFER PRICING
       Transfer prices are the charges made when a company supplies goods,
services or finance to another company to which it is related. It is an
internationally accepted principle that transactions between related parties
should be based upon the same terms as those between unrelated parties.
Thus both tax treaties entered into between countries and domestic tax
legislation of various countries have adopted the arm’s length principle.

Abuse of Transfer Pricing
In the era of global competition transfer pricing has became an unwanted
reality. The price charged by a company in Country A to another company
in Country B is reflected in the profit and loss account of both the
companies, either as income or expenditure, and impacts the tax paid by the
two related companies. By resorting to transfer pricing, related entities can
reduce their total taxation by transferring higher income to low-tax
jurisdictions and greater expenditure to those jurisdictions where the tax rate
is very high. For example, the current tax rate on domestic companies in
India is 33.3%. Take an example, the Company A is located in India and
Company B in Singapore, and that both belong to the same group. If the tax
rate in Singapore is 15% then Company B will transfer raw material to
Company A at slightly higher prices. This will enable Company A to show a
higher expenditure and reduce its taxable profits. On the other hand, a
slightly higher income will not harm Company B much as the tax rate in its
country is very low, thus the global group as a whole will benefit form tax
savings. In this game, the first country is the major loser and due to low
profits employees may struggle for their incentives.

Detection of Transfer Pricing

                                     127
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Globally, there are several methods of detecting transfer pricing to check
whether transactions between related parties have been at an ‘arm’s length’.
The transaction method relies directly or indirectly on information about the
prices at which similar transactions have been entered into by unrelated
parties. This method is further divided into the Comparable Uncontrolled
Price (CUP) method and cost plus (C+) method.

       Prices charged in similar business transactions between two
independent parties is the yardstick adopted under the CUP method.
Whereas under the C+ method, as arm’s length price is determined by
applying an appropriate mark-up on the costs incurred. The transactional
profit method, as the name indicates, is transaction-specific; it examines
whether or not profits from a particular deal are reasonable.

Importance of Transfer Pricing Regulations in Developing Countries
Import of raw material, semi-finished goods for assembling and most
important of all, intellectual property such as know-how and technology are
areas prone to transfer pricing. Such goods or services can be sent to
associate companies in India at a higher or lower rate than the prices charged
to unrelated parties, to secure a global tax advantage. In today’s high-tech
age, Indian companies often rely on technology and know-how from their
foreign joint venture partners; thus strict regulations are very important.

Regulations in Dealing with Transfer Pricing
The important sections relating to transfer pricing in the Income Tax Act
1961 are Section 40A (2), Section 80 1A (9) and Section 1A (10). The first
enables tax authorities to disallow any expenditure made to a related party,
which they feel is excessive. Certain tax benefits are available under Section
80 1A such as a tax holiday for a certain number of years. If transfer pricing
is suspected then the tax authorities can deny such tax holidays.

       The most important provision in the tax laws is in Section 92. This
allows the Indian tax authorities to adjust the taxable income of the Indian
party, if they feel that the prices charged in a transaction are not at an arm’s
length due to close connection between the Indian entity and a foreign party.

COUNTRY RISK
When making overseas direct investments it is necessary to allow for risk
due to the investment being in a foreign country. Country risk is one of the
                                      128
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


special issues faced by MNCs when investing abroad. It involves the
possibility of losses due to country-specific economic, political and social
events.

       Among the country risks that are faced by MNCs are those related to
the local economy, those due to the possibility of confiscation i.e.
government takeover without any compensation, and those due to
expropriation i.e. government takeover without any compensation, and those
due to expropriation i.e government takeover with compensation which at
times can be generous. In addition there are the political/social risks of wars,
revolutions and insurrections. Even though none of these latter events are
specifically directed towards an MNC by the foreign government, they can
damage or destroy an investment. There are also risks of currency non-
convertibility and restrictions on the repatriation of income. International
magazines like Euro Money and The Economist regularly conduct country
risk evaluations in order to facilitate MNCs.

Methods of Reducing Country Risk and Control
1. Controlling crucial elements of corporate operations
Many MNCs try to prevent operations in developing countries by other local
entities without their element of operations. For example, food and soft drink
manufacturers keep their special ingredients secret. Automobile companies
may produce vital parts such as engines in some other country and refuse to
supply these parts if their operations are seized.

2. Programmed stages of planned disinvestment
An alternative technique for reducing the probability of expropriation is for
the MNC to promise to hand over ownership and control to local people in
the future. This is sometimes a requirement of the host government. There is
a calculative move to involve themselves in stages.

3. Joint ventures
Instead of promising shared ownership in the future, an alternative technique
for reducing the risk of expropriation is to share ownership with private or
official partners in the host country from the very beginning. Such shared
ownerships, known as joint ventures rely on the reluctance of local partners,
if private, to accept the interference of their own government as a means of
reducing expropriation. When the partner is the government itself, the
                                      129
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


disincentive to expropriation is concerned over the loss of future
investments. Multiple joint ventures in different countries reduce the risk of
expropriation, even if there is no local participation. If the government of
one country does expropriate the business if faces the risk of being isolated
simultaneously by numerous foreign powers.




PROBLEMS FROM THE GORWTH OF MNCs
Much of the concern about MNCs stems from their size, which can be
formidable. MNCs may impose on their host governments to the advantage
of their own shareholders and the disadvantage of citizens and shareholders
in the country of operation. Even in India, MNCs have neglected the
interests of the minority shareholders in the past.

       It can be difficult to manage economies in which MNCs have
extensive investments. Since MNCs often have ready access to external
sources of finances, they can blunt local monetary policy. When the host
government wishes to constrain any economic activity, MNCs may
nevertheless expand through foreign borrowing. Similarly, efforts at
economic expansion elsewhere. Although it is true that any firm can
frustrate plans for economic expansion due to integrated financial markets,
MNCs are likely to take advantage of any opportunity to gain profits. As we
have seen, MNCs can also shift profits to reduce their total tax burden by
showing larger profits in countries with lower tax rates.

       Concern has been expressed, especially within the US, that their
MNCs can defy the foreign policy objectives of the government through
their foreign branches and subsidiaries. MNCs might break a blockade and
avoid sanctions by operating through overseas subsidiaries. This has led to
greater concern in some host countries, as they feel that companies operating
within their boundaries may follow orders of the US or any other foreign
government, and even within international trade unions. For example, in
1981 Chrysler Corporation was given loan guarantee to continue its
operation. The US government insisted on wage and salary roll backs as a


                                     130
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


condition. Chrysler workers in Canada did not appreciate the instructions
from the US Congress to accept a reduced wage.
    The examples below illustrate some of the controversies faced by
MNCs.

Parke-Davis
Parke-Davis India is a 40% subsidiary of Parke-Davis Inc, USA which in
turn is a division of the US-based company, Warner-Lambert. In 1995 the
latter set up a 100% subsidiary. Among other products, it planned to
manufacture and market confectionary products, although Parke-Davis India
was already operating in this field. Later the parent company bought the
brands of ‘Halls’ and ‘Chiclets’ from Parke-Davis India for about Rs.10
crores, which according to analysts was low price in relation to growth
prospects and sales. Post-transfer, the sales of Parke-Davis grew just 3% in
1995-96 and then fell 1.5% the following year. And revealingly while the
Sensex dropped 39% in 17 months from September 1994, Parke-Davis
shares plunged almost 70% in the same period. Practically, a loss of about
Rs.285 crores in market capitalization was witnessed during the same
period.

Pfizer
There is undeniable attraction for an MNC to retain all the profits of a
venture, rather than sharing them with minority shareholders. Obviously
such a prospect is attractive to the MNC and alarming to the retail investor,
especially since the regulatory framework cannot control corporate action in
this matter. Although not having to share the profits may be the real reason.
MNCs cite other factors, including lack of stringent patent and copyright
laws in India for their actions. Often it is also the high cost of acquiring the
additional shares to take the parent company’s holding above 51%. For
example the additional 11% equity stake required for Pfizer would set the
parent company back some Rs. 290 crore at the current valuation, and to buy
out the remaining 60% from the other shareholders, would cost it Rs.775
crore. Setting up a 100% subsidiary is possible.

SmithKline Beecham
This case gives us an insight into the royalty issues. In 1997, SmithKline
Beecham India announced its plan to pay 5% of net revenues earned from
the sale of Horlicks to its parent company for using the brand name. At that
                                      131
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


point Horlicks accounted for 80% of the company’s Rs. 430 crore net sales.
Although it paid about Rs.5 crore in 1996, the estimated annual outgoings
worked out to about Rs.20 crore, against a net profit of Rs.45.6 crore in the
same year.

      The immediate impact on the SmithKline Beecham Consumer
Healthcare stock was drastic, as the stock price fell by almost Rs.100 from
Rs.365 in Feb 1997 in just 10 days, reflecting a loss of about 27% or about
Rs.275 crore in terms of market capitalization.
      Here, the main issue for investors was whether royalty payment
needed to be paid to the parent company at all. Although the Indian
company does not own the brand and is only its licensed user, it has
nevertheless spent a huge amount on brand promotion and advertisement
expenses for Horlicks, over the last four decades, and approximately Rs, 175
crores over the past 10 years. Critics feel that the company could have used
this money to promote a brand of its own, with considerable success.

Philips
On 1st December 2001, the parent company of Philips announced that it
wanted to buy out the other shareholders of its 51% subsidiary Philips India,
and delist it from the stock markets. It offered to pay Rs. 105 for each share.
The deadline for accepting the offer was 14th December. The beauty of the
strategy was that Philips did not need to persuade every individual
shareholder to sell to achieve its goal. According to the SEBI regulations,
Philips needed to increase its shareholding to 90% in Philips India to apply
for delisting the latter. Since Philips owned 51% shares, it needed to pick up
only 39% more.
       When the offer opened, three financial institutional – GIC, LIC and
UTI – together held 22% of the shares, while another 27% were held by the
minority shareholders. Within days of the announcement, most minority
shareholders started worrying about what would happen to anyone who did
not sell their entire stake, Philips would need to pick up only another 17% of
the shares to reach a level of 90%. So, if Philips managed to pick up only
90% of the shares, all those who held out would be trapped. They would
agree to buy them after the deadline was over, provided it already had the
90% it needed.



                                     132
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


       This fear reportedly led to many minority shareholders selling out,
even though the FIs had not announced their decision. Finally the FIs did
announce that they too were taking up the offer. A major factor influencing
their decision was that, if enough minority shareholders sold out, the
liquidity of the Philips India stock would be drastically reduced. In that case,
they would find it impossible to sell later because there would not be enough
buyers.

        For a majority of the shareholders, the offer price was not the critical
factor in their decision to sell. In fact, many of them thought the price was
too low and that Philips had timed its offer cleverly. Royal Philips had
strictly followed SEBI guidelines which state that the offer price should not
be less than the average price of the past six months, Philips made sure that
most shareholders would sell out even if it was not the most attractive
option.

CRITICISM OF MULTINATIONALS IN DEVELOPING
COUNTRIES
1. They do not give enough importance to the society in which they operate.
   An example in Union Carbide, which did not show concern for the
   people of Bhopal. In South Africa, HIV medicines are sold at an
   expensive price irrespective of the cost. When people die out with these
   dreaded diseases in some region then MNCs consider that place as a huge
   potential for business prosperity.

2. While many Indian companies, such as the Tatas and Birlas allocate
   funds for charitable works like hospitals, temples and scholarships for
   higher studies, not many MNCs do so, though they generate huge
   revenue.

3. They generate profits when the situation is favourable, but will close their
   business if any risk is anticipated. E.g., many multinationals pulled out of
   South East Asia during the currency crisis, especially in Thailand and
   Indonesia.

4. Active participation is needed in developing countries for infrastructure,
   especially roads, ports, power plants etc. They enjoy but do not
   contribute.
   However, most multinationals in India deal in non-essential products
   such as soaps, shampoos, lotions and other consumer products. Whether

                                      133
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   Uniliver, Johnson & Johnson, Colgate or Ricket & Coleman, their
   contribution is not for the welfare except revenue generation. Hardly any
   multinational is getting involved in developing activities such as
   infrastructure.

5. There is a misconception that MNCs generate employment. However the
   managerial cadre and the sales force personnel do not represent real
   employment in developing countries.

6. Due to aggressive promotion and money power, MNCs can venture into
   small towns in all parts of the country, leading to the decline of small
   industries.

7. One Union Carbide could cost the life of thousand of living beings in
   Bhopal due to sheer negligence and disrespect for the pollution control
   norms. It shows that just for earning money such a multinational never
   had a concern for valuable human lives.

FOREIGN COMPANIES
      A foreign company is one that has been incorporated outside India
and conducts business in India. These companies are required to comply
with the provisions of the Indian Companies Act, 1956 as far as the Indian
operations are concerned. Foreign companies can set up their operations in
India by opening liaison offices, project offices and branch offices. Such
companies have to register themselves with the Registrar of Companies
(ROC), New Delhi within 30 days of setting up a place of business in India.

       The Indian entity may be a subsidiary of the foreign company in India
or it may be a joint venture company with an Indian partner.

As an Indian Company
A foreign company can commence operations in India by incorporating a
company under the provisions of the Indian Companies Act, 1956. Foreign
equity in such Indian companies can be up to 100% depending on the
business plan of the foreign investor, the prevailing investment policies of
the Government and receipt of requisite approvals. For registration as an
Indian company and its incorporation, an application has to be filed with the
Registrar of Companies (ROC). Once a company has been duly registered
and incorporated as in Indian company, it will be subject to the same Indian
laws and regulations that are applicable to other domestic Indian companies.
                                    134
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Joint Venture with an Indian Partner
Foreign companies can set up their operations in Indian by forgoing strategic
alliances with Indian partners. Setting up operations through a joint venture
entails the following advantages for a foreign investor:-

1. The Indian partners have an established distribution/marketing setup.
2. The Indian partner has available financial resources.

3. The established contacts of the Indian partner help to smoothen the
   process of setting up of operations.
Even before independence, India had so many multinationals in the field of
engineering, chemicals, Pharma and consumer goods. Metal Box, Spencer,
Uniliver, Colgate Palmolive, Sandoz, Pfizer, Siemens and Bayer entered and
prospered due to their monopoly in their respective field. Currently
indigenous organizations have proved that they are nowhere inferior to them.
The current decade is the era of Indian MNCs to operate every part of the
world.




                                     135
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



  8.GLOBALISATION- CONCEPT AND PRACTICE


 Soon after the independence the slogan of the business community
 was “export or perish”, after 50 years of independence, we have
 modified it as “globalize or perish”. It is ringing on the ears of
 every corporate board room right from the TATAS, BIRLAS,
 MITTALS, MALLYAS and MAHINDRAS.


Learning value:
On completion of this chapter, reader will have a complete idea on:
   1. Meaning of globalization

   2. Driving forces of globalization

   3. Competitiveness in globalization

   4. India as global player
   5. Role of global managers

   6. Stages of building globalization



Globalization is a way of life. The countries are not far off, business partners
are not away, goods could be manufactured anywhere, and barriers are
broken. The whole world is on the table. What is required for global players
is a “global mindset”. The global village has now shrunk to global table.

WHAT IS MEANT BY GLOBALISATION?
Globalisation is the “strategy of optimizing” the resources available in
various countries and catering to customers throughout the world with
internationally standardised products, at competitive prices. It advocates that
the nation or a company or product involved should be global. A global man
is one who is born in India, studies in the UK, wears Reid & Taylor, shops
in Marks & Spencer, drives a Lexus, acquires a steel plant in Kazakhstan

                                      136
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


and ships his hot rolled coil to China. Thus, he becomes a part of
globalisation process.
       Liberalisation, the rise of developing countries, new technology and
falling trade barriers are changing the economic landscape profoundly, and
contributing to fast track globalisation in many countries. Increasingly we
are living in a global world. In practical terms, this means that a steel
company in the United States will consider other countries as well as the US
when deciding where to locate a new $ 1 billion steel mill. Other examples
are automobile manufacturers such Fort Motors, who entered emerging
markets such as China or India with modified versions of existing cars,
rather than designing a new car from scratch and Mazda, which designs its
sports car in California, produces components in Tokyo, makes prototypes in
Worthington, and finally assembles the car in Mexico in order to market it in
North America at a very low price. China sources its fibre from South
Korea, uses funds from Macauk and a labour force in Beijing and finally
markets its soft toys all over the world.

       The economic landscape is not the same as it was twenty years ago,
nor is the pace of global economic change expected to slacken in the next
twenty years. This will have an effect on everybody from the highest to the
lowest. India’s finance minister will have to view the integration of India’s
economy with the rest of the world as fundamental to the country’s
transformation into an economic superpower, and a junior manager in a firm
will have virtually no chance of making it into the top ranks of the company
unless he or she combines superb qualities and skills in job performance
with extensive international experience.


   Financial                        MAZDA
   Resources
   TOKYO

    Design
   California                                                         North America
                                                          MIATA
                       MEXICO
                      (Assembly)
                                          CAR                         South America
   Prototype                                              BRAND          Europe
  Worthington


   Assembly                               Low Cost
     Units
   TOKYO                            137
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




GLOBALISATION TRENDS
       Globalisation can be defined in several different ways depending on
the level we choose to focus on. The philosophy is “the whole world is my
market; wherever the opportunity arises I will tap it irrespective of location,
standard of economy, ethnic relations and all other parameters.” “Cross
border customers are my neighbours; I will be close to them at any time” – a
slogan of a global manager. “Globalisation is a mindset rather than physical
pharmaceutical giant in India.

       At a worldwide level globalisation refers to the growing economic
interdependence among countries, which is reflected in the increasing cross-
border flow of goods, services, capital and know-how. Clear evidence of this
is offered by the following trends:

       Between 1989 and 200, cross-border trade in goods and services grew
at an average annual rate of 6.4 percent. This is almost twice as fast as the
average annual growth rate of 3.2 percent in the world’s GDP during the
same period.

       From 1980 to 2000 foreign direct investment grew from 4.8 percent to
10 percent of the world’s GDP. Destinations for flow of funds have changed
drastically. It has increased to 18% till the first half of 2007.

      In 1970 cross-border transactions in bonds and equities, as a ratio of
GDP, stood at under 5 percent in the US, Germany and Japan. By 2001, the
respective figures for these countries had soared to 152 percent, 197 percent
and 83 percent respectively. After 2001 every year it witnesses more than
15% in all those three countries.

      At the level of a specific country, globalisation refers to the ability of
the country to expand its trade and aggressively dominate in other parts of
the world; by motivating its entrepreneurs by investing, manufacturing and
marketing.



                                      138
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


       Despite the fact that globalisation is taking place very rapidly, all the
countries are not equally integrated into the global economy still. Some key
indicators to measure the global integrated into the global economy still.
Some key indicators to measure the global integration of any country’s
economy are exports and imports as a ratio of GDP, inward and outward
flow of foreign direct investment and portfolio investment, and flow of
royalty and know-how payments associated with technology transfer. The
growths of China and India with respect to some of these indicators during
the last two decades ensure that they will emerge as major global players.
      At the level of a specific industry globalization refers to the strength
of a company in the face of international competition. The more global an
industry, the greater is the face of international competition. The more global
an industry, the greater is the advantage that a company can derive from
leveraging technology, manufacturing and brand names.

       Specific industries which are on the verge of globalization co-ordinate
their strategic actions across countries. For example, the athletic footwear
industry is dominated by the firms of Nike, Reebok and Adidas. In the same
way Armani, Versace and Vanity Fair are looking at global markets and
strategizing their activities with new vigour. Currently Wal-Mart, Mark &
Spencer and TESCO chains are integrating by cost effective sourcing. The
current aggressiveness of Vodafone to dominate in the communication area
especially in Asia is daring and expensive globalization in non conventional
sector.

SOME LESSONS FROM GLOBAL COMPANIES
      Toyota is a good example of a highly globalised company. At the end
of 1995 one-third of Toyota’s global output came from wholly or partially
owned affiliates located in twenty-five foreign countries spread over North
and South America, Europe and Asia.

       Furthermore, Toyota exported 38 percent of its domestic production
from Japan to foreign markets and engaged in significant intro-firm flows
among its affiliates. Within its South East Asian regional network Toyota
exported diesel engines from Thailand, transmissions from the Philippines,
steering gears from Malaysia and engines from Indonesia. In effect units
were set up by Toyota in the whole of South East Asia, to assemble different
automobile parts, depending on the competency and resources of the
country.

                                      139
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


         Key indicators of the globalisation of a company are international
   dispersion of its sales revenue and asset base, intra-firm trade in intermediate
   and finished goods, and intra-firm flows of technology. These all lead to its
   physical presence, scattered investments, global image, brand promotion and
   building borderless customer patronage.




FREE MARKET
 IDEOLOGY




  RISE OF
DEVELOPING
ECONOMIES
                                                             CROSS BORDER FLOW
                                                                     OF:
TECHNOLOGY                                                         GOODS
 ADVANCES                  GLOBALISATION
                                                                  SERVICES
                                                                INVESTMENTS
                                                                TECHNOLOGY
                                                              HUMAN RESOURCES

NEW BUSINESS
OPPORTUNITY
 DUE TO WTO



  CHEAP
 LABOUR
  FORCE



   HUGE
INVESTMEN
TS IN INFRA                              140
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
STRUCTURE
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




            DRIVING FORCES OF GLOBALISATION




DRIVING FORCES FOR GLOBALISATION
Globalisation occurs because specific managers in specific companies make
decisions that result in increased cross-border flow of capital, goods and
known-how. Managers are increasingly making such decisions because
globalization is becoming more feasible and desirable. The following trends
lie at the core of these developments.

1. An ever-increasing number of countries are embracing the free-market
   ideology, Economic policy makers in industrialized and industrializing
   nations have shifted from a ‘planning’ mentality to a ‘market’ mentality,
   which has been well documented. Since the end of the second world war,
   the rising tide of free-market ideology that started with developed
   economies has swept up South Korea, Taiwan, Hong Kong, Singapore
   and other South East Asian economies, and is now moving into China,
   India, Brazil, parts of Africa and central and eastern including Russia. As
   per BRIC report, four countries will surpass the developed nations in
   terms of growth and prosperity.

2. The economic centre of gravity is shifting from the developed to
   developing countries. Economic liberalization promotes competition,
   efficiency, innovation, new capital investment and faster economic
   growth. Today’s market mechanisms have allowed the developing
   economies to start catching up with the advanced economies, so that
   China, India, South Korea, Taiwan, Indonesia and Thailand are emerging
   as major players in the global market. In fact Taiwan, Hong Kong and
   Singapore, which were amongst the world’s poorest countries in the

                                     141
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   1950s are already listed as advanced economies. Despite short-term
   growth for the region are still valid. Their shares in global markets are
   eating slowly the shares of developed countries especially in plastic,
   rubber,         medical         and          electronic      components.
   Larger economies, notably China are advancing rapidly. Having
   sustained an annual GDP growth rate above 10 percent since 1980, China
   has already transformed itself into the third largest economy in the world
   at least on a purchasing power parity basis and seems poised to overtake
   Japan              in             the               near            future.
   These numbers indicate that the world’s economic centre of gravity is
   shifting. Today, any company that seeks to grow has little choice but to
   go where the growth is. For the vast majority of the world’s top 500
   industrial corporations, such growth can only take place globally as the
   home markets are saturated.
3. Technological advances are constantly improving. The cost of air
   transportation, telecommunications and computers has declined sharply
   over the past two decades. The decline in transportation costs, especially,
   has motivated companies to explore new avenues and new countries. In
   the case of computers and telecommunications, the consistent decline in
   costs, and the recent widespread adoption of technologies such as video
   conferencing and electronic mail have made operations simple, effective
   and fast. By combining these trends with mobile telephones, video
   telephones, the Internet and increasingly powerful computers, one can
   optimize a real-time coordination of globally dispersed activities. This
   will lead to a further increase in the intensity of global competition and
   an even greater search for the best locations for the discrete activities in
   company’s value chain.
4. The main hidden principle of WTO is to generate new business
   opportunities throughout the world. The opening of borders to trade,
   investment and technology transfers not only creates new market
   opportunities for companies but also enables competitors from abroad to
   enter the home markets.

5. The availability of cheap labour has caused many companies to shift their
   manufacturing units to locations where a competent work force is
   available at much lower rates. Increasing competition forces competitors
   to offer better global services, to capture economies of scale, to exploit
   the cost reducing or quality-enhancing potential of optimal locations and

                                     142
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   to tap technological advancements wherever they may occur. This has
   resulted in an accelerated growth of globalization.
6. All the countries are vigorously developing their airports, seaports,
   energy sources and social amenities. Singapore, Malaysia, South Korea
   and India facilitate companies by assuring.


ORGANISATION AND GLOBALISATION
Due to the increased rate of globalization, the global economic landscape
will undoubtedly look very different 20 years from now. Companies will
need to adapt to this changing landscape and those that choose to move first
will have a better chance of turning these changes into competitive
advantage.

      The author regards three fundamental changes in the global economic
landscape as inevitable. These are described below.

Developing countries will essentially dominate the world economy in the
future
Given the commitment of the post-Deng Chinese leadership to economic
reform, China is likely to remain in the most successful economic story. Its
status as a super power is visible in innumerable fields like textiles,
garments, chemicals, silk, soft toys and ceramics. Despite its rapid growth
since 1979, China’s economy has attracted attention, only during the last few
years.

       China is not alone. As the economies of other countries such as India,
Brazil, Mexico and Russia continue to gather momentum, they will
increasingly become major contributors to the creation of new wealth. It is
expected that in 20 years, China’s economy will be larger than that of the
U.S. and India’s will be as big as that of Japan. The regional composition of
the world’s largest corporations will change radically, spreading, over the
developing countries, rather than just being limited to the U.S. and Europe,
where the majority of them are situated today. As a consequence intra-
industry competition will intensify.
       As an example from India, consider the case of the loosely held Tata
Group, a group of companies involved in a number of businesses, such as
steel, cement, engineering, chemicals, tea, construction, IT, hotels and
                                    143
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


trucks. The group’s intention is to triple its sales by 2010 and to achieve this
target it has narrowed down the group’s portfolio and increased control over
the individual companies. It is inevitable that the Tata Group will emerge as
a global power through cross border alliances and strategic moves. In the
field of steel it acquired larger unit, Corus as compared to its own Tata steel.

       Similar strategic moves are taking place in many business houses in
India, like Reliance, the Aditya Birla group and Murugappa. The same trend
is visible in the economies of Indonesia, Brazil, Mexico and Malaysia.
Ranbaxy, a pharmaceutical major has multiplied its operations in all the
continents in the world and aiming at achieving Rs.20, 000 crores by 2008.
LN Mittal group has emerged as a global steel giant, probably one amongst
the top richest three in the world in near future.

CRITERIA FOR GLOBAL ORGANISATIONS
Assuming that the trends described here are inevitable the following issues
need serious consideration by any medium-sized or large company that is
inclined to go global.

1. Size of the market:

How extensive do you want your markets to be, particularly the major
emerging markets for your products and services? How should you build a
necessary global presence?

2. Location advantage:

To what extent do you want to capture the cost reducing and quality
enhancing potential of locations around the world for the execution of
various activities in your company’s value chain? How should you deal with
the problem of suboptimal locations currently in use?

3. Global competitiveness:

How effective do you want to be in exploiting global presence and turning it
into a true global competitive company as opposed to global mediocrity?
How should you eliminate the existing shortcomings and impediments?
4. Management efficiency and mindset:



                                      144
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Is the mindset of your company’s top management sufficiently global? As
the world around you changes and new opportunities open up in various
parts of the world, is your company generally a leader or a laggard in
identifying and exploiting these opportunities? How should you create the
needed global mindset?

5. Vision and long term objective:
Does your company have vision? Is it there with everyone? Whether proper
road-map is in place. Is it only for generation of money or for leadership?

6. Right human resource to handle:
Do you have sufficient HR, especially technical? Or yet to be appointed in
the location of operation?

Once a company has selected the country or countries that will serve as a
launch vehicle for its products, it must determine the appropriate mode of
entry. This issue rests on two fundamental questions:
• To what extent will the company rely on exports versus local production
   in the target market? Here the firm has a range of choices as follows. (i)
   100 percent export of finished goods, (ii) export of components but
   localized assembly, (iii)100 percent local production.
• To what extent will the company exercise ownership and control over the
   activities carried out locally in the target market? Again, it faces a range
   of choices as follows: (i) 0 percent ownership by licensing or franchising,
   (ii0 partial ownership such as joint ventures or collaboration, (iii) 100
   percent ownership as a wholly owned subsidiary.

Local production would be appropriate under the following conditions:

1. Longer local production: The local market is larger than the minimum
   efficient scale of production. The larger the local market, the more local
   production will translate into scale economies while holding down tariff
   and transportation costs. An example is the entry of the Japanese tyre
   group Bridgestone into the US market by acquiring the local production
   base of Firestone instead of exporting tyres from Japan.
2. Cost of logistics and tariffs: Shipping and tariff costs of exporting to the
   target market are so high that they neutralize any cost advantages of
   manufacturing the product at any place other than the target market. This


                                     145
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   is the main reason why cement companies such as Cemex and Lafarge
   Coppe engage heavily in local production in all the countries they enter.
3. Localization and customization of products: The need to customize the
   product to suit local requirements is high. Customization of a product
   requires a deep understanding of local market needs and the ability to
   incorporate this understanding into which products to market and their
   design. Localising production in the target market area significantly
   enhances a firm’s ability to respond to local market needs.
4. Requirement for local production: There is a strong requirement for
   local production by the host country. This is one of the major reasons
   why foreign automobile companies rely heavily on local production in
   markets such as the European Union, China and India. The Hyundai
   Corporation has strengthened its production base in India and
   components are procured in India. Besides the above criteria, the
   strategic approach for successful companies could be on the following
   lines:
   a. Product focus, i.e. Bic pens and Ray ban.
   b. Human Resource focus, i.e. Infosys and Wipro.
   c. Technology focus, i.e. Microsoft and Singapore airlines.
   d. Service focus, i.e. FEDEX and Singapore airlines. They are going in
       their respective business with complete focus.

The Extent of Ownership Control over Locally Performed Activities
Entering the market via an alliance permits a company to share the costs and
risks associated with market entry and allow rapid access to local know-
how. However it also has the potential for various types of conflict. Alliance
based entries are often more appropriate under the following conditions:

1. The company is short of capital. In the 1950s, Xerox Corporation decided
   to enter the European market through an alliance with the United
   Kingdom’s Rank Organisation. Rank’s goodwill and presence in the UK
   benefited the Xerox Corporation immensely.
2. There are large physical, linguistic and cultural differences between the
   host and the home country. The more dissimilar and unfamiliar the target
   market, the greater is the need for a firm to rely on a local partner to
   network and provide local know how. Given a choice the company would
   prefer to obtain these assets through an acquisition. However, in
   unfamiliar markets, a firm’s ability to manage an acquired subsidiary is
   often very limited, and hence the involvement of a local partner becomes
   inevitable.
                                     146
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


     3. A subsidiary would not be able to integrate its operations easily with the
        other multinational operations and hence puts major constraints on a
        firm’s ability in the initial stages of operations.
     4. In a typical joint venture, the two partners pool different but
        complementary know-how. They interact regularly through their core
        operations and understand each other’s working. Both partners learn the
        other’s know-how and often if one firm learns faster than the other it may
        sooner or later seek to dissolve the alliance.
     5. Government regulations stress upon local equity participation.
        Historically, several countries with a very large market potential such as
        China and Brazil have been successful in imposing joint ventures.

     STAGES OF GLOBAL ORGANISATIONS

     Globalization process does not take place instantly. It is a deliberate and
     cautious move for several companies. Nike and Addidas took more than a
     decade to move to other countries from their origin. Apple, HP and Dell are
     fast globalizing their operations due to technology advantages. if they are
     not quick then technology obsolescence will crop up and finally they have to
     lose their current status to their competitors. However, in the normal
     process, a complete globalization has to pass through several stages as
     described in the following table:


Stages          Purpose                   Action                       End Result
            Make the presence                                One market established.
                               Physically export and
            feel – the move                                  Trial and errors are
Stage # 1                      establish     one     strong
            for product or                                   overcome, confidence is
                               contact overseas
            service                                          built
            Study the whole    Find out a right partner. Awareness is created in
            nation and explore Jointly    promote        the one territory. The demand
Stage # 2
            the avenues for    product/s. establish brand level is known for the
            production         in one market.                production.
                               Identify     location      or
            Set up production                                Becoming close to the
                               develop     a      complete
Stage # 3   facility with a                                  customer at a reduced cost
                               network. Reduce the cost
            local or alone                                   and part of the local
                               and service the market.
               Expanding to    Take the products from The whole region is
Stage # 4
             neighboring areas the unit and spread in aware. Loyalty is built.

                                         147
                                                           Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                 through        nearby countries and build      The network members
                production      brand name                      become patrons.
                                Analyse the potential in
            Review all the various regions. Evaluate            Comparing and selection
Stage # 5   pitfalls and gear the partners, investment          of right locations, right
            up to other regions climate     and    Socio-       partners and right markets
                                Cultural background
                                                             Global production
                                 Produce, distribute, invest
            Emerging          as                             Global investments
Stage # 6                        and build corporate image
            global enterprise                                Global brand name
                                 and face competition
                                                             Status of global company



     SPEED OF GLOBAL EXPANSION
     Having begun the journey towards globalization, a company must still
     address the question as to how fast it should expand globally.

           Rapid globalization enables a firm to grow aggressively but it can also
     spread managerial, organizational and financial resources quickly. The
     absence of one of these resources can jeopardize a company’s ability to
     perform.

           Faster global expansion is more appropriate under the following
     condition:

     A. It is easy for competitors to replicate a firm’s recipe for success. This
        possibility is obvious for fast food and retailing companies such as
        Kentucky Fried Chicken and Starbucks. Once the concept has been
        created in a market, competitors can come in and easily replicate it with
        relatively low investment.

     B. The scale of economies is extremely important. Mass production through
        cost reduction leads to rapid success. Firms which come in later may lose
        out in a specific sector. This is the reason why tyre manufacturers such as
        Goodyear, Michelin and Bridgestone, which went global at rapid rate
        now have considerable advantage over other firms such as Pirelli and
        Continental, which were slower in entering the global market.



                                          148
                                                            Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


C. The management is highly capable of managing global operations. For
   example, consider the case of global companies such as Anglo Dutch
   conglomerate Unilever or the Swedish-Swiss company ABB. If these
   companies successfully introduce a new product line in one country, it is
   relatively easy, and also logical, for them to globalize this line rapidly.

THE ROLE OF GLOBAL MANAGERS – CRITERIA FOR
SUCCESS
The management, which may be very successful domestically may not be
able to maintain the same level of performance level in its global operations.
Global operations require the investment of extremely large sums of money
and the managers have to live up to high expectations. To handle business in
a global context and make an organization successful, the managerial team
requires certain unique qualities.

1. They should have a strong information base.

2. They should possess multi-lingual skills.

3. The managerial cadre should be adaptable in its approach.

4. They should understand the strategies of their competitors.

5. Cost management should be meticulous.
6. The persons should be highly innovative and be able to identify new
   avenues.

7. They must be able to understand and implement all the organizational
   policies.

8. The leader must be acceptable, not only to his team, but also to
   institutions like banks, which support the company.

   In short, the managerial team should consist of personnel who are multi-
   lingual, multi-cultural, adaptable, informative, multi-functional, efficient
   and enthusiastic. Only then will a company be able to succeed in its
   global operations.




                                     149
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
STAGES FOR GLOBALIZATIONBusiness- AN Chandran
                            International FOR Dr. R.
                    ENTERPRISE

Stages        Objective           Action Plan          Anticipated risks and           End Result
                                                                  hurdle
               “Physical         (i) Identify one      (i) Local resistance for     (i) Entry into one
             movement of              country.                   bringing.         country- successful.
              goods and         (ii) Focus on one          (ii) Technical and          (ii) Learning
Stage:1     services from      product or services.      commercial barriers.        experience in a
            the country of         (iii) Explore       (iii) Competitive forces      country outside.
              its origin”.       opportunity for              from local and
                                      exports.              imported goods.
             “Strengthen        (i) Build a strong       (i) Local competitors      (i) Strengthen one
             and stabilize        relation in one              pose threats.             country by
             one overseas             market.                (ii) Price war is      overcoming all the
               market.”        (ii) Promote brand               inevitable.                hurdles.
Stage:2                             name with                                         (ii) One or few
                                  customers and                                      importers extend
                                     channels.                                        cooperation and
                                                                                   support for constant
                                                                                       flow of goods.
             “Establish        (i) Narrow down to            (i) Competitors       (i) Local production
            manufacturing        one local partner.           increase their      brings down the cost.
             base in the        (ii) Locate an ideal     production capacity.       (ii) The enterprise
Stage:3      importing                 place for        (ii) Local regulations    becomes close to the
              country”.              production.       on labour, transaction            customers.
                                 (iii) Workout for     and infrastructure may     (iii) Brand loyalty is
                               financially together.    trouble the operation.               built.
              “Spread the         (i) Develop fast       (i) Every part of the       (i) Access in the
            distribution and       network in the              region works            whole region.
                increase            neighbouring                differently.             (ii) Easy to
             production in             countries.           (ii) Rules are not     experiment in other
Stage:4       the region”.             (ii) Setup                uniform.                  regions.
                                 warehouses / sub-       (iii) Demand level is        (iii) Revenue is
                                 dealer network in        not similar in every            increased.
                                      the region.                 country.
            “Move to other             (i) Set up          (i) Cross cultural        (i) Global take off
               regions by           subsidiaries.             complexities.               assured.
             investing and      (ii) Develop strong    (ii) Local adaptability.   (ii) The enterprise has
              producing”.               systems.            (iii) Promotional     a competency in skill
                                  (iii) Induct right              barriers.        and knowledge to go
Stage:5                              people with                                           global.
                                    performance.
                               (iv)Flexible to local
                                    environment.



                                              150
                                                                 Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


              “Global        (i) Organization to          (i) Challenge on      (i) Global investment.
             mindset,              be global.                governance.               (ii) Global
             customer       (ii) Investment to be     (ii) Ethical standards.         competency.
          orientation and           global.            (iii) Concern for the    (iii) Global branding.
              constant       (iii) Technology to               locals.                 (iv)Global
Stage:6    innovation”.            be global.        (iv) Human Resources.           Organization.
                                   (iv) Real
                               optimization of
                               resources takes
                                     place.




                                           151
                                                                Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




   9.WORLD TRADE ORGANISATION (WTO)

 Transparent, free and rule-based trading system
 Provide common institutional framework for conduct of trade relations
 among members
 Facilitate the implementation, administration and operation of
 Multilateral Trade Agreements
 Rules and Procedures Governing Dispute Settlement
 Trade Policy Review Mechanism
 Concern for LDCs and NFIDCs
 Concern on Non-trade issues such as Food Security, environment,
 health, etc.



Learning value:

 Chapter deals with:

   1.   GATT & WTO
   2.   WTO overview
   3.   Developments in WTO
   4.   Environmental issues
   5.   Dilemma of developing countries
   6.   Impact of WTO on Indian Businesses

The roots of the World Trade Organisation (WTO) lie in the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) which was established in 1948 by
23 original founders, India being one of them. The 8th round of talks under
GATT (1986-1994), KNOWN AS THE Uruguay Round, led to the birth of
the WTO on 1st January 1995. In the Uruguay Round, new agreements such
as the General Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS) and the Agreement
on Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) and Trade
Related Investment Management System (TRIMS) were negotiated. All the
three major agreements along with their associate agreements now rest under
the umbrella organization, namely the WTO.

                                   152
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


The WTO, which has its headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland, has a
membership of 150 countries. More than 98% of the global trade is
transacted among the members.

As the only regulatory body of world trade, the WTO’s objective is to ensure
a freer, more transparent and more predictable trading regime in the world.
The WTO is based on a sound legal system and its agreements are ratified
by the parliaments of member countries. No one country controls the WTO;
wherein the top decision makers are the designated ministers of member
countries.

The WTO agreements cover:
  • Goods, e.g., all industrial products, FMCGs etc.
  • Services, e.g., banking, insurance, consultancy etc.
  • Intellectual property, e.g., patents, copyrights, designs and trademarks
     etc.

Two important principles that underline most agreements are:
  a) Most Favoured Nation Clause: No discrimination among member
     countries.
  b) National Treatment Clause: Equal treatment to imported and domestic
     products.

   These agreements broadly address three concerns:

Same rule for all: It restricts governments or organisations from ‘distorting’
normal trade by way of subsidising, dumping or discriminatory licensing
policies. Government policies are framed to eliminate distorting effects. The
WTO allows exports to be relieved of all indirect taxes such as excise, sales
tax etc. since they have a cascading effect on the cost of the product.

Administration of agreements: It has detailed guidelines as to how the
agreements should be administered at a national level. These apply to anti-
dumping proceedings, standardization, sanitary and phytosanitary measures,
or settlement of disputes.

Fair deal to businesses: It ensures rights for the business community e.g.,
the right to information, the right to present evidence etc. For example, the
Agreement on Customs Valuation allows the importer to justify the value of


                                     153
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


imported goods or requires the customs to give written reasons for rejecting
the value disclosed.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN GATT AND THE WTO

   •   GATT signifies two aspects – GATT as a body and GATT as a
       formulator of agreements.
   •   GATT – the body no longer exists; it was merged with the WTO on
       1st Jan, 1995.
   •   GATT – the agreement rests in the WTO along with other
       agreements.
   •   The WTO now includes GATT, GATS, TRIPS and the Dispute
       Settlement body. GATT covered trade in goods only, whereas the
       WTO covers trade in goods, services, and intellectual property rights
       as well.
   •   Throughout its duration, from 1948 to 1994, GATT was ad hoc and
       provisional; WTO and its agreements are permanent.
   •   GATT has contracting parties, whereas the WTO has member nations.
   •   The WTO is an inherently superior system as compared to GATT, as
       it has a sound legal basis; even its agreements are ratified in the
       members parliament.
   •   WTO has two significant functions, which GATT did not have. These
       are:
       (i) Trade Policy Review Mechanism – a periodic process to examine
       a country’s trade policies and to note changes and (ii) an in-built
       mechanism to settle disputes, which cannot be overlooked by anyone.
   •   The WTO is more democratic in character. If decisions cannot be
       reached by consensus, the matter is decided by putting it to vote; each
       WTO member having one vote. In the case of GATT, it was
       controlled by a power lobby.

WTO: THE ORGANISATION

The World Trade Organisation (WTO) monitors global trade. Its decisions
are absolute and every member must abide by its rulings. Extra powers given
to the WTO are supposed to ensure that disputes are settled in harmony with
international trade principles. It is located in Geneva, Switzerland. At its
head is the Director General, who serves a term of four years. Its staff is
made up of 500 persons of varying nationalities.

                                     154
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



The Decision Making Process

The Ministerial Conference, comprising designated ministers of the member
nations is the supreme decision making forum. The ministers meet at least
once in two years. The Ministerial Conference can take decisions on ‘all
matters’ under any of the multilateral agreements.

Second level

The day-to-day work is handled by the General Council, which also acts as
The Dispute Settlement Body and The Trade Policy Review Body. The
General Council acts on behalf of the Ministerial Conference and meets
under these three different terms of reference.

Third level

Three more councils, each handling a different broad area of trade, report to
the General Council: the Council for Trade in Goods, the Council of
Services and the Council for TRIPS.

Fourth level

Each of the higher-level councils has subsidiary bodies. The Council for
Trade in Goods, for example, has 11 committees dealing with specific
subjects such as agriculture, subsidies etc.

Four Principles

The WTO has 145 members and makes decisions on a basis of unanimity.
No country has a power of veto.

        The four principles which members abide by are:
   1.   Extending trade concessions equally to all WTO members.
   2.   Aiming for a freer global trade with lower tariffs everywhere.
   3.   Making trade more predictable through the use of rules.
   4.   Bringing about more competition by cutting subsidies.




                                      155
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


The definition of ‘trade’ has steadily expanded and now includes intellectual
protection, investment, trade in services and agriculture as well as trade in
manufactured goods.
In its short life the WTO has already become the focus of intense
controversy. Heralded by the richer nations as the ticket to world prosperity,
to many others it’s looking more and more like another Trojan horse in the
citadel of international development.
‘Freeing up’ trade- GATT’s Uruguay Round concluded at the end of 1993,
basically ‘freed up’ world trade. This meant doing away with barriers which
had prevented developing countries from exporting their goods to the richer
countries of the North. It also opened up all countries to foreign penetration
in completely new areas, such as service industries and intellectual property
rights. This offered richer nations and multinational corporations a golden
opportunity to take over new sectors in countries that were previously able
to protect their own smaller industries.

The WTO has the task of policing this new world order, and is beginning to
make its presence felt. Fairer trading provisions, which guarantee protection
to producers in the developing world, have already come under fire. The
USA, on behalf of the American MNC Chiquita, has challenged
arrangements whereby bananas from the Windward Islands are marketed in
Europe under the protection of the European Union’s Lome Treaty.
Dismantling such arrangements would bring Chiquita greater profits, but
would prove disastrous to the farmers and the economies of the Eastern
Caribbean. The WTO has upheld the US complaint.

It was perceived that the WTO is controlled by the industrialized nations,
just as they control the World Bank and the IMF. At the conference held in
Singapore in December 1996, delegates from developing countries
complained at being excluded from ‘behind the scenes’ discussions. The
charge was accepted by Renato Ruggier, who was the WTO’s Director
General at that time. While the WTO claims that its rules-based system is a
means of protecting smaller nations from the larger trading powers, many of
those smaller nations have complained of being bullied by the very
countries, which set the rules in the first place.
International resistance - While some developing countries, particularly
Latin America and East Asia, may be able to compete in the world trade, the
world’s least developed countries are predicted to lose out. Even in richer
countries, the expansion of MNCs has a negative impact on smaller

                                     156
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


businesses, labour standards and basic freedom. A growing international
movement is forming in protest against the WTO and its expanding ‘free
trade’ agenda. Multilateral negotiations, known as ‘rounds’, held in Seattle
and Doha. Qatar made the representation of developing countries stronger
than before especially regarding issues related to agricultural subsidies and
labour legislation. In many ways the advanced countries appear to have
double standards. This approach has been challenged and the influence of
the advanced countries in the WTO is gradually diminishing.

Developments
•   The agenda of the WTO, the implementation of its agreements, and the
    much-praised dispute settlement system all serve to advance interests of
    developed countries, sidelining those of the developing countries.

•   The Least Developed Countries (LCDs) are marginalized in the world
    trade system, and their products continue to face tariff escalations.

•   Rules uniformly applied to WTO members have brought about
    inequalities because each member has different economic circumstances.

   Compared to GATT, the WTO is much more powerful because of its
institutional foundation and its dispute settlement system. Countries that do
not abide by its trade rules are taken to court.

   Historically, GATT enforced phased-in tariff reductions worldwide. Until
the Uruguay Round, which ended in 1994, the trade negotiations focused on
nonagricultural goods, mainly because the U.S. wanted to protect its farm
sector. Over the years, as the corporate interests of the developed countries
expanded, they also lobbied for more issues to be incorporated into the
WTO.

   Changes in rules come about mainly through multilateral negotiations or
“rounds”. Each round offers a package approach to trade negotiations, in
which many issues are negotiated together and trade-offs between different
issues are made. Between the rounds, negotiations on single issues take
place.

    One of the commonly used yardsticks to measure the success of the WTO
is the volume of world trade. The results seem excellent in this respect, with
world trade up by 25% in the last four years. But the benefits of increased
trade are not widely shared. For example, the LDCs represent 20% of the
                                     157
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


world’s population, but they generate a mere 0.03% of the trade flows.
Developing countries have little power within the WTO framework for the
following reasons:

1. Although developing countries make up three-fourths of the WTO
   membership and can in theory influence the agenda and outcome of trade
   negotiations, they have never used this to their advantage. Most
   developing country economies are in one way or another dependent on
   the U.S., the EU, or Japan in terms of imports, exports, aid, security, etc.
   Any obstruction of a consensus at the WTO might threaten the overall
   well-being and security of dissenting developing nations.

2. Mutual give and take policies with tariff reduction exist between
   countries. This type of bartering benefits the large and diversified
   economies, because they can get more by giving more. For the most part,
   negotiations and trade-offs take place among the developed countries and
   some of the richer or larger developing countries.

3. Developing countries have discovered that seeking recourse in the
   dispute settlement system is costly and requires a level of legal expertise
   that they may not have.

   Nelson Mandela, commenting on the negotiations said: “The developing
countries were not able to ensure that the rules accommodated their realities.
It was mainly the preoccupations and problems of the advance industrial
economies that shaped the agreement.” He added that rules applied
uniformly are not necessarily fair because of the different circumstances of
members.

   “Trade and labour standards” is a highly sensitive issue. To date, a clause
of labour standards has not been included in the policies framed by the
WTO. The issue has been raised by some industrial nations, who feel that
the subject should be studied by the WTO as a first step towards bringing the
matter of “core labour standards” into the organizations. There is a great
divide between most of the industrialized nations and the developing
countries on the subject. Developing countries like India are most very vocal
on labour issues. They feel that developed nations try to annihilate the
comparative advantage they have of cheaper labour, and argue that the
International Labour Organisation (ILO) is the right platform to discuss the
issue and not the WTO.


                                     158
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Environmental Issues
The WTO has no specific agreement on environment; it has a “Trade &
Environment Committee’, which plays a limited role. There is increasing
pressure by environmentalists on the WTO to take proactive measures to
protect the environment. The US banned import of tuna fish from Mexico in
accordance with its Marine Mammals Law, which has the mandate like
dolphins. At that time Mexico appealed to GATT whose verdict went
against the USA.
      Trade experts fear that free trade will be undermined in the guise of
protecting the environment, if such issues find a place and are emphasized in
the WTO. There are more than 200 Multilateral Environmental Agreements
(MEAs) on various aspects of the environment. Twenty of these include
provisions that can affect trade e.g., the Montreal Protocol for Protection of
the Ozone Layer, the Basel Convention on Trade or Transportation of
Hazardous Goods. The WTO is off the view that the most effective way of
dealing with environmental issues is through international agreements.

Dilemma of Developing Countries-
Exports from developing countries continue to face significant market access
impediments. Recent UN studies confirm that tariff peaks and tariff
escalation still hamper developing country exports and their attempts to
export new products such as beef, cigarettes, clothing, footwear and wooden
articles.

To gain access to new markets in developing countries, the developed
counties are acting in the interests of transnational corporations. They have
rapidly imposed new agreements in telecommunications, information
technology, and financial services. The Millennium Round talks paved the
way for further economic liberalization in both the traditional and new
sectors, which is contrary to the interests of developing countries.

For example, Washington has interpreted WTO agreements to protect key
industries. For example the U.S. has selectively opened its markets in the
field of textiles and clothing, but this liberalisation has proved of little
benefit to the developing nations. Similarly, the U.S. has misused the
measures designed to safeguard domestic industries from a sudden increase
in imports. It has also introduced its own Rules of Origins, rules used to
identify where textiles or clothing products come from, changing the

                                     159
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


conditions of competition and adding to the restrictions against the low-cost
textile exports from other countries.
New rules regarding information on plants will have both agricultural and
medical implications. The Trade Related Intellectual Property Rights
Agreement (TRIPS) fiercely protects the rights of corporations but easily
allows the shared knowledge of indigenous communities to be patented by
others. When fully implemented, developing countries will lose billions of
dollars to the richer countries, as MNCs will continue to control virtually all
the patents of developing countries.

The agreement between the U.S. and China, stipulated the terms on which
China would join the WTO. This is the most significant deal between the
two countries since diplomatic relations were established more than two
decades ago. The Clinton administration hoped that this would pave the way
for Congress to now vote permanent Normal Trade Relations (NTR) (also
known as Most Favored nation), thereby giving China the same trading
privileges now enjoyed without an annual review, by almost every other
U.S. trading partner. The only other nations denied NTR status by the U.S.
are: Afghanistan, Cambodia, Cuba, Laos, North Korea, an Yugoslavia,
China has enjoyed NTR since 1980, but only by an annual vote of Congress.
Only if the U.S. Congress approves permanent NTR for China can the
November agreement be implement. WTO membership for China and
permanent NTR status will clear the way for Taiwan to join the WTO.


IMPACT OF WTO AGREEMENTS ON INDIAN BUSINESSES: AT A
                    GLANCE

AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                    IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                       INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                           POLICY/ LAWS
General             Prohibits: actions     India started          Import on all
Agreement on        of Govt/               reforms during         manufacturers,
Tariffs & Trade     organizations that     GATT negotiation       traders and service
(GATT)              distort normal         period (86-94)         providers
                    trade;                  • Import duties       • Competition to
                    discrimination             down form              intensify as more
                    between member             peak 300% to           imported
                    nations and                15%. Already           products finds
                    discrimination             complies WTO           easy access.
                                     160
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF         IMPACT ON            BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT            INDIAN               IMPLICATIONS
                                POLICY/ LAWS
           between domestic         binding on         Around half of
           and lawfully             most tariff        the products
           imported foreign         lines.             reserved for
           goods. Set            • Committed to        Small Industries
           guidelines for           remove all         already in OGL.
           implementation of        QRs                Removal of QRs
           agreements and           (Quantitative      set to further
           settlement of            Restrictions)      accelerate import
           disputes.                by 2003* i.e.      of all products.
                                    import           • WTO led
                                    restrictions/      external
                                    licenses to go.    liberalisation
                                 • Committed to        speedily done;
                                    create freer       Half baked
                                    trade regime as    internal
                                    per GATT           liberalization to
                                    agreement;         hurt domestic
                                    already            industries’
                                    amended host       competitiveness
                                    of legislation,    severely;
                                    more to follow     industry suffers
                                                       from poor
                                *India’s plan of       infrastructure,
                                phasing our QRs        absence of VAT,
                                (chiefly               obsolete labour
                                restrictions in        laws, lack of
                                import through         coordination
                                negative lists) is     among ministries
                                contested by US.       and non-
                                Recently WTO           availability of
                                panel                  economical,
                                recommendations        quality services-
                                have gone against      Banking,
                                India, i.e. it could   Insurance, inland
                                mean early phase       transport etc.
                                out, even before
                                2003. It will affect
                          161
                                            Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF     IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT        INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                            POLICY/ LAWS
                            consumer goods,
                            agricultural,
                            textiles and
                            petroleum
                            products etc.
                                                   - Availability of
                                                   economical, quality
                                                   services-Banking,
                                                   insurances, in land
                                                   transport etc.
                                                   • Ignorance among
                                                       SMEs on WTO
                                                       shockingly high;
                                                       set to attract
                                                       injuries from
                                                       sudden spurt in
                                                       unfair imports.
                                                   • Reassessment of
                                                       comparative
                                                       advantage
                                                       required. Many
                                                       will have to
                                                       change
                                                       businesses; rigid
                                                       legislation and
                                                       rules would be a
                                                       big stumbling
                                                       block in the way.
                                                   • Only those
                                                       businesses,
                                                       whether
                                                       producing for
                                                       domestic market
                                                       or for foreign
                                                       markets, who
                                                       have

                      162
                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                    IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                       INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                           POLICY/ LAWS
                                                                      international
                                                                      vision will
                                                                      survive and grow
                                                                      (in most of the
                                                                      product
                                                                      categories)
1.a.
Agreement on        Requires countries     India has amended
                                                           • India has
Implementation      to follow the          its law in        amended its law
of Article VII of   agreement for          conformity with   in conformity
GATT (94)           valuation of           agreement by      with agreement
(valuation of       imports to check       notification 26   by notification 26
Goods)              arbitrary decisions    (NT) 24.04.95;    (NT) 24.05.95;
                    Customs                Customs Act.      Customs Act.
                                                           • Importers and
                                                             exporters to
                                                             benefit from
                                                             more transparent
                                                             regime. While
                                                             rejecting the
                                                             value given by
                                                             importer,
                                                             Customs will
                                                             have to give
                                                             reasons in
                                                             writing. Clear
                                                             guidelines
                                                             provided for
                                                             computing value.
1.b.                To check arbitrary (India does not use • Indian companies
Agreement on        ways of PSI         service of PSI       exporting to the
Preshipment         companies in        companies)           countries using
Inspection          valuation of goods                       PSI companies
(PSI)               (Around 30                               (such as SGS,
                    countries use them)                      Bureau Veritas
                                                             etc) to benefit

                                     163
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                  IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                     INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                         POLICY/ LAWS
                                                              form improved
                                                              systems.
                                                              Arbitrary actions
                                                              of PSI companies
                                                              in computing
                                                              Export value to
                                                              be checked.
1.c. Agreement      To check misuse of Bureau of Indian     • Indian exporters
on Technical        mandatory product Standards (BIS) is      of electrical
Barriers to Trade   standards by       following the          machinery,
(TBT)               countries.         agreement (most        consumer
                    Recommends         Indian Standards       articles,
                    countries to base  are base on Intl.      pharmaceuticals,
                    their standards    Standards)             detergents,
                    around Intl.       BIS is also to serve   automobiles,
                    Standards.         as an enquiry point    household
                    Requires countries                        electric/
                    to establish                              electronic
                    ‘enquiry points                           gargets,
                                                              insecticides,
                                                              hazardous
                                                              chemicals,
                                                              fertilizers, toys
                                                              etc to benefit
                                                              from the
                                                              agreement as
                                                              import of these
                                                              products are
                                                              subject to
                                                              Mandatory
                                                              product
                                                              Standards.
                                                            • Enquiry points to
                                                              help in accessing
                                                              the information
                                                            • Threat: The

                                   164
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                   INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                       POLICY/ LAWS
                                                            agreement also
                                                            covers PPM
                                                            (Process and
                                                            Production
                                                            Methods). That
                                                            could be used for
                                                            discrimination
                                                            against Indian
                                                            exports for
                                                            agri/food/pharma
                                                            products.
1.d. Agreement    • Same as above      • Most of India’s • Companies
on Sanitary and     except that          standards are at   exporting
Phytosanitary       MFN rule-            par with the       fresh/processed
Measures (SPM)      countries can        Intl. standards    fruit/ vegetables/
                    deny import          (Implementatio     juices, meant
                    from certain         n to improve)      dairy products
                    region/ country                         etc should
                    due to fear of                          understand the
                    spread of                               Mandatory
                    pests/disease                           Standards. They
                                                            should follow the
                                                            developments
                                                            taking place at
                                                            various Intl.
                                                            Organisations as
                                                            FAO, Codex
                                                            Alimanatrius etc.
                                                            which have
                                                            serious
                                                            implications for
                                                            their businesses
                                                            in agri, process
                                                            food, and dairy
                                                            products.
1.e. Agreement    • To ensure          • System           • Improved system
on Import
                                 165
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                   INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                       POLICY/ LAWS
Licensing          transparency in       progressively            within India and
Procedures         issuance of           improved,                in other countries
                   import licenses       though still far         will have a
                   and also              from being               positive tall out
                   prescribes time       perfect. Delays          for small
                   limits for            & misuse of              businesses that
                   licenses to be        discretionary            are usually at the
                   issued                powers                   receiving end of
                                         frequent. EDI            restrictive policy
                                         being put in             environment.
                                         place.
1.f. Rules      • Allows export        • Foreign Trade        • Exporting
applicable on     product to be          Policy provides        companies have
Exports.          relieved to            schemes to             right to demand
                  indirect taxes         neutralize the         from Govt. such
                  (e.g. Excise)          incidence of           schemes that
                  prohibits direct       indirect taxes*        neutralize the
                  tax benefits           e.g. DEPB*,            incidence of
                  (e.g. Income           Adv. License,          indirect taxes on
                  Tax waivers on         Spl. Imp.              the export
                  export earnings        License etc &          product. In
                • Also allows            Draw Back.             absence of such
                  countries to         • Govt provides          schemes Indian
                  levy duties on         IT waver# on           products will be
                  exports for            export earnings        at serious
                  controlling it, if     (80HHC of IT           disadvantage
                  situation so           Act)                   internationally as
                  demands, but         • e.g. Customs           all countries have
                  prohibits other        duty on import         such schemes in
                  restrictions           contents used          place.
                  (except in few         in export            • The IT waiver on
                  cases)                 product, excise,       export earnings is
                                         sales tax/VAT          temporary
                                         etc. Few               measure;
                                         countries have       • According to an
                                         launched               EXIM Bank

                                 166
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                 IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                    INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                        POLICY/ LAWS
                                          complaint         study, Indian
                                          terming it as     exports suffer
                                          ‘subsidy’         from cost
                                          #prohibited as    disability of
                                          per GATT          16.3% over their
                                                            overseas
                                                            counterparts due
                                                            to absence of
                                                            VAT, inadequate
                                                            financing and
                                                            infrastructure
                                                            bottlenecks.
1.g. Agreement     • Prohibits export • India may have • Business will
on Subsidies and     subsidies;           scrap IT waiver   have to
Countervailing       allows               on export         understand what
Measures (SCM)       permissible          earnings by       is permissible
                     subsidies            2003. Foreign     and what is not.
                   • Requires             Trade Policy is   E.g. subsidies
                     developing           following the     given by Govts.
                     countries to         GATT              to small
                     phase them out       directives        businesses are
                     by 2003 (with        cautiously in     usually
                     some                 introducing the   permissible (non-
                     exceptions) and      Duty              actionable) or
                     to freeze their      Exemptions        given for R&D or
                     level and            schemes and is    for adaptation to
                     coverage during      suitably          new environment
                     transitional         modifying         requirements.
                     period.              them to make    • Even during
                                          them WTO          transition period
                                          compatible        (upto 2003).
                                                            Importing
                                      Also see : Indian     countervail
                                      Imports Regime to     ‘subsidies’ by
                                      be further            increasing duties.
                                      liberalized         • Export subsidies

                                  167
                                                    Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF               IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                  INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                      POLICY/ LAWS
                                                          on import
                                                          sensitive
                                                          products
                                                          (textiles, leather
                                                          products etc.) can
                                                          be maintained by
                                                          importing
                                                          countries.
1.h. Agreement   • Allows            • The required     • If undue spurt in
on Safeguard       countries to take   system is put in   imports causing
Measures           action against      place in           ‘injury’ to
                   undue import        Commerce           domestic
                   surge injurious     Ministry           manufacturers,
                   to domestic                            measures can be
                   manufacturers                          taken during the
                   during the                             transition period
                   transition period                      (initially for 4
                                                          years extendable
                                                          upto 10 years.
                                                          From Jan’95)
                                                          through raising
                                                          duties (beyond
                                                          bound rates) or
                                                          by imposing
                                                          QRs; for new as
                                                          well as for
                                                          development of
                                                          existing
                                                          industries.
1.i. Agreement   • Allow countries • Directorate of     • Most important
on Antidumping     to take             Anti-Dumping       for domestic
Measures (ADP)     measures            established in     manufactures. A
                   against             Commerce           number of
                   imported goods      Ministry           sectors have been
                   benefiting from • Anti-dumping         hurt by ‘unfair
                   ‘unfair trade       duties already     import’

                                168
                                                  Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                    IMPACT ON         BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                       INDIAN            IMPLICATIONS
                                           POLICY/ LAWS
                       practices’.           been imposed    • Actions have
                                             in more than 30   been taken
                                             cases,            against such
                                             provisional       import in many
                                             duties on few     cases. Mostly
                                           • Also see : Is     large units have
                                             you industry      been operating in
                                             hurt by excess    these sectors. No
                                             import            action so far for
                                                               those sectors
                                                               hurt, in which
                                                               small businesses
                                                               are predominant
                                                               because of their
                                                               ignorance
1.j Trade Related   • Currently            • Direct impact   • Currently 5 types
Investment            prohibits              on Govt’s         of TRIMS
Measures              countries form         FOREX &           (investment
(TRIMS)               imposing 5             Industrial        conditions) are
                      types of               policies.         prohibited out of
                      investment             Foreign           24 already
                      conditions on          investment        identified. Issue
                      investors              permissions.      comes up again
                                                               in year 2000
                                                             • Allows export
                                                               performance
                                                               requirement,
                                                               majority stakes
                                                               for locals etc.
1.k. Market         • Different            • Reduced duties • Massive increase
Access                negotiations are       on most tariff    in competition
Negotiations          taking place           lines             for domestic
                      with developed         successively to   manufacturers
                      countries and          comply with     • The reduction in
                      developing             the agreement     duties in
                      countries by         • Peak rate of      developed

                                     169
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                    IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                       INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                           POLICY/ LAWS
                    keeping low              duty is down             countries not to
                    tariff rate in           from 300% to             have much
                    mind.                    15% for goods            impact, these
                                             and services             have already
                                             except luxury            been very low.
                                             items.                   The actual
                                                                      benefit for India
                                                                      will come from
                                                                      removal of QRs
                                                                      in these countries
(a) Agreement on • Multi Fibre             • (Impact on           •   Opportunity:
Textiles &         Agreements and             Textiles/               Important
Clothing           other QRs                  Garments                development for
                   usually imposed            Export)                 textiles/
                   by developed            Also see : Impact          Garments
                   countries to be         of act on Indian           Exports from
                   phased out by           textile                    India. Quotas
                   year 2005 (in 4                                    will be phased
                   phases)                                            out in 2005.
                                                                  •   Threat: the level
                                                                      of competition
                                                                      will be manifold.
                                                                  •   Countries
                                                                      imposing quotas
                                                                      authorized to
                                                                      take safeguard
                                                                      measures.
                                                                      Punitive actions
                                                                      already taken
                                                                      against India in
                                                                      few cases
(b) Agreement on • The subsidies     • No obligation              •   Removal of
Agriculture        on agriculture to   of India to                    distortions like
                   be removed and      reduce subsidy                 high subsidies
                   converted in        given to                       and QRs will
                   ‘tariffs’; 36%      farmers (AMS                   expand market

                                     170
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF            IMPACT ON           BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT               INDIAN              IMPLICATIONS
                                   POLICY/ LAWS
                  reduction of       calculations        for Indian
                  tariffs by         reveal it is        Agriculture
                  developed, 24%     taxed than          products. E.g.
                  by developing.     subsidized).        closed markets as
                  Min. market        Sets high tariffs   Japan will have
                  access in closed   100% on             to procure rice
                  markets            primary             min 3% of home
                                     products, 150%      consumption
                                     on processed      • QRs imposed by
                                     food. 300% on       India on variety
                                     edible oils.        of agri products
                                   • No                  could be phased
                                     commitment          out by 2003 or
                                     regarding           before (through
                                     market access       some bilateral
                                     9being under        agreements with
                                     balance of          Austr4alia. NZ,
                                     payment             EU etc. It has
                                     Cover, though       already been
                                     disputed)           started
                                                         competition to
                                                         hot up.
1.1 Agreement   • MFN &            • (India is not a   • Govts. are large
on Govt.          National           party to the        buyers (often
Procurement       Treatment on       agreement)          purchasing 10-
                  the purchase of                        15% of their
                  goods as per                           GNP) India is not
                  their                                  a party to the
                  commitments                            agreement, hence
                                                         GOI could
                                                         exercise its right
                                                         to purchase from
                                                         domestic
                                                         manufacturers
                                                         even at higher
                                                         cost. This right is
                                                         to come under
                                171
                                                  Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                   IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                      INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                          POLICY/ LAWS
                                                                    severe pressure
                                                                    in coming
                                                                    negotiations. If
                                                                    gone against, it
                                                                    will have
                                                                    ser8ious fall out
                                                                    on almost all
                                                                    domestic
                                                                    manufacturers
                                                                    supplying to
                                                                    Govt./PSUS.
                                                                 • Indian exporters
                                                                    of goods and
                                                                    services can
                                                                    export to the
                                                                    countries that
                                                                    signed this
                                                                    agreement. Only
                                                                    the US disallows.
                                                                 *Chiefly of Textiles,
                                                                 footwear, computer
                                                                 hardware &
                                                                 Software, telecom
                                                                 equipment, electrical
                                                                 machinery, Pharma
                                                                 products, agri-food
                                                                 products,
                                                                 vehicles/spares,
                                                                 paper/stationery etc.
1. Agreement on   • Recommends            • Restructuring        • Currently the
State Trading       that STEs               of STEs like            agreement has
Enterprises         conduct their           MMTC, STC               limited scope. In
                    activities              etc.                    the coming
                    commercially            Commercializa           negotiations it is
                  • WTO to be               tion on of their        likely that
                    informed of             activities              monopoly/canali
                                                                    zing agency
                                    172
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                  IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                     INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                         POLICY/ LAWS
                    their activities                     status like that of
                                                         Public
                                                         P0etroleum
                                                         companies will
                                                         be broken.
2. General        • All services   • Foreign Trade • Services
Agreement on        come under        Policy             constitute 45% of
Trade in Services   GATS (12          incorporates       GDP, State
(GATT)              sectors).         services           monopolies in all
                    Require           chapter for the    the major sectors
                    countries to      first time; same   (banking,
                    ensure MFN        status as to       insurance,
                    principle,        merchandise        transport-rail
                    transparency,  • Committed to        etc).
                    mutual            open 10 sectors    Liberalization in
                    recognition of • Partial             the sectors will
                    qualifications    liberalization in  be extremely
                    etc.              Banking sector,    beneficial to
                  • Lists             Telecom sector     Indian companies
                    liberalization    (TRAI              in competing
                    commitments of    established in     domestically as
                    countries         line of SEBI),     well as
                  • Further           insurance (IRA     internationally.
                    negotiation by    established) etc • Huge potential
                    2005           Also see : what is    for export of
                                   service, India the    services as
                                   world service         accountancy,
                                   provider              date processing
                                                         & software
                                                         mgmt,
                                                         consultancy,
                                                         legal services,
                                                         feasibility
                                                         studies.
                                                         See also ; what is
                                                         service, India the
                                                         world service
                                   173
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                   INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                       POLICY/ LAWS
                                                                  provider
                                                              •   E-commerce and
                                                                  internet will fuel
                                                                  export of services
                                                                  further
3. Trade Related   • Provide          • Immediate             •   Impact will be on
Intellectual         protection to      change                    all businesses
Property Rights      IPRS as Patents,   required in           •   Main source of
(TRIPS)              copyrights,        Patents Act               technology for
                     Trade marks,       (1970), Trade             SMEs reverse
                     Ind..Designs,      and                       engineering will
                     Layout designs     Merchandise               be difficult, with
                     for ICs,           Marks Act                 the stricter IPR
                     Geographical       (1958),                   Regime and in
                     indications and    Designs Act               new regime
                     Undisclosed        (1957) etc.               ‘ignorance of law
                     information      • TRIPS                     will be no
                   • National and       agreement will            excuse’ (the
                     MFN Treatment      also trigger              burden of proof
                   • Developing         changes in                is on infringe.)
                     countries to       certain               •   The Transfer of
                     implement          provisions of             Technology cases
                     within 5 years.    Contract Act              may increase
                                        (1872), Law of            however on
                                        Torts,                    commercial
                                        Companies                 terms as
                                        Act(1961), IT             counterfeit trade
                                        Act (1961),               will have
                                        MRTP Act                  effective
                                        (1969) etc.               deterrent
                                      • New Acts to be            (amended laws)
                                        enacted.              •   India’s own
                                                                  R&D institutions
                                                                  could reap
                                                                  benefits within
                                                                  India as well as

                                 174
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF             IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                    POLICY/ LAWS
                                                               abroad.
                                                           •   Also see : New
                                                               Patent Laws. The
                                                               IPR Regime.
8. Patents      • Patents to be   • Patents Act            •   Immediate
                  given for         amended                    impact on
                  process as well   (1999). Now                Pharma, Agri-
                  as products       allows product             chemicals and
                • Life 20 years     patents in                 food; patented
                • Compulsory        pharmaceutical             products cannot
                  licensing on      s, agri-                   be manufactured
                  case to case      chemicals and              without license
                  basis             food. Patent           •   India has
                • Microorganisms    life increased             transition period
                  to be patented    to years 20,               granted till 1st Jan
                  and protection    micro-                     2005. (with the
                  of plant          organisms                  condition that
                  varieties by      made                       applicant would
                  patents or sui    patentable.                be given
                  generic system • New law for                 Exclusive
                  or both           plant varieties            Marketing Rights
                                    being drafted              (EMR) for 5
                                                               years form 1st Jan
                                                               1995 till
                                                               grant/rejection of
                                                               patent, whichever
                                                               ends earlier)
b. Copyrights   • Definition 7    • The new        •           Would benefit
                  scope             amendment bill             Indian Software,
                  broadened. Now    contains                   Music and Film
                  includes          changes as per             Industry besides
                  Software,         TRIPS                      authors and
                  Sound             agreement                  publishing
                  recordings,                                  companies
                  films etc.
                • Min. protection

                              175
                                                Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF               IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                  INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                      POLICY/ LAWS
                    50 years (25
                    years for
                    photographic
                    works)
c. Trademarks     • Covers Trade as • New             • Impact on
                    well as Service    amendment bill   counterfeit
                    Marks-             to cover TRIPS   Trade-Care
                    Protection for 7   promulgation     should be
                    years (renewals                     exercised in
                    indefinitely)                       choosing names
                                                        of the companies
                                                        of products e.g.
                                                        other “Brand
                                                        names cannot be
                                                        sued as
                                                        Company’s name
                                                        (name as Maruti,
                                                        Reliance, Usha
                                                        etc used by other
                                                        businesses will
                                                        be contested )
d. Industrial     • Covers new and • New              • Implications for
Design & Layout     original           amendment bill   Indian Designers
                    Industrial         contains         as well as
                    designs &          changes as per   Garment/
                    Layout             agreement;       Textiles Industry
                                       includes         using protected
                                       service marks    designs and
                                                        manufactures of
                                                        Ics.
e. Undisclosed    • Does not         • Impact on      • Employees,
information &       demand it to be    know-how         consultants,
Trade Secrets       intellectual       agreements,      licensees, sub-
                    property but       Contract Act     contractors, etc.
                    stipulates their   etc.             restrained form
                    protection                          divulging

                                176
                                                  Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF                   IMPACT ON              BUSINESS
           AGREEMENT                      INDIAN                 IMPLICATIONS
                                          POLICY/ LAWS
                      through                                 confidential
                      contractual                             information
                      obligations                           • Provisions on
                                                              Undisclosed Test
                                                              Data, submission
                                                              of which is
                                                              required by
                                                              Govts before
                                                              grant of
                                                              permission (e.g.
                                                              in pharma
                                                              products)
                                                              stipulates
                                                              adequate
                                                              protection.
f. Geographical    • Prohibits            • No specific law • Major impact on
indications          countries to           on                Agri-food
                     permit                 Geographical      products.
                     trademarks             indication yet;   Benefits from
                     containing             Being drafted     improved system
                     misleading           • Taking up       • Our not having
                     information on         membership of     law on GIs has
                     geographical           Paris             led to
                     origin of goods        Convention and    controversies on
                                            other important   Basmati,
                                            Treaties as       Darjeeling Tea,
                                            Lisbon Treaty     Alphanso
                                            for GIs.          Mangoes etc.


CONTRIBUTIONS OF THE WTO
It is a tribute to human civilization that sovereign nations have agreed to
subordinate their freedom (to act) and have agreed to work within the
framework of rules to promote global trade. The Uruguay Round of
negotiations resulted in formation of a rule based system, which is expected
to lead to smooth and orderly international trade.

                                    177
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


•   The WTO and its agreements have an impact on every economic activity,
    be it agriculture, trading, service or manufacturing.

•   World markets are opening up due to lowering of tariffs and dismantling
    of other restrictions in developed and developing countries to benefit
    from their comparative advantages.

•   Domestic markets will be increasingly threatened because of lowering of
    tariffs leading to freer entry of foreign goods and because of foreign
    companies’ establishing local manufacturing bases.

•   Whereas the developing countries will have greater opportunities in
    sectors in which they have cost bases comparative advantages e.g.,
    textiles, agriculture etc., the developed countries benefit due to the
    opening of the service sector and tightening of Intellectual Property
    Regime.

•   Export markets will become more difficult because of competition
    among developing countries with similar comparative advantages.

•   Products from developing countries will face higher quality standards in
    developed markets particularly in the areas where they have comparative
    cost advantage.

•   Every company, whether serving the domestic or international market,
    will have to undertake an internal exercise to identify factors affecting its
    international competitiveness in terms of cost as well as quality. It will
    need to study whether it can remain competitive once the product can be
    imported freely or tariffs are further lowered or both.

•   The WTO regime will be of greater benefit to those countries that show
    ability and skill in the ongoing dialogue. The governments that are in
    constant touch with their industries and affected groups will be able to
    clearly determine how and what should be negotiated at multilateral
    negotiations to the best of their advantage.

•   International trade is becoming increasingly trade, deregulation and
    privatization of internal economy have now been strengthened and
    legalized under the WTO. Countries have no option but to follow this
    direction. Countries that have understood this have moved swiftly in fine-
    tuning their domestic and international trade policies, to create a winning


                                       178
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


environment for industry and business. Those who are still debating the
issue or do not understand it clearly will be left behind.




                                179
                                                  Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   10. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS

 Human brain is a powerful creator, executor and controller
 of every function in the world, if optimum utilized. By
 converting its efforts one becomes world renowned, others
 remain    common.       Invent,  Create    and    beyond,
 Commercialise.



Learning value:

On going through this chapter reader will understand:

   1.   The concept and importance of IPR
   2.   Classification of IPR
   3.   Methods of protecting IPR
   4.   Procedure to file IPR

What would have happened if Stevenson had not invented steam engine,
Edison had not invented gramophone, Graham Bell had not invented
telephone, Albert & Wilbert had not invented airplane and finally Einstein
had not propounded three laws of gravitational force?
Every product/s we use or enjoy is an outcome of known and unknown
intellectuals. They continue to invent for the society and future.
“It is intangible, sometimes perishable, infringeable and intrudable property
of mind could be encashed by anyone if it is not legally protected”.

Intellectual property refers to ideas, discoveries and inventions that can be
commercially exploited. At one time, intellectual property was manipulated
by smart business. They could take ideas from innovations and inventors and
make fortune. Currently, such inventions can be owned, protected and
marketed by the inventor himself. Such legal protection is scheduled as a
part of the WTO agreement. In some sectors like the pharmaceutical,
chemical, engineering and manufacturing sectors ‘Intellectual Property
Rights’ has become common parlance.


                                    180
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   The term Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) is often shortened further to
Intellectual Property (IP). Intellectual property is a series of legal rights that
afford, in most cases temporary protection for different types of inventions,
designs, brand names or original creations. The legal rights given are the
rights to prevent unauthorized use of the invention, design, brand name or
creation for the period of protection. The right given can be an absolute
monopoly right or simply a right to prevent reproduction.
   The legal rights in intellectual property can be transferred between
parties, licensed to other parties and can even mortgage or used as security.
IP only comes into existence after an application has been made and/or
registration has been obtained. Alternatively, it may come into existence
automatically upon creation of an original design or other work or upon the
creation of a reputed brand name, with most forms of intellectual property,
the temporary protection afford expires after a finite term. However, this is
not true for all forms protection, some of which can last forever. The various
forms of intellectual property are given briefly below.

Components of IPR in current context

Patents: New and inventive technical innovations can enjoy an absolute
monopoly for twenty years.

Supplementary Protection Certificate: This is an extension of up to five
years on the absolute monopoly given by a patent, where the invention
consists of a medicinal product for which approval by the relevant authority
has yet to be given.

Trademarks: The owner of a trademark has an absolute monopoly for ten
years. The legal protection of any brand name has the title of trademark and
it is shown on any product as TM.

Designs: This is an absolute monopoly for twenty-five years, given for a
new design of a manufactured article.

Unregistered Design Right: This prevents reproduction of an original
design, which lasts for a maximum of fifteen years.

Copyright: Copyright prevents reproduction of an original literary, artistic,
musical or dramatic work. It is valid for a period of seventy years after the
death of the author.
                                       181
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



 Confidentiality and Trade Secrets: This prevents misuse of confidential or
 secret information.

 Plant Variety Right: This relates to a new horticultural genus or species. It
 gives the monopoly rights of the new variety of plant to the scientist.




                                   Trade
                                   Marks
Patents                                                             Designs



                                 Intellectual
                                  Property




 Copy                                                               Plant Variety
                                                                       Rights
 Rights
                                    Trade
                                    Secrets

 Intellectual property rights legally prevent unauthorized use of ideas and
 designs. Thus if a patent exists for a product, other persons are prevented
 from making or selling that product. If a brand name is registered as a
 trademark then using the same or similar brand name amounts to
 infringement of that registration and is illegal.
    Thus intellectual property rights have obvious commercial benefits as
 they enable a company to maintain a monopoly in a particular area of
 business to the exclusion of competitors.


                                     182
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   However, it may become necessary or advisable to join forces with other
parties to exploit the protected area of business. This is permitted under
intellectual property rights if the other parties, the licenses, pay a lump sum
or royalties to the primary party. Thus if there is a big market, which a
single party cannot, or does not wish to exploit alone, one or more licenses
can be appointed who can also take advantage of the market and the main
party will receive royalties on their income.
   Alternatively, it may be desirable for the party to simply sell the
intellectual property rights at an appropriate price. This is possible since the
rights can be assigned (ownership transferred) to other parties. Suppose a
party develops a product in an area in which it has no commercial interest,
then the party may consider selling that invention to another party who
operates in that area, as an alternative to licensing the party to exploit the
invention.
   Intellectual property rights can thus be used to avoid competition or to
derive an income through licensing of selling the rights.
   The existence of intellectual property rights also provides a useful tool
for monitoring the activities of competitors. Published patent application,
registered designs and applications for registration of a trademark can
indicate the technical and commercial direction a competitor is taking, or
thinking of taking. For example, published patent applications contain
technical information relating to inventions and can indicate the area of
technology that is currently of interest to the applicant or proprietor. An
application for a new trademark may indicate a new line of business or
change of corporate identity for a company.
   All this material is available for public inspection and can be a valuable
source of commercial information as it is unavailable elsewhere.




THE PROCEDURE TO OBTAIN IPR PROTECTION

Intellectual property rights can be obtained in one of two ways, by
application or by automatic derivation. Where an application procedure is
involved, it usually follows the steps set out in the following sequence:
1. File application
2. Search carried out to ascertain originality
3. Examination carried out

                                      183
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


4. Objections raised/No objections raised
5. Dealing with objections
6. Grant/Registration

It is a simple six step procedure that anyone can follow.

Where an application procedure is involved, the protection ultimately
obtained is usually an absolute monopoly, patents registered designs and
registered trademarks fall into this category.
   Intellectual property rights arise automatically if an original work, such
as a drawing, design document, or prototype is created. These rights are
usually limited to preventing any form of reproduction of misinterpretation.
Copyrights, unregistered design rights (including semiconductor topography
rights) and unregistered trademarks fall into this category.

CONCEPT AND MEANING OF IPR

Patents

Patent protection can be obtained for many types of technical innovations.
For example, a new piece of apparatus or machinery to carry out a particular
operation, a method or process for performing an operation or making a
product or the use of a piece of equipment or product for a particular
purpose.
   In order to determine if patent protection can be obtained, it is necessary
to consider whether the technical innovation is both novel and innovative.
Both these terms have a legal definition. It is usually relatively
straightforward to determine if a technical innovation is novel or not. The
determination is based upon whether the innovation is different from that
which existed previously. It is more difficult to assess if an innovation is
inventive. This determination is based upon whether it will be obvious,
given what existed previously, to arrive at the invention. Unfortunately this
is a legal definition, which cannot be applied without knowledge of the
concerned body of case law on the subject.
    Patent protection is not available for every type of innovation. It is
excluded in the case of innovations that are artistic and not technical
innovations, and innovations that are not applicable in industry. Once again
these are strict legal definitions and a thorough knowledge of case law is
needed to accurately assess whether an invention is an excluded invention.
Patents are obtained via an application procedure that involves a search and
                                     184
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


an examination. Once any objections raised are dealt with, the application
can proceed to grant the patent. Once the patent has been granted, it remains
in force for 20 years, subject to payment of annual renewal fees to keep the
patent in force, and a granted patent provides a patentee with an absolute
legal monopoly which can be used to prevent unauthorized use of the
patented invention.
    Generally speaking, patents are territorial and it is necessary to obtain a
patent in each country in which protection is required. A patent in a
particular country does, however enable a patentee to prevent importation
into that country of an infringing product from wherever that importation
takes place. Therefore, it is common for patentees to protect their inventions
in the countries which constitute either their major markets, or which contain
their major competitors’ manufacturing sites. Whilst patents are essentially
territorial, there are a number of international conventions that make the
process of applying for international patent protection more simple and cost
effective than filing a national patent application in all the countries of
interest. The most important these international conventions are the
European patent Convention and the patent Cooperation Treaty.

Trademarks

Traditionally trademarks were any word or logo that serves to designate the
origin of goods or services. In recent years the law has come to recognize
that there are many other ways of designating the origin of goods or
services, e.g. advertising jingles, smells and the shape of goods or
packaging. Nowadays, therefore, these are also recognized as trademarks.
       For registration, a trademark must be capable of distinguishing the
goods or services of one party from those of other parties. Furthermore,
trademarks that consist of anything other than words or logos must be
capable of being represented graphically. Any sign that does not satisfy
these requirements cannot be registered as a trademark. Signs which are
inherently non – distinctive or descriptive or which consist of words or
symbols, things that traders in the same area of business may wish
legitimately to use to identify the origin of their gods may be excluded from
registration. For example surnames and geographical locations would not be
allowed as trademarks.
       In some countries, for example the United Kingdom, rights can be
obtained on a trademark simply by using a symbol or sign extensively
enough, so that it is identified with the product. In these circumstances, the
person or company using the trademark has legal resources through an
                                     185
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


action for ‘Passing Off or Unfair Competition’, against other parties who are
attempting to misrepresent themselves by using a similar trademark.
        Most countries however provide a statutory registration procedure for
registration of trademarks and it is always advisable to register a trademark,
where possible, since infringement of a registered trademark is a strict
liability offence and is not dependent upon proving a reputation or any
misrepresentation. Furthermore, in certain circumstances, infringement of a
registered trademark can be a criminal offence and is punished accordingly.
        A registered trademark is obtained by filling an application with the
Trade Marks Registry, which is then searched and examined. Once any
objections raised are overcome, the mark is advertised in order to allow any
interested party to object to the registration should they have grounds to do
so. Subject to no objection being raised, the mark is then entered into the
Register of trademarks. Once registered, a trademark can usually be kept in
force for as long as is required. Subject only to the payment of renewal fees.

Copyright

Copyright, as its name suggests, is a right to prevent copying of an original
artistic, musical, literary or dramatic work. Because copyright is only a right
to prevent copying of the original work, there is no absolute legal monopoly
and copyright cannot therefore be used to prevent the independent
production of an identical or similar work without any reference to the
original work.
        From 1st January 1997, the copyright lasts for a period of 70 Years
from the death of the original author of the work.
        Copyright is given on a national basis in the country in which the
original work created but may be enforceable internationally by virtue of the
Berne Convention or universal copyright convention.
        In some countries, copyright can be used to prevent unauthorized
application of the original work to a manufactured article and thus similar
protection to that given by Unregistered Design right in the United Kingdom
is afforded. However, a notable exception to this is the United States of
America.

Confidentiality and Trade Secrets

There are laws that protect confidentiality of information. Companies or
individuals may wish to keep commercial or technical information
confidential. If this information is made public in breach of that confidence
                                     186
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


then it is possible to bring an action or breach of confidence against the
offending party. For example, an employee has an obligation to keep all
information, which is given to him or her by the employer, confidential.
       If confidential information is disclosed to a third party out of choice
then the obligation of confidentiality also passes to the third party. It should
be ensured that the third party is aware of the fact that they are expected to
treat the information as confidential and they agree to do so. In particle
terms this agreement should be given in writing in case there is ever any
dispute as to what was agreed.
       There is an exception to the protection of confidential information in
circumstances where the dissemination of the information is deemed to be in
the public interest. This is allowed, notwithstanding any obligation of
confidence.
            The current decade has witnessed innumerable inventions in
India in the field of biotechnology, agro chemicals, telecommunications,
pharmaceuticals, electronics, agriculture, food processing and natural herbal
medicines. Biocon, Bharat Serum, Ranbaxy, Gharda Chemicals, Cadila,
United Phosphorous and Glen Mark afford to employ separate invention
team and protect another team with legal expertise.

PATENT COOPERATION TREATY

The original Patent cooperation Treaty was signed in Washington in 1970
but it has been modified many times since. The convention only came into
force on 1st June 1978. This convention provides a mechanism whereby
protection can be ultimately obtained in all. Or selected countries that have
signed the treaty. This is carried out through a procedure which involves the
filling of a single application that is subjected to a single international search
and an international preliminary examination. At the end of the international
preliminary examination an examination report is produced which sets out
an opinion on the patentability of the invention described in the application.
After completion of the examination report, the applicant has the option of
proceeding with the application, or allowing the application to lapse, if the
examination report is dismissive of possibilities for protection. If the
applicant wishes to proceed further, the application is split into separate
national applications in the countries of interest and may be subjected to a
further national search and examination. The national offices function
independently and may place as much weight as they wish on the opinion of
the international authority, which was set out in the international preliminary
examination report. Attitudes vary widely from country to country as to the
                                       187
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


weight attached to the contents of the international preliminary examination
report. For Example, an applicant in the United Kingdom, Should know that
the Japanese and united States patent offices will often ignore the contents
on the report and will carry out a full search and examination, just as if the
application had not previously been searched or examined by the
international authorities.

ROLE OF PATENT AND TRADEMARK ATTORNEYS
Patent and trademark attorneys are generally speaking, professional advisors
who are qualified by an examination in the Law of Intellectual Property.
However, it is important to note that the term, ‘Patent and Trademark
Attorney’ may also be used by a solicitor, who may not have experience, or
relevant qualifications, in intellectual property rights.
       Knowledgeable patent and trademark attorneys are qualified to give
advice on infringement or exploitation of intellectual property rights and can
also carry out searches to ascertain the patent, design and trade mark
activities of competitors or any other person or company.
       They are fully experienced in the procedures for obtaining forms of
intellectual property rights and can offer advice on the forms available for
any particular innovation or idea, and the procedures necessary to obtain the
best protection.
       Innovators and inventors in any field are required to consult a
knowledgeable attorney prior to filing their applications. Following strict
procedures and also keeping documentary evidence at all stages will enable
the applicant to protect his intellectual property.
                                                   Internationally  renowned
research organizations like Genentech, BioRad, Hoffkins, E-Merck and
Pfizer are retaining attorneys permanently as a part of management team in
the organization for this purpose.




                                     188
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                   11. TRADE BARRIERS

 Diamond will not glitter without going through
 tedious process;
 Vessels cannot sail all the time without resistance;
 And even on fertile soils the plant has to out grow the
 harmful weeds to give yields.


Learning Value:

After completing the chapter one will understand:

   1.   The importance of barriers
   2.   Types of trade barriers
   3.   Impact of barriers in international business
   4.   Benefits to home and host countries
   5.   Relevance of trade barriers in the current decade



A trade barrier is defined as “any hurdle, impediment or road block that
hampers the smooth flow of goods, services and payments from one
destination to another”. They arise from the rules and regulations governing
trade either from home country or host country or intermediary. Trade
barriers are man-made obstacles to the free movement of goods between
different countries, and impose artificial restrictions on trading activities
between countries. Despite the fact that all international organisations such
as GATT, WTO and UNCTAD advocate reduction or elimination of
barriers, they still continue in different forms.
Free and fair international trade is an ideal situation as it is beneficial to all
countries. However, different countries impose various types of barriers. The
contribution of GATT in removing such trade barriers has not been
satisfactory as even now, both developed and developing countries, present
such trade barriers. Such barriers are usually imposed by the country that

                                       189
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


imports the goods, but they adversely affect the volumes of both imports and
exports. The volume of exports is reduced due to such trade restrictions and
the tariff results in an escalation in prices.

OBJECTIVES OF TRADE BARRIERS

   1. To protect domestic industries from foreign goods.
   2. To promote new industries and research and development activities by
      providing a home market for domestic industries.
   3. To maintain favourable balance of payment, by restricting imports
      from foreign countries.
   4. To conserve foreign exchange reserves of the country by restricting
      imports from foreign countries.
   5. To protect the national economy from dumping by other countries
      with surplus production.
   6. To mobilize additional revenue by imposing heavy duties on imports.
      This also restricts conspicuous consumption within the country.
   7. To counteract trade barriers imposed by other countries.
   8. To encourage domestic production in the domestic market and thereby
      make the country strong and self-sufficient.

Since trade barriers are harmful for the growth of free trade, efforts were
made to reduce such trade barriers, and international organisations initiated
collective efforts of all countries involved in trade. WTO ministerial
conferences held in concern or Doha Qatar or Hong Kong are focused on
breaking barriers of trading in different forms.

TYPES OF TRADE BARRIERS

Broadly, Trade barriers are classified as tariff barriers and non-tariff barriers.
They are now an inseparable part of global business and the location of a
business operation and pricing decisions are determined by tariffs. A country
may use both tariff and non-tariff barriers order to restrict the entry of
foreign goods.




                                       190
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Tariff Barriers

A tariff barrier is a levy collected on goods when they enter a domestic tariff
area (DTA) through customs. Tariff refers to the duties imposed on
internationally traded commodities when they cross national boundaries and
may be in the form of heavy taxes or custom duties (operated through a price
mechanism) on imports, so as to discourage their entry into the home
country for marketing purposes.
Tariffs enhance the price of the imported goods, thereby restricting their
sales as well as their import. Governments impose tariffs only on imports
and not on exports as they are interested in export promotion. Only a few
exported items of any country are taxed.
The aim of a tariff is thus to raise the prices of imported goods in domestic
markets, reduce their demand and thereby discourage their imports.
Tariff barriers are major determinant factor to build or get away from the
business. In India, over the past ten years the prime import duty has been
reduced to 15% from 100% on many consumer durables and electrical items.

Classification of Tariffs

A) On the basis of origin and destination of the goods crossing national
   boundaries

1. Export duty: An export duty is a tax levied by the country of origin, on a
   commodity designated for use in other countries. The majority of
   finished goods do not attract export duty. Such duties are normally
   imposed on the primary products in order to conserve them for domestic
   industries. In India, export duty is levied on oilseeds, coffee and onions.
2. Import duty: An import duty is a tax imposed on a commodity originating
   in another country by the country for which the product is designated.
   The purpose of heavy import duties is to earn revenue, to make imports
   costly and to provide protection to domestic industries. Countries impose
   heavy import duties to restrict imports and thereby remove the deficit in
   the balance of trade and balance of payment.
3. Transit duty: A transit duty is a tax imposed on a commodity when it
   crosses the national frontier between the originating country and the
   country which it is cosigned to. African and Latin American nations
   impose such transit duties at any point of time. Sri Lanka is another
   country enjoying such benefits from Indian companies.


                                     191
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



B) On the basis of quantification of tariffs

1. Specific duty: A specific duty is a flat sum collected on physical unit of
   the commodity imported. Here, the rate of the duty is fixed and is
   collected on each unit imported. For example, Rs. 800 on each TV set or
   washing machine or Rs. 3000 per metric ton on cold rolled steel coils.
2. Ad-valorem duty: This duty is imposed at a fixed percentage on the value
   of a commodity imported. Here the value of the commodity on the
   invoice is taken as the base for calculation of the duty, e.g., 3% ad-
   valorem duty on the C&F value of the goods imported. In the ad-valorem
   duty, the percentage of the duty is decided but the actual amount of the
   duty changes as per the FOB value of a product.
3. Compound duty: A tariff is referred to as compound duty when the
   commodity is subject to both specific and ad-valorem duty.

C) On the basis of the purpose they serve

1. Revenue tariff: It aims at collecting substantial revenue for the
   government, but does not really obstruct the flow of imported goods.
   Here, the duty is imposed on items of mass consumption, but the rate of
   duty is low.
2. Protective tariff: Protective tariff aims at giving protection to home
   industries by restricting or eliminating competition. Protective tariffs are
   usually high so as to reduce imports. However, if the protective duties are
   too high, it may hurt consumers, as imports will stop, leading to
   shortages in the consumer market.
3. Anti-dumping duty: Dumping is the commercial practice of selling goods
   in foreign markets at a price below their normal cost or even below their
   marginal cost so as to capture foreign markets. Many countries follow
   dumping practices. It is international practice which has a “do or die”
   instinct associated with the company’s policy. It is harmful to less
   developed countries where the cost of production is high.
4. Countervailing duty: Such duties are similar to anti-dumping duties but
   are not so severe. Countervailing duties are imposed to nullify the
   benefits offered, through cash assistance or subsidies, by the foreign
   country to its manufacturers. The rate of such duty will be proportional to
   the extent of cash assistance or subsidy granted.



                                     192
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


D) On the basis of trade relations

1. Single column tariff: Under this system tariff rates are fixed for various
   commodities and the same rates are made applicable to imports from all
   other countries.
2. Double column tariff: Under this system two rates of duty are fixed on all
   or some commodities. The lower rate is made applicable to a friendly
   country or to a country with which the importing country has a bilateral
   trade agreement. The higher rate is applicable to all other countries.
3. Triple column tariff: Here, three different rates of duties are fixed. They
   are general tariff, international tariff and preferential tariff. The first two
   categories have minimum variance but the preferential tariff is
   substantially lower than the general tariff and is applicable to friendly
   countries where there is a bilateral relationship.

Mutual understanding of products and tariffs is concluded through a cartel. It
is also called preferential tariff.

Benefits of tariff to the home country

1. Imports from abroad are discourage or even eliminated to a considerable
   extent.
2. Protection is given to the home industries and manufacturing sector. This
   facilitates an increase in domestic production.
3. Consumption of foreign goods is reduced to a minimum and the
   attraction for imported goods is brought down.
4. Tariff brings in substantial revenue to the government. In addition it also
   creates employment opportunities within the country, by promoting
   domestic industries.
5. Tariffs aim to reduce the deficit in the balance of trade and balance of
   payment of a country.




                                       193
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




                                 Trade Barriers




    Tariff
                                                                         Non-Tariff
   Barriers
                                                                          Barriers




On the basis    On the basis      On the basis      On the basis              1. Quota
  of origin          of            of purpose       of relations            2. Licensing
 1. Export      Quantification     1. Revenue        1. Single              3. Consular
    Duty           1. Specific         tariff         column                 formalities
                      Duty
 2. Import      2. Ad-Valorem     2. Protective      2. Double             4. Trade blocs
    Duty              Duty             tariff         column                 5. Customs
 3. Transit      3. Compound          3. Anti        3. Triple              Regulations
    Duty              Duty          Dumping           column             6. State Trading
                                  4. Counter-                                 7. Forex
                                      veiling                               Regulations
                                                                        8. Health & Safety
                                                                         9. Miscellaneous


      Non -tariff Barriers

      Along with tariff barriers, non-tariff barriers are imposed by countries in
      order to restrict free trade at a global level. Non-tariff barriers are
      quantitative restrictions as they directly restrict the entry of foreign goods
      over and above a specific limit fixed by the government. Other forms of
      non-tariff barriers are licenses, exchange control, complicated
      documentations, technical certifications etc. Non-tariff barriers are useful for
      reducing the total quantity of goods that are imported from abroad, but they
      do not affect the price of imported goods. However, the net effects of tariffs
      and non-tariff barriers are more or less the same. The impact of non-tariff
      barriers is more direct and faster.

                                              194
                                                                Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



Types of non-tariff barriers

1. Quota system: The quota system is an important non-tariff barrier. Under
   this system, the quantity of a commodity permitted to be imported from
   various countries during a given period is fixed in advance. Such quotas
   are usually administered by requiring importers to have licenses to import
   a particular commodity. Imports are not allowed over and above a
   specific limit. This suggests that tariffs restrict imports indirectly while
   quotas restrict imports directly. Developing countries may use quotas in
   place of tariffs. The quota system acts as a barrier to international trade as
   it restricts the flow of goods in an artificial manner. There are different
   types of quota and a country can introduce any type of quota as per the
   need of the situation.
   The types of quotas are:
   Tariff quota: A tariff quota combines the features of the tariff as well as
   the quantity. Here, the imports of a commodity up to a specified volume
   are allowed duty free or at a special low rate of duty. Imports in excess of
   this limit are subject to a higher rate of duty.
   Unilateral quota: In a unilateral quota system, a country fixes its own
   ceiling on the import of a particular item.
   Bilateral quota: In a bilateral quota, the quantity to be imported is
   decided in advance, but it is the result of negotiations between the
   country importing the goods and the country exporting them.
   Mixing quota: Under a mixing quota, the producers are obliged to utilise
   a certain percentage of domestic raw material in manufacturing the
   finished products.
2. Import Licensing: Import licensing is an alternative to the quota system.
   It is useful for restricting the total quantity to be imported. In this system,
   imports are allowed under license. Importers have to approach the
   licensing authorities for permission to import certain commodities.
   Foreign exchange for imports is provided against the license. Such
   import licenses are the practice in many countries. This method is used to
   control the quantity of imports. Import licensing may be used separately
   or along with the quota system.
3. Consular formalities: Some importing countries impose strict rules
   regarding the consular documents necessary to import goods. Such
   documents include import certificate, certificates of origin and certified
   consular invoices. Penalties are imposed for non-compliance of such
   documentation formalities. The purpose of consular formalities to restrict
                                       195
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


     imports to some extent and prevent free imports of commodities that are
     not necessary.
4.   Preferential treatment through trading blocs: Some countries form
     regional groups and offer special concessions and preference to member
     countries. As a result trade is developed among the member countries and
     allows advantages to all member countries. On the other hand, it can
     cause a considerable loss to non member countries, as a trading bloc acts
     as a trade barrier. Even trade agreements and joint commissions are used
     as trade barriers as they restrict free movement of goods at the
     international level.
5.   Customs regulations: Customs regulations and administrative regulations
     are very complicated in many countries. There are a number of
     ‘Commodities Act,’ pertaining to the movement of drugs, medicines,
     minerals, bullion etc. Restrictions under such acts are useful to curtail
     imports. Tax administration also acts as barrier to free marketing
     amongst countries.
6.   State trading: State trading refers to import-export activities conducted by
     the government or a government agency. Stat trading is useful to restrict
     imports, as the final decision is taken by the government. Such state
     trading acts as a barrier, restricting the freedom of private parties.
7.   Foreign exchange regulations: Countries impose various restrictions on
     the use f the foreign exchange earned through exports. Such restrictions
     have the following objectives.
     a) To restrict the demand for foreign exchange and to use the foreign
         exchange reserves in the best possible manner.
     b) To check the flow of capital.
     c) To maintain the value of exchange rates. Under such regulations the
         foreign exchange earned should be surrendered to the government.
         The government provides foreign exchange to the businessmen as per
         priorities that are fixed periodically.
8.   Health and safety measures: Many countries have specific rules regarding
     health and safety regulations, which are mainly applicable to raw
     materials and food items. Imports are not allowed if the regulations are
     not followed properly.
9.   Miscellaneous non-tariff barriers: Such barriers include prior import
     duties such as deposits, embargoes and import restrictions due to
     environmental regulations, provision of subsidies to domestic industry,
     canalization of imports of some commodities and technical and
     administrative regulations. All such measures act as non-tariff barriers as
     they restrict the free flow of goods and services between countries.
                                       196
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




     12. INTERNATIONAL INSTITUTIONS AND
       ROLE IN INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS

   Learning Value:

      1. World bank
      2. IDA & IFC
      3. IMF
      4. ADB
      5. IMO
      6. ILO
   An international organisation must be established by a treaty (constituent
   instrument) providing it with legal recognition. International organizations
   so established are subjects of international law, capable of entering into
   agreements among themselves or with states.
      Purpose of International organizations

   International Organizations exist to increase international relations, promote
   education, health care, economic development, environmental protection,
   human rights, and conflict resolution throughout a region.



     GLOBAL                                         REGIONAL
  ORGANISATIONS                                   ORGANISATIONS

     1. United Nations                              1. European Union
      2. World Trade                               2. Asia Co-operation
       Organization                                       Dialogue
      3. International                             3. Common wealth of
Hydrographic Organization                           Independent States
 4. International Seabed                              4. African Union
          Authority                                       5. APEC
  5. Organisation for the                      6. Organization of American
 Prohibition of Chemical                                    States
          Weapons
                                        197
                                                          Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




198
                  Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


World Bank
The World Bank (the Bank), a part of the World Bank Group (WBG), was
formally established on the 27 December 1945 following the ratification of
the Bretton Woods agreement. The concept was originally conceived in July
1944 at the United Nations Monetary and Financial Conference in July 1944.

The World Bank Group (WBG) is a family of five international
organizations responsible for providing finance and advice to countries for
the purposes of economic development and eliminating poverty. The Bank
came into formal existence on 27 December 1945 following international
ratification of the Bretton Woods agreements, which emerged from the
United Nations Monetary and Financial Conference (1 July – 22 July 1944).



The World Bank Group consists of

   •   the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development
       (IBRD), established in 1945, which provides debt financing on the
       basis of sovereign guarantees;
   •   the International Finance Corporation (IFC), established in 1956,
       which provides various forms of financing without sovereign
       guarantees, primarily to the private sector;
   •   the International Development Association (IDA), established in
       1960, which provides concessional financing (interest-free loans or
       grants), usually with sovereign guarantees;
   •   the Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (MIGA),
       established in 1988, which provides insurance against certain
       types of risk, including political risk, primarily to the private
       sector; and,
   •   the International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes
       (ICSID), established in 1966, which works with governments to
       reduce investment risk.




                                   199
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


The Bank’s mission is to aid developing countries and their inhabitants
achieve the MDGs (Millennium Development Goals), through the
alleviation of poverty, by developing an environment for investment, jobs
and sustainable growth, thus promoting economical growth and through
investment in and empowerment of the poor to enable them to participate in
development. The World Bank sees the four key factors necessary for
economic growth and the creation of a business environment as:

   1. Capacity Building – Strengthening governments and educating
      government officials
   2. Infrastructure creation – implementation of legal and judicial systems
      for the encouragement of business, the protection of individual and
      property rights and the honoring of contracts
   3. Development of Financial Systems – the establishment of strong
      systems capable of supporting endeavors from micro credit to the
      financing of larger corporate ventures
   4. Combating corruption – Eradicating corruption to ensure optimal
      effect of actions


Areas of operation


   •   Agriculture & Rural Development
   •   Conflict & Development
   •   Development Operations & Activities
   •   Economic Policy
   •   Education
   •   Energy
   •   Environment
   •   Financial Sector
   •   Gender
   •   Governance
   •   Health, Nutrition & Population
   •   Industry
   •   Information & Communication Technologies
   •   Information, Computing & Telecommunications
   •   International Economics & Trade
   •   Labor & Social Protections
   •   Law & Justice

                                    200
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   •   Macroeconomic & Economic Growth
   •   Mining
   •   Poverty Reduction
   •   Poverty
   •   Private Sector
   •   Public Sector Governance
   •   Rural Development
   •   Social Development
   •   Social Protection
   •   Trade
   •   Transport
   •   Urban Development
   •   Water Resources
   •   Water Supply & Sanitation


                              WORLD
                              BANK



               IDA                                        IFC


                                   IFC
Purpose of IFC is to:

   •   Promote open and competitive markets in developing countries
   •   Support companies and other private sector partners
   •   Generate productive jobs and deliver basic services
   •   Create opportunity for people to escape poverty and improve their
       lives

   IFC promotes sustainable private sector development in developing
   countries. Our particular focus is to promote economic development by
   encouraging the growth of productive enterprise and efficient capital
   markets in our member countries.

                                   201
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


IFC invests in enterprises majority-owned by the private sector throughout
most developing countries in the world. Developing regions include:

   •   Sub-Saharan Africa
   •   East Asia & the Pacific
   •   South Asia
   •   Europe & Central Asia
   •   Latin America & the Caribbean
   •   Middle East & North Africa

The International Finance Corporation has 179 member countries. To join
IFC, a country must:

   •   Be a member of the World Bank (IBRD);
   •   Have signed IFC's Articles of Agreement; and
   •   Have deposited with the World Bank Group's Corporate Secretariat an
       Instrument of Acceptance of IFC's Articles of Agreement.

Products and Services of IFC

IFC is a dynamic organization, constantly adjusting to the evolving needs of
our clients in emerging markets. We are no longer defined predominantly by
our role in providing project finance to companies in developing countries.
We have also:

   •   Developed innovative financial products;
   •   Broadened our capacity to provide advisory services; and
   •   Deepened our corporate governance, environmental and social
       expertise.

Financial Products
   •   Loans for IFC's Account
   •   Syndicated Loans
   •   Equity Finance
   •   Quasi-Equity Finance
   •   Equity & Debt Funds
   •   Structured Finance
   •   Intermediary Services
   •   Risk Management Products
                                    202
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   • Local Currency Financing
   • Municipal Finance
   • Trade Finance



                                    IDA
The International Development Asso- ciation (IDA) is the part of the World
Bank that helps the world’s poorest countries. Established in 1960, IDA
aims to reduce poverty by providing interest-free loans and grants for
programs that boost economic growth, reduce inequalities and improve
people’s living conditions.

IDA complements the World Bank’s other lending arm—the International
Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD)—which serves middle-
income countries with capital investment and advisory services. IBRD and
IDA share the same staff and headquarters and evaluate projects with the
same rigorous standards.

IDA is one of the largest sources of assistance for the world’s 80 poorest
countries, 39 of which are in Africa. It is the single largest source of donor
funds for basic social services in the poorest countries.

IDA lends money (known as credits) on concessional terms. This means that
IDA credits have no interest charge and repayments are stretched over 35 to
40 years, including a 10-year grace period.

Eligibility for IDA support depends first and foremost on a country’s relative
poverty, defined as GNI per capita below an established threshold and
updated annually (in fiscal year 2007: US$1,025).

Some countries, such as India, Indonesia and Pakistan, are IDA-eligible
based on per capita income levels, but are also creditworthy for some IBRD
borrowing. They are referred to as “blend” countries.

Eighty-two countries are currently eligible to borrow from IDA. Together,
these countries are home to 2.5 billion people, half of the total population of
the developing world. An estimated 1.5 billion people there survive on
incomes of US$2 or less a day.

                                     203
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                          FY06 Top Ten IDA Borrowers
                                      ($million)


                              Pakistan                                      1183
                              Vietnam                                       768
                              Tanzania                                      751
                              Ethiopia                                      505
                                India                                       500
                             Bangladesh                                     462
                               Nigeria                                      422
                            Congo (DRC)                                     365
                               Ghana                                        355
                             Afghanistan                                    240
                            New IDA Lending by Region:

Sub-Saharan Africa.............50%
South Asia............................27%
East Asia/Pacific..................11%
Europe/Central Asia...............5%
Middle East/North Africa.........4%
Latin America/Caribbean........3%

                             New IDA Lending by Sector:

Social sector........................28% Public admin and law...........24%
Industry...............................22% Infrastructure......................15%
Agriculture..........................11%




                                            204
                                                              Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


INTERNATIONAL MONETARY FUND
The IMF is an international organization of 185 member countries. It was
established to promote international monetary cooperation, exchange
stability, and orderly exchange arrangements; to foster economic growth and
high levels of employment; and to provide temporary financial assistance to
countries to help ease balance of payments adjustment.

The purposes of the International Monetary Fund are:

   • To promote international monetary cooperation through a permanent
     institution which provides the machinery for consultation and
     collaboration on international monetary problems?
   • To facilitate the expansion and balanced growth of international
     trade, and to contribute thereby to the promotion and maintenance of
     high levels of employment and real income and to the development of
     the productive resources of all members as primary objectives of
     economic policy.
   • To promote exchange stability, to maintain orderly exchange
     arrangements among members, and to avoid competitive exchange
     depreciation.
   • To assist in the establishment of a multilateral system of payments in
     respect of current transactions between members and in the
     elimination of foreign exchange restrictions which hamper the growth
     of world trade
   • To give confidence to members by making the general resources of
     the Fund temporarily available to them under adequate safeguards,
     thus providing them with opportunity to correct maladjustments in
     their balance of payments without resorting to measures destructive
     of national or international prosperity.
   • In accordance with the above, to shorten the duration and lessen the
     degree of disequilibrium in the international balances of payments of
     members




                                    205
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


IMF LENDING
A core responsibility of the IMF is to provide loans to countries
experiencing balance of payments problems. This financial assistance
enables countries to rebuild their international reserves; stabilize their
currencies; continue paying for imports; and restore conditions for strong
economic growth. Unlike development banks, the IMF does not lend for
specific projects.

A member country may request IMF financial assistance if it has a balance
of payments need—that is, if it cannot find sufficient financing on
affordable terms to meet its net international payments. An IMF loan eases
the adjustment policies and reforms that a country must make to correct its
balance of payments problem and restore conditions for strong economic
growth.

An IMF loan is usually provided under an "arrangement," which stipulates
the specific policies and measures a country has agreed to implement to
resolve its balance of payments problem. The economic program underlying
an arrangement is formulated by the country in consultation with the IMF,
and is presented to the Fund's Executive Board in a "Letter of Intent." Once
an arrangement is approved by the Board, the loan is released in phased
installments as the program is carried out.


TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE:

IMF technical assistance supports the development of the productive
resources of member countries by helping them to effectively manage
their economic policy and financial affairs. The IMF helps these
countries to strengthen their capacity in both human and institutional
resources, and to design appropriate macroeconomic, financial, and
structural policies.




                                    206
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


ASIAN DEVELOPMENT BANK


The work of the Asian Development Bank (ADB) is aimed at improving the
welfare of the people in Asia and the Pacific, particularly the 1.9 billion who
live on less than $2 a day. Despite many success stories, Asia and the Pacific
remains home to two thirds of the world's poor.

ADB is a multilateral development financial institution owned by 67
members, 48 from the region and 19 from other parts of the globe.

ADB's vision is a region free of poverty. Its mission is to help its developing
member countries reduce poverty and improve the quality of life of their
citizens.

ADB's main instruments for providing help to its developing member
countries are

    •   policy dialogue
    •   loans
    •   technical assistance
    •   grants
    •   guarantees
    •   Equity investments.

ADB's annual lending volume is typically about $6 billion, with technical
assistance usually totaling about $180 million a year.

INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANISATION
The Convention establishing the International Maritime Organization (IMO)
was adopted in Geneva in 1948 and IMO first met in 1959. IMO's main task
has been to develop and maintain a comprehensive regulatory framework for
shipping and its remit today includes safety, environmental concerns, legal
matters, technical co-operation, maritime security and the efficiency of
shipping.

Specialized agency of the United Nations with 167 Member States and three
Associate Members, IMO is based in the United Kingdom with around 300
international staff.

                                     207
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


MEASURES OF IMO

IMO's specialized committees and sub-committees are the focus for the
technical work to update existing legislation or develop and adopt new
regulations, with meetings attended by maritime experts from Member
Governments, together with those from interested intergovernmental and
non-governmental organizations.

Firstly, measures aimed at the prevention of accidents, including standards
for ship design, construction, equipment, operation and manning - key
treaties include SOLAS, the MARPOL convention for the prevention of
pollution by ships and the STCW convention on standards of training for
seafarers.

Secondly measures which recognize that accidents do happen, including
rules concerning distress and safety communications, the International
Convention on Search and Rescue and the International Convention on Oil
Pollution Preparedness, Response and Co-operation.

Thirdly, there are conventions which establish compensation and liability
regimes - including the International Convention on Civil Liability for Oil
Pollution Damage, the convention establishing the International Fund for
Compensation for Oil Pollution Damage and the Athens Convention
covering liability and compensation for passengers at sea.



INTERNATIONAL LABOUR ORGANISATION
The International Labour Organization (ILO) is devoted to
advancing opportunities for women and men to obtain decent and
productive work in conditions of freedom, equity, security and
human dignity. Its main aims are to promote rights at work,
encourage decent employment opportunities, enhance social
protection and strengthen dialogue in handling work-related issues.

In promoting social justice and internationally recognized human
and labour rights, the organization continues to pursue its founding

                                   208
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


mission that labour peace is essential to prosperity. Today, the ILO
helps advance the creation of decent jobs and the kinds of
economic and working conditions that give working people and
business people a stake in lasting peace, prosperity and progress.

International Telecommunication Union
The ITU is a specialized agency of the United Nations and is the world's
oldest international organization.25 In general, the ITU seeks "to promote, at
the international level, the adoption of a broader approach to
telecommunications issues in the global information economy and
society."26 ITU decisions are made on a one nation, one vote basis;27
therefore, each member-nation has equal authority in the ITU decision-
making process. In part due to this voting policy, developing countries view
the ITU as an important organization to provide assistance and aid
infrastructure development in these nations




                                     209
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


          13. INTERNATIONAL LOGISTICS
Logistics is defined as a “system of handling the physical movement of
goods and services from the place of origin to the destination as fast as
possible at a low cost and with safety and security.” Logistics provides the
means for the actual transfer of goods or services from the seller to the
buyer. Once a product or service has been marketed and ordered, it is
necessary to employ logistics to pack, deliver and manage the items for
delivery. In order to be effective, logistics must address the following issues.
Distribution has always been an important and inevitable function, but it is
only relatively recently that it has been recognized as a major function in its
own right. The main reason for this lapse was probably been the natur4e of
distribution itself. It is a function made up of many sub-function and sub-
systems, each of which has been, and may still be, treated as a distinct
management operation.
Both the academic and the business world now accept that there is a need to
understand all the operations in a global perspective in order to see how they
are interrelated.
Logistics primarily involves three broad areas of functions.
Logistics = Supply + Materials Management + Distribution
(L = S + M + D)
Logistics is an art and science of determining business success. Acquiring
goods, distributing and finally maintaining them to win the goodwill of the
customer is the major responsibility of logistic management.

Importance of Logistics Management

In advanced countries a large part of the final price of a product often goes
towards logistics. In the case of bulk cargoes like sulphur, Bitumen, grains,
iron ore and crude, the cost of logistics is the main factor in fixing the price.
Major turnkey projects, can be completed provide the right materials are
supplied in the right time. During an emergency, thousands of lives may be
lost if medicines do not reach in time. Therefore, logistics is the
management of cost and time. Hence, the UK Institute of Logistics and
Transport has defined logistics as “the positioning of resources at the right
time, in the right place, at the right cost and in the right quality”. Logistics is
an important activity making extensive use of human and material resources
that affect the national economy.


                                       210
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


  A study indicated that about 30 % of the working population in the United
  Kingdom is associated with work that is related to logistics. Another such
  study undertaken by Michigan State University in the USA and reported in
  the Financial Times indicated that logistics alone represented between 10 %
  and 15 % of the gross domestic product of most important element at 46%,
  followed by storage/warehousing at 22 %, inventory carrying at 20 %, and
  administration at 12 %.

  Cost of Logistics for key countries in comparison to GDP

                                               LOGISTICS
  COUNTRIES                    GDP                                       GDP%
                                                 ($M)
  North America
     Canada                  585.105              70.191                  12.00
     Mexico                  334.726              49.753                  14.86
       US                      7576               795.265                 10.50
    Sub total                8495.931             915,209                 10.77

      Europe
Belgium/Luxemburg            286.383              32.573                  11.37
     Denmark                 174.237              22.440                  12.88
       France                1537.582             171.230                 11.14
     Germany                 2353.472             306.264                 13.02
      Greece                 122.870              15.269                  12.43
      Ireland                 67.392               9.611                  14.26
        Italy                1214.272             137.027                 11.28
    Netherlands              392.550              44.495                  11.33
      Portugal               101.182              12.871                  12.72
       Spain                 581.565              67.022                  11.52
         UK                  1151.348             122.344                 10.63
     Sub total               7981.853             941.146                 11.79

   Asia/Pacific
   Hong Kong                 153.068              20.992                  13.71
      Japan                  4599.706             522.982                 11.37
      Korea                  484.777              59.764                  12.33
    Singapore                 94.063              13.074                  13.90
     Taiwan                  273.440              35.686                  13.05

                                     211
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   Sub total               5605.072              652.498               11.64



ELEMENTS OF LOGISTICS AND DISTIBUTION

   1. Storage, Warehousing and Handling of Materials



                         Warehousing




  Warehouses                   Depots                          Order
                                                             Processing



Location of warehouses
Number & Size of distribution depots
Type of operations
Order processing

   2. Transport


                           Transport




    Mode            Delivery             Loading            Route Schedule


                                   212
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Mode of transport
Type of delivery operation
Load planning
Route schedule




   3. Inventory


                             Inventory




      Product                 Location of                  Quantity of
       Stock                    stock                        Stock

What to stock?
Where to stock?




                                  213
                                                    Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




4. Inventory Channel

                       SUPPLIERS

                  BULK DELIVERY

                   RAW MATERIALS
                     INVENTORY
                        TRANSFER

                       PRODUCTION

                        TRANSFER

                  WORK IN PROGRESS
                INVENTORY & ASSEMBLY

                   FINISHED GOODS
                     INVENTORY
                        TRANSFER
                            214
                         PRIMARY              Only for Private Circulation
                       DISTRIBUTION
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




How many intermediaries are required?
How much will it cost?
How long will it take to reach various centres?
  5. Information and Control

                            Information &
                               Control




     Designing                 Procedure                    Forecasting
      System

Design of systems
Control procedures
Forecasting

   6. Packaging and Unitization




                                     215
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



                              Packaging




       Unit                         Total                       Handling
      Packing                     Packaging                      System

Unit load
Protective packaging
Handling systems

Logistics and Interrelationship with other functions

Value addition

Attitude towards distribution and logistics has changed over the past two
decades. For a long time the view prevailed that various elements within
logistics created additional cost for companies. Although there is a cost
associated with the movement and storage of goods, it is now recognised
that distribution and logistics contribute to the value of a product. This is due
to the fact that logistic operations provide the means by which the product
reaches the consumer or end user in an appropriate condition at the required
location.
Dell supplies a laptop within sixty minutes in the US, from the moment
order is placed. Honda Motors delivers car in Europe and North America i9n
ten hours. Many mail order companies use logistics as a major weapon to
win the market today.
It is therefore, possible for companies to compete on the basis of providing a
product either at the lowest possible cost so that the customer will by it,
because it is the least expensive or at the highest possible value to the
customer. Few companies may try to achieve both these objective such as
Hyundai Motors, LG in rural India and Electrolux in Europe. This is
particularly important today as there are many products that are not sold on
the basis of their brand name alone, but also on the basis of availability or

                                      216
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


price. This applies to many food products as well as technical products such
as mobile phones and personal computers. Sony, Hitachi and Samsung are
very strong in adding value through low cost of distribution.

The role of depots and warehouses

Companies like Sony, Johnson & Johnson, Asian Paints, HP and Sansui
have succeeded through establishing depots and warehouses wherever they
operate. There are many reasons why depots and warehouses are required;
the main reasons are given below:
• To keep down production costs by allowing long productions runs, thus
   minimising the time spent on machine set-ups.
• To match demand and requirements with production capabilities, to
   smoothen the flow and assist in operational efficiency.
• To enable large seasonal demands to be catered for more economically.
• To provide good customer service.
• To allow trade off with the transport systems
• To facilitate order assembly.

In addition, it should be noted that there are a number of different types of
depots each of which might be considered in the planning of the physical
distribution structure. These might include:
• Finished goods depots/ warehouses – these hold the stock from the
   factories.
• Distribution centers which might be central, regional or national or local
   depots – all of these will hold stock to a greater or lesser extent.
• Transshipment depots or stockless, transit or cross decking depots –by
   and large, these do hold stock but act as intermediate points in the
   distribution operations and selected orders to customers.
• Seasonal stock holding depots.
• Overflow depots.

Asian Paints emerged as a market leader in India by setting up warehouses
all over the country, which led to effective distribution. Other well-known
companies like ICI, Berger, Shalimar, Nerolac etc. compete with Asian
Paints.

Cost relationships



                                    217
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


The major cost relationships are discussed, starting with storage and
warehousing. The major cost breakdown is outlined below, with the
percentage values indicating the approximate relative importance of the
different factors based on conventional warehouses.
                                                                  Percentage
I.     Building costs including rent, furnishing and depreciation       24
II.    Building services, such as heating and lighting                  16
III. Equipment related                                                  13
IV. Labour overheads                                                    38
V.     Management, supervision and security                              9

Procurement

Procurement is one of the key links in the supply chain. It can have a
significant influence on the overall success of the organisation. Ensuring that
there is a sufficient supply of raw materials of the required quality, at the
right price, in the right place at a right time is obviously crucial to any
manufacturing plant. Over the years many organizations have developed
large departments to deal with the sheer weight of supplier transactions.
Recently, many companies have reduced the number of suppliers in order t
reduce the cost of transactions. Single entity takes the responsibility and
committed to supply many product lines required by customers.
In addition to supplier reduction programmes many companies have moved
away from the traditional adverse relationship with suppliers. Companies
practice cooperation and coexistence concept wherein the buyer is also part
of supplier. This style of relationship recognizes that both the parties need to
make a profit to survive.
Procurement is not just about raw materials. The following goods and
services also need to be acquired:

1.   Utilities like gas, water, electricity and telephones
2.   Fuel including diesel and petrol
3.   Capital assets such as machinery, vehicles and buildings
4.   Stationery
5.   Consultancy services
6.   Outsourced services such as distribution contracts, IT services etc.
7.   IT equipment, e.g., hardware, software and support systems.

Very large sums of money are involved in the above areas. Depending on
the nature of business of the organization concerned, emphasis will be
                                       218
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


placed on different elements. For a transport company, fuel may represent as
much as 35% of the total operating budget, but for a manufacturing plant the
major costs may be running costs of the plant. These costs need to be
carefully managed.

TRANSPORT MODE AND CHARACTERISTICS

Sea Freight

There are two main container loads in sea freight namely (i) the
conventional load (ii) unit load. Both are applicable in the present practice.
The main features in conventional sea freight are:

(i)    Conventional Load

Cost

For some products, the most economic means of carriage remains that of
conventional sea freight. This particularly applies to bulk goods like rock
phosphates, boilers and transmission equipments that are being transported
to large distances. Where speed of service is unimportant, the lower cost of
sea-freight makes it very competitive.
Flexibility: There are many liners and tramp ships available in many ports in
the world. In addition to this, sailings are quite frequent making sea transport
quite flexible in terms of the alternatives that are quite open.
Availability: Liner services are widely advertised and extensively
categorised and most types of cargo are categorised.
Speed: Sea freight tends to be slow for several reasons, which include the
turnaround time in the port and inefficient handling methods. This is
especially true when compare to the more conventional “through transport”
systems with which sea freight must compete. The problem is particularly
apparent on some of the short sea routes.

(ii)   Unit Load (Container System)

Container is a metal box having the unit 1 x 20 feet. These boxes ensure
safety, security, reliability and easy mobility during transit and at the time of
handling both at the port of discharge and destination.
Container systems can now be viewed as a specialised mode of freight
transport although the container is now a fundamental feature of all major
                                      219
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


national and international transport modes, whether rail, sea, road or air.
Containers facilitate what is known as the ‘intermodel’ system of freight
transport enabling the smooth movement of goods in bulk, from one
transport mode to another.
The main attributes of containers and containerization are as follows:
• They enable a number of small packages to be consolidated into large
   single unit loads.
• There is a reduction in the handling of goods as they are distributed from
   the point of origin to the point of destination.
• There is a reduction in individual packaging requirements, depending on
   the load within the container.
• There is a reduction in damage to products caused by other cargo.
• Insurance charges are lower due to the damage potential is reduced.
• Handling costs at the docks and other modal interfaces are reduced.
• Turnaround time is faster for all types of transport used. Port utilization
   also improves.
• The all round delivery time is faster and hence service levels are better.
• Documentation is much simpler – this applies to both company and
   custom documentation.
• The concept of ‘through transit’ become feasible and allows a truly
   integrated transport system to be developed.
• The systems that were developed in the early days of containerisation,
   have been integrated across the different modes. This has considerably
   improved transportation in recent years.
• There is a need for special facilities and handling equipment, which are
   expensive. Thus, only a limited number of transfer points are feasible.
• The initial cost of the containers is quite high.
• Trade is seldom evenly balanced. Very often return loads may not be
   available and so the cost increases.
• Containers may leak, thereby causing damage due to rain or sea water.
• Loads may be affected by the position in which they are stowed, e.g.,
   above or below deck.

Sea freight container details
      Container
                                      Outside Dimensions
        Type
                                             6.045m
      20’ day                                2.438m
                                             2.438m
                                    220
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                                              6.045m
      20’ dry
                                              2.438m
     high cube
                                              2.591m
                                              6.045m
         20’
                                              2.438m
    refrigerated
                                              2.438m
                                              6.045m
    20’ open top                              2.438m
                                              2.438m
                                              6.045m
    20’ flat rack                             2.438m
                                              2.438m
                                              6.045m
  20’ open side/top                           2.438m
                                              2.438m
                                             12.192m
       40’ dry                                2.438m
                                              2.591m
                                             12.192m
  40’ dry high cue                            2.438m
                                              2.896m
                                             12.192m
      40’reefer                               2.438m
                                              2.743m
                                             12.192m
40’ reefer high cube                          2.438m
                                              2.743m
                                             12.192m
    40’ open top                              2.438m
                                              2.438m
                                             13.716m
 45’ dry high cube                            2.436m
                                              2.896m

Storage System

Ways to classifying storage systems are given below:
• Bulk storage for solids such as silos, bunkers and stockpiles.
• Loose items storage, e.g. casting and fabrications held loose on the floor.

                                     221
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


• Pallet storage systems
• Small item storage for individual items or small unit loads.
• Non-standard unit loads such as loads.

Stock Location

The location of stock within a store is an important aspect of stock
management and can be considered at different levels. For example, the
placement of stock within a warehouse will affect the effort required to
move material in and out of the warehouse. I twill also affect the efficiency
of selecting orders, as this depends on the distance employees have to travel
to get the required stock.
At another level, it is important to locate certain stocks so that they can be
easily lifted and handled by the operator. For example, items that have to be
lifted mechanically should be stored at ground level for lifting and using
material handling equipments. Fast moving product lines that have to be
accessed frequently located at a level for optimum operator arm movement,
i.e. neither too high or too low.




                                     222
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




    14. INTERNATIONAL TRADE THEORIES

 To build a large mansion and an action plan, a strong
 foundation is a prerequisite. To establish a large
 international business, conceptual base is important. Trade
 theories and their impact in every aspect of operation are
 widely viewed as major inputs by organizations around the
 world.

Learning Value:

On going through this chapter the reader will learn:

  1. Importance of trade theories in the economy
  2. Classical theories and their implications
  3. Competitive advantages of nations
Their limitations in globalised era

International Trade Theories

Many renowned economists have carried out considerable research on scale
of economies, productivity of the work force and advantages of resources,
which certain countries are endowed with. The theories formulated by them
were accepted by the contemporary economies. European industrialization,
the emergence of the United State as a major power and rapid colonisation
were the three major international developments during the era of classical
economic theories. Today, these factors have lost their relevance. The
revolution taking place in communications, transportation and banking
makes every country resourceful if they formulate proactive policies. The
diminishing importance of borders between countries has enabled many
entrepreneurs to shift their manufacturing base anywhere in the world, invest
their money in safe destinations and explore the resources at any point of
time. Therefore, the theories of absolute advantage, comparative advantage
are not really applicable in current international business operations.
                                     223
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


However, it is important to understand, interpret and modify these concepts
and apply them to current practices in business, especially the functions of
labour productivity, resource exploration and demand forecasting.

THE THEORY OF ABSOLUTE ADVANTAGE

The classical theories of international trade that were propounded by Adam
Smith, David Ricardo, John Stuart Mill and others were based mainly on
differences in the cost of labour between different nations. Among the
classical theories, the most discussed theory was the theory of ‘Absolute
Advantages’ put forward by Adam Smith, which was widely accepted and
relevant during his contemporary era.
   Adam Smith was a champion of free trade and he claimed that free trade
always leads to better division of labour and thereby encourages
specialization both in national and international markets. He advocated that
every country is specialized in certain production function and ultimately
will be able to enjoy the benefits. Countries can exchange the products they
produce at a lower cost with each other. He remarked that, “it is the wise
decision of every prudent master never to make goods at home, which will
cost him more, but to buy them, which is cheaper”. For example a cobbler
does not attempt to make his own shoe, but he buys them from the
shoemaker and vice versa. An individual select the occupation for which he
thinks himself best fitted. Similarly, every country tries to specialise in the
production of those commodities, in which it enjoys greater advantages e.g,
Malta produces glass. China produces soft toys, South Korea produces
synthetic fibres, and India produces metal ware and Myanmar produces good
quality timber,
   The theory of absolute advantage can be explained with the help of an
example, consider two countries A and B, each in which produces two
different types of goods, namely X and Y. With one unit of labour, country
A can produce either 20 units of commodity X or 10 units of commodity Y.
On the other hand, with one unit of labour, country B can produce either 10
units of X or 20 units of Y. This clearly shows that country A has an
absolute advantage in the production of goods of the type X and country B
has an absolute advantage in the production of goods of the type Y. In this
case, trade between countries A and B will be mutually beneficial, as with
two units of labour, A can produce 40 units of X and B can produce 40 units
of Y, i.e 80 units of X and Y between them. On the other hand without
international trade, they can produce only 60 units of X and Y between them
with the same amount of labour. Thus country A should specialize in the
                                     224
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


production of X by using all the available labour, which country B should
devote its labour for the production of commodity Y.
     In China one unit of labour produce three soft toys per day, whereas, in
India, one unit of labour can produce only 1.5 soft toys per day, At the same
time one unit of labour in India cuts and polishes 10 carats of diamond a day
whereas in China it is possible to achieve only 6 six carats a day with the
same amount of labour.
   In the above example the main factor is labour, In today’s era of
inventions and innovations, automation, outsourcing and cost reduction, and
mass production, the theory of absolute advantages does not have much
relevance.
   The major drawback of the theory of absolute advantage is that it fails to
explain the fact that even less developed countries, which have no real
absolute advantage in any commodity are engaged in the export of goods.
The limitations and shortcomings of this theory are given below:
1. It has not advocated quality, premium and brand aspects of a product.
2. It has restricted itself only to considering the maximum to labour force.
3. It has failed to take into account the fact that many cost reduction
    techniques are adopted in mass production.
4. There are many duties applicable when goods enter into other countries,
    which have not been accounted for.
5. The nature of the commodity may incur huge transportation costs, which
    may be even greater than the cost of the labour.

The theory of international trade, based on absolute cost difference is not
fully applicable in the current century, although it was an acceptable concept
during the period when industrialization was catching up in Europe during
the time of Adam Smith. Another theory, the theory of comparative cost
advantage was therefore evolved as the basis for international trade.



THE THEORY OF COMPARATIVE COST ADVANTAGE

It was David Ricardo, one of the prominent classical economists, who
propounded the theory of comparative cost advantage or the theory of
comparative advantage. He argued that it was the comparative difference in
cost that led to trade between two nations. According to him, each country
would specialize in the production of a commodity in which it has a
comparative advantage in cost. The country should export these
                                     225
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


commodities and import those commodities that it produces at a higher
comparative cost. The theory of comparative advantage is based on certain
underlined assumptions given below:
   a) There should be two countries that produce the same two
       commodities.
   b) Labour is the only factor applied in production. It is assumed that the
       supply of labour is given and fixed. Also, the labour force is assumed
       to be homogeneous.
   c) Cost of labour, i.e, wages determine the price.
   d) Production is subject to the law of constant returns.
   e) There is no change in taste and preference of the people.
   f) No change in technology in expected.
   g) Factors of production are perfectly mobile within two countries but
       are not freely mobile between the countries.
   h) There is no transportation cost.
   i) There is full employment of factors in both the countries.
   j) There is homogeneity in consumption, buying behaviour and
       affordability.

Based on the above assumption, Ricardo showed that two countries could
indulge in trade even when one of them has an absolute advantage in
production of one of the two commodities vis-à-vis the other country.
Ricardo explained the theory of comparative advantage with the help of the
example given below.
   Suppose the two countries viz. England and Portugal produce two
different types of goods say wine and cloth, whose labour costs in terms of
man hours required for unit of production are as follows:

      Country             Wine          Cloth
      England             120           100
      Portugal             80            90

   It is very clear from the table that Portugal has to expand less labour as
compared to England in the production of both the commodities. Thus
Portugal has an absolute cost advantage in both the goods while England has
an absolute cost disadvantage in both of them. But Portugal would benefit by
producing wine and exporting it to England in return for cloth as it has a
comparative advantage in the production of wine. This is due to the fact that
the relative cost of producing a unit of wine (80/120), is less than the relative
cost of producing a unit of cloth (90/100). On the other hand, England has
                                      226
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


the least comparative disadvantage in the production of cloth, whose relative
cost (100/90) is less than relative cost of wine (120/80). Thus Portugal
should concentrate more on the production of wine whereas England should
concentrate on cloth, thus benefiting both countries.
    Ricardo explained the principle of comparative cost in international trade,
but did not explain the determination of the terms of trade i.e. the rate at
which one commodity will be exchanged for the other. Since the ration of
exchange, say wine for cloth would be the same for both the countries after
they enter into trade, it must be somewhere between domestic exchange
ratios of the two goods within each country. Since wine is costlier in
England than cloth, as it takes more Labour to produce wine than cloth, the
exchange ratio in England would be 1 unit of wine = 120/100 = 1.2 units of
cloth. On the other hand, cloth is costlier in Portugal as it takes more labour
to produce cloth than wine. The exchange ratio would be 1 unit wine =
80/90 = 0.89 units of cloth. So the international rate of exchange of wine for
cloth would thus be settled somewhere between 1 unit of wine = 1.2 units
and 0.89 units of cloth. Assuming that the rate is established at 1 unit of
cloth = 1 unit of wine, England would gain because at home the ratio was
1.2 units of cloth for 1 unit of wine. Portugal would also gain because at
home it could produce only 0.89 units of cloth for 1 unit of wine. Thus, with
international trade both the countries will benefit.
       On the same lines Spain produces chicken and Chile produces wine at
lower cost; Australia produces wool made ups and Singapore produces
edible oil at relatively low cost; Malaysia produces rubber products at a low
cost compared to knit wear, which Indonesia produces at a lower cost
compared to rubber. In the latter case both countries are situated close to
each other and hence it would be a distinct advantage for Malaysia to focus
on rubber and supply it to Indonesia and for Indonesia to focus on knit wear
and export it to Malaysia.
     An important implication of theory of comparative cost is based on the
principle of complete specialization. According to above example, England
should specialize in the production of cloth and Portugal in the production of
wine. Each country would produce only goods in which it has a comparative
advantage and trade the surplus of production with other countries. The
underlying basis of complete specialization is that the comparative
advantage is permanent, irrespective of the scale of production in both
countries- Ricardo assumes the production is subject to the law of constant
returns i.e. the cost per unit of output would remain the same whatever be
the scale of production. He also assumes that a permanent supply of raw
material and other consumables associated with the product are available,
                                     227
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


e.g., if wine is to be produced, grapes should be available all the times with
no price fluctuations. Obviously, this cannot be the case and the availability
of raw material (in this case grape) would affect the cost of the end product.
This aspect of the theory has been criticised as the comparative advantage
may only exist for a given range of production, sooner or later the law of
increasing costs will come in to operation and the advantage may turn in to a
disadvantage. Hence, countries do not specialize completely and
specialization also changes in many countries due to multifarious reasons.

The major limitations of the theory are as follows:

   1. Theory of comparative advantage is based on the value of the labour.
      It considers labour as the only factor of production and assumes that
      all labour is homogeneous. However, labour does not alone produce
      goods; there are other factors, such as availability of raw materials
      that have been ignored. Further, labour units are not homogeneous as
      there are different grades such as skilled, unskilled, semi skilled,
      efficient, less efficient etc. hence the whole theory is unrealistic.
   2. The assumption that labour is used in same fixed proportions in
      production of both the goods in both the countries is too simplistic. In
      fact, labour is used in varying conditions in producing different goods,
      as some goods are more labour intensive than others, e.g., cotton
      becomes yarn, yarn becomes grey; grey becomes fabric and fabric is
      turned in to garments. It is difficult to verify the cost of labour at each
      stage.
   3. The theory assumes constant labour costs even output of goods
      increases due to specialization under international trade. But in reality
      the cost may either increase or decrease as a greater quantity of goods
      are produced in the wake of trade. If costs decline with increased
      production, comparative advantage will be larger and vice versa. The
      theory does not takes in to account these changes in costs.
   4. Ricardian theory is based on the assumption that factors of production
      are mobile within the country but are immobile internationally. The
      theory advocates uniform wages in a particular country. Practically,
      however wages differ between one region and another in the same
      country and between one industry and another within the same
      country. Within the country, wages are very high in urban areas and
      lower in the interior areas. In USA, India and Australia, local
      transportation costs are than freight rates to neighbouring countries.
      These costs are not considered in the Ricardian theory.
                                      228
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   5. The theory is one sided as it considers only the production costs, i.e.,
      only the supply side. The demand factors that affect the price of goods
      and through them the prices of the factors of production are not taken
      in to account. This negligence of demand factors renders the theory
      incomplete and liable to providing wrong conclusions.

   However, in spite of these weaknesses, Ricardo’s theory of comparative
   advantage is accepted as the basis of international trade. This is due to the
   fact that the theory provides a sound rationale for exchange of goods
   between two trading nations. Improvements have no doubt been made in
   the theory, but these mainly related to the factors that give rise to
   comparative advantage. The basic principle of trade viz, that a country
   should export goods in which it has comparative advantages and import
   those goods where its comparative advantage is the least, still holds good.


MODERN THEORY OF INTERNATIONAL                                 TRADE:        THE
HECKSCHER-OHILIN THEORY

The classical theory of comparative advantage was based on a model where
labour was the only factor considered in production and differences in labour
productivity were regarded as the cause for differences in comparative cost
and international trade. In 1993, Heckscher and Ohilin took the Ricardian
model and conceptualized further by thinking the source of a country’s
comparative advantage through the endowment of its factors of production.
It was Eli-Heckscher who put forward the idea that international trade results
from the fact that different countries have different factor endowments i.e., a
few countries have more capital than labour while others have more labour
than capital. These differences in factor endowments are the cause of
comparative cost differences. Bertil Ohilin further refined this theory and
formulated what are known as the ‘general equilibrium theory’, ‘factor
proportion theory’, which is commonly known as the ‘modern theory of
international trade’.
            The theory states that the production patterns and trade among
various countries are determined by the difference in factor endowments.
The country that has abundant capital will produce and export capital
intensive goods, and the countries with abundant supply of labour will
produce and export labour intensive commodities. The main cause of
differences in relative availability of factors of production or the difference
in factor endowments.
                                      229
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



Assumptions of Heckscher-Ohilin Theory

  1. The theory is based on a 2 × 2 × 2 model. It takes in to consideration
     that there are two countries, two commodities and two factors of
     production.
  2. Transport costs or other impediments to trade are not taken in to
     account. This assumption applies that the prices of commodities under
     trade will be the same in both the countries.
  3. The Theory assumes the existence of perfect competition in both the
     commodity and factor markets. This implies that both capital and
     labour are perfectly mobile in respective country, and would move
     from low paying industries in to high paying ones. Perfect
     competition in the commodity market implies that neither a
     monopolistic nor oligopolistic environment prevails.
  4. All production factors are homogeneous in degree, specially it expects
     returns to scale in production of each commodity in each country. For
     example a 10 percent increase in factor inputs in each industry results
     in exactly 10 percent output in that industry.
  5. The production functions are such that the two commodities show
     different factor intensities. This means that different combinations of
     factors or production techniques are used in different industries. The
     goods ‘Y’ may be capital intensive while the goods ‘X’ may be labour
     intensive. Goods that are labour intensive will always remain labour
     intensive irrespective of relative changes in the price of labour.
  6. The production function differs between two commodities but
     nevertheless remain same in both the countries. Thus the production
     techniques and factors intensity used in producing goods ‘Y’ in
     country A is the same as that is used in producing goods ‘X’ in
     country B. the same is true about production function for goods ‘X’ in
     country A and B. This implies that the best available techniques are
     known to both the countries and are used in the price of labour.
  7. The theory assumes that full employment resources exists in both the
     countries so that production takes place on the same point on the
     production possibility curve and not somewhere below it.
  8. It also assumes that preferences and technology levels do not change.
     Practically, technology has become accessible to anyone both
     indigenous and internationally. Germany, Japan and USA have proved
     their high levels of technology in medical equipments, entertainment
     electronics and chemicals & drugs respectively. Today, productivity is
                                   230
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


      directly proportionate to technology. Based upon these assumptions,
      the Heckscher-Ohilin theory demonstrates the proposition that capital
      rich countries export capital intensive goods and labour rich countries
      export labour intensive goods.

   There are two alternative ways of defining whether a country is capital or
   labour intensive. The first way, known as capital abundance is based on
   factor prices and states that a country A is capital rich as compared to
   country B if capital is relatively cheaper in country A than in country B.
   Thus the abundance or scarcity of a factor is identified on the basis of
   factor price. The second way compares the overall physical amount of
   labour and capital in two countries. For example, country A is said to be
   capital rich if ratio of capital to labour is larger the ratio in country B.
   Logically, country B will be labour rich if its ratio of labour to capital is
   larger than in country A.

   a. Capital abundance – based on factor price ratio orientation; According
      to the criterion of factor price, country A is abundant in capital
      compared to country B if,

       PAK < PBK           where;

       PAL      PBL

       PAK – price of capital in country A
       PAL – price of labour in country A
       PBK – price of labour in country B
       PBL – price of labour in country B

The above equation shows that capital is relatively cheap in country A and
labour is relatively cheap in country B. Hence we can say that country A is a
capital rich and country B is a labour rich one.
    According to the Heckscher-Ohilin theory, the capital rich country A
would export capital intensive goods and labour rich country B would export
labour intensive goods. This proposition can be explained by following
diagram;




                                      231
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


    Y            Y

    A
    B
C
                         E
A   R                                        X1
P   C
A                                                           Y
    P                                   F
C
I
T
Y                                                    G                                     X
    K
                                                                H
    M



        O
                     S              Q               L       N       A             C            B   X
                                              LABOUR


        In the figure, we have two isoquants YY and XX showing the production of
        one unit each of goods ‘Y’ and goods ‘X’ in each one of the two countries.
        These isoquants are common to both countries showing that production
        functions are same in both countries. According to these isoquants, goods
        ‘Y’ are capital intensive and goods ‘X’ are labour intensive. Country A is
        rich in capital and hence capital here is cheaper relative to labour, which is
        shown by the relative factor price line AA. On the other hand, country B is
        labour rich and hence the relative price of labour is low, a fact shown by the
        relatively flatter factor price line BB.

                                             232
                                                                Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


       Consider country A whose factor price line AA is tangential to the
isoquant YY at the point E. Since the isoquant YY represents one unit of
goods ‘Y’, we find that in country A, one unit of goods ‘Y’ can be produced
with OR of capital and OS of labour, the factor price ration line shows the
rate at which one factor can be exchanged for the other. Thus on the factor
price line AA, with points A and E being on the same line, OS of labour is
worth RA of capital and OR of capital is worth SA of labour. As we have
seen, the cost of producing one unit of goods ‘Y’ is equal to OR of capital
plus OS of labour. It is found that OS of labour, we find that the cost of
producing one unit of goods ‘Y’ is equal to OR of labour SA of labour
which has been substituted for OR of capital which is equal to OA of labour.
By the same reasoning, the cost of producing one unit of goods ‘X’ in
country A is OK of capital plus KA of capital (because OL of labour is
worth KA of capital) and hence equal to OA of capital. In terms of labour
alone, this cost is equal to OL of labour plus LA of labour (because OK of
capital is worth LA of labour) and hence equals OA of labour.
       Now, let us examine the cost of producing one unit of both types of
goods in country B. Since country B is labour rich and therefore labour is
relatively cheaper here, the factor price ratio line BB is flatter than AA. This
price line BB is tangential to the isoquant YY at the point F. This shows that
the cost of producing one unit of ‘X’ in country B in terms of capital alone.
To find this we draw a price line CC parallel to and below the price line BB
in such a way that it is tangential to the isoquant XX at point the H. The
price line CC represents the same factor price ratio as the line BB as the two
are parallel. At point H the cost of producing one unit of ‘X’ in country B is
OM of capital plus ON of labour. Since on this price line CC, ON of labour
corresponds to MC of capital, the price of one unit of ‘X’ is equal to OC of
capital in country B. Thus, in country B the cost of producing one unit ‘Y’ is
OB in terms of capital while for ‘X’ it is OC in capital alone. Hence in
country B it is more expensive to produce ‘Y’ than to product ‘X’ in the
same quantities as OV>OC.
The above analysis shows that country B has a cost advantage in production
of ‘X’ and it is relatively cheaper to produce ‘Y’ in country A. This fact
establishes the Heckscher-Ohilin theory, that a country abundant in capita
will export capital intensive goods and a country abundant in labour will
export the labour intensive goods.
One of the major drawbacks of this analysis is that it defines factor
abundance in terms of factor prices. This is not free from flaws due to the
fact that factor prices do not depend on abundance or scarcity of factor
supplies alone, but they are also influenced by demand factors. It is
                                      233
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


        therefore, not possible to say anything about factor prices on the basis of
        factor endowments alone. It would thus be more fruitful to study factor
        abundance in terms of physical amounts of the factors available in two
        countries.

        b) Suppose country A has more capital than labour, and country B has more
        labour than capital. Taking into consideration the differences in factor
        endowments, we can draw a production possibility curve of these two
        countries (AA1 of country A and BB1 of country B) with respect to the
        goods ‘X’ and ‘Y’ of which ‘X’ is labour intensive and ‘Y’ is capital
        intensive. This is shown in the following diagram.
    Y




                                                                        R


P1


A
P1
YB                          S1


                      S




 O                                                                                          X
                                 A1       P1       P2        Y
        The resources endowment in county A is such that with the given total
        resources of labour and capital, it can produce more of capital intensive
        goods of ‘Y’ over ‘X’. Similarly, country B can produce more of labour

                                           234
                                                             Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


intensive goods ‘X’ than capital intensive goods ‘Y’ and thus has an
advantage in the production of ‘X’. The production possibility curve AA1,
of country A shows relative abundance of capital while the production
possibility curve BB1 of country B shows relative abundance of labour.
Thus country A will have a bias towards the production of capital intensive
goods ‘Y’ while country B will be more inclined to produce labour intensive
goods ‘X’.
The nature of this bias is illustrated in the diagram. If both countries produce
both the goods in the same proportion, it will be represented by the ray OR.
The production of country A will be represented by the point S while that of
country B will be represented by point S’ on their respective production
possibility curves. The slope of country A’s production possibility curve at
S’ is steeper than the tangent P1P1 than the slope of the production
possibility curve of country B at point S shown by the tangent P2P2. This
implied that good Y is cheaper in country A than in country B and that good
X is cheaper in country B than in country A.
As it is clear from the respective price lines P1P1 and P2P2, the operating
cost of expanding production of goods Y is lower in country A than country
B and vice-versa for good X.
    This shows that the capital rich country A has a bias in favour of capital
intensive goods Y and the labour abundant country B has a bias in favour of
prevailing Labour intensive goods X.

Comparison of Ricardian and Factor Endowment Trade Models

Ricardian                                  Heckscher-Ohilin
                                           Two factor model
One factor model (labour)
                                           (labour and capital)
                                           Comparative advantages on the basis
Comparative     advantage    is            of production conditions along with
determined by the production               the market demand pattern of goods,
condition alone and it leads to            because the price determined the
export.                                    demand for goods may not always
                                           lead to export
                                           Heckscher-Ohilin theory regards
Classical theory of international
                                           international trade as arising from
trade is totally different from internal
                                           differences in factor endowments and
trade and hence requires a separate
                                           deals with it specific to international
theory to explain the causes the trade
                                           trade
Ricardian theory does not take factor      More realistic theory as it is based on
                                       235
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


prices in to account. It takes the price   relative    factor    prices,    which
of goods as being determined by the        influence the relative prices of goods.
production condition alone
It takes no note of production factor      It assumes a linear homogeneous
in the two countries                       production function of one degree

PURCHASING POWE PARITY AND IPACT ON TRADE

The estimates of per capita income in various countries are not strictly
comparable because they are based on conversion of per capita income of a
country as measured in its local standard money unit (the rupee in India) to a
common currency denominator (US $ in this case), the conversion being
based on the official exchange rates. The official exchange rates do not
reflect the purchasing power of different countries in their respective
counties. Thus, India may have had a low per capita income e.g., US $ 420
in 2002 can buy in the USA due to relatively lower prices in India. Hence,
the comparison of national and per capita incomes do not reflect the true
value or purchasing power or command over goods and services in their
respective countries.
    A change in exchange rate will also change the per capita income of a
country as expressed in foreign currency. For example, when India devalued
its currency against the US dollar, even when there was no change in the
economy. This is illustrated by the following example:

In India in 1990:                                                    INR 21 = US
$1
After devaluation in march-April 1992:                               INR 29 = US
$1
After 10 years, in 2002:                                             INR 46 = US
$1
After 5 years in 2007:                                             INR 40 = US $
1

The practice of devaluation and depreciation of local currency against the
US $ was very common in all developing countries and less developed
nations, over the past two decades. Surprisingly, for the first time, Indian
rupee is appreciating against dollar in 2007.

The competitive advantage of Nations

                                       236
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Competition is a challenge posed by any goods or service with equal or extra
benefits, which cause the company or country to lose its share of business.
Competition may come from the home country, host country or a third
country. It may come from the same range of products or through
outstanding technology or cost effective substitutes. Many companies devote
considerable time and energy facing or managing competitors. As far as
nations are concerned, they consolidate their resources and move ahead,
withstanding competitors and prospering in international trade. To prove
such consolidating forces Michael Porter developed a model, which was
applicable during the second half of twentieth century.
     He conducted a comprehensive study of ten nations to learn about the
factors that lead to success and the “five forces” influencing strategy. None
of the five forces were new and were in fact known to people around the
world. Porter advocated the conversion of these five forces in to a main
competitive force that would enable a country to succeed in world trade. By
‘success’ he means that a country should be the centre of production for a
particular item. This implies that for a given quality of goods, production
costs must be the lowest.
   However, he does not believe low production costs are solely due to
comparative advantage. Sustaining comparative advantage depends on the
ability to produce more with a given level of inputs. This in turn is based on
innovation and upgrading of products, production processes and
management.

Forces influencing Competitiveness

This model determines the competitive environment as being determined by
the following forces:

   1. The power of buyers, and how much leverage they have in
      determining the price.
   2. The power of suppliers, and the competition among suppliers which
      determines the price of inputs to the firm.
   3. The threat from potential new entrants in to the industry i.e. the degree
      of market contestability.
   4. The threat from substitute products.
   5. The degree of competition (rivalry) in the industry.

Porter’s Diamond – Four Determinants of National Competitive
Advantage
                                     237
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



  1. Factor conditions: The basic factors are labour, land, natural
     resources, capital and infrastructure. Porter argues that advance
     factors including communications, infrastructure, sophisticated and
     skilled labour, research facilities and technological know how are
     created and most important for competitive advantage.
  2. Demand conditions: The character of the home market demand shapes
     the way in which a company responds to the needs of the buyer.
     Nations can gain competitive advantage if sophisticated and
     demanding buyers provide a clear picture of buyer needs and demand
     innovations and product improvement.
  3. Related and supporting industries: The existence or absence of
     internationally competitive suppliers. Their existence provides:
        a. Lower transportation costs
        b. Lower communication costs
        c. Firm strategy, structure and rivalry
  4. Inferences: No single management system is universally appropriate.
     Domestic
     Competition spurs innovation.

The diamond as a system: The points on the demand constitute a system
and are self re-in forcing.

  1. Domestic rivalry stimulates the production of specialized intermediate
     goods. Suppliers of these goods can grow and realize economies of
     scale, and may become potential competitors of the firms they supply.
     They will enhance inter-firm rivalry.
  2. Domestic rivalry also leads to specialized pools of labour, e.g.,
     computer scientists in Silicon Valley.
  3. Keen domestic competition leads to more sophisticated consumers
     who come to expect innovation and up gradation. It facilitates the
     development of supplier industries. The diamond promotes
     geographic clusters of competitive industries.
  4. This leads to localized industries with numerous final goods
     producers, supporting firms and specialized labour. Positive feedback
     flows throughout.

How the Diamond Works: the Italian ceramic industry



                                   238
                                                     Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Italian producers located near the small town of Sassuolo accounted for 30%
of the total world production of ceramic tiles and 60% of their exports,
constituting an industry of US $ 10 billion.
         Rebuilding and reconstruction activities after World War II led to a
strong demand for tiles, especially in Italy as they were well suited to the
climate and taste of the people. This led to the following steps:

   1. A local pool of trained workers; engineers, designers, technician and
      maintenance workers etc, was formed.
   2. Companies producing kilns and presses were started to replace
      imported items with local products. This was facilitated by the local
      need to modify imported equipments.
   3. Retail outlets and specialized showrooms were established throughout
      Europe.
   4. The Italian market was the most sophisticated due to familiarity with
      the product. This led to demand for better products by the customers.
   5. Intense rivalry was fueled by geographic proximity.
   6. Disadvantages in labour costs led to continuous process, production
      and automation.
   7. Exports were facilitated by the existence of an industry association
      that promoted the product abroad. Advertising by the individual
      companies also promoted a positive image.

The same kind of competitiveness can be seen in the following countries
with respect to specific products:

   1.   Cut flowers – Netherlands
   2.   IT – India
   3.   Soft Toys and ceramics – China
   4.   Rubber products – Malaysia
   5.   Glasses – Malta

Implications for business

   1. Locations Implications: One direct implication is that firms should
      concentrate production in the country with the best diamond in the
      industry. This seems to rule out geographic separation of assembly
      and manufacture of parts, (the diamond works when these two
      ‘points’ are in same country). However, Porter acknowledges that a


                                    239
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


      firm may want to source some materials and some components
      overseas.
   2. First mover advantages: There are a number of advantages associated
      with early entry in to an industry. The firm that enters first are likely
      to gain customers loyalty and access to distribution channels.
      Moreover, first mover may enjoy economies of scale. To the extent
      that diamond is mutually reinforcing, early advantages might
      snowball.

Implications for the government

   1. An early lead in an industry is reinforced through the dynamics of the
      diamond.
   2. The government should also focus on creating specialized factors such
      as education, apprenticeship, promotion, support for basic research,
      high quality infrastructure etc.
   3. The government should limit direct cooperation among industry
      rivals. A recent trend is cooperative research ventures. While these
      may provide benefits for developing broad-based technology on a
      limited basis, they will blunt the motivational force of strong rivalry.
   4. The government should enforce strong domestic snit-trust policies.
      While strategic alliances and mergers have become popular, they
      undermine vigorous competition.

If we supply this model to the Indian automobile industry, IT industry, gem
and jewellery industry, we will see the current advantages and the decisions
necessary to be taken, for them to have a competitive edge over their
competitors in the world.




                                     240
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




                               Firm Strategy,
                               Structure and
                                  Rivalry




        Factor                                              Demand
       Conditions                                          Conditions




                                Related and
                                Supporting
                                 Industries

PURCHASING POWER PARITY

The PPP was formulated by Gustan Cassel in the year 1920, when inflation
was high. It represents a synthesis of the work done by economists like
David Ricardo, Wheatley and Henry Thorton in the nineteenth century.
The theory puts forward the idea that when currencies are exchanged among
nations, their purchasing power is only transferred. This means that we
should be able to buy the same amount of goods in either country, when
expressed in either country’s currency because people value currencies for
what they pay.
The theory suggests that the principle determinant of exchange rate is the
difference in National Inflation Rates. This means, a country, where costs
and prices are relatively less than other country will find its currency
appreciating. The sole focus on inflation differentials among countries is the
dominant factor that explains the movements in the exchange rates and also
indicates why the spot rate is what it is at a given point of time.
The law of one price is usually the basis to interpret the theory. According to
this law, after making allowances for tariff and transport costs, the price of

                                     241
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


the goods in one country should not significantly differ from that in another
country. Mathematically, this can be expressed as:


P = e.P* -------------- (1)

Where, P is the price of a product in the domestic country.
       P* is the price of the same product in foreign country.
       E is the domestic currency price of the foreign currency.

Thus if an item costs USD 1 in USA and its price in India is Rs. 45.50 then
thus the exchange rate is 45.50 to USD 1.
Equation (1) can be written as

e = P/P*

Further if P and P* can be interpreted as the domestic and foreign index,
representing the respective inflation figures; the exchange rate becomes a
ratio of the (relative) price level (or inflation rates) in the two countries.
An important application of the PPP theory is that the nominal exchange rate
must be adjusted significantly and sufficiently so as to reflect/compensate
the underlying inflation difference. Once this happens, the international
competitiveness of any country’s product in the world market shall be
maintained.
Thus the PPP theory tries to restore the real exchange rate, which is relevant
for international business.


                                                             Foreign Price Index
Real Exchange Rate (R) = Nominal Exchange Rate ×
                                                            Domectic Price Index




The above equation is explained with following numerical example:
Suppose the nominal exchange rate is Rs. 40= USD 1, the foreign price
index is 100 and the Indian domestic price index increase to 110 due to
inflation. If the Indian authorities fail to adjust the nominal exchange rate
what happens to the Real Exchange Rate (R)?


                                     242
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


R= 44 ×100 = Rs. 40
     110

The real exchange rate thus appreciates to Rs. 40 although the nominal
exchange rate is Rs. 44/USD. This will adversely affect the exporter’s
ability to compete globally due to the fact that is a U.S. buyer pays US$ 1
for a product, the Indian exporter will get Rs.44 due to nominal exchange
rate, which is worth only Rs.40 in real terms because of the effect of
inflation in India. The supporters of PPP theory insist that the nominal
exchange rate should be depreciated by 10% [the difference between Rs.44
and Rs.40] and the nominal exchange rate should be depreciated by 10% to
Rs.48.40 per US$ so as to restore the old exchange rate; in which case R will
become:

R = 48.40 x 100 = Rs.44    which is the odd nominal exchange rate
                  110      prior to inflation


  Thus if nominal exchange rate is adjusted to inflation differentials then the
exchange rate will be constant in terms of purchasing power.

   The essence of theory is that one must export to a country whose inflation
rate is higher than the domestic rate. In the case of imports the strategy
should be reversed as nominal exchange rates are not adjusted on a real time
basis.

   However the PPP theory does not take into account actual practice factors
such as current account performance, portfolio decisions, interest rates,
economic growth, and the central bank’s intervention, which have an effect
on the variations in exchange rates. Thus relative price level differences
alone cannot explain exchange rate movements exhaustively.

  Further, the law of one price which is the basis of PPP theory has also
been empirically challenged by absolute advantage theory and Factor
Endowment theory. Studies have shown that there are significant and
persistent differences among the relative prices of narrowly defined
domestic and foreign manufactured products.




                                     243
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


  The floating exchange rate regime of 1970s and 1980s clearly showed that
exchange rates over short periods depend significantly on asset market
considerations rather than price movements.

  The other issues associated with PPP theory are those of index numbers,
inconsistency in the basket of products considered for inflation calculations
and the weight age procedures adopted. However the theory holds well in
long run. Empirically when prices gets affected by a large number of
variables the exchange rate may overshoot the value postulated by the PPP
theory.

   Thus, there is more to exchange rates than what is stated in PPP theory.
The deviations of exchange rates from those postulated by the theory are
fairly persistent in countries with unstable monetary policies. The PPP
theory plays a significant role in describing exchange rates in the long run or
when inflationary forces are significant. Whether or not the PPP theory
provides a tool to determine real exchange rate or prices in international
markets is a moot point that continues to be debated. This is the reason why
the PPP theory failed to explain volatility of exchange rates, which was a
prominent feature of the floating rate experience during late 1990s.

  Current account performance and the monetary aspect of exchange rates
are a simplified approach to study exchange rate variations. The view put
forward by Keynesian Balance of Payment (BOP); dominate analysis during
the 1950s because capital movements were minimal. The influence of asset
markets and portfolio preferences of investors plays an important role in the
present context of exchange rate determination and the PPP theory only
supports the exchange rate variations in long run.




THEORY OF PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE

Theory of international product life cycle propounded by Raymond Vernon
emphasizes that every product has to pass through different stages.
Conceptually, the life cycle consists of four stages- introduction, growth,
maturity and decline.



                                     244
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


   To understand the concept very clearly the international product life cycle
starts from the location where the products originates. The introduction stage
is marked by innovation. Innovation is an outcome of research and
development. According to product life cycle theory, the production location
for a specific product moves from one country to another at different stages.
Generally, the life cycle movement starts from advanced countries where
considerable amount is spent for research and development. Many occasions
failures may occur. Still they pursue innovation. Out of ten innovations, two
may be commercially viable for which they do not hesitate to spend money
other eight innovations.

1. Introductory Stage
New products are generally developed after observation of demand, utility
and benefits a group of a group of customers enjoy in a given market. It is a
normal practice that Japanese company develops a new product for Japanese
market first and US Company develops a product for US market first. The
Research and Development group creates a new product and predominantly
the company concentrates on the domestic market and gradually starts
export to other countries. By way of getting constant market feed back the
company modifies or alters or adds new features to match international
markets.
Importance of innovation and decision of locations
Over the past 50 years all the new products have been developed either in
US or in Europe or in Japan. The industrialized countries are having
advantage of research, technological infrastructure, and manpower.
Companies like Merck, Siemens, Sony, Honda motors, General motors,
Matsushita allotted huge funds for such development. Those companies are
capable of taking the risk on new product development in anticipation of
long term gainful results. Innovations are taking place in such companies on
continuous basis. Few companies concentrate more on technological
innovative products. Few companies are making improvements in the
existing products. Few companies modify methods of manufacturing and
process.
  Even though the debate is going on that developing countries and less
developed countries have lacunae in research capabilities currently
innumerable innovations are taking place in developing and less developed
countries also. In future, the industrialized countries will locate innovation
centers or R&D intensive operations in developing countries.

Movement of labour and products
                                     245
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


In the first stage of the product life cycle a minimum percentage of the total
production may be exported. Labors intensive items are not standardized in
the initial stage. Rapid change in the production process may not take place.
Obviously, production with standardization will be a Herculean task. At the
same time, since cost of production is not known to the customer, there is a
possibility of adding comfortable margins. For example, entertainment
electronic items innovated by Sony made a windfall gain right from the
beginning. Dell is enjoying the same kind of benefits for its laptops. The
major challenge in this stage is to educate and enhance the skill levels of
labors force until the standardization is achieved. Once the labors force is
trained and competitive, the organization can perform well.


2. Growth stage
Growth stage has few salient features:
1. It increases in export to many countries by which the company generates
huge revenue.
2. More competitive forces crop up from a country by innovation, country of
entry and any other third country.
3. The organization becomes high capital intensive.
4. The innovator resorts to foreign production units in order to bring down
the cost and come closer to customer.
   Since the customers are aware of the products and the demand is likely to
grow substantially, setting up manufacturing units become inevitable. While
Sony products have huge demand in South East Asia and Middle East, the
company started manufacturing products in Malaysia. Hewlett Packard
started setting up units in South East Asia due to rapid growth in sales in the
whole region. The innovating company will increase its quantum of exports
and is prepared to incur small loss in the export markets where the
manufacturing subsidiary unit will commence its operations.


3. Maturity stage
This stage has following features:
   1. There is a gradual fall in quantum of exports from innovating country.
   2. Standardization and quality aspects are pre-requisites.
   3. Sophisticated machineries are used, hence is huge.
   4. Price war is inevitable due to many players.
   5. Production facilities are available in many developing countries at a
       low labors cost.
                                     246
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



Though the demand is growing in few countries, especially in the less
developed ones it declines in all the developed and few developing
countries. Cost cutting is the only strategy available for the innovator to
sustain. Few of the companies shifted their focus to get products
manufactured wherever per unit cost is low. It is a general trend that
innovating countries no longer enjoy production advantage. Since many
physical, fiscal and infrastructural incentives are offered by the developing
countries, such innovators are lured and increase there production in
developing countries. Today, we see such manufacturing units in Indonesia,
Thailand, Malaysia and Brazil. India is also emerging as a strong production
centre for automobiles, health care and consumer products.

4. Declining stage
1. The main feature of the declining stage is that maximum production takes
place in less developed countries.
2. The innovating country starts importing from other countries.
3. The days of keeping high margins are over.
4. It is the stage of survival and no prosperity for the innovator.
5. The innovator may completely deviate from a specific product and go in
for a completely new product.

The industrial countries disappoint the innovator because the affluent
customer demands more and more. New products are flooded in the market
with so many features. Since cost factor is the only weapon, production from
less developed countries will win. The innovator of the product cannot
depend on the first production unit which gave the first product for
launching.




                                    247
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




                                    Maturity
                                Production in
                                 Developing
                                 Countries:
                                Cost cutting




                   Growth                                  Declining
                  Exports and                             Import from
                   Overseas                                 LCDs;
                  Production                              For survival
                   Expansion




  Introduction
    Country of
      origin:
    Innovation.




Limitations of Product Life Cycle

The theory is having application in few specific sectors such as
entertainment, electronics and certain medicinal items. The movement of
production centres from different stages may not be applicable in the
following circumstances;

                                    248
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



   1. A vast majority of the products are having very short life cycle such
      as computers, tape recorder, musical discs and fashion items. Shifting
      production from one country to another country may not achieve cost
      reduction. The very nature of product itself is subject to obsolescence.
   2. Cost involved in perfumes, cosmetics and other essential oils which
      fail under luxury category do not make any impact on the customer
      because brand is important to them.
   3. Wherever costs of logistics are high the export is minimal at any
      stage. At the same time, few countries are producing certain essential
      bulk cargo. Irrespective of life cycle stages, they export all the time.
      Articles like bitumen from Iran, sulphur from Jordan and coal from
      China. They cannot shift production facilities to other countries.
   4. Many MNCs are using aggressive marketing promotion such as
      advertising, personal selling and sales promotion. Any other
      competition will not be a great concern for such products.
   5. Few products are very much associated with outstanding services and
      specialized knowledge. More than product life cycle stages, customers
      need assured technical support. Lifts and escalators will be accepted
      by customers provided service is given top priority. Same concept is
      applicable to life saving medical equipments produced in Germany.

Irrespective of the types of products the companies are all the time
introducing new products simultaneously, both in the domestic and
international markets. It is obvious that in the globalization era, companies
develop different products to different segments and different prices. They
cannot wait for an opportunity to start in the domestic market first and going
to other markets later on. Multi domestic operations are very common
among MNCs. Innovations are carried out to launch products in many
countries at a time especially health care items and industrial consumables.
Hence, product life cycle theory has very limited applications in the current
globalised era.




                                     249
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




  15. CROSS CULTURAL COMMUNICATION

 The major challenges to do international business are not
 only managing people, money and resources. To trigger all
 those resources and succeed one has to understand two
 areas:
   1. CULTURE
   2. COMMUNICATIONS

Learning Value:

On completion of this chapter the reader can:

   1.   Understand the complexities of culture
   2.   General characteristics of culture
   3.   Implications of culture in business operations
   4.   Different nations and different methods to deal
   5.   Challenging cultural elements in the current era

A unique set of traits, behaviours, values, habits, norms and ethics innovated
and practiced in the past and forwarded to the future generation for day to
day practice is culture.


Culture is the essence of life. For many nations it is the basis of their
identification and countries are often identified by their cultural inheritance.
The culture of the country affects the way people behave, and often explain
why they behave the way they do. In general, we often talk about oriental
culture, western culture and material culture, but these terms are not explicit
and can have a number of connotations. The pattern of behaviour in different
cultures will reflect in business deals, working conditions, productivity
levels and whether a company is accepted in different countries.



                                      250
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


       When business firms operate in different nations, different cultures
come together to do business. More than anything else they have to respect
the cultural sentiments of each other. Often, businesses fail not because of
logistical shortcomings, but due to the erroneous evaluation or total lack of
understanding of the other party’s cultural values.

       As stated above the culture determines an individual’s actions or
behaviour. The society that people grow up in shapes their basic beliefs,
values and norms. They absorb, almost unconsciously, a world view that
defines their relationship to themselves, to others, to nature and to the
universe. A society’s beliefs, values and norms are influenced by their
family and by the social, educational, and religious systems of a country.
What people buy, why they buy, when they buy and how much they buy, are
all primarily determined by the typical culture of each country. Cultural
attitudes vary considerably among countries, so it is difficult to find general
patterns amongst them. For examples, despite the fact that their economic
levels are similar, the French and Germans are culturally quite different. The
French are somewhat hostile to frozen food, but the Germans welcome it.
Thus, for a frozen food exporter, both these countries hold different
importance.

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CULTURE
Culture is a distinctly human capacity for adapting to circumstances and
transmitting these coping skills and knowledge to subsequent generations.
Culture gives people a sense of belonging and shapes their behavioural
pattern. Culture impacts behaviour morals and productivity at work and
includes values and patterns that influence company operations and actions.
Corporate culture affects the way in which an organization copes with
competition and change, whether in technology, economies or people.
        The way people do business is different in different countries. In
Japan employees are extremely loyal to their employers and will not easily
leave their jobs. The Japanese have great respect for protocol and even the
way a person presents his visiting card may determines his compatibility to
initiate business discussions. The Indian business community strongly
believes in the concept of a family business, with the line passing from
father to son. In France it is usual to work five days week, starting early in
the morning. In Germany, serious business discussions do not call for
humour. Delaying, often for weeks, to get a better bargaining strength, is an

                                     251
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


integral part of Chinese business. In Brazil, no major business decisions will
be taken the carnival.

Characteristics
Self-identity and appreciation of others can manifest as a humble bearing in
one country and egoistic behaviour in another. Independence and creativity
are countered in other cultures by group cooperation and conformity.
Americans keep their distance in business negotiations, while this is not so
in Latin America and Vietnam.

Communication and Language
In addition to the multitude of different languages, some countries have
hundreds of dialects, spoken amongst their different communities and
geographic units. Furthermore, even though body language is universal, the
meanings given to gestures often differ in different cultures.

Dress and Appearance
This includes garments and adornments as well as body decorations that are
distinctive of different cultures. For example the Japenese Kimono, the
African head dress, the Englishman’s hat and the Indian saree.

Food and Eating Habits
The manner in which food is selected, prepared, presented and eaten often
differs in different cultures. Americans love beef, yet it is forbidden to
Hindus. Both, Moslem and Jewish cultures forbid pork, which is consumed
extensively by the Chinese. Many restaurants cater to diverse foods and
offer national dishes to meet varying cultural tastes. Eating habits also differ
from one country to another, from hands and chopsticks to a full set of
cutlery. Even when cultures use cutley such as a fork, one can distinguish a
European from an American by the hand in which he holds a fork or spoon.

Relationships
Cultures fix human and organizational relationships by age, gender, status
and degree of kindness, wealth, power and wisdom. The family unit is the
most common expression of these characteristics. In a Hindu household a
joint family lives under one roof. In some cultures, the authoritarian figure in


                                      252
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


the family is the head male and this fixed relationship is then extended from
home to community.

Values and Norms
Value systems vary in different cultures Persons who are barely surviving,
place importance on food and shelter. Richer persons need security while
that with high security needs, value material things, money and position as
well as law and order. The younger generation in many and position as well
as law and order. The younger generation in many countries concentrates on
quality of life, self-fulfillment and status. In some Pacific island cultures, the
more one gives away or shares, the more he or she is recognized.

Beliefs and Attitudes
One of the most difficult tasks in carrying out international business
understands the beliefs and attitudes of people in different countries and
cultures. People in all cultures seem to have a concern for the supernatural
that is evident in their religions and religious practices. Western culture is
largely influenced by judeo-Christian traditions, while East Asian cultures
are dominated by Buddhism. Confucianism, Taoism and Hinduism. The
Japanese also believe in Shintoism, which is an off-shoot of Buddhism,
which originated in India. Religious beliefs can play an important role in
political and legal aspects. This is especially true of Muslim countries like
Saudi Arabia, Kuwait and Qatar, where business operations are strongly
influenced by religious beliefs.

Mental Processes and Learning
The way people think and the process of learning vary from country to
country. The British will enter into any business only after doing their home
work thoroughly and follow strict documentation procedures; they also
expect their counterpart to do the same. The Germans have a preconceived
notion that they are technically superior and can produce perfect items, and
lay great stress on logic, while the Japanese reject the western idea of logic.
Learning is much respected in the whole of Europe. Europeans are never
adverse to learning new things and they generally will not enter into
discussions without a strong information base. The Americans spend a lot of
time on documentation. Some cultures favour abstract thinking and
conceptualization while others prefer strong base and continuous learning.


                                       253
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Work Habits and Practices
Another dimension for examining a group’s culture is its attitude towards
work. In some countries, the culture is oriented towards work, and holidays
are minimum. An example is China, except for ten continuous days holiday
during the Chinese New Year. A work ethic in which all members are
excepted to engage in a desirable and worthwhile activity in the same
culture For some cultures, the worthiness of the activity is narrowly
measured in terms of income produce and the worth of he individual is
assessed in terms of job status. In Japan, the culture lies in family which is
transferred to the organization that employs the person and the quality of
ones performance is expressed in work group participation, communication
and consensus.

Global Culture – A Rationale
Today, there is an increasing need for an uniform culture across different
countries, however it is not entirely possible. The main reason for this is the
close bond with traditions and beliefs, which has been carried over
generations. Time and space have largely divided the world into diverse
forms and patterns, and cultural differences an evident even within a
country. India itself is a land of varied cultures and beliefs. So is Canada,
which is divided between English speaking and French speaking cultures.
Even though cultures vary, our need to interact remains and it is essential to
adapt to a new country and its culture. This is especially important in the
exchange of commerce and persons doing business across the world have
constantly felt a need for this. Many corporates fail because they did not take
cultural differences into account. An American cannot sell port to a Muslim.
This shows that there is a strong need to understand diverse cultures, for
business to succeed.

CULTURE AND BUSINES ACROSS THE GLOBE
United States of America
The fourth largest nation in the world, the USA has been considered a
melting pot of diverse cultures. An overview of the dominant culture of the
USA reveals the following traits:

1. Highly achievement-oriented.
2. Highly organized and institutionalized.
                                     254
                                                         Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


3. Freedom loving and self-reliant.

4. Work-oriented and efficient

5. Friendly and informal

6. Competitive and aggressive

Doing business and negotiating with Americans
   1. Basic concept of negotiation: Conflict and confrontation seen as an
      opportunity to exchange views.

   2. Selection of negotiators: American negotiators are usually chosen
      based on their past record of success and their knowledge and
      expertise.

   3. The role of individual aims: Americans encourage individual aims and
      achievements.

   4. Complexity of language: Americans are low context communicators
      Messages are not overridden by non-verbal communication.

   5. Value of time: For most Americans time is money. They set schedules
      are appointments and tend to priorities events.
   6. Risk taking propensity: Americans are willing to take risks.

   7. Form of satisfactory agreement: American culture is legalistic.
      American prefers and expects detailed contractual agreements to
      formalize negotiations.

Canada
Canada is a bilingual and multicultural country. Throughout Canada, the
family is the center of the society and homes are often passed from one
generation to another. Canada has one of the world’s highest standards of
living and the people are very industrious. Canadians are friendly but
conservative and tend to observe formalities and rules of etiquette. They are
patriotic and law abiding and confident of their future and welcome foreign
business.



                                      255
                                                        Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Doing business and negotiating with Canadians

1. Basic concept of negotiations: They focus on points of disagreement as
   they work through a problem by a linear process. This process involves
   identifying the problem/opportunities, the objectives, the alternatives, the
   decision and finally the plan of action.
2. Selection of negotiators: Canadian negotiators are usually chosen based
   on their past record of success and their knowledge and expertise.
3. Role of individual aims: Canadians are expected to put the objectives of
   the firm/country ahead of their personal aims.
4. Complexity of language: English speaking Canadians are low context
   communicators, whereas French speaking Canadians are high context
   communicators.
5. Value of time: Promptness in both beginning and ending a meeting is
   appreciated. They are rigidly bound by their schedules and deadlines.

People’s Republic of China

The Chinese have always held themselves in high esteem. They see
themselves and their country and culture as the center of civilisation.

Negotiating in China

China is a group-oriented society and any negotiations must cover the
interests of many different parties. The Chinese will examine their
counterpart’s attitude and speech and apply it to solving the problem. The
following points should be taken into account when doing business with
China:
    1. The Chinese are interested in long range benefits.
    2. They stand by their word, and emphasis is placed on trust and mutual
       connection.
    3. They prefer to negotiate through intermediates.
    4. They will not compromise on their goals.




                                     256
                                                       Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Japan

Language and communication
The Japanese prefer ambiguous terminology to direct and specific
references. Sentences are frequently left incomplete. All business and
negotiations are extremely polite and formal, but informality is seen during
socialising. Often, negotiations are carried out during business
entertainment.

Dress and appearance
Neat, orderly and conservative dress is recommended for executive staff,
Blue collar workers and students generally wear a distinctive uniform and
even a company pin which executives may also wear. Colours have
considerable significance in the Japanese culture.

Food and eating habits
Eating is ritualistic, communal and time consuming, Businessmen avoid
taking their wives to a business dinner even if invited.

Time and age consciousness
The Japanese are punctual, but they expect the other party to wait for group
decisions that may take time. In negotiating a licensing agreement, the final
decision may take up to three years but once the decision is taken,
production may be started within a few weeks. Their planning is long term
and implemented quickly. They give respect to seniority and the elderly.

Reward and recognition
There is a tendency to accept only group appreciation and not individual
rewards,. Great emphasis is put on security as well as a social need for
belonging. Money if given to Japanese should be in an envelope or else it is
considered to be an insult.

Relationships
They are group oriented rather than individualistic. They are sensitive to
what others think or expect and have a sharp sense of right and wrong.

Attitudes and beliefs
They are extremely adaptable. They do not resist change and are open to
automation and new technology. The Japanese are hard working, both for
the family and business. They are cooperative with the management.
                                    257
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




Europe

The three large markets in the EU are Great Britain, Germany and France. In
doing business with the EU the following points are to be considered.
   1. Customer service is the key to success.
   2. Price lists should be published in the local currency and not in any
      foreign denomination.
   3. Sales personnel must know their products. Europeans are
      sophisticated buyers of foreign products.
   4. Europeans gauge the commitment of the company by the way they
      treat their sales representatives.
   5. Europeans value personal contact and mementos, so a token gift may
      create a favourable impression.


Australia

Australians are generally easy going and friendly. Australians speak directly
and frankly; they dislike pretensions of any kid and will not shy away from
disagreement. It is necessary for men to shake hands before and after
meetings, but not necessary that women should do the same. The basic rules
of etiquette in Australia are that:
   1. Men should never wink at women, even if they are friends.
   2. Yawning in public is rude.
   3. Eye contact is important, especially in business meetings.

CONCLUSION

The international business community is constantly expanding its activities
in different part of the world. The business executives and managers are
required to interact with society, customers, and bureaucrats. Handling the
work force is a major challenge even to multinationals. This has led to any
transnational companies taking the advice of experts in a chosen field prior
to entering a country.




                                    258
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


16 . GLOBAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
        Human being is the only intangible asset which will bring
        an unimaginable quantum of tangible output provided the
        asset is identified, nurtured and groomed to shoulder global
        business responsibilities.



Learning Values:

   1. Discuss the role culture that plays in determining the effective use of
      human resource management.
   2. Identify critical HRM issues faced by multinational and global
      organizations.
   3. Discuss human resources as core competent tools for Global
      organizations
   4. Define Global HR planning and process.
   5. Specify four important HR benchmarking measures.
   6. Evaluate human resource information system (HRIS).

Human Resources as a Prime Mover

Strategic Human Resources Management deals with Organizational use of
employees to gain or keep a competitive advantage against competitors.
Core Competency is a unique capability in the organization that creates high
value and that differentiates the organization from its competition.




                                    259
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


Possible HR Areas for Core Competencies in Global Market




                         Outstanding
                           Service




                                                      Unusual
 Innovation                                           Quality
                           GLOBAL
                            HRM




                                           Special
          Productivity
                                            Skills




HR-Based Competencies
                                 260
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



  1. Organizational Culture
       a. The shared values and beliefs of the workforce
  2. Productivity
       a. A measure of the quantity and quality of work done,
           considering the cost of the resources used.
       b. A ratio of the inputs and outputs that indicates the value added
           by an organization.
  3. Quality Products and Services
       a. High quality products and services are the results of HR-
           enhancements to organizational performance.

Global Customer Service Dimensions

                Service
               Excellence


                                         Physical Facilities and
                                              Equipment

                                          Care and Concern


                                         Confidence in Employees
                                               Knowledge

                                      Dependable and Accurate
                                           Performance

                                           Timely Assistance




Key Terms in Global Human Resource Management

                                   261
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



Culture shock
The feelings of frustration and confusion that result from being constantly
subjected to strange and unfamiliar cues about what to do and how to get it
done when trying to live in a new culture. Many MNCs struggle hard at
operational level due to their inability to overcome cultural shocks,
especially in developing countries.

Ethnocentric HRM Perspective
A view of HRM whereby an organization thinks that the way of doing things
in the parent country is the best way, no matter where business is done.
Imposing ethnic or parent company’s norms and operation styles will lead to
detriments.

Expatriate manager
A manager who is on assignment in a country other than the parent country
of the organization. This person is also called a parent country national
(PCN). Such a manager has to be so quick in adopting the culture of his
working domain if he wants to be an effective manager.

Foreign Corrupt Practices Act of 1977 (FCPA)
A law that makes it illegal for an American organization to pay bribes to
foreign officials for the purpose of getting a competitive advantage in doing
business.

Geocentric HRM Perspective
A view of HRM whereby nationality is ignored and managers are hired on
the basis of qualifications. Merit and performance are the key criteria for
HRM. They are highly respectable and capable of handling any turbulent
situation.

Global Corporation (GC)
A corporation with a geocentric HRM perspective. National boundaries are
ignored and HRM is viewed as a way of integrating operations all over the
world.



Global Human Resource


                                    262
                                                      Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


     The policies and practices related to managing people in management an
     internationally oriented business.

     Host Country National (HCN)
     An employee of an international organization who is from the local
     workforce rather than being from the parent country of the organization.

     Parent Country National (PCN)
     An employee from the corporation’s home country is on assignment in
     another country. Generally the investing companies are prone to such a
     syndrome to bring key human resources from home country which may
     enkindle hatred amongst the people in the country of operation.

     Sullivan Principles
     Reverend Sullivan was the first African-American to serve on the Board of
     General Motors. The tenets of his principles were designed to eventually
     eliminate oppressive racism in South African business.

     Third Country National (TCN)
     An employee working for an international organization who is from a
     country other than the parent country of the organization or the host country
     in which the assignment is located.

     Global organizational move                         Challenges
                                               1. Foreign direct investment (FDI) flows
    Driving force for globalization            2. Cross-border inter-firm agreements

                                               1. Satisfied employees
                                               2. Competitive products and services
                                               3. Searching for new or broader markets
Organizations expand beyond domestic
                                               4. Acquiring new, more efficient
        boundaries to achieve
                                                  manufacturing technology
                                               5. Large, inexpensive labor forces

 Global human resource management              1. “people challenge” the most difficult for
(GHRM) includes the same functions as             firms becoming international
  domestic HRM, plus several aspects           2. Most critical to success, acquiring a
  unique to international management              competent workforce (survey of top

                                         263
                                                                Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                                                     execs.)

                                               1.    Finding suitable candidates
                                               2.    Intercultural understanding
                                               3.    Career management
                                               4.    Employee retention
    The top HR challenges include
                                               5.    Adjusting to environment
                                               6.    Partner dissatisfaction
                                               7.    Relocation reluctance

                                               1.    Individualism versus collectivism
  The cultural nature of global human          2.    Power distance
        resource management                    3.    Uncertainty avoidance
          cultural differences                 4.    Masculinity versus femininity

                                               1. Fit (congruence among HR policies,
                                                  firm’s plan & values of foreign culture)
                                               2. Internal fit (HR policies that allow for
  The concept of "fit" in global human
                                                  smooth work flow: HQ & local)
        resource management
                                               3. External fit (HR to consider the local
                                                  cultural/socioeconomic environment)

                                               1. Early stages of internationalization
                                                  strategy
Multinational Corporation (MNC) - HRM          2. Ethnocentric orientation - PCN hires
               Philosophy                      3. Adapting products and services to local
                                                  markets

                                               1. National boundaries disappear
                                               2. Geocentric orientation – TCN hires
   Global Corporation (GC) - HRM
                                               3. The world is the market for its products &
             Philosophy
                                                  services

                                               1. Finding competent expatriate managers
                                               2. To capitalize on the diversity of a global
                                                  workforce without suppressing each
          The real challenge
                                                  nation’s desire to maintain its cultural
                                                  identity


                                         264
                                                                Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                                                 1. Host Country Nationals (HCNs)
    Three sources of employees for               2. Parent Country Nationals (PCNs)
   international assignments include             3. Third Country Nationals (TCNs)

                                                 1. Complex & sensitive task
                                                 2. Technical competence
                                                 3. Self image: self-confidence, self-esteem,
                                                    stress coping
   Selecting the expatriate manager              4. Interaction skills: interpersonal style,
                                                    sensitivity to nonverbal communication
                                                    perceptual orientation: open-mindedness,
                                                    tolerate uncertainty accept cultural
                                                    differences
                                                 1. Fascination
                                                 2. Culture shock
Stages of reaction to foreign experience
                                                 3. Adaptation

                                                 1. Select managers who desire/want foreign
                                                    assignments (where possible)
Effective measures to deal with culture
                                                 2. Language fluency
                shock
                                                 3. Preparation for cultural differences

                                                 1. Provide intercultural training – improves
                                                    chances for success
                                                 2. How much & type of training depends on
                                                    level of contact with host culture
                                                 3. Degree of dissimilarity between home &
   Training the expatriate manager                  host cultures
                                                 4. Training to differ/vary at different phases
                                                    of expatriate’s assignment
                                                   (ex. pre-departure, overseas assignment,
                                                     repatriation)

                                                 1. Expensive proposition
                                                 2. Pay expatriate premium, COLAs,
                                                    allowances
Compensating the expatriate manager              3. Financial (education, home leave)
                                                 4. Social adjustment (language, cross
                                                    cultural training, locate home)
                                                 5. Family support (child care, trailing
                                           265
                                                               Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran


                                                   spouse, schools)

                                                1. Less expensive
                                                2. Have distinct advantages in cultural
                                                   sensitivity, understanding local employee
                                                   needs/motivation strong reservations exist
                                                   in using HCNs:
                                                3. Concern that locals will not adopt PC
                                                   culture & management system
                                                4. Level of commitment to organization
Host Country Nationals and the Global
                                                   may not be high
            Corporation
                                                5. Don’t have the expertise or requisite
                                                   skills that PCNs/expatriates possess
                                                6. Communication between HQ and host
                                                   offices will be less effective
                                                7. Most problems can be eliminated by
                                                   careful recruitment, selection, and
                                                   training of HCNs

                                          When recruiting try to use the same recruitment
                                          methods as local businesses &
         HCNs - Recruitment               other successful GCs



                                                1. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act – (1977)
                                                   forbids in conducting to give the firm an
                                                   unfair advantage
                                                2. There exists varying degrees of
                                                   employment discrimination in other
The legal and ethical climate of global
                                                   countries which may cause
    human resource management
                                                   problems/dilemmas for PCNs managers
                                                3. Civil Rights Act of 1991 applies to US
                                                   firms’ operations overseas
                                                4. Sullivan Principles



     FACTORS AFFECTING GLOBAL HR PLANNING

                                          266
                                                             Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




  Strategy of    Culture of          Competitive /         Current
      the           the               Financial          Organization
                                     Environment
 organization   organization                              Situation



      Need for Human                            Available
         resources:                             Financial
       Quantity and                             Resources
        Skill Levels



                HR policies and Plans for:
                  • Recruiting
                  • Selection
                  • HR development
                  • Compensation
                  • Performance
                    Management
                  • Staffing Adjustments




Linkage of Organizational and HR Strategies
                               267
                                                  Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran




Global HR Planning Process




Benefits of Global HR Planning
                                 268
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



  1. Better view of the HR dimensions of business decisions abroad
  2. Lower HR costs through better HR management.
  3. More timely recruitment for anticipate HR needs
  4. More inclusion of protected groups through planned increases in
     workforce diversity.
  5. Better development of managerial talent

Scanning the External Environment

  1. Environmental Scanning
       a. The process of studying the environment of the organization to
           pinpoint opportunities and threats.
  2. Environment Changes Impacting HR
       a. Governmental regulations
       b. Economic conditions
       c. Geographic and competitive concerns
       d. Workforce composition

Internal Assessment of the Organizational Workforce

  1. Auditing Jobs and Skills
       a. What jobs exist now?
       b. How many individuals are performing each job?
       c. How essential is each job?
       d. What jobs will be needed to implement future organizational
           strategies?
       e. What are the characteristics of anticipated jobs?
  2. Organizational Capabilities Inventory
       a. HRIS databases—sources of information about employees’
           knowledge, skills, and abilities (KSAs)
       b. Components of an organizational capabilities inventory
                • Workforce and individual demographics
                • Individual employee career progression
                • Individual job performance data




Assessing HR Effectiveness
                                 269
                                                   Only for Private Circulation
International Business- Dr. R. Chandran



1. Diagnostic Measures of HR Effectiveness
      a. HR expense per employee
      b. Compensation as a percent of expenses
      c. HR department expense as a percent of total expenses
      d. Cost of hires
      e. Turnover rates
      f. Absenteeism rates
      g. Worker’s compensation per employee

1. HR Audit
     a. A formal research effort that evaluates the current state of HR
        management in an organization
     b. Audit areas:
            i. Legal compliance (e.g., EEO, OSHA, ERISA, and
               FMLA)
           ii. Current job specifications and descriptions
         iii. Valid recruiting and selection process
          iv. Formal wage and salary system • Benefits
           v. Employee handbook
          vi. Absenteeism and turnover control
         vii. Grievance resolution process
        viii. Orientation program
          ix. Training and development
           x. Performance management system




                                270
                                                  Only for Private Circulation

More Related Content

PDF
Internationalisation of indian comapnies
PPTX
Multinational Enterprises
PDF
Research paper The Role of MNCs in the Making of Globalization
PPT
Multinational corporations in the global economy final
PPT
PDF
International business dynamics
PPTX
MNCs in India & Criticism
PPT
presentation on multinational corporation
Internationalisation of indian comapnies
Multinational Enterprises
Research paper The Role of MNCs in the Making of Globalization
Multinational corporations in the global economy final
International business dynamics
MNCs in India & Criticism
presentation on multinational corporation

What's hot (20)

PDF
Beyond Asia - Strategies to support the quest for growth
 
PPTX
Multi National Corporation by Munish
DOCX
International business
PDF
Multinational
ODP
International entrepreneurship- an indian case study
PPT
Multinational corporations MNCs
PPTX
Multinational corporations (mnc)
PPTX
Multinational Companies...
PPTX
Mnc meaning growth origin
PPT
Challenges in mnc's ppt
PPT
PPTX
Multinational companies
PPTX
Multinational corporation IB
PPT
Mnc 1226082281842875-9
PPTX
Multinational companies
PDF
Oman India Trade & Investment Promotion Group
PPTX
MULTINATIONAL CORPURATION
PPTX
Beyond Asia - Strategies to support the quest for growth
 
Multi National Corporation by Munish
International business
Multinational
International entrepreneurship- an indian case study
Multinational corporations MNCs
Multinational corporations (mnc)
Multinational Companies...
Mnc meaning growth origin
Challenges in mnc's ppt
Multinational companies
Multinational corporation IB
Mnc 1226082281842875-9
Multinational companies
Oman India Trade & Investment Promotion Group
MULTINATIONAL CORPURATION
Ad

Similar to Chandran (20)

DOCX
Mgt assignment
PPT
01 int biz.theories session 1, 2 & 3
DOCX
Unit.1 Overview of International Business
PPTX
nature scope importance of international business
PPTX
IB Chapter 1 [Autosaved].pptx
PDF
Ibiii ibe
PDF
International business-environment-1220943187483599-8 (1)
PPT
IB CHAPTER chapter one for post gradute .ppt
DOC
International Business Environment Full Syllabus
PDF
Mgt520 international business (replace)
PDF
Inter.business
PPTX
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT.pptx
PDF
International business management
PPTX
Introduction to International Business
PPT
International Business Management Meaning,features,significance,modes of ent...
RTF
E:\Notes Of M Com 2\Converted Pdf Notes\International Business
PDF
403 ib International Business Environment course notes
DOCX
Thesis Statement
DOCX
WHAT IS INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS?
Mgt assignment
01 int biz.theories session 1, 2 & 3
Unit.1 Overview of International Business
nature scope importance of international business
IB Chapter 1 [Autosaved].pptx
Ibiii ibe
International business-environment-1220943187483599-8 (1)
IB CHAPTER chapter one for post gradute .ppt
International Business Environment Full Syllabus
Mgt520 international business (replace)
Inter.business
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT.pptx
International business management
Introduction to International Business
International Business Management Meaning,features,significance,modes of ent...
E:\Notes Of M Com 2\Converted Pdf Notes\International Business
403 ib International Business Environment course notes
Thesis Statement
WHAT IS INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS?
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
My India Quiz Book_20210205121199924.pdf
PDF
advance database management system book.pdf
PDF
Mucosal Drug Delivery system_NDDS_BPHARMACY__SEM VII_PCI.pdf
PPTX
Virtual and Augmented Reality in Current Scenario
PDF
ChatGPT for Dummies - Pam Baker Ccesa007.pdf
PPTX
Module on health assessment of CHN. pptx
PDF
BP 704 T. NOVEL DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS (UNIT 2).pdf
PDF
Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment .pdf
PDF
BP 704 T. NOVEL DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS (UNIT 1)
PDF
HVAC Specification 2024 according to central public works department
PPTX
Core Concepts of Personalized Learning and Virtual Learning Environments
PDF
Environmental Education MCQ BD2EE - Share Source.pdf
PDF
English Textual Question & Ans (12th Class).pdf
PPTX
ELIAS-SEZIURE AND EPilepsy semmioan session.pptx
PDF
David L Page_DCI Research Study Journey_how Methodology can inform one's prac...
PDF
Journal of Dental Science - UDMY (2021).pdf
PDF
MBA _Common_ 2nd year Syllabus _2021-22_.pdf
PDF
Complications of Minimal Access-Surgery.pdf
PPTX
What’s under the hood: Parsing standardized learning content for AI
DOCX
Cambridge-Practice-Tests-for-IELTS-12.docx
My India Quiz Book_20210205121199924.pdf
advance database management system book.pdf
Mucosal Drug Delivery system_NDDS_BPHARMACY__SEM VII_PCI.pdf
Virtual and Augmented Reality in Current Scenario
ChatGPT for Dummies - Pam Baker Ccesa007.pdf
Module on health assessment of CHN. pptx
BP 704 T. NOVEL DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS (UNIT 2).pdf
Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment .pdf
BP 704 T. NOVEL DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS (UNIT 1)
HVAC Specification 2024 according to central public works department
Core Concepts of Personalized Learning and Virtual Learning Environments
Environmental Education MCQ BD2EE - Share Source.pdf
English Textual Question & Ans (12th Class).pdf
ELIAS-SEZIURE AND EPilepsy semmioan session.pptx
David L Page_DCI Research Study Journey_how Methodology can inform one's prac...
Journal of Dental Science - UDMY (2021).pdf
MBA _Common_ 2nd year Syllabus _2021-22_.pdf
Complications of Minimal Access-Surgery.pdf
What’s under the hood: Parsing standardized learning content for AI
Cambridge-Practice-Tests-for-IELTS-12.docx

Chandran

  • 1. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 1. International Business: Meaning And Scope Interdependency is a natural phenomenon; nations, living beings and companies cannot totally depend on themselves. It is the major driving force for international business. Learning value: This chapter covers the essential aspects, 1. Definition of international business 2. Emergence of developing nations in international business 3. Motives of international business from companies and nations 4. Fundamental differences between Domestic and International business 5. Few successful organizations in Domestic & International business International business: Meaning and Scope In the post independence era, more than half-century Indian entrepreneurs concentrated on domestic operations and a surplus production was exported. The physical movement of goods, called EXPORT cannot represent International business. International business is defined as “any commercial transaction-taking place across the boundary lines of a sovereign entity”. It may take place either between countries or companies or both. Private companies involve themselves in such transactions for revenue, profit and prosperity. If governments are involved, they need to maintain their image, dependency and economic growth. Sometimes economic ties are strengthened through such transactions. These transactions include investments, physical movements of goods and services, transfer of technology and manufacturing. Today every company, whether small or large, single entity or partnership, joint stock or government owned, is determined to expand internationally. Earlier the slogan “export or perish” has now become “internationalize or perish”. 1 Only for Private Circulation
  • 2. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran International business has a wide spectrum of activities beyond mere exports. Currently Indian corporate acquire and takeover companies elsewhere. They invest a huge sum to find a right location for cost-effective production base. They are on the lookout for right joint-venture partners. Hence International business operations extend their dimensions. The future success of company will depend upon its operations in many other countries through investment, manufacturing and marketing and not only on the revenue generated indigenously. In the same way nations success will depend on the businessman operating successfully in other countries and establishing their credentials there. In the 1950’s and 60’s, companies form United States built business operations throughout the world and brought image to the nation. In 1970’s and 80’s, Japanese electronics and automobile companies made great revolution everywhere in the world. Why should we study International business? Three decades ago very few companies ventured in to international arena, and most of them restricted themselves to physical movement of goods and services i.e. exports and imports. Restrictions, regulations and other barriers prevented them to take risks. Today, the whole world is open. Duties, license quotas and other investment limitations have gradually been eliminated. Anyone can do business in any part of the world. Risk factors are properly analyzed and evaluated and information about them is abundant. The aspiring international businessman can go to anywhere and explore opportunities. In such a situation few key factors like finance flow or investment is a great force. To manage business internationally the right human resource is necessary and to manufacture goods, right technology is a pre-requisite. There should also be sizeable market to generate revenue. To manufacture goods in any country, raw material, components, consumables and capital items are required. Easy access to all the above is as easy as domestic procurement today. Hence scope of international business is widened. 2 Only for Private Circulation
  • 3. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran COMPANY OVERSEAS COUNTRY OF OPERATION ORIGIN KEY FACTORS FINANCE HUMAN RESOURCE TECHNOLOGY MATERIAL REFORM PROCESS Almost all countries are reforming their economy by LPG i.e. Liberalization, Privatization and Globalization. Many South East Asian nations, China, South Korea and a few Latin American countries were quick to introduce the reform process. India too, injected new vigour in to its economy and industry by introducing an open door policy, eliminating licenses, replacing foreign restrictions by other models and in general liberalizing procedures. It is clear that through reforming process, manufacturers in India are required to increase the production capacity and divert products to various destinations. Companies with surplus money should invest in different countries with motive of getting higher returns on their investment. Every business house such as Tatas, Birlas, Mittals, Mallayas have begin their aggressive operations abroad. 3 Only for Private Circulation
  • 4. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran STRENGTH OF HUMAN RESOURCES Countries like India have been endowed with efficient technical and non- technical human resources. Companies with their origin in India have proved themselves all over the world specially information technology, steel, healthcare, garments and jewellery. Today international business is growing at a fast pace. Countries, which until now did not ventured in to the international arena and untapped markets have emerged as potential ground for business. Latin America, sub-Saharan Africa and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) are favourite destinations of future prosperity. Trade policies announced by various governments in the world are positive, proactive and pragmatic. Autocracy, authoritarianism and despotism are disappearing in all parts of the world. International bodies, such as World Trade Organisation strongly advocate elimination of barriers. It is mandatory for professionals to understand the whole network of political, legal, competitive and socio-cultural aspects wherever the business is setup. When E-Merck set up a business unit in India, there was a need for five hundred professionals who understood drug price control order, in- process control system, food and drug administration and legal procedures, not only in India but in all countries in South Asia, Middle East and Africa. Hence, there will be an unprecedented demand for trained professional in the field of international business to handle business, investment, manpower, technology, services and marketing. To operate effectively, managers must understand modes, functions, means, environments, growth opportunities and risk factors. To this end they need to have access to a strong information base. To integrate all resources and produce a cost-effective product it in to revenue a strong professional force is directly involved at all stages. Thus a large force of trained manpower is required to handle future international business in all countries. Proper understanding of culture, economic indications, infrastructure, cost of operation, political scenario and working condition will make effective manager in international business in any country. 4 Only for Private Circulation
  • 5. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran REASONS TO ENTER INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS All organizations, irrespective of their size, are keen to enter in to international business. Established companies are expanding their business. Many countries encourage trade, and removal of strangulating trade barriers. It motivates companies to aggressively multiply their targets. The governments of various countries are also determined to make their economy grow through international business that has therefore become a inevitable part of their economic policy. The objective behind international business can be looked at: 1. From an individual company’s angle. 2. From the government angle. From an individual company’s angle 1. Managing the product life cycle: All companies have products, which pass through different stages of their life cycles. After the product reaches the last stage of the life cycle called the declining stage in one country, it is important for the company to identify other countries where the whole cycle process could be encashed. For example, Enfield India reached maturity and declining stage in India for the 350 cc motorcycle. The company entered Kenya, West Indies, Mauritius and other destinations where the heavy engine two-wheeler became popular. The Suzuki 800 cc vehicle reached the last stage of its life cycle in Japan and entered India in the early 1980’s, where it is still doing good business today. HP laptops are moving all the developing countries the moment they reached maturity in the U.S. market. 2. Geographic expansion as a growth strategy: Even if companies expand their business at home, they may still look overseas for new markets and better prospects. For example, Arvind mills expanded their business by either setting up units or opening 5 Only for Private Circulation
  • 6. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran warehouses abroad. Ranbaxy’s growth is mainly attributed to geographic expansion every year to new territories. Arabindo Pharma, Cipla and Dr. Reddys follow the same. 3. The adventurous spirit of the younger generation The younger generation of business families has considerable International exposure. They are willing to take risks and challenges And also create opportunities for their business. Laxmi Mittal has Emerged as the steel king of the world and Vijay Mallya of the UB Group took a major risk in setting up operations in South Africa. Kumar Birla expands to Australia and Europe through acquisitions. 4. Corporate ambition: Every corporate in the country has strategic plans to multiply its sales turnover. In case some of the ventures fail, others will offset the losses because of multi-location operations. For example, Coco Cola is still to day not earning any profit in a number of countries. But this will not affect the company because more than a hundred countries are contributing to offset losses. Kellogge cannot think of profits in India for further five years. They are ambitious to be visible and then revenue. 5. Technology advantage: Some companies have outstanding technology through which they enjoy core competency. There is a need for such technology in all countries. Biocon, Infosys, Gharda chemicals are known for their core competency in biotechnology, IT and pesticides respectively and a huge demand exists throughout the world for their technology. Thermax, Ion Exchange, Bharat Heavy Electricals and Larsen & Toubro have marched ahead in International business. 6. Building a corporate image Prior to profits and revenue generation, many companies first build their corporate image abroad. Once the image is built, generating revenues is a comparatively easy task. Samsung and LG built their 6 Only for Private Circulation
  • 7. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran image in India for the first three years and generation of revenue and profits has been considerable, as they have expanded to semi-urban and rural India as well. Today their market share and penetration levels have gone far ahead of other players in India. 7. Incentives and business impact Companies, which are involved in international business, enjoy fiscal, physical and infrastructural incentives while they setup business in the host country. The Aditya Birla Group enjoyed such incentives in Thailand and Indonesia. All such incentives contribute to the company to enjoy multiple advantages like economies of scale, access to import inputs, competitive pricing and aggressive promotion. 8. Lobour advantage Many companies have a highly productive lobour force. Their unique skills may not be available throughout the world. Manufacturing units in India have consistently performed well, whether in a diamond industry, handicraft, woodwork or leather. Companies nurture the skills of the artisans and win world markets. Knitwear, handlooms, embroidery, metal ware, carpet weaving, cashew processing and seafood call for cost-effective lobour force. India is endowed with such skills. 9. New business opportunities Many companies have entered in to business abroad, seeing unlimited opportunities. National foreign trade policy emphasizes focus markets. Enormous amount of growth potential is untapped in Latin America, Sub-Saharan Africa, CIS countries and China. 10. Emergence of SEZ’S, EOU’S, AEZ Current approvals of Special economic zones, Agrizones and Technology parks by Ministry of Commerce & Industry give new dimensions to international business. The companies setting up units in SEZ’s enjoy innumerable benefits and competitiveness. 7 Only for Private Circulation
  • 8. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran From a Government Angle 1. Earning valuable foreign exchange Foreign exchange earning is necessary to balance the payments for imports. India imports crude oil, defense equipments, essential raw materials and medical equipments for which the payments have to be made in foreign exchange. If the exports are high and imports are low it indicates a surplus balance of payment. On the other hand if imports are high and exports are low it indicates an adverse balance of payment, which all economies would want to avoid. A vast majority of the nations in the world are facing adverse balance of payment. 2. Interdependency of nations From time immemorial, nations have depended on each other. Even during the era of Indus valley civilization, Egypt and the Indus Valley depended on each other for various items. Today, India depends on the Gulf regions for crude oil and in turn the Gulf region depends on India for tea, rice etc. Developed countries depend on developing countries for primary goods, whereas developing countries depend on developed countries for value added finished products. No single country is endowed with all the resources to survive on her own. 3. Trade theories and their impact The theories of absolute advantage, comparative advantage and competitive advantage, which have been propounded by classical economists, indicate that a few nations have certain advantages of resources. The resources may be in the form of labour or infrastructure or technology or even a proactive policy of the government. Such theories are remaining foundations till today, for international business practices with few changes and trends. 8 Only for Private Circulation
  • 9. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 4. Diplomatic relations Diplomacy and trade always go hand in hand. Many sovereign nations send their diplomatic representatives to other countries with a motive of promoting trade besides maintaining cordial relations. Indian diplomats in Latin America have done a remarkable job of promoting India’s business in the 1990’s. Indian embassies and high commissions in all the countries around the world play a catalytic role of promoting trade and investment. 5. Core competency of nations Many countries are endowed with resources, which are produced at an optimum level. Such countries can compete well anywhere in the world. Rubber products from Malaysia, knitwear from India, rice from Thailand and wool from Australia are a few illustrations. Competing with a focused competency in any major resource or technology gives core competency status. India’s core competency in IT is known throughout the world. 6. Investment for infrastructure Over the years all countries have invested huge amounts of money on infrastructure by building airports, seaports, economic zones and inland container terminals. If the trade activities do not increase, the country cannot recover the amounts invested. Hence, the government fixes targets for every infrastructure unit and time frame to achieve it. Economies like Mauritius, Hong Kong, Singapore, Malta and Cyprus invest in trade related infrastructure in order to elevate themselves to be foreign trade oriented economies. Infrastructure and international business are the two eyes of a growing economy. 7. National image A new era has emerged from conquering countries by sword to winning it by trade. A businessman gives priority to the image of the country he belongs to. We come across products with labels such as 9 Only for Private Circulation
  • 10. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran “made in China” and “Japan” & “made in India”. Businessmen from India, China and Japan bring credentials to their country. When L.N.Mittal operaters in Indonesia or Kazakhstan or Trinidad he is perceived by the people as Indian. The stigma cannot be detached. 8. Foreign trade policy and targets All developing countries announce their trade policies. A clear road map is drafted and given to promotional bodies so that timely implementation is possible. Every trade policy in India, in the past had its agenda and action plans right from import control order in 1947. All the trade policies had three fold objectives in their agenda- production promotion and competitiveness. 9. National targets By the year 2010, India aims to have a 2% share of the global market from the current level of 1%. By the year 2009-10, our trade status should cross $ 500 billion. 10. WTO and international agencies The apex body of world trade, the WTO, a free, transparent and regulatory body upholds provisions related to the elimination of tariffs and non-tariff barriers. The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD), popularly called the World Bank extends financial assistance on a soft loan basis in order to assist developing countries in their infrastructure and industrial development. The International Monetary Fund (IMF) maintains currency stability in various countries through regulatory mechanisms. Many more organizations like International Maritime Organization, International Standard Organization, International Telecommunication Union, International Civil Aviation Organization are major catalysts to promote trade between nations. Over the past few years their role in promotion of trade, especially amongst developing economies is unprecedented. 10 Only for Private Circulation
  • 11. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Fundamental differences between DOMESTIC BUSINESS OPERATIONS AND INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS OPERATIONS Many well-known business units are highly successful in their home countries. However, they are not able to face the challenges abroad. On the other hand there are organizations that do very well in international business but they lose out in local arena. There are a number of organizations that do business, both domestic and international, successfully, by properly allocating right resources in right countries. These organizations are quick to see the advantages and disadvantages involved in both operations. If business is slow in the home country, they concentrate more on international business, and if risk is high in international business they focus their attention on the domestic front. Understanding differences and deciding policies and strategies enable organizations to succeed or fail. There are certain similarities between domestic and international business in terms of broad objectives and goals of the company, namely: 1. Generating revenue- either by creating opportunities or by optimizing strengths 2. Corporate image building 3. Customer satisfaction and building loyalty as patronage buyers 4. Carrying out their operations respecting and adhering to local regulations 5. Generation of employment opportunities 6. Both are subject to a set code of conduct and ethics that includes corporate governance. 7. Mass production through cost reduction and achieving economies of scale 8. Building a strong network in order to make product and services available in any part of the nation or world 9. Adapting new standards and change in style and function. At the same time, there are major macro level differences. These are analyzed below, under various parameters. 11 Only for Private Circulation
  • 12. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran DOMESTIC BUSINESS VERSUS INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS Domestic Business International Business Dimension Operations Operations The environment is not fully known. The economic, political, legal, Innumerable hidden factors which may 1.Environment socio-cultural, competitive and emerge any time to pose as problems. technology environments are known They will lead to pitfalls. Only long term planning and strategy Can be worked out for short terms 2. Plan and strategy will work. Strategic inputs are required and carried forward to long term in multiples. The maximum domestic competitive 3. Competitive International competitive forces play a forces operate and one can forces and their vital role and its difficult to understand understand their movements as they intensity their motive and movement are visible Local currency is used for Transactions are carried out in various transactions. Costing, pricing, currencies. Fluctuations in cross revenue and margins are computed 4. Currencies and currency movement and associated risks in a single currency. Volatility may their movements are common. Currency fluctuation have a minimum impact in business influences pricing and costing and in short term. One can overcome investment decisions. easily. Comparatively one can predict Very difficult to predict and risks may future risks and shocks and they will crop up at any time, due to the political 5. Business risks not have a major impact on the situation, the society itself and several businesses with strong background. unknown factors. It is reasonable and easy to conduct Very expensive and difficult to conduct. business research, demand analysis Reliability criteria depends on 6. Research and customer surveys. It is also individual countries and there is no reliable. uniformity in the output and findings. Due to past laurels and established Multilingual, multi-strategic and multi- systems, corporates can succeed cultural human resources and they even if the human resources have 7. Human resources should be able to withstand large risks. minimum skills and knowledge. Every individual is profit center, hence, Team commitments is evaluated and accountable. appraised Narrowed down to work in a single Broadened to cover many countries and 8. Organizational country with a steady growth geographic and cultural diversity may vision and objective objective. Each one will understand influence the vision and objective. the vision and objective easily. Adapted to the local environment, as Varies from country to country subject 9. Product and per the requirements of the domestic to regulations. This is especially true for usage customers affordability, beliefs, consumer & medicinal items. values, cultural elements and buying Standardization, adaptability, usage 12 Only for Private Circulation
  • 13. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran behavior. pattern & warranties are parts of product International regulations and host Only local regulations are fully country regulations are applicable. applicable to conduct business. Advanced countries impose strict 10. Legal aspects There is minimum adherence to regulations compared to LDCs. Strict international regulations related to adherence to contractual obligations is IPR. common. Depending on the size of the All overseas operations except exports, business one can start with a call for huge investments to set up and 11. Investment and minimum investment. Involvement expand the business in many countries. Sourcing of regulatory bodies is minimal. Special regulatory bodies are involved Individual ability and repayment in the process since foreign currency is terms determine the funds. transacted. A majority of companies use cost Companies use marginal cost pricing or 12. Pricing strategy plus margin pricing or competitive transfer pricing or competitive pricing to pricing. succeed. Government or market practice governs The business house can use its the distribution channel. Cash and carry, 13. Distribution discretion to select any channel to shopping malls and mail order services channels reach the customer. No restriction are becoming popular in international exists here. business. Different countries have different Advertising, personal selling and restrictions. For example, other promotional methods are not advertisements for liquor and cigarettes 14. Promotion restricted through strict legal are not permitted in some countries and framework if they are not socially campaigns using female models are objectionable. banned in others. International players with advanced Domestic players are involved in all technology and systems are involved. 15. Logistics the activities. The cost of logistics is Proportionately, the cost is low for very high locally. physical movements. Some business groups like Adanis started only overseas operations without any linkage with domestic operation right from the beginning. Tata group established a good name at home country and gradually moved to other countries. For companies in IT, such as Wipro or Infosys, the major focus is on overseas operations. All the companies cited as examples above are successful in their own right, but the strategies and operation systems differ from country to country. Organizations like RELIANCE INDUSTRIES have inherent strength in indigenous business such as completing the project prior to stipulated time. This experience enables the company to grab any business 13 Only for Private Circulation
  • 14. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran opportunity in petrochemicals around the world and build reputation. Gammon India, IRCON (Indian Railway Construction), Larsen & Toubro (L&T) and Sapoorji Pallonji are successful due to their meticulous way of understanding both operations. 14 Only for Private Circulation
  • 15. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 2.Methods of Entry in International Business For every human being or business unit, the origin is one, but, the laurels are built in multiples and that too, in various destinations. The vision, business models, right decisions and proper implementations have created business enterprises in the and in the contemporary world. Learning value International business provides a wide range of advantages and opportunities. Companies in developing and less developed countries operate through physical exports, whereas those in advance countries operate through joint ventures, collaborations, franchises and other methods. Firms would prefer to go international only if the benefits surpass anticipated risks, and they carry out an in-depth analysis before entering international business. Generally, they give serious consideration on the following aspects: a. Current and potential size of the market. b. Level of completion for a specific product or service c. Economic growth of the country and reform process d. Purchasing power of the people e. Political and legal environments and their impact in business f. Infrastructures like banking, insurance, port facilities etc g. Socio-cultural background of the country h. Availability of technical and non-technical work force i. Foreign exchange reserve and repatriation facilities 15 Only for Private Circulation
  • 16. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran DIFFERENT MODES OF ENTRY IN INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS 1. EXPORTS Export deals with physical movement of goods and services from one place to another through a customs port followings the rules of both the country of origin and country of destination. Depending upon the involvement of the exporter, exports can be classified as direct or indirect. Direct exporters export their goods and services in their own name and the buyer directly remits proceeds, in a proper manner and through a proper channel. The proper channel means that the remittance is made through the banking channel in the currency, which is quoted in the invoice, and the proper channel means that the goods are legally exported through a customs port. Indirect exporters supply goods to direct exporters. Lack of expertise, international contacts and manpower cause them to depend upon direct exporters. Farmers rarely export grains on their own. Artisans cannot develop international contacts to clinch business deals. Therefore, they become indirect exporters. Their products are to other countries but not in their names. Exporters can be classified in several ways: 1. Depending upon the size of business, they are classified as small and large exporters. Current national trade policy provides incentives and facilities to promote both small & large exporters in different ways that are status holders due to their performance in earning foreign exchange. 2. Depending upon the product lines exported, they are classified as single product and multiple product line 3. Depending upon their legal status, they are classified as proprietary, partnership, private limited and public limited companies 4. Depending upon the destination of their exports, they are classified as single destinations or multi destination exporters. Nowadays, the majority of the companies adopt the philosophy of multi product, multi location, multi strategic, and multi dimensional operations. 16 Only for Private Circulation
  • 17. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 5. Depending upon the frequency of their exports, they are classified as occasional exporters and dynamic exporters. EXPORT INVOLVEMENT DIRECT INDIRECT EXPORTERS EXPORTERS Own name and beneficiary Not on there own name but supply to direct exporters CLASSIFICATIONS SIZE PRODUCT LEGAL DESTINATION FREQUENCY LINE STATUS PARTNER PUBLIC SHIP PVT LTD LTD SMALL LARGE PROPRIETARY OCASSIONAL BRISK SINGLE MULTI PRODUCT PRODUCT SINGLE MULTIPLE 17 Only for Private Circulation
  • 18. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 2. INTERNATIONAL LICENSING International licensing is an agreement between the licensor and the licensee over a period of time for the use of brand name, marketing, know-how, copyright, work method and trade mark by paying a license fee. For example, British American Tobacco Company (BATS) has given licenses in many countries for the manufacture of their brand of cigarettes “555”. In India, ITC is the licensed producer of “555”. Pepsi cola licensed to Heineken of the Netherlands giving them the exclusive right to produce and sell Pepsi cola in Netherlands. The licensor has minimum involvement in day-to-day functions. Therefore the returns are also comparatively low. Licensing specifies the territory as well as period. The licensor gives such permission after establishing such a command-able position globally. It has a brand command. Licensing Concept and Practice Licensor Country A License Fee Country B Licensee Manufacture and Market One or more countries as per agreement 18 Only for Private Circulation
  • 19. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Licensing Process PROVIDE THE RIGHT TO USE INTELLECTUAL RECEIVES ROYALTY LICENSOR PROPERTY AND BRAND MONEY NAME USE THE INTELLECTUAL PAYS ROYALTY TO THE LICENSEE PROPERTY TO PRODUCE LICENSOR FOR USING PRODUCTS FOR SALE IN HIS INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY COUNTRY AND BRAND AND BRAND NAME 3. FRANCHISING Franchising is a form of licensing wherein the franchiser exercises more control over franchisee. The franchiser supplies the main part of the product, and provides the following services to the franchisee: 1. TRADEMARKS 2. OPERATING SYSTEMS 3. PRODUCT, & 4. BRAND NAME Company support systems like advertising, training of employees, quality assurance are also involved in franchising. McDonald, Dairy Queen, Domino’s Pizza and KFC are the known franchise brands. NIIT & Aptech have appointed franchisees in Africa, south East Asia, Gulf countries and China. Hotels like The Hilton and Marriott are well known operators in hotel sector. Jatia’s in India are the national franchisees of McDonalds. All the investments on premises, HR, operations and promotions are totally borne by the franchisees. In practice the franchiser is determined to maintain a standard throughout the world in terms of quality brand logo and symbol. But the product is adaptable depending on the socio-cultural background of the country. McDonalds sells BEEF BURGERS in Russia & VEG BURGERS in India. 19 Only for Private Circulation
  • 20. International Business- Dr. R.creator with Well-known Chandran brand command can become strong franchiser FRANCHISE R En cashes on the past & present efforts FRANCHISEE FEE SELECT FRNCHISEE Invests on all the resources Sometimes the franchisers initiate the process where the economy is on boom. In many developing nations, franchisees initiate the process and they are forced to bear all the expenses. 4. CONTRACT MANUFACTURING Many companies outsource their products and concentrate mainly on marketing operations. Contract manufacturing is the strategy of identifying a manufacturing unit to produce items at a competitive price in any part of the world. Nike is procuring its athletic footwear in a number of factories in South East Asia. Mega Toys is sourcing from China. Hundreds of international companies with their origin in European countries have selected manufacturing centers in India, China and South East Asia. Mark and Spencer, J.C. penny, Target and H & M have contract manufacturing arrangements in many parts of the world. Contract manufacturing with a dimension in the service sector offer ample opportunities for Indian companies in the form of BUSINESS PROCESS OUTSOURCING (BPO) and KNOWLEDGE PROCESS OUTSOURCING (KPO). All the developed nations are becoming end user of outsourced products and services of developing nations. 20 Only for Private Circulation
  • 21. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran A well-known marketing company Supply Selects Manufacturers- China/India/SEA 5. CONTRACT MARKETING All the companies, which are strong in production, may not have equal marketing strengths. However, they may be comfortable dealing with marketing outlets around the world such as TESCO, Maeys, ‘K’ Mart, Wal-Mart and Spinneys. Such manufacturing units enter in to a marketing agreement and concentrate more on production at lower costs. Thermax, Ion Exchange and Supreme industries have selected marketing firms in other countries, which have a good background with technology support. Majority of technology-based companies essentially have to identify competent organizations with marketing infrastructure to aggressively promote their products or projects. Many Indian companies are contract marketers for Germany based medical equipments, dental care items and hearing aids. Their contractual obligations include TARGETS & TERRITORIES. A well-known manufacturer in India Selects Marketer in GCC with technical support Territorial rights with commitment 21 Only for Private Circulation
  • 22. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 6. MANAGEMENT CONTRACTS Companies with a low level of technology and managerial expertise may seek the assistance of foreign countries. A management contract is an agreement between two companies whereby one company provides managerial and technical assistance for which proper monetary compensation is given, either as a flat lump sum fee or a percentage on the sales or a share in the profits. Delta airlines, Air France and KLM offer such services in developing countries. Exxon is a major operator in Gulf region in the field of oil exploration. 7. JOINT VENTURE VENTURE ORIGINATES FROM ADVENTURE, which means NEW, either market or technology or environment. A joint venture is a binding contract between two venture partners to set up a project either in home country or host country or a third country. In this case both parties are committed to joint risk taking and joint profit sharing. For example, The Taj group of hotels has a joint venture in Russia for setting up Five Star Hotels. Mahindra & Mahindra has recently entered in to a joint venture with Renault to manufacture cars. Partner one from Partner two from Country A Country B New Venture Joint commitment A large number of joint ventures have been miserable failures in the past. In the initial stage every venture promises excellent opportunities to both the venture partners. However, when the operation actually starts, certain functional level grievances and issues become inevitable. Therefore, it is 22 Only for Private Circulation
  • 23. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran absolutely necessary for both the venture partners to understand all the aspects of management, investment and regulations of the countries where they operate. The business units should have clear guidelines and operation manuals wherein the role of every one should be clearly defined. Hence, a joint venture is nothing but a “marriage binding” between two partners from different backgrounds with an understanding, commitment and mutually rewarding experience to work together. 8. COLLABORATION While a joint venture deals with the project in totality, in financial terms and the proportionate partnership commitments, Collaboration deals with only a part of the functions. For example Bajaj Auto has technological collaboration with Kawasaki of Japan, who offers the technology for two wheelers. Others well known technological collaborations are Ind-Suzuki, Kinetic-Honda and Hero-Honda. All the developing countries encourage technology collaborations. The investors in the US, Japan, Germany and UK enjoyed the fruits by offering technical expertise to the developing nations. The world famous Kellogg Business School has collaborated with the Indian school of business (ISB) in Hyderabad, by offering teaching methodology. Likewise, there may be financial collaborations, HR collaborations, systems collaborations and strategic collaborations. The common term used for collaboration is TIE-UP. 9. FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT The flow of funds from one destination to another is called investment. Companies, which are constantly involved in international business, invest their money in manufacturing and marketing bases through ownership and control. Kellogg, Pepsi, Coca Cola and the Hyatt group of hotels are willing to invest even if the profits are expected after a long gestation period. Currently every developing country is formulating strategies by offering ample amount of incentives to attract investments. 23 Only for Private Circulation
  • 24. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Any Country Investor Money Projects/Technology/ Trade Short term/Long term ROI Foreign firms adopt certain methods as mentioned below: a. They control the operations through subsidiaries to achieve strategic synergies. b. They have control through technology, manufacturing expertise, intellectual property rights and brand name. c. One permanent person or a team in the country of operation is appointed to monitor day to day operations. The most attractive part of the operation is the direct investment, which contributes to optimization of resources in the host country, generating employment opportunities and enhancing the standard of living in the host country. The other major developments, which have taken place during the past two decades, are exposure of the host countries to advance technology and quality products. It is boon to the host country since capital is great resource it is coming through investment. The main disadvantages are lack of clarity of repatriation of profits, imposition of restrictions by host countries and elimination of small and medium industries due to the financial power of the investor. A number of South American countries like Argentina and few South East Asian nations like Indonesia fell pray to the dominant forces of overseas investors. They feel that the old colonialism may re-emerge through investments. Generally, a foreign investment takes place on full swing in developing countries only in the past two decades. China, Taiwan, India, Brazil, Argentina and other developing countries have started attracting huge foreign investments. If it takes place in specific sectors like infrastructure, mining, marine technology and agro processing, it is highly beneficial to both the host country and investor. 24 Only for Private Circulation
  • 25. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 10. MERGERS AND ACQISITIONS In this case the company in the host country selects a foreign company merges itself with it. The foreign company acquires the control of ownership. This mode of entry gives an outstanding competitive edge over others. Such companies strengthen their international manufacturing facilities and marketing network. Proctor & Gamble entered Mexico and became leaders in five years by acquiring Loreto. Tata bearing acquired Metal Box in India. It is an easy and fast method since the cost of acquisition is comparatively low. At the same time the disadvantages are: a. It is a complex task involving banks, lawyers, bureaucrats and obviously politicians. b. The host countries may impose restrictions on acquisitions. c. The labour problem is a big challenge to acquisitions specially in developing countries where unemployment is a critical issue. The global STEEL-KING L.N.Mittal was successful right from the first acquisition of steel mill in Indonesia. Many other acquisitions followed in Trinidad, Kazakhstan, Hungary and others. The recent Aditya Birla Group Company Hindalco acquisition of Novelis has strengthened its production synergy and market access for non-ferrous category in the international market. 11. TAKE-OVERS This is a strategy whereby a company identifies a healthy unit with strong brand name and network and brings it under the management of another unit in order to become a leader in the field and guarantee success. Since there may be many parties wanting to takeover a well-known company, competition becomes inevitable. It is obvious that only one entity will win and the winner has to withstand hostilities. Therefore, the process is called a “hostile take over” and the winner is called the “take over tycoon”. Well- known examples are the Hindujas who took over Ashok Leyland and Uniliver who took over Brook Bond and Lipton. Take-over is also on different levels, such as company takeover, business takeover, product takeover and brand takeover. Some takeovers in the past have made many corporate success stories. For example, Uniliver’s take over of Brook Bond and Lipton enhanced its position as a leader in the tea industry in India. Always takeovers cost more as compared to acquisition but probability of success is high. 25 Only for Private Circulation
  • 26. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran FOREIGN ENTRY DECISION FOR MNCs Exploit competitive advantage through entry abroad Produce at Home and Produce Abroad Export Licensing or Management Maintain Control over Contracts assets abroad Majority or Wholly owned Joint Venture affiliate Build from scratch Acquire or Merge or Takeover For all the decisions the company has to analyse the opportunities and risk factors, future potential and long term prospects available in the destination. Once the entry is wrong, a major pitfall occurs in one country of the entry level, it may cause a major damage to the company. Entry of ENRON in INDIA was one such incident one cannot forget. 26 Only for Private Circulation
  • 27. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 12. TURNKEY PROJECTS A turnkey project is a contract under which a company is fully involved from concept to completion. It covers right from supply of manpower, capital, and erection of plant, installation and commissioning up to the trial operation of a project. The turnkey project contractors either get a fixed fee or the cost plus profits are collected over a period of time. Today, infrastructure projects like power plants, airports, refineries, railway lines, highways and dams are undertaken on a turnkey basis. Bechtel, Brown Bovery, Hyundai, Mitsubishi, L&T and Daewoo are turnkey contractors for international projects. They use terms like BOT (Build, Operate and Transfer) and BOOT (Build, Own, Operate and Transfer) depending upon the level of involvement and obligations. Whenever turnkey project contractor is capable of cutting costs on material and manpower or finances or speed of completion: every component increases profitability. 27 Only for Private Circulation
  • 28. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Mode of Operation and Benefits to International Companies EXPORTS EXPORT PROCEEDS JOINT VENTURE PROFIT SHARE/DIVIDEND ACQUISITION/TAKE OVER PROFIT REPATRIATION HOME HOST COUNTRY COUNTRY (SENDER) LICENSING/FRANCHISING (RECEIVER) LICENSE FEE/FRANCHISE FEE TURNKEY PROJECT PACKAGE DEAL FDI RETURN ON INVESTMENT 28 Only for Private Circulation
  • 29. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 13. COUNTER TRADE In all the above operations, foreign exchange is necessary for transactions. For exports, the supplier gets the proceeds in foreign exchange. For joint ventures, profits are shared in foreign exchange. For international licensing, the license fee is paid in foreign exchange. The current challenge to many international business organizations is to get payments in foreign currency. A vast majority of the countries in the world do not have the necessary reserves of foreign exchange to remit. However they can still be actively involved in international business, by using COUNTER TRADE mechanism. Counter trade came in to existence in the absence of foreign exchange reserves in a country. Sometimes the country is not willing to pay, though foreign exchange reserves are with it. Such unwillingness will lead to non-repatriation of payment. Ultimate solution is to enter in to counter trade practices. Counter trade can be classified in to three categories: 1. Pure Barter 2. Buy Back 3. Counter Purchase Counter Trade Pure Barter Buy Back Counter Purchase Product to Buy from the Change of product host partner in destinations exchange setting up unit till finding FOREX 29 Only for Private Circulation
  • 30. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Pure Barter In this system goods and services are mutually exchanged between two countries depending upon their bargaining strength. A country with surplus products can finalize deals with another country that has a shortage of the same range of products. At the same time, the second country may have a surplus of a different range of products, which are in short supply in the first country. Hence, both countries can exchange their products by fixing a price in advance for a given period of time. This age old system that was prevalent during the era of ancient civilizations is being practiced currently. The Indus Valley supplied timber for maritime activities to Mohenjadaro and Harappa. The same practice has re-emerged with sophisticated pre fixation of value. Pure barter is defined as “the mutual exchange of goods and services between two countries depending upon their bargaining strength, in order that both the countries enjoy the benefits”. For example Russia supplied newsprint and crude oil to India for decades, and in turn India supplied tea, garments, medicines and tobacco products to Russia at a comparatively low price, thus enabling both countries to enjoy the advantages. Buy Back A buy back is an arrangement by which the home country representative sets up a project in the host country, which does have sufficient foreign exchange reserves to fully pay for the project to the supplier. The project amount is partially paid in foreign exchange and the remaining amount is paid in kind. Usually, the home country representative comparatively at low price purchases the end product of the same project. This can be marketed in the home country or it could even be diverted to a third country in order to maximize the profit margin. Buy back arrangements have become popular since many turnkey project contractors get greater benefits by marketing the end product in any part of the world at a higher margin. Bharat Heavy Electricals (BHEL) sets up projects in other countries. Partially it gets the payment in foreign exchange. For the balance amount it takes back tankers from the host country and markets them in any other country and also brings them back to India to sell at a higher price. Such deals enable the home country businesses to get international exposure very fast. The host country is an ultimate beneficiary since the project is locate in and owned by it. At 30 Only for Private Circulation
  • 31. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran the same time, it need not have to pay the full sum of money necessary to invest in the project. COUNTER PURCHASE This is a method, wherein company A from country A supplies product X to country B. Country B, which has a surplus of product Y, compensates by supplying it to company A, which finds a market for e product Y, say country C. Country C sells a product Z to a country D, which has sufficient foreign exchange to pay for it. Country D can then pay country C, and finally country A collects payment routed through company B and C. Thus purchasing takes place against supply until a country, which has sufficient foreign exchange reserves is found. He transaction. Many multinationals use this system to make large amounts of money at every stage of For example, Pepsi International supplies rice to South Africa from India. From South Africa it procures steel equivalent to the amount of rice collects and supplies it to Ghana. From Ghana, it procures coffee and cocoa equivalent to the steel imports and sells them to Canada, which has sufficient foreign exchange reserves to pay for them. By appointing one representative or employee the company can carry out routine functions deals in the Far East are Marubeni Corporation, Mitsubishi and Majuko. The age-old economic theory of inter-dependency of nations has been redefined with the counter purchase mechanism. Today, to trade with other countries, it is not necessary that the country in question has to have sufficient foreign exchange reserves. Without foreign exchange reserve one can continue trade. The model on the next page shows the benefits that both the home country and the host country enjoy on successful completion of the transactions undertaken. Today, anyone can do business with any country. Foreign exchange as a medium of transaction had a dominant role in all the countries in the past. Due to counter purchase mechanism very few countries with foreign exchange reserve can comfortably contribute to international business. 31 Only for Private Circulation
  • 32. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 3.Key Factors Influencing International Business Analyzing similarities and dissimilarities prevalent in countries gives wisdom; selecting a country for business enkindles spirit and minimizing risks knocks the door of success. Learning value: This chapter highlights the major factors influencing the direction of international business; 1. Importance of environmental factors 2. Economic environment 3. Social environment 4. Political environment 5. Cultural environment 6. Technological environment 7. Legal environment 8. Competitive environment A pilot has to check the atmosphere prior to take-off and landing his aircraft. A sailor has to understand waters & before sailing peacefully. A farmer has to plant seeds depending on the nature of the soil and monsoon. On the same line, an international business entry or operation depends upon multiple environmental factors. They may change the direction, strategy and every moment of international business operations. Prior to going deep in to the topic, we can ask ourselves few questions and seek answers. 32 Only for Private Circulation
  • 33. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran a. Why ENRON could not succeed in India? b. What is the major hindrance for success of Kellogg in India? c. Why KFC has not made any break through in India as it did in other countries? d. What made Whirlpool & Caterpillar stop business in India? An international marketer is required to understand, evaluate and work out various parameters before venturing into any country. These Parameters are called environmental factors and they determine the direction and purpose of the international business operation. Many decisions depend upon environmental factors right from selection of the country, location of the plant, liaison with the government, and entry of investment from local bodies, product launch, channel management, promotion and opening of outlets. The first challenge for an organization is to navigate from its home country to the host country. Thereafter it has to develop a proper system so that the venture is successful in the host country; learn all about the regulatory bodies both in the host country and home country; understand the customer’s changing tastes and attitude towards foreign goods and finally obtain revenue and make the business effective with right people. A majority of the multinational corporations and large business houses appoint a team of experts who are specialists in economies, political science, sociology, industrial psychology and policy matters, to advice the management on its strategic decisions. These experts are called risk analysts. Prior to entry or investing millions of dollars, the experts gather all the relevant information about the country and interpret those facts to facilitate the company. By such risk analysis, companies can safeguard themselves from future dangers. The major risks are: 1. Political 2. Economic 3. Exchange 4. Socio culture 5. Financial 6. Legal 7. Technological 8. Competitive 33 Only for Private Circulation
  • 34. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 9. Infrastructural and 10. Labour. An organization can overcome the effects of all the risks by taking into account the different environmental factors. Since the home environment is known, one can understand and overcome the pitfalls in the event that any action goes wrong. The international business related environments vary from continent, country to country and even from region to region. A detailed and comprehensive analysis of such fast changing environment is essential for formulating business strategies. Even well known companies with financial power, advance technology and an efficient management team have failed in other countries. Examples are the Enron project which did not take off in India; American style of managing a sales force which never worked for Procter and Gamble in Japan; the multilayer marketing technique of Amway, which did not work in South Korea and Kentucky Fried chicken and McDonald’s hamburgers, which failed in Brazil and Tashkent respectively. Thus, it is important for a company to have an international team to design strategies to suit varying environments of different countries. In this chapter we discuss the environmental factors relevant to international business. The economic environment, political environment, cultural environment, technological environment, legal environment and competitive environment play a vital role in determining an international business operation. Certain environments are quite conducive to a company at the time of entry and later on they may pose major challenges. Argentina attracted huge investments before 2000. After 2002, they became detrimental to innumerable organizations. Hence environmental factors could be stimulant or detrimental. If it is stimulant, the business will flourish. But if it is detrimental, then the company has to be cautious. ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT: The economic environment can be classified into three categories: a) Economy in the home country b) Economy in the host country c) Economy at a global level. 34 Only for Private Circulation
  • 35. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran a) Home country Economy Since 1940, hundreds of MNCs from the USA have ventured abroad, with the support of their home country. After 1990, many Indian companies started venturing into sub-Saharan Africa, South East Asia and Latin America due to the liberal policies adopted in India. In order to encourage the business community to venture overseas, it is necessary for a country to have liberal economic and trade policies. 1. Economic policies The country’s economic policies are formulated and the targets are fixed looking at business opportunities in other countries. It is made simpler for businessmen to invest or set up units abroad. 2. Trade and commercial policies: The trade policy is announced by the ministry of commerce and industry and the target for nSational foreign trade is fixed. All the promotional bodies are geared to achieve the target. Many incentives are held out to overseas companies, so that they set up operations in the home country through local partners, Indonesia, Thailand and Brazil extend all facilities in their home country to promote their nationals. 3. Promotion and regulatory measures: The home country should take the opportunity to do business abroad. It can do this by being proactive, encouraging persons to take risks and extending fiscal and promotional support. If restrictions are imposed and bureaucratic hurdles are encountered at all stages the business community will not think 35 Only for Private Circulation
  • 36. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran of taking any risks. By removing exchange control restrictions and draconian codes of business and providing an environment conductive to foreign trade, small countries like Malta, Cyprus and Mauritius have today transformed themselves into foreign trade economies. b) Host Country Economy. When a firm from one country enters any other country, the following major criteria are taken into account: 1. Size of the market Many multinational firms are thinking of entering India, China, Brazil and Indonesia, because of their large potential markets. Coca cola, Pepsi, Hewlett Packard and Samsung are looking to India as a future destination keeping in mind the size of population which represents the size of the market. 2. Gross Domestic Product (GDP) GDP is an indicator o the health of the economy; it also determines pr capita income. A country with a high GDP is an attractive destination for any international businessman. If a constant growth rate is maintained, such a country would always be a magnet for investors. Thailand, Malaysia and Indonesia were attractive during the 1990’s due to a very high growth rate in GDP, until the currency crisis affected their economies. 3. Industrialization Many firms in the developing world were interested in entering into Europe or the USA. The recent trend amongst companies in India is towards Latin America specially, Brazil, Argentina, Chile. This is due to the industrialization program, which is taking place in these countries. It is obvious that industrialization brings about prosperity and affluence. 4. Banking Banking is the only channel through which remittances take place, and hence is a major infrastructure for international business. European, American and far East economies have highly effective banking systems. Sub –Saharan Africa and commonwealth Independent states (CIS) are not able to provide good banking 36 Only for Private Circulation
  • 37. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran services to the international business community. Thus, a firm which enters Africa or the CIS countries has to necessarily depend on other countries for banking services. 5. Purchasing Power Another major determining factor for any international business unit is whether the people can afford to buy for a product is low. In other countries like Saudi Arabia, both the income and willingness to pay for the product are high. In the Scandinavian countries the per capita income is very high and they are ready to pay a premium price for highly sophisticated items. However, the low population is a limiting factor. 6. Foreign Exchange Another determining factor in international business is whether tforeign exchange facilities are available transactions. Although more than 70% of the countries in the world do not have foreign exchange reserves, the majority of them are becoming liberal in transacting foreign exchange as a long term strategy for their future economic development. Against this, some countries with surplus foreign exchange reserves do not permit free movement of the currencies. Such countries that have restrictions in repatriation of foreign exchange will not be attractive to international business firms. Therefore, countries with sufficient foreign exchange reserves, a liberal policy on repatriation and which have a demand for the products and services are an ideal destination for any company to do international business. 7. Income Levels Economies are classified into low income and high income economies. Industrialized nations are high income economies and enjoy a high per capita income. Companies manufacturing or marketing premium quality or high technology products have an easy entry into such advanced countries with the proper strategies. Developing countries, which are the low income economies, are price sensitive. Many of them are under pressure from high population, unemployment and lack the vision to industrialize fast. Still they need only primary goods and rated one amongst less developed countries. Differences in the income levels may limit the involvement and investments. Sometimes, in a densely populated country, a small 37 Only for Private Circulation
  • 38. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran percentage of the population can afford to buy premium products. Since this does not represent the purchasing power of the whole country, the revenue is minimum. 8. Economic diversity In the same country, a few urban centers may offer outstanding business opportunities, while in remaining areas there is no demand at all. Nairobi I Kenya, Lusaka in Zambia, Johannesburg in South Africa, Sao Paulo in Brazil and Casablanca in Morocco are cities with the highest purchasing power and demand for refrigerators, air conditioners, TV sets etc. However in other parts of the country, there is hardly any opportunity to do business. In Madagascar, despite the fact that it is a highly resourceful country, one can not get even the basic item for survival, exept in two cities, Tamatave and Antamarino. c) ECONOMY AT A GOBAL LEVEL Besides the home country and the Host country, there are certain other factors, which can influence the pattern of international business. Organizations such as the World Trade Organization, World Bank, International Monetary Fund, Asian development bank and the organization of petroleum Exporting countries (OPEC) can affect international business. The preferential treatment given to the members of NAFTA, ASEAN, the European Union and COMESA can have a negative impact on the trade between outside cartels and non-members. When shipments move from one destination to another, there are transit ports which charge huge sums as surcharge or transit charges. 38 Only for Private Circulation
  • 39. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT The social environment encompassing religious aspects, language, customs, traditions and beliefs, influences buying consumption habits. Many companies face failure in foreign countries, due to their inability to understand the socio cultural environment. For example whenever any company establishes business in some African countries, the local population expects that many jobs will open up for them. Very few countries perceive tat they may be exploited. Due to the entry of foreign firms the economic and hence the social environment of an area can completely change. An example is southern China, which has completely changed to an affluent society due to the fact that almost 2000 companies get their products manufactured in coastal south China. 1. National Taste In Thailand, People prefer black shampoo; Nestle brews different varieties of instant coffee because people in those countries have different tastes, uncommon in other countries. Green is the favorite color of all the Arab countries; Red is still widely used in Russia, in banners, posters, and hoardings although communism is in no way relevant to modern Russia. 2. Language Cross culture and cross border operations call for necessary language skills, e.g. South Koreans have learnt Indian languages to operate in India. One can see this in Hyundai or LG factories in India. Companies also have to change their brand names and slogans in different countries. In Japan, General Motor’s slogan “body by fisher” means “corpse by fisher”, and Pepsi Cola slogan “come alive” means come out of the grave. Prior to promoting the brand, one has to take into account the socio- cultural background of a specific nation and different interpretations of a name in the local language. 3. Values and beliefs 39 Only for Private Circulation
  • 40. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran It is also important for companies to understand the significance of different designs and colors in different countries. For example, blue is perceived as feminine in Holland and masculine in widen. Green is favorite color in the Muslim world, but is associated with illness in Malaysia although it is a Muslim country. White indicated death in china and Korea but it is the color of bridal dresses in Europe. Red is associated with danger in many countries but it is a favorite in Russia. Another example is ‘swastika’, which is considered sacred in India, but has completely different connotations in the west. 4. Demography A number of demographic factors such as age, sex ratio, family size and occupation influence the business of many companies. Different companies concentrate on different segments. For example, Barbie generates huge revenues through the children’s segment of affluent countries. 5. Literacy rate Countries with a high literacy rate experience a better standard of living. Here the need is for standardizes goods, supported by technical services. For a country with an educated population, the amount of training required for the staff will be far less than in the case of the country which has a low literacy rate. This is an important factor, as it influences the cost incurred. The ame argument holds in the case of educating the consumer about the products manufactured. 6. Female Workforce The most spectacular change that has taken place in the current era is the empowerment of women throughout the world. In China, Indonesia, Russia and Thailand, women are major contributors to the GDP. With economic independency, women no longer have to depend on men to make decisions about what to buy; they can make their own decisions about whether to purchase any consumer product or durable. Delux, a well known brand of paint in Europe was promoted through campaigns directed at women, because it was felt that women have an aesthetic taste for colors in the household paint segment. The performance of the i-pod of Apple hit the roof in 40 Only for Private Circulation
  • 41. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran terms of revenue generation due to female customers. The female work force is very strong in various sectors in many countries. Examples are: Indian women in IT enabled services and handicrafts, Chinese women in the soft toys and ceramics and Indonesian women in garments and paper work, who have brought great success to their countries. 7. Double Income Families As the household income increases, the demand for the number of products increases proportionately. This is specially true for packaged food items, electronic gadgets, household appliances, health equipment, Japanese entertainment electronics and French perfumes dominate in the whole of Europe and North America. Pizza Express, McDonald and Kentucky Fried Chicken invariably rule the households of double income families throughout the world. 8. Impulse buying Benefit oriented buying is taking place everywhere. Pre- planned shopping and scheduled purchases are gradually going away. Throughout the world, people need instant items. They see, ask and buy. It is a major challenge to international businessmen to provide benefits to lure impulse buying. POLITICAL ENVIRONMENT. The political environment in international business operates in different dimensions: 1. The home country political environment; 2. The host country political environment, and 3. The global political environment. 1. Home Country Political Environment In an ideal world, one would not normally expect domestic policies to affect the firm’s international activities. Some countries like the USA encourage their organization to establish activities abroad, especially in their core competency fields. Japan encouraged their electronics and auto companies to spread their activities outside Japan. Domestic 41 Only for Private Circulation
  • 42. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran firms that continue to invest and manufacture abroad while ignoring their home country are often accused of creating domestic unemployment problems and may be subject to political pressure, from the government. Indian government encourages business houses to go and perform outside in steel, healthcare, mining, textile and automobile. 2. Host Country Political Environment If the actual benefits of foreign firms are shared in terms of employment, taxes and social security with the locals, political atmosphere tends to be hospitable. If it is felt that the foreign firms contribute nothing to the well being of the nation, it may produce a hostile reaction from the business community and labor organization, which in turn puts pressure on the government. In extreme cases, this may lead to either political turmoil or the appropriation of the assets of the foreign firm. Mc Donald had to face a change in the ruling party, in Israel. When the National Religious Party (NRP) came into the power it demanded that McDonald should change its practices or be shut down. 3. Global Political Environment This may be describes as the combined politics of the home country, the host country and the other countries in the world. Multilateral agreements between international organizations, such as GAAT, the UNO and the Commonwealth, may constitute an impediment to free trade as well as to the nature and scope of the operation of international firms. Embargos, Cartels, free trade pacts and customs’ unions allow a few nations to enjoy competitive advantages, whilst others lose their business prospects. However, there may also be advantages, e.g., the commonwealth generalizes Systems of Preferences (CWGSP) offers good opportunities to all commonwealth countries to supply and receive goods and services at concessional rates, which ultimately give them a competitive edge over non-commonwealth nations. Global politics can influence business in vastly varying ways. For example the economic embargo on Iraq by the Security Council of the United Nations in 1991 meant that conducting trade with that country was illegal for all international firma. Another example is China Ordering Microsoft to stop selling. “Windows 95” as it 42 Only for Private Circulation
  • 43. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran contained politically offensive material including phrases like “communist bandits”. Microsoft agreed to change the material for re- entry. CULTURAL ENVIRONMENT The cultural environment for international business refers to the set of factors which shape the material and psychological development of a nation and represents the primary influence on individual lifestyle, attitude, pre-deposition and behavior as consumers in the market. The most important task of international business is to identify relevant similarities and differences among countries, and means and methods to match the organization’s culture with that of the country of its operation. For example, when Toshiba gained 100 percent ownership of Rank-Toshiba in the Plymouth all the managers in charge learnt the British Style of working. Working it is the operation of a business or dealing with customers one cannot overlook cultural elements. The performance of a company in the international arena partly depends on how well the strategic elements fit into the culture of the host country. Culture may be described as the totality of the complex and learned behavior of members of a given society. Elements of culture include beliefs, art, morale, code of conduct and customs. Culture has the following three characteristics: - It is learned: acquired by people over time through their membership in a group that transmits culture from generation to generation. - It is interrelated: i.e. one aspect of the culture is connected with another part, e.g. religion and marriage, or business and social status. - It is shared: i.e. tenets of a culture extend to other members of the group. 43 Only for Private Circulation
  • 44. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Culture is perhaps one of the most important determinants of human behavior. Food habits, social class, the family system, community units and other cultural and sub-cultural elements influence the process of decision making in day to day dealings and the buying habits of customers. Thus, there is a need for cross-cultural understanding because of the significant differences in attitude, belief, motivation, perception and life styles between nations. For example, branded products will move fast in Europe and America, but Africans perceive branded products as being very expensive. The Influence Of Culture On International Business 1. The Utility value of a product may differ considerably from country to country because of differences in beliefs, values and lifestyles. Fast foods, such as Kentucky Fried Chicken, McDonalds, hamburgers and pizzas are more popular in modern societies than in traditional societies. Similarly, branding and packaging are very susceptible to cultural bias. 2. Products are launched in markets on the basis of either perceived or real utility value. Products from certain parts of the world such as Western Europe, Japan and United states command premium prices in developing countries because it is felt that they are of better quality than locally manufactures products. They have a higher value. 3. Culture is perhaps the most powerful influence in determining the acceptability of advertising copy, design and other elements in various countries. Advertisements released in France may not be acceptable in the United Kingdom. Many advertisements acceptable to the other pats of the world will not be accepted in the Saudi Arabia. Liquor advertisements are prohibited in many countries. 4. Holidays in different countries vary on religious grounds. Friday is a holiday in the whole of gulf region. In China, the offices and factories are closed for a week for the New Year celebrations. For companies having firms in different countries, it is therefore impossible to impose the rule of common business practices everywhere, as productivity would be very low during festive days. Any strict implementation of company 44 Only for Private Circulation
  • 45. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran policy will have direct repercussions, which may even lead to closure of the business in different countries. 5. Local norms and practices may affect certain distribution strategies. Eating in public places during Ramadan days is prohibited in Muslim countries. Therefore, eateries are not opened during the day at this time. In Spain, mail order shopping is very popular, whereas in the US and Europe chain stores are preferred, and door-to-door delivery is common in many Scandinavian countries. Shopping malls are coming up in urban India faster than in any other country in the world. Still small traditional shops near hometown are perceived as trustworthy suppliers when the customers need groceries. TECHNOLOGY ENVIRONMENT Technology and its applications are key factors in determining the international competitiveness of a firm in conducting international business. Multimedia using Pentium 4 is common in advanced countries whereas it will take at least another five years to introduce such products in Africa. Leadership in technology is achieved and maintained through a consistent program of intensive research and development, which can be very expensive. Only those companies that are able to maintain their technological activities will remain competitive. A Company may invest millions of dollars in R&D, despite the fact that the projected revenue in the home country would be very low. However other countries will generate huge revenues over a period of time. The Hoffkins, Bio Rad, Genen technology and Pfizer are examples of institutions and firms, who are investing huge sums of money in R&D, because they are sure of their returns on their investments over a period of time. In the late 20th century, Asian tigers, Japan, South Korea, Hong Kong, Singapore and Taiwan achieved a miraculous success due to their investment and implementation of the technology policies in specific sectors. Few countries, such as Japan for electronic equipment, Germany for medical equipment, and the USA for pharmaceuticals have remained leaders in their fields for decades. Other countries have remained behind them. The time between the innovation and its adoption and its adoption may vary from country to country. Innovating countries are few. Following countries are many. Technology leaders encash on skimming pricing strategies, wherein the margins are huge. Eriksson, Nokia, Motorola and LG have been 45 Only for Private Circulation
  • 46. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran successful since they manufactured cell phones. Currently, the business opportunities exist in every country in the world. The people around the world are adaptable to the technology too. While technology innovation is adaptable to the masses, the companies involved in such business prosper. Today Hewlett Packard, Fujitsn, Apple, Samsung and Lenova compete against each other by educating the workers on using their laptops and launch their new versions everywhere. LEGAL ENVIRONMENT : This relates to the laws and regulations governing the conduct of business activities in the country. Before entering any country, firms avail of the services of local legal firms to understand business interpretations pertaining to labor legislations, taxes, environment, pollution, investment, distribution, contracts, logistics etc. The international legal environment has three aspects: a) Home country laws b) Host country laws c) International laws. a) Home Country Laws These deal with two important issues: i) Conduct of the firm in the domestic territory. ii) Trade with the other countries For international operators, the home country laws are not stringent. They are more of facilitating or regulating in nature, but not controlling in normal practice. b) Host country laws These include investment regulations, tariffs and duties, anti-dumping regulations and protection of local industries from unfair competition from industrialized countries. Tariffs and duties are used to discourage imports of non-essential products in order to conserve foreign exchange and maintain a favorable balance of trade and to generate revenue. Seven advanced countries impose laws against developing countries. Super 301 against Indian nylon skirts imposed by USA as inflammable fabric and ban on Indian sea food by Europe are the examples. 46 Only for Private Circulation
  • 47. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran c) International Laws These comprise treaties, conventions and agreement between nations, and have basically the same standing as laws. They are particularly in areas relating to patents and trademark protection and privacy laws. One has to understand the broad provisions of UN resolutions, and multilateral trade agreements such as the WTO. Disputes are solved by different means. Food and drug administration, health regulation, registration formalities are judiciously implemented in international business operations. Investment restrictions in some sector, promotion in others and the role of regulatory authorities are part of legal environment. For example, Nigerian government nationalized the assets of British petroleum, when it was revealed that the company as selling Nigerian crude oil to South Africa, despite an embargo. COMPETITIVE ENVIRONMENT: Competition is a threat imposed by an environment, which may effect or hamper or challenge the operation of an international business firm. Competition either could be from the firm’s home country or host country or third country. Some times product related competition may crop up through substitutes or low cost production process or technology or cost reduction through economies of scale. The current international business operation has to encounter competition as various levels such as entry, operation, production, administration, human resource, technical resource, and financial resource. Distribution and logistics. Motorola had to face the face the competition from Nokia, soon Nokia concentrated in fast growing markets of India and China resulting the follower became leader in the world. Cuba based White Spirit Company; Havana club entered very late in the field and surpassed the erstwhile leader like Smirnoff. Tusker and Phoenix – the major beer brands in COMESA countries (Common Market for East and South Africa) have been overtaken by King Fisher after UB group took over National Breweries of South Africa. For international companies, facing competition is a way of life. According to them, competition keeps their mind alert, quality war is inevitable. Beyond theoretical models, they believe in learning competitiveness in streets, countries and production centers. They consolidate competitive advantages and succeed. Hyundai motors in 47 Only for Private Circulation
  • 48. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran India, Honda motors in Europe and Tata Motors in Africa withstood all the competitive forces and succeeded. FACTORS INFLUENCING INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS ENTITY ENVIRONMENT ACTIVITIES END RESULT Economic Manufacturing Political INTERNATIONAL FIRM Social Investment Cultural International Destinations Legal Trading Technology Competitive Marketing 48 Only for Private Circulation
  • 49. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 4.FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT Financial resource is crucial, time bound and critical. If it is not available in right time from anywhere, the probable results are bankruptcy, decline and loss of status whether it is a nation or company or individual. Learning value: 1. Meaning and correct trends of FDI 2. Benefits to host countries through FDI 3. Destinations of FDI flow 4. Criteria of attracting FDI 5. Major challenges for FDI in various countries Definition and Importance Investment is “the flow of funds one destination to another”, for any activity, including industrial development, infrastructure and manufacturing. When the investment goes from the home country to another country it is defined as ‘investment outflow’ and when the foreign investment comes from other countries to home country it is termed as ‘investment inflow’. Both inward and outward movements are encouraged in majority of the countries. All developing countries produce primary goods, and to exploit them financial resources are necessary. Developed countries are also in need of FDI for further development of technology and modernization. The current Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) is related to investment in developing countries and Less Developed Countries (LDCs) require huge investments in other activities, such as infrastructure, healthcare, housing, power generation etc. 49 Only for Private Circulation
  • 50. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran With the liberalization of the Indian economy, a large Indian market is being opened up to foreign investors. Practically, FDI represents foreign assets in domestic structures, equipment and organizations. It does not include foreign investment in the stock markets. Foreign direct investment in useful to a country if the focus is more on projects rather than investments in the equity of companies because equity investments are potentially “hot money” which can leave at the first sign of trouble. South Korean, South African and Argentinean crisis were partially due to such problems. When a firm invests directly in facilities in a foreign country it is said to be FDI. It involves the active control of the investment not really determined by level of stock ownership. Many multinational enterprises become involve in FDI with the ultimate objective of reaping short term as well as long term benefits. Ownership may become transnational, i.e., ownership in more than one country. Factors influencing FDI are related to increasing business opportunities across national borders and their involvement could be in the following functional areas. • Production • Marketing / services • Research & development • Raw materials or other resources The parent company has direct managerial control, but the degree of control may depend on the type of country and company policy. Prior to their investment decisions it is necessary to carry out risk analysis and interpretations of the same. MNCs do not develop blind faith in any country. A team of experts analyse risks carefully and invest gradually. CHARACTERISTICS OF FDI FDI is an activity by which an investor, who is resident in one country, obtains a lasting interest in, and is a significant influence on the management of an entity in another country. This may involve either creating an entirely new enterprise, so-called “Greenfield” investment or, more typically, changing the ownership of existing enterprises via mergers and acquisitions. Other types of financial transactions between related enterprises, like reinvesting the earnings of the FDI enterprises or other capital transfers, are also defined as foreign direct investment. 50 Only for Private Circulation
  • 51. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 1. POLITICAL RISKS 2. ECONOMIC RISKS INVESTMENT PATTERNS • Follow Competitors – Oligopolistic industries and interdependence of a few major competitors force a strategic approach of following competitors: American Motor Company (AMC) invested in Shanghai Motor Company in China. All others were on bee line including Japanese and South Korean companies besides other American companies. • International Product Life Cycle – Reduces cost by shifting production to developing countries. Essel Propack moved to China for instance. • Location – Specific advantages make FDI easier than exporting or licensing. Mahindra tractors are manufactured in North America. 51 Only for Private Circulation
  • 52. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • Contract manufactures – brings down the cost of manufacturing and also contributes to consolidate competitive sourcing and competing in world market. Honda motors manufactures its vehicles in Europe. • Assured return on investment – R & D centres and futuristic projects enable the investor to achieve great success through high revenue. Roseh products invest huge money in Genentech in California to get innovative products to their outlets around the world. More than two thousand multinational from the USA and Europe have invested in Chinese Special Economies Zones and Export Processing Zones. Indonesia, Thailand, Philippines and Malaysia have also now become attractive destinations. In Latin America, Brazil, Argentina and Columbia are also attracting huge investments. Malta, Cyprus, Panama, Mans Island and Mauritius are growing only through Foreign Direct Investment, either in manufacturing, trading, or any other form. The reputation of such destinations depends on their ability to attract investments through their policies and hassle-free industrial climate. BENEFITS AND COSTS OF FDI Benefits for Host Countries • Capital: Multinational enterprises invest in long-term projects, taking risks and repatriating profits only when the projects yield returns. • Technology: Technology effects emerge especially when the liberalization of investment flows drives a more rapid rate of technology development, diffusion and transfer. Such processes may involve the transfer of physical goods and/or the transfer of knowledge. A vast majority of economic studies dealing with the relationship between FDI on the one hand and productivity and economic growth on the other hand, have found that technology transfer through FDI has contributed positively to productivity and economic growth in host countries. • Market access: Investors can provide access to export markets. The growth of exports itself offers benefits in terms of technological learning, competitive stimulus, etc. They can transform normal customers to intellectual customers. • Increase in domestic investment: The increase in FDI inflow is associated with a manifold increase in the investment by national investors. 52 Only for Private Circulation
  • 53. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • Export promotion: It seems that FDI could be related with export trade in goods, and the hosting country can benefit from an FDI-led export growth. • Generating employment: It leads to generation of both direct and indirect employment opportunities in the host country. • Infrastructure: In order to facilitate and enable the investors perform well, the host country studies other competitive destinations and enhance the level of infrastructure to match the requirements of the investors. India’s silver valley in Bangalore, Hitch city in Hyderabad and Tidel Park in Chennai have revolutionized the areas through connectivity. • Social effects: Closed economies have started to liberalize their economy through market reforms that are favourable to foreign investors through privatization, property rights and liberal labour policies. Society at large gets the benefit while employment, infrastructure, literacy and health care are bound to improve as an impact of FDI inflow. • Formation of Clusters: Group of similar projects and manufacturing centres are formed in a specific location by way of providing common production , R&D, training and pollution control system to group competing companies. In Italy, Brazil and India, such clusters have made wonders. • Spillover: Statistical evidences exist across the world to show that FDIs have a number of spillovers. Business history is replete with examples where persons trained in companies started their own ventures and became successful leaders in their respective fields. Silicon Valley in the U.S. provides many examples of such spin-offs. Intel is a spin-off of Fairchild. The main competitor to Intel today is its spin-off. Even in India, the machine tool industries of Ludhiana and Bangalore are spin- offs of yesteryears’ popular companies like SKF, Bosch or MICO. Cost for the Host Country • The investing companies may not serve the host country’s interests. • There is an outflow of earnings as they are repatriated to their home country. • Import of substantial inputs from the country of the investor. 53 Only for Private Circulation
  • 54. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • Hiring expatriate managers for management positions • The investing country has controlling technology, for which it charges a huge technology fee. • FDI can even wipe out the local firms. Infant industries and other home industries may suffer if they cannot compete. Home country producers do not have money power or technology to withstand the onslaught of the investors. Benefits for Home Country • Inwards flow of earnings on a long term basis. • High salaries for employees. • Exposure to foreign market. Costs for the Home Country • Initial capital outflow is extremely large. • Exports may decrease. • Imports may increase if FDI is intended to serve the home country. • Employment loss to the home country population. • Profits are repatriated abroad. They may not stay in the country for reinvestment. • Major tax heavens will enjoy the money at the cost of home country. MOTIVATIONS FOR FDI • Exporting may not be feasible with high transportation costs and trade barriers. • Companies, with operations only in the home country, have limited scope for prosperity and in order to grow fast investing in fertile grounds outside is a strategic move. • Ownership advantages are used to benefit from global expansion. 54 Only for Private Circulation
  • 55. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • Location specific advantages are important at the time of selecting right destination: 1. Availability of low cost labour force. 2. Natural resources available in abundance and do not deplete. 3. The cost incurred in research and development can be recovered at the earliest by identifying a suitable location. 4. The cost of transportation and logistics is low in the specific as well as neighboring countries. STRATEGIES FOR FOREIGN INVESTORS TO INVEST IN INDIA There are several strategies by which foreign enterprises could be lured to set up Indian operations. Broadly, entry strategies for such organistions may be classified into two major types:- 1. A foreign investor may directly set up its operations in India through a branch office, a representative office, a liaison office or a project office to carry out business. 2. It may do so through and Indian arm i.e. through a subsidiary company set up in India under Indian laws. 3. It may invest in business units in SEZs and EOUs. Generally, the second option of setting up operations through an Indian arm is advisable, especially if the investment is large. A foreign company is one which has been incorporated outside India and conducts business in India. These companies are required to comply with the provisions foreign companies can set up their operations in Indian by opening liaison offices, project offices and branch offices. Such companies have to register themselves with the Registrar of Companies in New Delhi, within 30 days of setting up business in India. Liaison Office/Representative Office A foreign company can set up a liaison or representative office in India to test the Indian market. Once it is convinced about the potential of the Indian market, it can then bring in greater investment. There are, however, certain limitations regarding the type of work which can be done through a liaison 55 Only for Private Circulation
  • 56. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran or representative office. A liaison office is not allowed to undertake any business activity in India and therefore cannot earn any income in India. The role of such office is thus limited to collecting information about possible market opportunities and providing information about the company and its products to prospective Indian customers. The Foreign Investment Promotion Board of the Reserve Bank of India is a regulatory body governing such operations. Foreign investors are required to follow the basic procedures prior to opening such offices. Permission is initially granted for a period of three years, and may be extended from time to time. Project Office Foreign companies planning to execute specific projects in Indian can set up temporary project/site offices for the purpose. Specific approval from the RBI is required for setting up a project office, which is generally given for Government approved projects, but the RBI can give approval for setting up project offices even for executing private sector projects. Approval for setting up project offices is specific to a particular project that is to be executed and lasts only till the completion of the project. Branch Office The Government has allowed foreign companies engaged in manufacturing and trading activities abroad to set up branch offices in India for the following purposes:- 1. To represent the parent company/other foreign companies in various matters in India e.g. acting as buying/selling agents in India. 2. To conduct research work in the area in which the parent company is engaged, provided the results to the research work are made available to the Indian companies. 3. To undertake export and import trading activities. 4. To promote possible technical and financial collaborations between the Indian companies and the overseas companies. A branch office is not allowed to carry out manufacturing activities on its own but is permitted to subcontract them to an Indian manufacturer. 56 Only for Private Circulation
  • 57. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Permission for setting up branch offices is granted by the Reserve Bank of India on a case-to-case basis. The RBI normally considers the operating history of the applicant worldwide and its proposed activities in India for granting the approval. Through an Indian Arm The entry strategies through an Indian entity are given below. The Indian entity may be a subsidiary of the foreign company in India or it may be joint venture. As an Indian company A foreign company can commence operations in India through incorporation of a company under the provisions of the Indian Companies Act, 1956. Foreign equity in such Indian companies can be up to 100% depending on the business plan of the foreign investor subject to the prevailing investment policies of the Government and receipt of requisite approvals. For registration as an Indian company and its incorporation, an application has to be filed with the Registrar of Companies. Once a company has been duly registered and incorporated as an Indian company, it will be subject to the same Indian laws and regulations that are applicable to other domestic Indian companies. Joint venture with an Indian partner Foreign companies can set up their operations in India by forging strategic alliances with Indian partners. Setting up operations through a joint venture may entail the following advantages for a foreign investor:- 1. Established distribution/marketing set up of the Indian partners. 2. Available financial resources of the Indian partner. 3. Established contacts of an Indian partner, which help the process of setting up operations. Wholly owned subsidiary company The other investment option open to foreign investors is the setting up of a wholly owned subsidiary. This implies that the foreign company can own 100% shares of the Indian company. All such cases are subject to prior approval from the Foreign Investment Promotion Board (FIPB). 57 Only for Private Circulation
  • 58. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran The FIPB considers cases on a flexible basis and grants permission for 100 percent ownership based on the following criteria:- 1. Where only a “holding” operation is involved and all subsequent/downstream investments to be carried out would require prior approval of the Government; 2. Where proprietary technology is sought to be protected or sophisticated technology is proposed to be brought in. 3. Where at least 50% of the production is to be exported. 4. Proposals for consultancy. 5. Proposals for power, roads, ports and industrial model towns/industrial parks or estates. 6. Business units in SEZs, AEZs, Techno-Parks and EOUs: The investor who invests to setup units in the above categories does not need mandatory permission from Foreign Investment Promotion Board of Reserve Bank of India. It is called automatic route. Such units can enjoy 100% profit repatriation to their home countries. STRATEGIES FOR INDIAN INVESTORS TO INVEST IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES Foreign Investment through GDRs (Global Depository Receipts), ADRs (American Depository Receipts) and FCCBs (Foreign Currency Convertible Bonds). Foreign Investment through ADRs and GDRs and FCCB’s is treated as Foreign Direct Investment. Indian Companies are allowed to raise equity capital in the international market through the issue of GDRs/ADRs/FCCBs. These are not subject to any ceilings on investment. An applicant company seeking the Government’s approval in this regard should have a consistent track record of good financial performance for a minimum period of 3 years. This condition can be relaxed for infrastructure projects such as power generation, telecommunication, petroleum exploration and refining, ports, airports and roads. There is no restriction on the number of GDRs/ADRs/FCCBs to be floated be a company or a group of companies in a financial year. The 58 Only for Private Circulation
  • 59. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran reason for this is that a company engaged in the manufacture of items covered under automatic route is likely to exceed the percentage limits under automatic route, whose direct foreign investment after the proposed GDRs/ADRs/FCCs is likely to exceed 50 percent / 51 percent / 74 percent as the case may be. There are no end-use restrictions on GDRs/ADRs/ issue proceeds, except ban on investment in real estate and stock markets. The FCCB issue proceeds need to conform to external commercial borrowing end use requirements. In addition, 25 percent of the FCCB proceeds can be used for general corporate restructuring. Use or GDRs The proceeds of the GDRs can be used for financing capital goods imports, capital expenditure including domestic purchase/installation of a plant, equipment and building and investment in software development, prepayment or scheduled repayment of earlier external borrowings, and equity investment in joint ventures and wholly owned subsidiaries, in India. Restrictions However, investment in stock markets and real estate will not be permitted. Companies may retain the proceeds abroad or may remit funds into India in anticipation of the use of funds for approved end uses. Any investment from a foreign firm into India requires prior approval of the Government of India. FDI POLICY The Government has put in place a liberal, transparent and investor-friendly FDI policy, wherein FDI up to 100% is allowed on the automatic route in most of the sectors except in: • Activities that attract industrial licensing. • Proposals where the foreign collaborator has previous/existing ventures in India. • Proposals for acquisition of shares in an existing Indian company in favour of non-residents. • Activities where the automatic route is not available under the notified sectoral policy. 59 Only for Private Circulation
  • 60. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Salient Features of FDI Policy In view of sectoral policies, security concerns and other strategic considerations, restrictions, such as equity cap, divestment condition, minimum capitalization and lock-in period have been imposed of FDI in a few sectors, which are given below. 1. Agriculture and plantations excluding tea plantations. 2. Real estate business excluding integrated township development. However, NRI/OCB investment is allowed for real estate business. 3. Retail trade in any form. 4. Lottery, betting and gambling activities. 5. Security services. 6. Atomic energy. Non-resident Indians’ Scheme The general policy and facilities for Foreign Direct Investment as available to foreign investors/companies are fully applicable to NRIs as well. In addition, the Government has extended some concessions for NRIs and Overseas Corporate Bodies in which NRIs have invested more than 60%. These include: • NRI/OCB investment in the real estate and housing sectors up to 100%: • NRI/OCB investment in the domestic airline sectors up to 100%; • NRI/OBC investment up to 74% in the banking sector. Since 2001, the investments of NRIs in India have grown 20% every year till 2007 due to liberal policies. Few NRIs from the Middle East and Europe invest in huge amounts in real estate and SEZs. The confidence level has increased on India amongst NRIs resulting huge investments in India. 60 Only for Private Circulation
  • 61. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran FDI Policy Initiatives The FDI policy is reviewed on an ongoing basis and suitable liberalization measures are taken. Some of the main initiatives undertaken are mentioned below: • Issue of equity shares has been allowed against a one-time fee or royalty and External Commercial Borrowings received in convertible foreign currency, subject to meeting all tax liabilities and procedures. • The policy governing the payment of royalties under foreign technology collaboration has been further liberalized by allowing all companies, who have entered into foreign technology agreements, to pay royalties on the automatic route to the extent of 8% on exports and 5% on domestic sales without any restriction on the duration of the royalty payments. This is irrespective of the extent of foreign equity in the shareholding. • The foreign investment in the banking sector has been further liberalized by allowing a FDI limit in private sector banks up to 74 percent under the automatic route including investment by FIIs. • The foreign banks regulated by a banking supervisory authority in the home country and meeting the Reserve Bank’s licensing criteria have been allowed to hold 100 percent paid up capital to enable them to set up a wholly-owned subsidiary in India. • FDI up to 100% has been permitted in printing scientific and technical magazines, periodicals and journals subject to compliance with all legalities and with the prior approval of the Government. • FDI up to 100% has been permitted on automatic route on marketing of petroleum products, subject to the existing sectoral policy and regulatory framework in the oil marketing sector. • FDI up to 100% has been permitted on automatic route in oil exploration in both small and medium sized fields subjects to, and under the policy of the Government on private participation in: 1. Exploration of oil. 2. The discovered fields of national companies. 61 Only for Private Circulation
  • 62. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • FDI up to 100% has been permitted on automatic route for petroleum product pipelines subject to, and been permitted for Natural Gas/LNG pipelines with prior Government approval. • 100% FDI is permitted in any venture related to Special Economic Zones and 100% export oriented units either as a developer or as a unit holder or service provider. The same scheme is applicable to agricultural zones and technology parks. Country-wise distribution of approvals In terms of the quantum of investment, Mauritius with 22.61% of the total approvals is the highest, followed by the U.S.A. (12.62%), the Netherlands (9.78%), the U.K.(8.28%), Japan (5.68%), Singapore (3.59%), Germany (3.53%), Hong Kong (1.64%), Switzerland (1.39%) and Belgium (1.27%). Other countries constitute the remaining 29.61% of approvals. Sectoral distribution of approvals Drug & pharmaceuticals sector has a major share of the approvals followed by the services sector, both financial & non-financial, electrical equipment including computer software & electronics, the food processing industry, telecommunications and automobiles. All put together account for 60%. Other sectors account for 40% of the approvals. Country-wise distribution of approvals In terms of quantum of investment, Mauritius with 24.10% of the total approvals is the highest, followed by the U.S.A. (12.53%), Singapore (11.955%), U.K. (7.93%) and U.A.E. (3.52%). Other countries constitute the remaining 39.97% of approvals. State-wise distribution of approvals The choice of location of projects depends on the commercial judgment of investors and is based on factors such as market size and growth potential, availability of skilled man-power; availability and reliability of infrastructure facilities; fiscal and other incentives provided by State Governments. The Central Government supplements the efforts of the State Government by providing fiscal incentives for investments in the 62 Only for Private Circulation
  • 63. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran infrastructure sector as also high priority industries such as information technology, through specific schemes such as the Growth Center Schemes. Transport Subsidy Schemes, New Industrial Policy for the North-East and other hill States, Electronics Hardware Technology Park (EHTP), Software Technology Park (STP), Export Promotion Zones (EPZs), Special Economic Zones (SEZs). Maharashtra, Delhi, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Gujarat, Andhra Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, West Bengal, Orissa and Uttar Pradesh accounted for a major portion of FDI investment approvals during the cumulative period i.e. from August 1991 to March 2004. FDI Promotion Initiatives Several steps have been initiated during the year to facilitate increased FDI inflows, which include, inter alia, the following: • On the policy front: While our FDI policy is already very liberal, it is being further progressively liberalized. Equity caps in the banking sector, the petroleum sector and printing of scientific/technical magazines/periodicals & journals have recently been raised as a measure of further liberalisation of policy. • On the investment promotion front: The Government organized “Destination Authority has been actively involved to ensure speedy resolution of investment related problems, which has been widely acknowledged as an effective problem-solving platform. • On the competitiveness issue: The Government has received reports on various studies on current potential and risks involved in various business activities in India. Different sectors with competitive advantages have been enlisted to attract foreign investment. • An exclusive website is hosted by the promotion authorities is comprehensive and informative with online chat facilities. About 2000 investment related queries were replied to during the year. • The Committee on Reforming Investment Approval and Implementation Procedures submitted its reports on simplification of investment procedures. Steps have already been initiated to implement these recommendations. The Department is coordinating with other ministries to implement the same at all levels in the Central Government. 63 Only for Private Circulation
  • 64. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • Every state government takes a major initiative like Vibrant Gujarat to bring all the investors around the world and show cause their advantages and encourage them to invest. The advantages of India as an investment destination rest on a number of factors, which include a large and growing market; world-class scientific, technical and managerial manpower; cheap labour; an abundance of natural resources; a large English speaking population; independent judiciary, etc. This has now been recognized by a number of global investors who have either already established a base in India or are in the process of doing so. Ongoing initiatives such as further simplification of legislation, de-licensing, setting up of regulatory authorities such as Central/State Electricity Regulatory Commissions, etc. is expected to provide the necessary impetus to increase FDI inflows in the future. Inflows of FDI would depend on domestic economic conditions and the FDI policy, world economic trends, and strategies of global investors. The Government, on its part is fully committed to creating strong economic fundamentals and an increasingly proactive FDI policy regime. The positive efforts of the Government to improve the investment climate, including sustained improvement of infrastructure, have led to renewed optimism about India as an emerging investment destination. Criteria considered by investors prior to selecting a destination. 1. Political stability and a strong policy to protect investors. 2. Safety and security for life, money and output. 3. Investment protection through legal provisions. 4. Good governance as compared to other countries. 5. Proactive government policies and implementing authorities, bureaucrats. 6. Continuous infrastructural development.. 7. Banking system with updated technology. 8. High productivity of the labour force and unhindered working conditions. 64 Only for Private Circulation
  • 65. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 9. Clear and simple tax procedures without any ambiguity. 10. Availability of raw material, components and consumables. 11. Hospitable society, especially secular approach towards investors. 12. Demand for the products the investor manufacturers. 13. Ample potential opportunities for products in the neighboring countries. Even though the developed and developing countries are extending schemes of tax holidays and many other incentives, very few countries are capable of attracting FDIs. Still, China is an attractive destination because it ranks on a higher scale as compared to others on all the parameters mentioned above. India, could not attract an expected investment in the last and early part of current decade though the scenario is changing gradually now. The reasons are: 1. Poor infrastructure, which does not match international standards. 2. Political instability, but now it is not a major constraint. 3. High levels of corruption, which are deep-rooted at all levels. 4. Bureaucratic red tape, which the investor does not have to face in other destinations in the world. 5. Interpretation of policies and their implementation are quite complex. 6. Heterogeneous society with different states, cultures and languages. 7. Inordinate delay in projects. 8. Draconian labour legislation. 9. Lack of transparency in regulatory bodies. 10. High cost of production due to expensive power and other inputs and transportation. 65 Only for Private Circulation
  • 66. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 5.OFFSHORE BANKING No other resources will be effective in the absence of financial resources and that too, at the right time. Non-availability can cause major damage to international operations. The purpose of offshore banking is to provide international business firms funds at cheaper cost, at a high place and at right time. Learning value: After completion of the chapter the reader will learn: 1. Concept and practice of offshore banking 2. Operation mechanism of offshore banks 3. Attractive centres for offshore banks 4. South East Asian offshore banks 5. Initiatives in India for offshore banking Any international business unit, whether manufacturing or trading is always looking for funds for their operations. Every company cannot take funds from its home country due to strict regulations or interest cost or taxes. All over the world the business community is in search of locations where their investments are safe and the funds can be taken out without any barriers and invested comfortably for any ventures in any part of the wo9rld. Currently, Mauritius, Malta, Panama, Man’s Island, Cyprus, Seychelles and Hawaii are a few centres attracting offshore banks. Since 2003, the Government of India has permitted banks to set up offshore banking operations in Special Economic Zones. Hence, the system of offshore banking has become part of international business. Offshore banks are banking units set up by foreign banks in territories where the restrictions and regulations are limited and the intervention of the country of location is minimal. Offshore banking units bring foreign 66 Only for Private Circulation
  • 67. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran currency funds from non-residents and the international money market, and invest them in the host country or in projects set up by the host country in a third country. In short, it is a hassle free and safer banking system for saving and borrowing funds for business. ESTABLISHMENT OF OFFSHORE BANKING UNITS The origin of offshore banking units can be traced to the growth of financial activity in tax havens. A “tax haven” is a place where non-residents can receive income or own assets without paying high taxes. Some such places are Bahamas, Bermuda, Hong Kong, the Netherlands, Panama and Switzerland. Some features of these tax havens are: 1. Low rate or complete absence of income tax on foreign investment and income. 2. High degree of economical and political stability and a political system, which directly or indirectly encourages and fosters business activity at the center. 3. Strict and well enforced rules of banking secrecy. 4. Absence of exchange control 5. Availability of supporting infrastructure such as an efficient communications and transportation network. 6. Presence of well developed legal system and professional accounting expertise. 7. Investor’s confidence due to past credential. 8. No incidence of violence or criminal activities. These features encourage various types of business operations some of which are bona fide but most of them generate what has been termed as ‘dirty offshore funds’. OPERATIONS OF OFFSHORE BANKS Offshore banking centres are an integral part of the foreign currency markets. Therefore, the operations of banking units set up at these centers comprise foreign currency transactions, in the form of accepting and placing of funds in foreign currency outside the country of issue. The functional offshore centers engage in the issue and placement of foreign currency certificates of deposits, loan/credits and bonds. 67 Only for Private Circulation
  • 68. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran These centers contribute to the economic development of the host country in the following ways. 1. The offshore banking units can raise foreign currency loans and bonds for the host country at reasonable interest rates, due to their connections with well known international banks These foreign currency funds can be lent to the host countries or invested in onshore projects or even projects in a third country. Indirectly, the host country gains better access to international capital markets. 2. The functional offshore centers contributes to the foreign exchange income of the host country through local operating expenditures, such as rent paid on leased property, salary paid to local staff, and license fees/taxes recovered from the offshore units. 3. The presence of functional units speeds up the communication and transport network in the host country, which helps to upgrade local skills and technology and constitutes productive assets to the host country. 4. The onshore banking industry in the host country is compelled to improve its efficiency and skills in order to retain its competitive edge. 5. The local staff employed at the centre develops sophisticated international banking skills and this pool of highly trained personnel can be brought in to the host country to attain a faster growth level. Once an offshore centre consistently offers an attractive package of incentives, the above benefits will accrue to the host county, which will be able to induce more and more reputed foreign banks to set up banking units in its territory. ROLE OF OFFSHORE BANKS AND INVESTMENTS In today’s highly integrated global network international Offshore Financial Centers (OFCs) have come to play a vital role in facilitating investment worldwide. An offshore centre exists for comfort and convenience. OFCs are jurisdictions where offshore banks are exempted from a wide range of regulations, which are normally imposed on onshore institutions. Specially, deposits are not subject to statutory reserve requirements. Bank transactions are mostly exempted from tax or treated under a favourable fiscal regime and they are free of interst and exchange control restrictions. In many cases, offshore banks are exempted from regulatory scrutiny with effect to liquidity or capital adequacy. An important activity in OFCs is offshore banking, which is the cross border intermediation of funds and provisions of services by banks residing in 68 Only for Private Circulation
  • 69. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran OFCs to non-residents. Offshore banking is an increasingly attractive alternative to heavily regulated financial markets of emerging economies. They exploit the risk return trade off by being more profitable than onshore banks and in many instances they have more leverage. OFFSHORE BANKING – METHOD OF OPERATION Offshore banks deal mostly with other financial institutions and transact wholesale business in currencies other than that of the country hosting the OFC. Offshore banking is carried out typically through offshore establishments that are offshore branches. Offshore branches are legally indistinguishable from parent banks onshore, which facilitate intra-branch transfers. Offshore activities may also take place through what are called parallel-owned banks. These are banks established in different jurisdictions having the same owner(s), but at the same time they are not subsidiaries. Offshore banks are mainly engaged in three types of transactions; Foreign currency loans and deposits, the under writing of bonds, and Over the Counter (OTC) trading in derivatives for risk management and speculative purposes. Foreign currency transactions form the bulk of offshore banking operations. They include transactions between banks and original depositors, between banks and ultimate borrowers, and between banks themselves on the inter bank market. Underwriting of bonds floated in international capital markets is also a significant part of offshore banking activities. OFCs IN DEVELOPED COUNTRIES AND EMERGING ECONOMIES In the developed countries, OFCs appear to be losing their attractiveness and appeal for financial institutions, which are operating in liquid, increasingly competitive and well-regulated financial markets. With competition under prudential supervision and capital account convertibility being increasingly adopted, the distinction between onshore and offshore banking is progressively disappearing in industrialized countries. In Aisa, offshore interbank markets developed after 1968 when Singapore lauched the Asian Dollar Market (ADM) and introduced the Asian Currency Units (ACUs) and Japan established the Japanese Offshore Market (JOM). 69 Only for Private Circulation
  • 70. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran The ADM was an alternative to London Eurodollar market for the investment of oil surpluses from Indonesia and Malaysia and ACUs enabled local banks to engage in international transactions under a favourable tax and regulatory environment. OFFSHORE FINANCIAL CENTRES IN SINGAPORE, MALAYSIA AND MAURITIUS Singapore Singapore is an established financial centre. The financial service sector is supported by sound economic and financial fundamentals and attractiveness as a base for financial institutions. This has been aided by its geographical location in a fast growing area that bridges the gap between the time zones of the North American and European financial markets, political and financial stability, a skilled labour force and significant government incentives. Singapore is the fourth largest foreign exchange trading centre in the world, the fifth largest trader in derivatives and the ninth largest offshore lending centre. The Asian Dollar market (ADM) in one of the premier offshore banking centres in Asia. The STOCK Exchange of Singapore (SES) is a leading stock market in Asia, and the Singapore International Monetary Exchange (SIMEX) has grown into one of the world’s leading derivatives exchanges. There are three categories of commercial banks in Singapore: I. Full banks II. Restricted banks III. Offshore banks Full banks are allowed to carry out the full range of banking services under the Banking Act. Restricted banks may engage in the same range of domestic branch and cannot accept Singapore dollar savings accounts and Singapore dollar fixed deposits of less than Singapore $ 250,000 from non- bank customers. In 1973, with a view to facilitate Singapore’s goal to become an international financial centre through the entry of more foreign banks, another category of same opportunities as the full and restricted banks in 70 Only for Private Circulation
  • 71. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran business transacted, their scope of business in the Singapore dollar retail market is slightly more limited. In the domestic market, offshore banks cannot accept any interest-bearing deposits from persons other than approved financial institutions, nor can they open more than one branch. By the end of November 1998, there were 104 offshore banks in Singapore, all of which were branches of foreign banks. By 2003 the number of banks crossed 120. In Singapore, offshore banking is carried out by separate book- keeping entities known as Asian Currency Units. ACUs do not have the right to incur assets and liabilities in Singapore dollars but can engage in all types of banking transactions in other currencies. Various incentives have been given to encourage the development of ACUs, the most important of which is that ACUs face a tax on profits of only 10% compared with the standard corporate rate of 27% and are not subject to reserve and liquidity requirements. ACUs have functioned in the region primarily as a centre for routing capital from markets in Europe, North America and the Middle East to the fast growing regions of Asia. Important measures to promote offshore banking in Singapore include: • 1973 – Offshore banking licenses issued to seven foreign banks; corporate tax of ACU on interest earnings from overseas loans reduced from 40% to 0%; interest received by non-resident holders of approved Asian dollar bonds exempted from tax. • 1976 – Non resident deposits with ACUs and approved Asian dollar bonds held by non-residents exempted from Singapore estate duty. • 1979 – Income earned from offshore general reinsurance business granted 10% concessionary tax rate. • 1980 – Stamp duty on ACU offshore general reinsurance business granted 10% concessionary tax rate. • 1980 – Stamp duty on ACU offshore loan agreements and Asian dollar bond certificates abolished. • 1983 – ACUs granted 5 year tax holiday for all income derived from syndicated offshore loans arranged in Singapore. • 1989 – A concessionary 10% tax rate was granted on income from international oil trading activities. • 1990 – Monetary Authority of Singapore (MAS) raised the ceiling on foreign ownership of shares in local banks to 40% from 20%. 71 Only for Private Circulation
  • 72. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • 1992 – Stock Exchange of Singapore (SES) granted membership to seven foreign brokerage houses, allowing them to trade directly on the local market. • 2002 – Offshore transactions became equivalent to domestic transactions. • 2006- offshore banks started investing huge money in other Asian countries like India, Sri Lanka, Indonesia, Thailand and Vietnam. With a view to creating a more level playing field for local and foreign banks, the maximum limit for offshore banks for Singapore dollar credit facilities at any one time to non-bank residents was raised from S$ 200 million to S$ 300 to S$ 1 billion, with a view to boosting Singapore as a financial centre. In 2004, many of the investors and joint venture partners avail of offshore facilities to invest in the mega projects of South Asia and South East Asia. Malaysia Malaysia established an International Offshore Financial Centre (IOFC) in Labuan in 01991. The Offshore Banking Act 1990 provides a regulatory framework for offshore banking operations in Labuan. As confidentiality is the hallmark of an offshore financial centre, an offshore bank has to maintain strict secrecy in the affairs of its customers. Offshore banks are expected to observe a strong self-regulatory code of conduct which places emphasis on ‘knowing your customer.’ The Labuan Offshore Financial Services Authority (LOFSA) established in 1996, is the single regulatory authority with the following roles and functions: • To be responsible for setting national objectives, policies and priorities for the orderly development and administration of the Labuan IOFC. • To be responsible for the promotion and development aspects and recommend new measures to the government to speed up growth and development of the Labauan IOFC. • To supervise the activities and operations of the offshore financial service industry in Labuan and to process applications to conduct business in the Labuan IOFC, specially in offshore banking, offshore insurance and insurance related business, offshore trust and fund management, incorporating and registering of offshore companies as well as for setting up of Labuan trust companies. 72 Only for Private Circulation
  • 73. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • To administer and enforce offshore financial services legislation and work with the offshore players in Labuan to promote offshore financial services. The Labuan IOFC operates in a free exchange control environment. Offshore companies are given a non-resident status for exchange control status. Offshore companies can continue to transfer funds freely to and from their accounts outside Malaysia without approval from the central bank of Malaysia. The foreign currency accounts held with the offshore banks are not considered as external accounts and are not subject to exchange control measures. The offshore banks are also allowed to issue financial and non- financial guarantees to residents in Ringgit. They can receive fees and commissions related to guarantee in Ringgit. The holding requirement of one year is not applicable to assets in Ringgit held in collateral by the offshore banks for credit facilities granted to residents. The payments of existing loans and guarantees in foreign currency by Malaysian residents to the offshore banks do not require prior approval from the Central Bank. In Labuan no tax is imposed on the income of offshore companies that are non-trading companies, and offshore trading companies enjoy a low tax regime with a rate of only 3% of their net income of RM 20,000 (USD 8000). Other benefits and incentives include: • No tax on offshore companies carrying out offshore non-trading activities such as holding of securities, shares, immovable properties and taking of loans and placing of deposits. • No withholding tax for dividends paid by an offshore company, distribution from an offshore trust, royalties received from an offshore company by a non-resident, interest earned on deposits with offshore banks, and interest earned on loans to Malaysians. • No inheritance, death, or estate duty. • Exemption from paying stamp duty on all offshore business transactions. • Double tax treaty agreements signed with over 40 other countries and investment guarantee agreements with 50 countries. Mauritius Mauritius is fast becoming an international financial and business centre. Offshore transactions are normally conducted with non-residents and in currencies other than the Mauritius Rupee. Mauritius has focused its offshore business on specific areas such as investment funds, investment holdings and international trading. The island is becoming an attractive 73 Only for Private Circulation
  • 74. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran destination for offshore fund structuring and investment vehicles. Mauritius enjoys international exposure as a domicile for emerging market funds, and is being considered as a gateway for investment into India, the Indian sub- continent and the African region. In 1989, offshore banks were allowed to be set up in Mauritius and subsequently the incorporation of offshore companies was allowed. In 1992, the offshore financial services sector was officially set up with the proclamation of two acts of parliament, namely the Mauritius Offshore Business Activities Act and the Offshore Trusts Act. Offshore business can be conducted through the follo9wing entities: an ordinary status company, an international company, a trust, or a partnership. The Mauritius Offshore Business Activities Authority (MOBAA), set up in 1992 under the Mauritius Offshore Business Activities (MOBA) Act 1992, is entrusted with the task of licensing, supervising and developing non-banking offshore business in Mauritius. The MOBA Act 1992 sets out the broad parameters for the conduct of offshore business. An offshore business activity is defined as an activity carried on from within Mauritius with non-residents and in foreign currencies. The MOBA Act of 1992 provides fro a whole range of approved offshore activities which include Offshore Funds Management; International Financial Services; Operational Headquarters; International Consultancy Services, Shipping and Ship Management; Aircraft Financing and Leasing: International Licensing and Franchinsing; International Data Processing and Information Technology Services; Offshore Pension Funds; International Trading; International Employment Services; International Assets Management; and Offshore Insurance. Currently, eleven offshore banks of international standing operate in Mauritius. Both the volume and range of business undertaken by offshore banks have registered sustained progress. Various factors have registered sustained progress. Various factors have contributed to the attractiveness of Mauritius as an OFC which include: • Exemption from compliance with the Exchange Control Act. • Freedom to conduct all legitimate banking and other financial business with non-residents. • Exemption from credit, interest rates and other restrictions normally applied to business of domestic banks. • Low income tax rate of 5 percent on all offshore profits. • Free repatriation of profits without further taxation. 74 Only for Private Circulation
  • 75. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • Exemption from stamp duty on documents relating to offshore business transactions. • Exemption from stamp duty on documents relating to offshore business transactions. • Exemption from customs duty on imported office equipment. • No withholding tax on interest payable on deposits raised from non- residents by offshore banks. • Double taxation avoidance treaty with a number of countries. • Expatriate staff is subject to a concessionary personal income tax rate. • No estate duty or inheritance tax is payable on the inheritance of shares in an offshore entity. • No capital gains tax. OFFSHORE FINANCIAL CENTERS AND IMPLICATIONS FOR INDIA A synthesis of the role and evolution of OFCs in select countries, their operative mechanisms, regulatory framework and privileges delineated in the preceding sections highlight various factors that contribute to the attractiveness of OFCs, Certain common facilities/exemptions/concessions have been worked out to form offshore banking in India. With the Government having announced the policy of promoting Special Econ9mic Zones (SEZs) which would, inter alia, serve to attract world class investors, and at the same time contribute towards the country’s export efforts, it is pertinent to take into account the factors highlighted above that have contributed to successful OFCs around the world. This is very important, as it is necessary to create a policy environment relating to finance and banking which is conducive as also internationally competitive. The main requirements of such a policy are given below. • Conducive fiscal regime, such as minimal taxation or low tax jurisdiction with an extensive web of bilateral tax treaties; no income tax, capital gains or wealth taxes on individuals, stamp duty, customs duty, estate tax, inheritance tax, etc. • No withholding of income tax on non-resident depositors in OFCs. • Stringent banking secrecy rules. • Absence of exchange control or minimal control. • Exemption from several prudential regulations including reserve requirements limitations on investments, limitations on acquisitions of immovable property, etc. 75 Only for Private Circulation
  • 76. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • Minimum formalities for incorporation. • Adequate legal framework that safeguards the integrity of principal agent relations. • Conducive regulatory framework – a separate banking act to provide a regulatory framework covering the operations of banks and financial institutions in the SEZs. For instance, the Offshore banking licence for the setting up of a branch or subsidiary. Offshore Banks: Regulatory Framework in Selected Offshore Financial Centres. Offshore Activities Prudential Tax Role of Financial and Regulations Privileges Regulators Centre Restrictions Offshore banks are under the oversight of the offshore Both private Finance and public Committee companies chaired by the may operate Governor with onshore and representatives offshore. All No taxes are Anguilla N/a of both the four levied Government domestic and private banks offer sector. The offshore Eastern banking Carribean services. Central Bank does not supervise the offshore sector. Offshore Minimum Offshore Offshore banks may be paid in banks have a banks are Antigua & legally capital is US 50 year regulated by Barbados established $ 1 milion. reprieve from the Supervisor under the Licensing taxes on of Banking 76 Only for Private Circulation
  • 77. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran international includes profits. There and Trust Business information are no income Corporations Centre (IBC) on capital gains, and the Act (1982) shareholders, or other Ministry of and are directors, and wealth tax on Finance. defined as officers with individuals. corporations satisfactory The Eastgern licensed to evidence that Caribbean carry out the latter Central Bank banking have the does not business in necessary supervise the currencies education offshore other than and sector. those of experience, Caricom and recent financial information on the applicant. Offshore banks must submit quarterly returns and an annual audit must be submitted to the Inspector of Banks in the Ministry of Finance, which has the ability to carry out onsite inspection. Deposits Locally Offshore Taxation is Bahrain from non incorporated banks must be minimal bank offshore and licensed by the 77 Only for Private Circulation
  • 78. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran institutions onshore BMA, which are allowed banks must also only if they follow the supervises are atleast same rules. them. A equivalent to Offshore deposit US$ 50,000. institutions insurance Offshore are required scheme is in banks cannot to disclose place for all extend loans fully their commercial to residents ownership banks. The of Baharain; structure. BMA has the cannot offer They are sub ability to current subject to provide lender accounts. regular of the last reporting resort (LOLR) requirements facilities to to the onshore banks Baharain are excluded Monetary from LOLR Authority support. (BMA) on a monthly, quarterly, semiannual and annual basis. Prudential requirements are applied on a consolidated basis. Typically ACUs are ACU are ACUs must be offshore exempt from taxed at a licensed by the banking is several concessionary MAS, which operated prudential rate of 10 also supervise Singapore through regulations, percent them. Asian most natbly (normal Inspections on Currency the reserve corporate tax the accounts Units requirements rate is 26 of the ACUs 78 Only for Private Circulation
  • 79. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran (ACUs). (normally 6 percent). are carried out These are percent) the There is no on a regular operational minimum withholding basis. There is units whose liquid asset or income tax no formal function is to ratio on non deposit conduct (normally not resident insurance business in less than 18 ACUs scheme. The the Asia percent) depositors. MAS has Dollar limitations on ability to act market. ACU investments, as lender of may also be limitation on lasat resort, operated by acquisition of but not an onshore immovable obligation to commercial property and do so. In 1996, banks and some of the the Banking merchant limitations on Act was banks. In credit amended to these cases, facilities allow foreign ACUs are (limits to a regulators to distinct single inspect the accounting borrower and Singaporean entities related party branches of separately or parties) banks under licensed by Foreign their the Monetary ACUs are oversight. Authority of required to Singapore provide a (MAS) guarantee ACUs accept from their deposits and parent make loans institutions in foreign ensuring currencies liquidity on and are demand to prohibited the ACU from doing should it run business into denominated difficulties. in Singapore ACUs are dollars. They required to 79 Only for Private Circulation
  • 80. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran cannot accept provide time deposits detailed of less than financial SGD statements to 250000; the MAS on operate a monthly savings basis. account; have more than one location (no branches) Total credit facilities to Singapore non-bank customers must be less than SGD 50 million India as offshore banking, an emerging sector The concept and practices are not new to Indian banks. Indian public sector banks such as Bank Of India, State Bank Of India, Punjab National Bank and Bank Of Baroda already had operations in other countries. They have developed systems and expertise to handle offshore operations. The customers, both investing and borrowing segments are also aware of the mechanism. But in real terms, the awareness has been created while news items started appearing on overseas banking units (OBU) could be set up in special economic zones (SEZ) without mandatory requirements of SLR (Statuary Liquidity Ratio). 80 Only for Private Circulation
  • 81. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 6. Essentials of Trade Finance “Means and methods of transaction determine perfection. No one can claim that his business is successful until a complete receipt of money is ensured for his business. deal, through proper channel and right currency Learning Value: On going through this chapter the reader will learn certain essential aspects of transaction either export or import or investment. • Foreign exchange transaction. • Exchange rate mechanism fro merchant trade. • FEMA on international trades • UCPDC and its essential provisions • Safe and secured transaction through Letter of Credit. Different countries have different currencies. All the currencies are neither equivalent in value nor stable. Whether the company is involved in trading or manufacturing or investing there is a need for expertise in managing currencies at all the stages of operation. Exchange Rate is defined as the rate at which one currency is exchanged for another currency. Foreign Exchange trading is a sale or purchase of one currency and traded with another. In a foreign exchange transaction: 81 Only for Private Circulation
  • 82. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • The transaction is always talked of from the banks point of view. • The item referred to is the foreign currency. When we say “Purchase” we mean (buying rate): • The bank has purchased and • It has purchased foreign currency. Similarly, “Sale” means (selling rate): • The bank has sold and • It has sold foreign currency. Direct Quotation: A given number of units of domestic currency per unit of foreign currency, e.g., $1 = Rs.40.00. With effect from 2nd August 1993 direct quotations are being used in India. Indirect Quotation: A given number of foreign currency per unit local (domestic) currency, e.g., Rs.100 = $2.5. Two-Way Quotation The foreign exchange quotation by the bank has two rates- one at which quoting bank is willing to buy and the other at which it is willing to sell. For example US $1 = Rs.45 – Rs.45.20. Here, the bank will enter into purchase transaction at Rs.45.00 and sell transaction at Rs.45.20. Hence the principle in case of direct quotation is BUY LOW & SELL HIGH. From the Ads point of view, conversion of foreign currency on behalf of an exporter into Indian Rupees would be a purchase transaction, and conversion of domestic currency into foreign currency on behalf of an importer would be a sale transaction. Likewise, outward remittance would involve sale of foreign currency while inward remittance would involve purchase of foreign currency. In case of Indirect Rate Quotation the principle is BUY HIGH & SELL LOW. Types of Exchange Rates 82 Only for Private Circulation
  • 83. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Ready of Cash: Refers to transaction to b settled on the same day e.g., transaction done on 3rd June to be settled on 3rd June. Tom: Refers to transaction where delivery of foreign currency to be done on the next day tomorrow, e.g., transaction done on 3rd August to b settled on 4th August. Spot: Refers to transaction where delivery of foreign currency to be done on the second working day (day after tomorrow) from the date of contract e.g., transaction done on 3rd June to be settled on 5th June. Forward: Refers to transaction where delivery of foreign currency to take place on a date farther than the spot date e.g., transaction done on 3rd June to be settled on any date after 5th June, normally. Cross Rates: If the quotation for a particular currency is not available, we can obtain it through the rate of that currency, of which the rate is available. Value Date: The date on which payment, delivery of funds or an entry to an account becomes effective. Cover Rate and Base Rate The rate at which the banks can cover the merchant transactions in the inter-bank market without any profit or loss is called the Cover Rate. That is, the rate at which the bank can buy the dollars to cover import transactions in US$ and the rat at which it can sell the Dollars to cover an export transaction in Dollars is called the Cover Rate. The base rate is arrived from the cover rate after allowing for some cushion for adverse movement of the rates. In practice there are instances where the cover rate and the base rate are the same. Fixed and Floating Exchange Rates • In a fixed exchange rate regime, the rate of the domestic currency vis-à-vis a foreign currency is fixed. In Hong Kong the HK dollar rate is fixed i.e. $1 = HK$ 7.80. In case of higher demand of the foreign currency viz. the dollar, the central bank of the country sells dollar from its reserve to maintain the rate. • In a floating exchange rate regime, the rate of the domestic currency vis-à-vis foreign currency depends on supply and demand and market forces. Most major currencies viz. US Dollar, British Pound, Euro Japanese Yen etc. are floating ones. Principle Types of Merchant Rates 83 Only for Private Circulation
  • 84. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran As mentioned above, in a purchase transaction the bank buys foreign currency from the customer and pays him in rupees. Some transactions result in the bank getting the foreign exchange immediately, while some involve delay in getting the foreign exchange. Depending upon the time of realization of foreign exchange by the bank, two types of buying/selling rates are quoted in India. • TT buying rate is applied when the transaction does not involve any delay in realization of foreign exchange by the bank i.e. the nostro a/c of the bank has already been credited. For example, purchase of drafts, MT’s, TT’s etc. and/or cancellation of drafts sold earlier. • Bills buying rate is applied when a bill is purchased. The proceeds will be realized by the bank after the bill is presented to the drawee and he makes payment. The rate is loaded with transit/usance period interest. • TT selling is applied when the correspondent bank’s account is credited immediately. For example, issue of drafts, TT’s drawn on a correspondent bank and/or cancellation of foreign exchange purchased earlier. • Bills selling rate is used for all other transactions involving handling of documents by the bank e.g. payment against import bills etc. SELLING TRANSACTIONS 84 Only for Private Circulation
  • 85. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran RATES A. Outward remittance in foreign currency (TT,MT, PO,DD) B. Cancellation of purchase, e.g. TT Selling Rate • Bill purchased returned unpaid. Exchange • Bill purchased transferred to Margin: collection amount. 0.125% to 0.150% • Earlier inward remittance (converted into rupees) is refunded to the remitting bank. C. A forward purchase contract is cancelled. Transaction involving transfer of proceeds of Bill Selling Rate import bills. Exchange {Even if proceeds of import bills are remitted Margin: in foreign currency by way of DD, MT, TT, 0.175% to PO, the rate to be applied is the Bill Selling 0.200% Rate(and not TT Selling Rate)}. Foreign – TCs/ Currency Notes At the option of Ads. Selling Rates BUYING RATES TRANSACTIONS A. Clean inward remittance (PO, MT, TT, DD) TT Buying Rate for which cover has already been Exchange credited to Ads account abroad. Margin: B. Conversion of proceeds of instruments sent 0.125% to for collection. 0.180% C. Cancellation of outward TT, MT, PO etc. D. Cancellation of a forward sale contract. A. Purchase / Discounting of Bills and other Bill Buying Rate instruments. Exchange B. Where banks has to claim cover after Margin: payment. 0.125% to C. Where drawing bank at one centre remits 0.150% cover for credit to a different centre. Foreign-TCs / Currency Notes At the option of Ads. Selling Rates Persons residing in India: 85 Only for Private Circulation
  • 86. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Section 2 of FEMA, 1999 defines the term resident in India as a person residing in India for more than 182 days during the course of a financial year. Persons residing outside India: Section 2 of FEMA, 1999 defines person residing outside India as a person who is not resident in India (NRI). Non-resident Indians generally fall under one of the following broad categories: • Non-Resident Indian (NRI) • An NRI is a person holding an Indian passport: o Who has gone abroad for a gainful employment or business or vacation, or for any other purpose indicating an indefinite period of stay outside India. o Who are working abroad on foreign assignments- persons employed by IMF/IBRD/UNO/UNESCO etc. or who are employed in Central/State Government and Public Sector Undertakings and deputed abroad on temporary period. • Persons of Indian Origin (PIO) o For the purpose of being eligible for the facilities of opening and maintenance of various types of bank accounts and making investments in shares and securities in India, a PIO means a citizen of any country other than Bangladesh or Pakistan, if: • He held an Indian passport at any point of time, or • Whose parent/s or grand parent/s was citizen of India (undivided India), or • Spouse of a non-resident Indian. Overseas Corporate Bodies (OCBs) Overseas firms, trusts or companies, predominantly owned by non- resident Indians are called Overseas Corporate Bodies. The level of ownership of NRIs in such bodies should be minimum 60%, by one or 86 Only for Private Circulation
  • 87. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran more NRI owners. The facilities for investment into India, granted to OCBs were almost similar to those granted to individual non-resident Indians. However, with effect from 16.08.2003, OCBs have been completely derecognized as an investor class by the RBI. Now they are not allowed to make fresh investments in India. Correspondent Banking Nostro Account: A foreign currency account maintained by a bank in India with a bank abroad. “Our account with you”. E.g., State Bank of India, Kolkata. Vostro Account: A rupee account of a foreign bank with an Indian bank. “Your account with us”. E.g., Citibank’s rupee account with State Bank of India, Kolkata. Loro Account: A bank’s account with another bank. “Their account with you”. E.g., Citibank’s HK $ account with Hong Kong Bank, Hong Kong. Mirror Account: These are dummy accounts maintained by banks to know the actual position of their accounts with the foreign correspondent banks. We may call it a pass-book of our accounts maintained with the correspondents. Escrow Account: These accounts are maintained by citizens outside the country or by the citizens residing outside the country, but accounts maintained in the parent country. These accounts are being maintained exclusively for business purposes and like current accounts, do not carry any benefit of interest, overdrafts etc. Basically, such accounts are opened to carry merchant trading activity with prior approval from the RBI and general transactions are not permitted. International Organizations as facilitators of International Business: International Organizations like the World Bank were set up to maintain orderly international financial conditions and to provide capital and advice for economic development, particularly of developing countries. International Business Organizations are required to understand the system and lending criteria of such 87 Only for Private Circulation
  • 88. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran institution, so that it would be easy to avail their funds to develop business. World Bank Group • International Development Association • International Finance Corporation • Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency Other International Organizations • International Monetary Fund • Bank of International Settlements • Asian Development Bank • African Development Bank Asian Clearing Union • Established in 1974 • Members- Central Banks of India, Iran, Bangladesh, Nepal, Pakistan, Sri Lanka and Myanmar (Burma). • To provide facility to settle payments for current international transactions. • Promote use of participant’s currencies in current transactions. • Promote monetary cooperation. • Exempted categories: Travel between India and other countries. Foreign trade financed by World Bank, ADB etc. Payments between India and Nepal, Pakistan and Iran individually. • With effect from 1.1.1996, 1 A.C.U. $ = 1 U.S. $. • ACU accounts are settled at the end of every two months. • The balance outstanding in ACU Vostro account with the Authorized Dealers is subject to CRR and SLR. Offshore Banking Unit (OBU) An Offshore Banking Unit (OBU) of a bank is a deemed foreign branch of the parent bank situated within India, and shall undertake international banking business involving foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities. The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) 88 Only for Private Circulation
  • 89. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran has given permission to certain select banks in India, fulfilling certain criteria, to set up OBUs in “Special Economic Zones” (SEZ), for facilitating exports from India. Offshore Banking Units can accept Multi Currency Deposits from NRIs and Eligible Resident Indians as per FEMA. Companies/Units within the “SEZs” in India as well as companies outside “SEZs” as per existing FEMA guidelines can go for Multi Currency Borrowing from OBU. E-Money India This is a completely online mode of sending money from US to India. Any person/organization who wishes to make a payment (in foreign currency) to an individual/organization in India (in Indian rupees) can use e-Money India. The customer needs to follow three simple steps to send money to India: • Register on the e-money India site by providing elementary details. • Provide his bank details. • Provide the receiver’s details in India. Presently, a customer can make an inward remittance in US Dollars only for family maintenance, purchase of property, investments, or transfers to NRE accounts. Remittances from foreign tourists visiting India and trade- related remittances can also be sent. The remittance will be delivered to his/her beneficiary’s doorstep as a locally payable demand draft or deposited directly into the receiver’s account in India in Indian Rupees only. LETTER OF CREDIT: Short term transactions for goods and services. The concept: In simple terms, a letter of credit is an undertaking by a bank to make a payment to a named beneficiary within a specified time, against the presentation of documents which comply strictly with the terms of the letter of credit. A letter of credit is opened by an importer (applicant), to ensure that the documentation requested reflects and proves that the seller has 89 Only for Private Circulation
  • 90. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran performed under the requirements of the underlying sales contract, by the exporter by making them conditions of the letter of credit (N.B. The sales contract is not an inherent part of the Letter of Credit, although the Letter of Credit may contain a reference to such contract). For the exporter, a letter of credit, apart from cash in advance, is the most secure method of payment in international trade as long as the terms of the credit are met. The following diagram shows those involved in a Letter of Credit transaction: Issuing Bank Advising/ Confirming Bank Importer Underlying Exporter (Applicant) Contract (Beneficiary) Its main advantage is providing security to both the exporter and the importer. The security offered, however, comes at a price and must be weighed against the additional costs resulting from bank charges. The exporter must understand the conditional nature of the letter of credit and the fact that payment will not be made unless the terms of the credit are met precisely. When an exporter asks for payment by letter of credit, he is transferring the risk of non-payment by the buyer to the issuing bank 90 Only for Private Circulation
  • 91. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran (and the confirming bank if the letter of credit is confirmed), providing the exporter presents the required documents in strict compliance with the credit. An importer should only be thinking of opening a letter of credit of his country’s exchange control regulations require it or if his supplier insists upon it. It is worth noting that over 50% of letters of credit are rejected on first presentations, which can cause expensive delays for both the exporter and importer. Up to one half of these rejections could have been avoided if more care was taken to ensure the credit properly represented the sales contract. Exporter will need to be certain that it is necessary to use a letter of credit. Typical considerations include: • Is it a legal requirement in the importing country? • What is the value of the order will the bank charges be out of proportion to the value? • ‘Always Traded This Way’ always using letter of credit for a particular customer or region without periodically re- assessing the reasons for requesting this method of payment. • What is the credit rating of the importer and are they a new customer or has a trading relationship already been established? • What is the country risk of the issuing bank? Would a confirmed letter of credit be more suitable? • What is the standing of the issuing bank? Would a confirmed letter of credit be more suitable? • What is the usual practice in trading with that country and in that particular commodity? • Are there any other measures that could be taken to protect the exporter such as credit insurance? • Insistence by a Credit Insurer to trade on letter of credit terms with buyers in certain markets. • Recommendation by banks who may advise that the best method of payment is a ‘confirmed irrevocable letter of credit’ irrespective of the country, strength of issuing bank and without much regard to the value of the consignment. • Strategic decision made by the exporter however, this strategy should be flexible to adapt to the changing risk profile of both the country and the buyer. It is important to remember that all parties in the letter of credit transaction deal with documents, not goods. 91 Only for Private Circulation
  • 92. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Types of Letter of Credit (L/C) Revocable: A revocable letter of credit can be amended or cancelled at any time by the importer without the exporter’s agreement unless documents have been taken up by the nominated bank. Little protection is offered to the exporter with a revocable credit and they are rarely seen. Irrevocable: An irrevocable letter of credit can neither be amended nor cancelled without the agreement of all parties to the credit. Under UCP 600, all letters of credit are deemed to be irrevocable unless otherwise stated. Here, the importer’s bank gives a binding undertaking to the supplier provided all the terms and conditions of the credit are fulfilled. Unconfirmed: An unconfirmed letter of credit is forwarded by the advising bank directly to the exporter without adding its own undertaking to make payment or accept responsibility for payment at a future date, but confirming its authenticity. Confirmed: A confirmed letter of credit is one in which the advising bank, on the instructions of the issuing bank, has added a confirmation that payment will be made as long as compliant documents are presented. This commitment holds even if the issuing bank or the buyer fails to make payment. The added security to the exporter of confirmation needs to be considered in the context of the standing of the issuing bank and the current political and economic state of the importer’s country. A bank will make an additional charge for confirming a letter of credit. Confirmation costs will vary according to the country involved, but for many countries considered a high risk will be between 2%-8%. There also may be countries issuing letters of credit which banks do not wish to confirm they may already have enough exposure in that market or not wish to expose themselves to that particular risk at all. Standby Letter of Credit: A standby letter of credit is used as support where an alternative, less secure, method of payment has been agreed. They are also used in the United States of America in place of bank guarantees. Should the exporter fail to receive payment from the importer he may claim under the standby letter of credit? Certain documents are likely to be required to obtain payment including: the standby letter of credit itself; a sight draft for the amount due; a copy 92 Only for Private Circulation
  • 93. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran of the unpaid invoice; proof of dispatch and a signed declaration from the beneficiary stating that payment has not been received by the due date and therefore reimbursement is claimed by letter of credit. The International Chamber of Commerce publishes rules for operating standby letter of credit ISP98- International Standby Practices. Revolving Letter of Credit: The revolving credit is used for regular shipments of the same commodity to the same importer. It can revolve in relation to time or value. If the credit is time revolving once utilized it is reinstated for further regular shipments until the credit is fully drawn. If the credit revolves in relation to value once utilized and paid the value can be reinstated for further drawings. The credit must state that it is a revolving letter of credit and it may revolve either automatically or subject to certain provisions. Revolving letters of credit are useful to avoid the need for repetitious arrangements for opening or amending letters of credit. Transferable Letter of Credit: A transferable letter of credit is one in which the exporter has the right to request the paying, or negotiating bank to make either part, or all, of the credit value available to one or more third parties. This type of credit is useful for those acting as middlemen especially where there is a need to finance purchases from third party suppliers. Back to Back Letter of Credit: A back to back letter of credit can be used as an alternative to the transferable letter of credit. Rather than transferring the original letter of credit to the supplier, once the letter of credit is received by the exporter from the opening bank, that letter of credit is used as security to establish a second letter of credit drawn on the exporter in favour of his importer. Many banks are reluctant to issue back-to-back letters of credit due to the level of risk to which they are exposed, whereas a transferable credit will not expose them to higher risk than under the original credit. Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credit (UCPDC): Most letters of credit are subject to UCP 600 which are the universally recognized set of rules governing the use of the documentary credits in international trade. UCP were originally formulated in 1993 by the International Chamber of Commerce (ICC) and last updated in 2003 ICC publication. All definitions and general documentary requirements referred to in this briefing are in accordance with UCP 600 unless otherwise stated (it should be remembered that in some instances this may differ from national law). 93 Only for Private Circulation
  • 94. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran SITPRO would only recommend using letters of credit which are subject to UCP 600. It is important to negotiate, at contractual stage if possible, which party will bear bank charges. It is worth remembering that on a small transaction these may be totally out of proportion and if these costs are not included in the pricing any profit may be completely eroded. Essential checks when the Letter of Credit is received Even when the above steps are followed, it is essential to check the Letter of Credit as soon as it is received. The following is a checklist to be reviewed immediately on receipt of a Letter of Credit. • Is the credit subject to UCP 600? • Are there any terms or conditions within the credit which cannot be met? If so immediate arrangements must be made with your importer for the credit to be amended. • Can the goods be shipped within the period set by the Letter of Credit? • Do any documents need to be legalized? • Can the mode of transport specified be used? • Can shipment be made from the port/airport specified? • Are the prices correct? • Do the credit terms confirm with the underlying sales contract? • Are drawings under the credit negotiable or payable in the exporter’s country rather than abroad? • Are the description, price and quantity of the goods are in accordance with the terms of the contract? (Remember that under-drawing a credit may sometimes cause problems, e.g., if trade discount has been forgotten when the opener instructed his bank). • Are the insurance requirements of the credit acceptable? • Can the required documentation be obtained? • If part shipments and trans-shipment of goods are prohibited, can the full quantity of the goods be exported on a vessel direct from the port of loading to the port of destination? • Can the goods be shipped within the period specified and documents presented to the bank within 21 days from the date 94 Only for Private Circulation
  • 95. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran of shipment (unless a shorter time is stipulated) but, I any case before the credit expires? Checklist for preparing documents Amount Payable: • Do not overstate of the amount to be drawn as this could lead to the rejection of documents when presented. • The words “circa” or “about” relating to the quantity or unit price of the goods or to the amount of the credit allow a tolerance of 10% either way. • Unless a credit stipulates that the quantity of the goods specified must be exceeded nor reduced, a tolerance of 5% either way is permissible, always providing that the total amount of the drawings dos not exceed the amount of the credit. However, this tolerance does not apply when the credit specifies quantities in number of packing units or individual items. Shipment: • Can specified shipping documentation can be obtained? • If the seller is chartering a vessel or shipping on deck, does the credit specifically permit such methods? • Do the ports of shipment and discharge, if specified, conflict with the price quotations? • If partial shipment or transshipments have to be made, does the credit allow this? Any installments not shipped within a stipulated period will effectively cancel the credit. • Is the time available for shipment sufficient and the period allowed for presentation of documents after shipment also sufficient? • If a credit on a day when banks are not open, the validity is usually extended to the next working day. However, this does not apply to the stipulated time after shipment allowed for the presentation of documents, usually 21 days. Individual Documents Draft: The draft must be drawn by the beneficiary on the party specified in the credit or as requested by the advising bank. It must be 95 Only for Private Circulation
  • 96. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran drawn in accordance with the terms of the credit. One should check that it is: • Correct in words and figures. • Drawn payable at sight or sometimes at a given future time. • Clause in accordance with the credit terms. • Correctly dated. Bill of Lading: It is a transport document issued by the shipping company to prove that the consignment has left the port of despatch. A traditional bill of lading has a threefold purpose: • Formal receipt by the ship owner for goods. • Evidence of the contract of carriage. • Document of title to goods. They should: • Be issued by a shipping company or its accredited agent. • Not be issued by a forwarding agent nor under a charter unless specifically authorized by the Letter of Credit. • Be shipped on board, unless the credit provides otherwise. • Bear a proper amendment, duly dated and signed by the shipping company, if a “received for shipment” item has been converted into a “shipped” document. The same applies to any other alteration. • Be in a complete set (unless otherwise indicated in the Letter of Credit) with any required number of non-negotiable copies, each negotiable copy being signed by the shipping company. • Be free from any detrimental clauses added by the shipping company indicating damage to goods or packing. • Cover an ocean voyage. Bills of lading evidencing shipment by a local vessel are not normally acceptable if transshipment is not allowed. • Bear a precise notation concerning payment of freight, i.e. either “freight paid” or freight payable at a given destination. • Bear goods description either in general or particular terms: however, the wording chosen must not conflict with the credit or other documents. • Bear shipping marks, number of packets and weights, consistent with all other documents. In particular, car should be taken that details on the bill of lading (often the last 96 Only for Private Circulation
  • 97. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran document to become available) do not contradict details typed on earlier documents. • Show ports of shipment and discharge in agreement with credit terms. • Be endorsed on the reverse if made out to the shopper’s order. • Be presented within the time limit specified in the credit for presentation of documents. If no such period is stipulated, banks will refuse documents presented later than 21 days from the date of the bill of lading. • Must bear a shipment date on or before the last stipulated shipment date but, in any event, within the validity of the credit. • Unless otherwise stipulated in the credit, banks will accept short form bills of lading issued by shipping companies or their agents or combined transport bills of lading issued by shipping companies or their agents. Insurance Documents Check that: The extent of the cover agrees precisely with the credit terms, bearing in mind that Institute Cargo Clauses (all risks) do not always cover special risks. The date of the insurance document is not later than the shipment date or, if dated after shipment, it bears a clause to the effect that cover commences not later than the date of shipment. Claims are payable in the place specified in the credit. The amount payable in the accordance with the credit terms plus any specified percentage and is in the currency of the credit. Marks, weights and description of the goods agree with the bill of lading and all other documents. The policy or certificate required by the terms is signed by the insurance company, agents or underwriters and endorsed as necessary. Cover is not by means of a broker’s cover note, unless this is specified in the credit. Any insurance policy or certificate made out to the order of the shippers has been blank endorsed. Invoice 97 Only for Private Circulation
  • 98. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Check that: • These have been completed by the exporter in the name of the importer unless the credit specifies otherwise. • Totals of all invoices agree with the amount of the drawing. • Prices and shipment terms (FOB and CIF etc) agree with the credit. • If a combined invoice and certificate of origin is called for, the certificate of origin is duly completed and signed. • If invoices have to be visaed, this has been done by the authority stipulated in the credit. Also remember the time lag between forwarding documents to a consulate and their return. • The full and exact description of the goods as shown on the credit appears on the invoice and that the quantity and specifications are as called for. If goods are described as being “……in accordance with Performa invoice number……dated…..” this can reduce superfluous, error- producing, detail. • There are no additional goods, charges or deductions not authorized in the credit. However, a deduction of normal trade discount is allowed as long as the final amount is correct-neither overdrawn nor under drawn. • If both an invoice and a packing list are called for, no “combined invoice and packing list” should be offered. An appropriately detailed extra invoice may often satisfy the packing list need, if suitably headed. • Performa invoice numbers or references numbers are required by the credit are shown. • Marks and weights net unless the credit states otherwise, number of cases and name of vessel agree with the bill of lading and other documents. Certificate of Origin 98 Only for Private Circulation
  • 99. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran An exporter’s own certificate on a separate sheet is acceptable unless the credit states otherwise. Check that: All details quoted, shipping marks and description of goods, agree with the Letter of Credit, bill of lading and other documents. The certificate does not conflict with other documents with regard to value and country of origin. Weight Note/List Check that: • Certificates of weight must bear an authorized signature of the person/firm/company issuing the certificate in the detail required. • If a weight lists is called for by the credit, this requires the individual weight of each parcel or package together with the total weight. • If a weight note is called for by the credit it can merely state the weights concerned in general terms, perhaps one total. Other Documents which provide evidence of the movement of goods Airway Bill or Air Consignment Note: • These should be issued and stamped by an airline on standard forms and should appear to be the original for the shipper, usually in 3 copies, this shows: name of consignee, goods, which must agree with the credit and all other documents, flight number and date, freight paid or to be paid at destination again in accordance with the terms of the credit. • Ensure that the correct copy is submitted, bearing a clear reception stamp with signature of the carrier or his agent. • Airway bills issued by freight forwarders and referred to master Airway Bill are not acceptable unless a certificate is presented stating that the forwarders are acting as agents for the carriers. 99 Only for Private Circulation
  • 100. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Parcel Post Receipt Check that: • The receipt shows evidence of dispatch to the party named in the credit. • The Post Office stamp shows a dispatch date on or before the last stipulated date for shipment. • The credit does not call for postal dispatch on a FOB basis; these are not acceptable as postal charges to destinations have to be prepaid. Forwarding Agent’s Receipt It is very important to establish at the outset whether there’s a requirement for: • A forwarding agent’s receipt showing goods received for shipment or; • A forwarding agent’s receipt showing goods received and dispatched, as in the case of the CMR note. Normally, one set of documents accompanies the goods on this type of journey. INCOTERMS- A GENERAL GUIDE A set of common and understandable terms with commitment amongst the business community is to be implemented by every entity in trading such as, shipper, receiver, shipping company, banker clearing houses and insurance company. Incoterms are a set of rules for the interpretation of the most commonly used trade terms in international trade- International Commercial Terms. They were first published by the International Chamber of Commerce (ICC) in 1936 and since then have been updated I 1953, 1967, 1976, 1980, 1990 and the current revision 2000. Parties to a contract are often unaware that there are different trading practices in their respective countries, for example, FOB for an American company may have a different meaning than FOB for a UK trader. This can lead to misunderstanding and, in the worst scenario, costly litigation. Incoterms set out to avoid this problem by giving a set of standard rules that are recognized throughout the world. The basic purpose of each Incoterm is to clarify how functions, costs and risks are split between the buyer and seller in connection 100 Only for Private Circulation
  • 101. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran with the delivery of the goods as required by the sales contract. Delivery, risks and costs are known as the critical points. Each term clearly specifies the responsibility of the buyer to the other extreme where everything is fundamentally the responsibility of the seller. The Obligations of the Seller and Buyer The main purpose of Incoterms is to clearly set out the obligations of the seller and the buyer in relation to the delivery of the goods and the division of functions, costs and risks related to the delivery. The way this is presented in each Incoterms is under ten clauses each for the seller and the buyer, where each clause on the seller’s side “mirrors” the obligations to contract for carriage and insurance and clause B3 deals with buyer’s obligations to contract for carriage and insurance. Incorporating Incoterms It is important to ensure that where the protection of Incoterms is intended to be incorporated into a contract of sale that an express reference to the current edition of Incoterms is always made. For example, it is not enough to quote just “FOB Southampton” but instead “FOB Southampton Incoterms 2000” should be used. Alternatively, suitable wording can be included in the contract stating that the contract is subject to Incoterms 2000. However, if this is the case, you should be careful to ensure that standard contracts, and any other standard paperwork mentioning Incoterms, are updated to quote “Incoterms 2000” rather than Incoterms 1990. Failure to incorporate the correct version of Incoterms could result in dispute as to which version is intended or indeed, if Incoterms were intended to be incorporated at all. The Incoterms The thirteen Incoterms are split into four distinct groups: Group E- where the goods are mad available to the buyer at the seller’s premises; Group F- where the seller must deliver the goods to a carrier appointed by the buyer; Group C- where the seller must contract for the carriage of the goods without assuming risk of loss of, or damage to the goods or additional costs due to events occurring after shipment; 101 Only for Private Circulation
  • 102. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Group D- where the seller has to bear all costs and risks required to bring the goods to the place of destination. The following is a list of all of the Incoterms, the group to which they belong and a brief outline of responsibilities under that Incoterm. However, it should be remembered that this is just a brief outline and is not a substitute for reading and understanding Incoterms 2000 itself. Additionally it has been noted whether the term is suitable for any mode of transport or just conventional maritime and inland waterway transport. Group E Departure EXW- Ex Works (named place) (any mode of transport). The seller must place the goods at the disposal of the buyer at the seller’s premises or another named place not cleared for export and not loaded on any collecting vehicle. Group F Main Carriage Unpaid FCA- Free Carrier (named place) (Any mode of transport). The seller must deliver the goods, cleared for export, to the carrier nominated by the buyer at the named place. FAS- Free alongside Ship (named port of shipment) (Maritime and inland waterway transport only). The seller must place the goods, cleared for export, alongside the vessel at the named port of shipment. FOB- Free on Board (named port of shipment) (Maritime and inland waterway transport only). The seller delivers the goods, cleared for export, when they pass the ship’s rail at the named port of shipment. Group C Main Carriage Paid CFR- Cost and Freight (named port of destination) (Maritime and inland waterway transport only). The seller delivers the goods when they pass the ship’s rail in the port of shipment and must pay the costs and freight necessary to bring the goods to the named port of destination. The buyer bears all additional costs and risks after the goods have been delivered (over the ship’s rail at the port of shipment). CIF- Cost, Insurance and Freight (named port of destination) (Maritime and inland waterway transport only). The only obligations are the same as under CFR with the addition that the seller must 102 Only for Private Circulation
  • 103. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran procure insurance against the buyer’s risk of loss of, or damage to the goods during carriage. CPT- Carriage Paid to (named place of destination) (any mode of transport). The seller delivers the goods to the nominated carrier and must also pay the cost of carriage necessary to bring the goods to the named destination. The buyer bears additional costs and risks after the goods have been delivered to the nominated carrier. CIP- Carriage and Insurance Paid To (named place of destination) (any mode of transport). The obligations are the same as under CPT with the addition that the seller must procure insurance against the buyer’s risk of loss of, or damage to the goods during carriage. Group D Arrival DAF- Delivered at Frontier (named place) (Any mode of transport). The seller must place the goods at the disposal of the buyer on the arriving means of transport not unloaded, cleared for export but not cleared for import, at the named point and place at the frontier. DES- Delivered Ex Ship (named port of destination) (Maritime and inland waterway transport only). The seller delivers when the goods are placed at the disposal of the buyer on board the ship, not cleared for import, at the named port of destination. DEQ- Delivered Ex Quay (named port of destination) (Maritime and inland waterway transport only). The seller delivers when the goods are placed at the disposal of the buyer, not cleared for import, on the quay at the named port of destination. DDU- Delivered Duty Paid (named place of destination) (any mode of transport). The seller must deliver the goods to the buyer, not cleared for import, and not unloaded at the named place of destination. DDP- Delivered Duty Paid (named place of destination) (any mode of transport). The seller must deliver the goods to the buyer, cleared for import, and not unloaded at the named place of destination. As can be seen, this list runs from the term where the buyer has most of the responsibility (EXW) through that where the seller has the majority of the responsibility (DDP). It is worth noting that in 103 Only for Private Circulation
  • 104. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Incoterms 2000 the only term that requires the buyer to clear the goods for export (including obtaining any export license necessary) is EXW and the only term that requires the seller to clear the goods for import (including obtaining any import license necessary)is DDP. UCPDC ICC (2007) – 600 – IMPORTANT PROVISION Background In May 2003, the International Chamber of Commerce (ICC) authorized the ICC Commission on Banking Technique and Practice to bring a revision of the Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits. The commission has framed ICC-600 which will be applicable from 1st July 2007. Meaning The Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credit (UCPDC) is a set of rules on the issuance and use of letters of credit. It is being utilized by bankers and commercial parties for more than 175 countries. Essential Articles for Trading Operations Article 2: Definitions of advising bank, applicant, confirmation, beneficiary etc. As per the definition of credit, credit is an arrangement which is irrevocable and constitute a definite undertaking of the issuing bank to honour a complying presentation. Means there is no revocable credit. Article 3: Interpretations of various commonly used words in credit are given. Important of which is that if on or about or similar will be interpreted as a stipulation that an event is to occur during a period of 5 calendar days after the specified date, both start and end dates included. Article 4: A credit by nature is a separate transaction from the sale or other contracts on which it may be based. Banks are in no way concerned or bound by such contracts even if any reference is given in the credit. Article 5: The bank deals in documents and not with goods, services or performance to which the documents may relate. Article 6: A credit must state availability of the bank, expiry date and place of presentation. 104 Only for Private Circulation
  • 105. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Article 7: Issuing Bank undertaking for making payment as per terms of LC or reimbursing to nominated bank having made the payment by way of negotiation as per the terms of LC. Article 8: Confirming Bank undertakings for reimbursement to another nominated bank that has honored or negotiated a complying presentation. Article 14: A presentation must be made by or on behalf of the beneficiary not later than 21 calendar days after the date of shipment but not later than the expiry date of the credit. Further, a nominated bank acting on its nomination, a confirming bank, if any, and the issuing bank shall each have a maximum of 5 banking days (7 in earlier UCP - 500), following the day of presentation to determine if presentation is complying. This period is not curtailed or otherwise affected by the occurrence on or after the date of presentation of any expiry date or last date for presentation. Article 20: Clause in Bill of Lading stating that the carrier reserves the right to transship will be disregarded. Article 22: In case of Charter Party Bill of Lading, banks will not examine the Charter Party contract, even if they are required to be presented by the terms of credit. Article 23: In case of air transport document indicating that transshipment will or may take place is acceptable, even if credit prohibits transshipment. Article 28: If there is no indication in the credit of the insurance coverage required, the amount of insurance coverage must be at least 110% of the CIF or CIP value goods. Article 29: If the expiry date of a credit or the last day for presentation falls on a day when bank is closed for reasons other than Force Measures (Article 36), the expiry day / presentation day will b extended to the first following banking day. But the latest date for shipment will not be extended as a result of this. Article 30: If the word ‘about’, ‘app’ etc is mentioned in the credit it will be construed as + or – 10% for amount and + or – for quantity. The tolerance of 5% in quantity is allowed even if partial shipment is not allowed. Article 31: Partial drawings or shipment are allowed. Article 33: A bank has no obligation to accept a presentation outside its banking hours. Article 36: Force Majeure- A bank assumes no liability or responsibility for the consequences arising out of the interruption of 105 Only for Private Circulation
  • 106. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran its business by acts of God, riots, civil commotions, insurrections, wars acts or terrorism, or by any strikes or lockouts or any other causes beyond its control. A bank will not upon resumption of its business, honour, or negotiate under a credit that expired during such interruption of its business. Article 38: For the purpose of this article, transferable credit means a credit that specifically states that it is transferable. A credit may be transferred in part of more than one second beneficiary provided partial drawings or shipments are allowed. But a transferred credit cannot be transferred at the request of a second beneficiary to any subsequent beneficiary i.e. it can be transferred only once. International business organizations are relocating their manufacturing units. Destinations are changing for their goods. Companies like Mitsubishi and support their goods through ship liners. Obviously, trade finance transactions are integral parts of their business. 106 Only for Private Circulation
  • 107. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 7.MULTINATIONAL CORPORATIONS The world is my playground; Playing is my duty. No barriers or obstacle is known to me. Let me play everywhere and anywhere and at any time. Going and performing in any part of the world is fundamental principle of an MNC. Learning value: On going through the chapter, reader will 1. Understand the concept of MNCs. 2. Role of Head-Quarters and subsidiaries in the current scenario. 3. Basic philosophy of MNCs. 4. Risk analysis of MNCs. 5. Criticism of MNCs and few illustrations. THE CONCEPT If we ask any employee of a multinational company in a developing country, he is proud of his status, sense of achievement and affluence as compared to his peers. The system, style, technology and working style elevate his position little higher than others. What is Multinational Corporation? “The multinational is a business unit which operates simultaneously in different parts of the world. In some cases the manufacturing unit may be in one country, while the marketing and investment may be in other countries. In other cases all the business operations are carried out in different countries, with the strategic head quarters in any part of the world.” For example, the Manhattan based company, Colgate Palmolive Inc., which manufactures and markets dental care, health care, hair care and skin care 107 Only for Private Circulation
  • 108. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran products, in more than 120 countries. Procter and Gamble, based in Cincinnati also has similar product lines and operates in more than 150 countries. Their logo, symbol, products and brands are easily identified in the malls, outlets and media. There are multinationals that have a total turnover exceeding the GDP of many small or less developed nations. The Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, called for short, 3M, have more than a thousand product lines. The top three multinationals in the world today could combine to purchase a small nation. Few multinationals in the total employee force that is larger than the population of a country and my even have the power to bring down governments. Therefore, multinationals have money power, muscle power, managerial power, technology power and political power through which they influence many economies in the world. At one time American based multinationals rules the world. Today, many Japanese, Korean, European and Indian multinationals have spread their wings in many parts of the world. Few nations have created specific product based MNCs such as General Motors, Ford Motors and AMC in case of U.S.A and Sony, Sharp, Hitachi and Casio incase of Japan. Germany concentrated on technology based items like dental equipments and telecommunications. From the centre they started moving to various countries and established their empires. The strategic nerve centre is the company’s headquarters, where major decisions are taken and policies are formulated. The main roles of a typical multinational at headquarters are: 1. Strategic role: It is a policy making entity for operations worldwide. 2. Execution: Decisions on implementation of policies, methods and means of operations, in different countries. 3. Control: Since the operations are vast it is necessary to maintain control over global strategic, costs, systems and operations. All the three roles are played by the head quarters after completing major five pre-requisites: 1. The business opportunity has been explored in a specific area. 108 Only for Private Circulation
  • 109. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 2. Sufficient investment has been made in tangible and intangible assets. 3. The production facility has been already developed. 4. The key persons are taking responsible positions. 5. The location is ideal and conducive for further expansion. Every multinational has to operate through its satellite units in many countries, called subsidiaries. Therefore, multinationals have headquarters and a number of subsidiaries that are scattered throughout the world. As an expansion process, few multinationals are fast expanding their operations in developing countries. While doing so the headquarter is involved in a serious risk analysis and finally select the country where they are comfortable to do business. At the headquarters, the experts from political science, economics, accountancy, sociology and diplomacy are advising the top management on different issues prior to entry into any country. The entry decision is crucial for any MNC and it is an outcome of many brains and not a daring decision of a single mind. 109 Only for Private Circulation
  • 110. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran A typical multinational operates as per the following model: HEADQUARTERS S1 S2 S3 S4 In most cases the power rests with the main company at its head quarters. However, a few multinationals do give considerable powers to their subsidiaries. Currently, multinationals are motivated solely by revenue wherein profits are the main criteria. CLASSIFICATION OF MULTINATIONALS 110 Only for Private Circulation
  • 111. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Depending upon the relationship between the headquarters and subsidiaries, multinationals can be classified into three broad categories: 1. Pyramidal Model Multinationals HQ (STRONG) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 A pyramid indicates a broad bottom and narrow top. According to the typical pyramid model, the multinational operates as follows: a) It has strong headquarters and weak subsidiaries. b) All decisions are made at the headquarters and imposed on the subsidiaries, 111 Only for Private Circulation
  • 112. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran c) Major decisions related to new product development, plant location and managerial decisions are taken only at the headquarters. At times, the head-quarters may be quite autocratic towards its subsidiaries. d) They may be quite old fashioned in their day-to-day functioning. e) They do not bring sentiments and emotions for the local population into their dealings. f) They exercise complete control in their deals. g) They run their business through power. Sympathy, compassion and human approach are generally far off in their approach. Lower is the prime motive in their style. Age old colonialism and imperialism got percolated to follow such style. Due to rigidity in their style of functioning, such organizations may invite opposition from citizens in developing countries at any time. Fortunately, such multinationals changed became adaptable to local environment. 2. Umbrella Model Multinationals HQ S1 S2 S3 S4 Here the headquarters acts as a facilitator. Such MNCs believe in a) Mutual exchange of knowledge and technology. 112 Only for Private Circulation
  • 113. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran b) Constant motivation of subsidiaries. c) Building an image for both headquarters and the subsidiary. d) Harmony between employees at different levels, and between employees and employers. e) High respect for the sovereignty of the county where they operate. Such organizations are concerned about their image, goodwill and reputation. For them doing business is a way of life. They invite representatives from the subsidiaries to the headquarters for strategic decisions. They do not practice favoritism, nepotism, parochialism and racial superiority. Merit is the only consideration for growth and career enhancement. An Indian is the CEO of Mc.kinsey, Afghani is the head of HR in Yahoo, Indonesian is the research head in Biorad and Indian woman is heading Pepsi world-wide operations. 3. Inter-conglomerate Multinationals Conglomerate indicates grouping of business activities aiming at high profits and revenue generations, whether it is related to existing core business or not. Inter –conglomerate multinationals are aggressive in expansion and achieving a high turnover. Such multinationals enter into any business where the profits are exponentially high. They generally do not consider any other aspect, except high profits, as a performance indicator. 113 Only for Private Circulation
  • 114. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran INVESTMENT PROFITS HUGE REVENUE EXPANSION HIGH RATE AND OF RETURN AGGRESSION a) High profit motivation. b) They do not restrict themselves to their core competency. c) A ‘hire and fire’ policy is very common. d) They set high targets for themselves. e) No social consideration in the country of their operation. f) Growth, expansion, takeovers and aggression are constant endeavours. The investments are high and are made with expectations of high returns, which will be used for aggressive expansion, diversification and takeovers? 114 Only for Private Circulation
  • 115. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Although multinationals can be classified on the above basis, today the classification is not rigid. Hence, multinationals have become flexible over the past two decades. As the indigenous forces become strong in any developing country, the pure pyramidal model will not work. Organizations, which work under a pure umbrella model cannot generate sufficient revenue to sustain itself and it is also difficult for such organizations to face stiff competition. Organisation, which functions under the inter-conglomerate model, cannot focus only on profit, considerations for social causes and sensitivity towards the host country have to be maintained or else the nationals in the host country pose major challenges and pull down the operations. Classification of Multinationals Depending upon their Origin CLASSIFICATION BASED ON ORIGIN ETHNOCENTRIC REGIO-CENTRIC CONTINENTAL POLYCENTRIC TRANSNATION AL GLOBAL Succeed at Understand Focus on Group the Facilitate Cross the home and complete one requirement accessibility borders and spread with background continent of the whole to serve the home and focus on and continent customers customers at influence a specific strengthen and provide door steps region product and services 115 Only for Private Circulation
  • 116. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 1. Ethnocentric: Such multinationals concentrate more on their place of origin. Since they understand their own socio-cultural background it is easy for them to succeed in their home country. Instead of taking high risks in other countries they first succeed in their home country and then slowly more abroad with few changes in the product and mode of functioning. Mitsukoshi Super Market practices ethnic touch of Japan in its malls wherever it operates. 2. Regio-centric: Few multinationals focus their activities only in a particular region like South East Asia or the Gulf region. There are certain practices that are uniform in nature in a specific region, and hence they succeed. A region covers many nations; hence the organization operates in all parts of the region to get the title ‘multinational’. “Continent”, the French super market chain has an influence in the whole of Indian ocean rim countries. 3. Continental: There are multinationals that are very successful in particular continent for their specific product ranges. The cost of storing and warehousing can be brought down if the product is distributed in the whole continent. There are hundreds of multinationals doing exceedingly well only in Europe, but are not able to face cross-cultural challenges in other continents. Therefore, they remain as continental multinationals. TESCO serves the whole European continent by understanding the need of every European community. 4. Polycentric: The majority of multinationals have to simultaneously enter different countries. It is not possible to adopts a ‘wait and watch’ policy to enter different countries and commence operations. Once a company invests in an innovation, it has to spread its activities everywhere, otherwise it will lose the opportunity, and competitors will step in to get the business. Therefore, companies like Proctor & Gamble, Unilever, Sony, Electrolux, Henkel and Colgate-Palmolive are present in almost every part of the world. 5. Trans-national: Multinational like Hewlett Packard has set up sub- head quarters close to the subsidiaries for easy accessibility. The sub- headquarters are located in Singapore or Hong Kong but the main office remains in California. The trans-national multinationals sole 116 Only for Private Circulation
  • 117. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran problems arising from nearby countries through their sub-headquarter. It is serving the purpose of administrative convenience. 6. Global organizations: These organizations have a physical presence in other parts of the world and cater to customers in different countries through standardized products by consolidating resources from any part of the world. Today, every company dreams of becoming a global company. Companies shift their manufacturing bases to more profitable locations, open up warehouses in special economic zones and train people to be multilingual, multi-strategic and multi-functional in order to manage the business successfully. The difference between polycentric and global multinationals is that the latter is very closed to customer and does not give extra weight- age to the headquarters. Global orgainsations take into account customer tastes and preferences. They employ cost cutting techniques and are able to provide customers with good quality, low-priced items. They have enormous respect for the country in which they operate and integrate themselves into the society. BASIC PHIPLOSOPHIES OF MULTINATIONALS MNCs will always look out for opportunities. They carry out risk analysis, and send their personnel to learn and understand the business climate. They develop expertise in understanding the culture, politics, economy and legal aspects of the country that they are planning to enter. They look at the global, rather than only local potential. The essential element that distinguishes the true multinational is its commitment to manufacturing, marketing, developing R&D, and financing opportunies throughout the world, rather than just thinking of the domestic situation. STRUCTURE OF MULTI-NATIONAL CORPORATIONS MNCs can be categorized in 3 main structures: 1. Attachment of Subsidiaries with General (or Top) Management of the Parent Company and with the CMD 2. Creation of an International Division 117 Only for Private Circulation
  • 118. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 3. Putting in place Group Structure 1. Attachment of Subsidiaries with Top Management of the Group Top Management Financial Asian American Division/ Subsidiary Subsidiary Planning Division Division Division No discrimination between various departments of the organization and foreign subsidiaries. 118 Only for Private Circulation
  • 119. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 2. Organizations with an International Division Parent Company International MARKETING FINANCE Division HR FINANCE MARKETING HR 3. Creation of a Group Structure Organization according to functions Organization according to products Organization according to geographical zones Mixed organization 119 Only for Private Circulation
  • 120. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 3.1 FUNCTIONAL ORGANISATION Top Management Marketing Finance HR COUNTRY A COUNTRY B COUNTRY C 3.2 PRODUCT ORGANISATION CMD PRODUCT A PRODUCT B PRODUCT C PRODUCTION MARKETING FINANCE ASIA EUROPE AMERICA 120 Only for Private Circulation
  • 121. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 3.3 Organization according to Geographical Zones CMD ASIAN AMERICAN AFRICAN EUROPEAN DIVISION DIVISION DIVISION DIVISION PRODUCT A PRODUCT B PRODUCT C PRODUCTION MARKETING 3.4 MIXED ORGANISATION CMD PRODUCT A PRODUCT B INDIA USA EUROPE AFRICA PRODUCT PRODUCT PRODUCT A B C 121 Only for Private Circulation
  • 122. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Some of characteristics of MNCs are Mode of Transfer ( as per convenience) An MNC has considerable freedom in selecting the financial channel through which funds or profits or both are moved. For example, patents and trademarks can be sold outright or transferred in return through contractual binding or royalty payments. Similarly, the MNC can move profits and cash from one unit to another by adjusting transfer prices on inter company sales and purchases of goods and services. MNCs can use these various channels, singly or in combinations, to transfer funds internationally, depending on the specific circumstances encountered. Timing Flexibility Some of the internationally operating companies have to comply with strict payment schedule; others can be accelerated or delayed. MNCs can extend trade credit to their other subsidiaries through open account terms, say from 90 to 180 days. This gives a major leverage to financial status. In addition, the timing for payment of fees and royalties may be modified when all parties to the agreement are related. In the same way while price of raw material is low then they can procure a huge quantity and stock for usage. Value addition through tax reduction By shifting profits from high-tax to low-tax nations, MNCs can reduce their global tax payments. In additions, they can transfer funds among their various units, which allow them to circumvent currency control and other regulations. Cyprus, Panama and Malta are safe destinations for such operations. STRATEGIC APPROACH TO MULTINATIONALS In order to explain new and potentially profitable projects, a good understanding of multinational strategies is necessary. The three broad categories of multinationals and their associated strategies are examined below. A. Innovation Based Multinationals Firms such as IBM, Philips and Apple create barriers to entry for others by continually introducing new products and differentiating existing ones, both 122 Only for Private Circulation
  • 123. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran domestically and internationally. Firms in this category spend large amounts of money on R&D and have a high ratio of technical to factory personnel. Their products are typically designed to fill a need perceived locally that often exists abroad as well. In the field of chemical and pharmaceuticals Hopkins and E. Merck adopt the same strategy. B. The Mature Multinationals The principal approach in such firms is the presence of economies of scale. It exists whenever there is an increase in the scale of production, marketing and distribution costs could be increased in order to retain in existing position or more aggressive. The existence of economies of scale means there are inherent cost advantages of being large. The more significant these economies of scale are, the greater will be the cost disadvantage faced by a new entrant in the same field in a given market. Philip Morris, Toshiba and Whirlpool are falling under this category. Reduction in promotion costs Some companies such as Coca Cola and Proctor & Gamble take advantage of the fact that potential entrants are wary of the high costs involved in advertising and marketing a new product. Such firms are able to exploit the premium associated with their strong brand names. MNCs can use single campaign and visual aspects in all the countries simultaneously with different languages like Nestlé’s Nescafe. Cost advantage through multiple activities Other firms take advantage of economies of scope. Economies of scope exist whenever the same investment can support multi-profitable activities, which are less expensive. Examples abound of the cost advantages of producing and selling multiple products related to common technology, production facilities and distribution network. For example, Honda has increased its investment in small engine technology in the automobile, motorcycle, lawn mower, marine engine, chain saw and generator business. Mitsubishi enjoys this advantage of steel trading, lifts and escalators, vehicles and power generation. C. The Senescent Multinationals 123 Only for Private Circulation
  • 124. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran There are some product lines where the competitive advantages erode very fast. The strategic followed in such cases are given below. 1. One possibility is to enter new markets where little competition currently exists. For example Crown Cork & Seal, the Philadelphia-based maker of bottle tops and cans, reacted to the slowing of growth and heightened competition in business in the United States by expanding overseas. It sets up subsidiaries in such countries as Thailand, Malaysia, Zambia and Peru, estimating correctly that in these developing and urbanizing societies, people would eventually switch from home grown produce to food in cans and drinks in bottles. 2. Another strategy often followed when senescence sets in is to use the firm’s global scanning capability to seek out lower cost production sites. Costs can then be minimized by integration of the firm’s manufacturing facilities worldwide. Many electronics and textile firms in the US shifted their production facilities to Asian locations such as Taiwan and Hong Kong, to take advantage of the lower labour costs. REASONS FOR THE GROWTH OF MNCs 1. Non-transferable knowledge It is often possible for an MNC to sell its knowledge in the form of patent rights and to license a foreign producer. This relieves the MNC the need to make foreign direct investment. However, sometimes an MNC that has a production process or product patent can make a larger profit by carrying out the production in a foreign country itself. The reason for this is that some kinds of knowledge cannot be sold and which are the result of years of experience. 2. Protecting Reputations Products develop a good or bad name, which transcends international boundaries. It would be very difficult for an MNC to protect its reputation if a foreign licensee does an inferior job. Therefore, MNCs prefer to invest in a country rather than licensing and transfer expertise, to ensure the maintenance of their good name. 3. Building Reputations 124 Only for Private Circulation
  • 125. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Sometimes, MNCs invest to build their image and reputation rather than protect their reputation. This motive is of particular importance in the case of foreign direct investment by banks, because in the banking business an international reputation can attract deposits. If the goodwill is established the bank can expand and build a strong customer base. Quality service to a large number of customers is bound to ensure success. This probably explains the tremendous growth of foreign banks such as Citibank, Grind lays and Standard Chartered in India and other developing countries. 4. Protecting Secrecy MNCs prefer direct investment, rather than granting a license to a foreign company if protecting the secrecy of the product is important. While it may be true that a licensee will take precautions to protect patent rights, it is equally true that it may be less conscientious than the original owner of the patent. 5. Product Life Cycle theory and impact It has been argued that opportunities for further gains at home eventually dry up. To maintain the growth of profits, a corporation must venture abroad where markets are not so well penetrated and where there is perhaps less competition. This hypothesis perfectly explains the growth of American MNCs in other countries where they can fully exploit all the stages of the life cycle of a product. A prime example would be Gillette, which has revolutionized the shaving systems industry. HP laptop, Sony Walkman and Xerox face various stages of their life-cycle in their home country. 6. Availability of Capital The fact that MNCs have access to capital markets has been advocated as another reason why firms themselves move abroad. A firm operating in only one country does not have the same access to cheaper funds as a larger firm. However, this argument, which has been put forward for the growth of MNCs, has been rejected by many critics. 7. Invest and prosper “out” and not “in” The strategic motive for making investments has been advocated as another reason for the growth of MNCs. MNCs enter foreign markets to protect their market share when this is being threatened by the potential entry of indigenous firms or multinationals from other countries. Fast growing 125 Only for Private Circulation
  • 126. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran countries like India and China give a great boost to MNCs originated in U.S, Japan and Europe. 8. Avoiding Tariffs and Quotas MNCs prefer to invest directly in a country in order to avoid import tariffs and quotas that the firm may have to face if it produces the goods at home and ship them. For example, a number of foreign automobile and truck producers opened plants in the US to avoid restrictions on selling foreign made cars. Automobile giants like Fiat, Volkswagen, Hyundai, Honda and Mazda are entering different countries around the world not with the products but with technology and money. 9. Symbiotic Relationships Some firms have followed clients who have made foreign direct investment. This is especially true in the case of accountancy and consulting firms. Large US accounting firms, which know the parent companies’ special needs and practices, have opened offices in countries where their clients have opened subsidiaries. These US accounting firms have an advantage over local firms because of their knowledge of the company and because the client may prefer to engage only one firm in order to reduce the number of people with access to sensitive information. Templeton, Goldman Sachs and Ernst and Young are moving with their clients even to small countries like Panama, Mauritius, Malta and Sri Lanka. MULTINATIONALS: CREATURES OF MARKET IMPERFECTIONS Broadly, two kinds of imperfections are relevant. 1. Structural imperfections: These may be natural or manmade. Government regulations on investment, taxes and subsidies, capital markets and monopoly aspects create imperfections. This kind of imperfection is now disappearing from industrial countries, but is still appearing in developing countries. 2. Imperfections in transactions and markets: Uncertainty in delivery, the volatility of exchange rates; the difficulty that customers face in evaluating unfamiliar products; the costs of negotiating deals, economies of scale in production, purchasing, research and developments and 126 Only for Private Circulation
  • 127. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran distribution give advantages to existing firms and impose barriers against newcomers. Due to these and other imperfections, firms locate their production and other operations internally. As these market imperfections disappear, the importance of MNCs may diminish. The days for this may not be far off due to the international apex body, WTO and its regulatory norms are strictly implemented in near future. TRANSFER PRICING Transfer prices are the charges made when a company supplies goods, services or finance to another company to which it is related. It is an internationally accepted principle that transactions between related parties should be based upon the same terms as those between unrelated parties. Thus both tax treaties entered into between countries and domestic tax legislation of various countries have adopted the arm’s length principle. Abuse of Transfer Pricing In the era of global competition transfer pricing has became an unwanted reality. The price charged by a company in Country A to another company in Country B is reflected in the profit and loss account of both the companies, either as income or expenditure, and impacts the tax paid by the two related companies. By resorting to transfer pricing, related entities can reduce their total taxation by transferring higher income to low-tax jurisdictions and greater expenditure to those jurisdictions where the tax rate is very high. For example, the current tax rate on domestic companies in India is 33.3%. Take an example, the Company A is located in India and Company B in Singapore, and that both belong to the same group. If the tax rate in Singapore is 15% then Company B will transfer raw material to Company A at slightly higher prices. This will enable Company A to show a higher expenditure and reduce its taxable profits. On the other hand, a slightly higher income will not harm Company B much as the tax rate in its country is very low, thus the global group as a whole will benefit form tax savings. In this game, the first country is the major loser and due to low profits employees may struggle for their incentives. Detection of Transfer Pricing 127 Only for Private Circulation
  • 128. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Globally, there are several methods of detecting transfer pricing to check whether transactions between related parties have been at an ‘arm’s length’. The transaction method relies directly or indirectly on information about the prices at which similar transactions have been entered into by unrelated parties. This method is further divided into the Comparable Uncontrolled Price (CUP) method and cost plus (C+) method. Prices charged in similar business transactions between two independent parties is the yardstick adopted under the CUP method. Whereas under the C+ method, as arm’s length price is determined by applying an appropriate mark-up on the costs incurred. The transactional profit method, as the name indicates, is transaction-specific; it examines whether or not profits from a particular deal are reasonable. Importance of Transfer Pricing Regulations in Developing Countries Import of raw material, semi-finished goods for assembling and most important of all, intellectual property such as know-how and technology are areas prone to transfer pricing. Such goods or services can be sent to associate companies in India at a higher or lower rate than the prices charged to unrelated parties, to secure a global tax advantage. In today’s high-tech age, Indian companies often rely on technology and know-how from their foreign joint venture partners; thus strict regulations are very important. Regulations in Dealing with Transfer Pricing The important sections relating to transfer pricing in the Income Tax Act 1961 are Section 40A (2), Section 80 1A (9) and Section 1A (10). The first enables tax authorities to disallow any expenditure made to a related party, which they feel is excessive. Certain tax benefits are available under Section 80 1A such as a tax holiday for a certain number of years. If transfer pricing is suspected then the tax authorities can deny such tax holidays. The most important provision in the tax laws is in Section 92. This allows the Indian tax authorities to adjust the taxable income of the Indian party, if they feel that the prices charged in a transaction are not at an arm’s length due to close connection between the Indian entity and a foreign party. COUNTRY RISK When making overseas direct investments it is necessary to allow for risk due to the investment being in a foreign country. Country risk is one of the 128 Only for Private Circulation
  • 129. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran special issues faced by MNCs when investing abroad. It involves the possibility of losses due to country-specific economic, political and social events. Among the country risks that are faced by MNCs are those related to the local economy, those due to the possibility of confiscation i.e. government takeover without any compensation, and those due to expropriation i.e. government takeover without any compensation, and those due to expropriation i.e government takeover with compensation which at times can be generous. In addition there are the political/social risks of wars, revolutions and insurrections. Even though none of these latter events are specifically directed towards an MNC by the foreign government, they can damage or destroy an investment. There are also risks of currency non- convertibility and restrictions on the repatriation of income. International magazines like Euro Money and The Economist regularly conduct country risk evaluations in order to facilitate MNCs. Methods of Reducing Country Risk and Control 1. Controlling crucial elements of corporate operations Many MNCs try to prevent operations in developing countries by other local entities without their element of operations. For example, food and soft drink manufacturers keep their special ingredients secret. Automobile companies may produce vital parts such as engines in some other country and refuse to supply these parts if their operations are seized. 2. Programmed stages of planned disinvestment An alternative technique for reducing the probability of expropriation is for the MNC to promise to hand over ownership and control to local people in the future. This is sometimes a requirement of the host government. There is a calculative move to involve themselves in stages. 3. Joint ventures Instead of promising shared ownership in the future, an alternative technique for reducing the risk of expropriation is to share ownership with private or official partners in the host country from the very beginning. Such shared ownerships, known as joint ventures rely on the reluctance of local partners, if private, to accept the interference of their own government as a means of reducing expropriation. When the partner is the government itself, the 129 Only for Private Circulation
  • 130. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran disincentive to expropriation is concerned over the loss of future investments. Multiple joint ventures in different countries reduce the risk of expropriation, even if there is no local participation. If the government of one country does expropriate the business if faces the risk of being isolated simultaneously by numerous foreign powers. PROBLEMS FROM THE GORWTH OF MNCs Much of the concern about MNCs stems from their size, which can be formidable. MNCs may impose on their host governments to the advantage of their own shareholders and the disadvantage of citizens and shareholders in the country of operation. Even in India, MNCs have neglected the interests of the minority shareholders in the past. It can be difficult to manage economies in which MNCs have extensive investments. Since MNCs often have ready access to external sources of finances, they can blunt local monetary policy. When the host government wishes to constrain any economic activity, MNCs may nevertheless expand through foreign borrowing. Similarly, efforts at economic expansion elsewhere. Although it is true that any firm can frustrate plans for economic expansion due to integrated financial markets, MNCs are likely to take advantage of any opportunity to gain profits. As we have seen, MNCs can also shift profits to reduce their total tax burden by showing larger profits in countries with lower tax rates. Concern has been expressed, especially within the US, that their MNCs can defy the foreign policy objectives of the government through their foreign branches and subsidiaries. MNCs might break a blockade and avoid sanctions by operating through overseas subsidiaries. This has led to greater concern in some host countries, as they feel that companies operating within their boundaries may follow orders of the US or any other foreign government, and even within international trade unions. For example, in 1981 Chrysler Corporation was given loan guarantee to continue its operation. The US government insisted on wage and salary roll backs as a 130 Only for Private Circulation
  • 131. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran condition. Chrysler workers in Canada did not appreciate the instructions from the US Congress to accept a reduced wage. The examples below illustrate some of the controversies faced by MNCs. Parke-Davis Parke-Davis India is a 40% subsidiary of Parke-Davis Inc, USA which in turn is a division of the US-based company, Warner-Lambert. In 1995 the latter set up a 100% subsidiary. Among other products, it planned to manufacture and market confectionary products, although Parke-Davis India was already operating in this field. Later the parent company bought the brands of ‘Halls’ and ‘Chiclets’ from Parke-Davis India for about Rs.10 crores, which according to analysts was low price in relation to growth prospects and sales. Post-transfer, the sales of Parke-Davis grew just 3% in 1995-96 and then fell 1.5% the following year. And revealingly while the Sensex dropped 39% in 17 months from September 1994, Parke-Davis shares plunged almost 70% in the same period. Practically, a loss of about Rs.285 crores in market capitalization was witnessed during the same period. Pfizer There is undeniable attraction for an MNC to retain all the profits of a venture, rather than sharing them with minority shareholders. Obviously such a prospect is attractive to the MNC and alarming to the retail investor, especially since the regulatory framework cannot control corporate action in this matter. Although not having to share the profits may be the real reason. MNCs cite other factors, including lack of stringent patent and copyright laws in India for their actions. Often it is also the high cost of acquiring the additional shares to take the parent company’s holding above 51%. For example the additional 11% equity stake required for Pfizer would set the parent company back some Rs. 290 crore at the current valuation, and to buy out the remaining 60% from the other shareholders, would cost it Rs.775 crore. Setting up a 100% subsidiary is possible. SmithKline Beecham This case gives us an insight into the royalty issues. In 1997, SmithKline Beecham India announced its plan to pay 5% of net revenues earned from the sale of Horlicks to its parent company for using the brand name. At that 131 Only for Private Circulation
  • 132. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran point Horlicks accounted for 80% of the company’s Rs. 430 crore net sales. Although it paid about Rs.5 crore in 1996, the estimated annual outgoings worked out to about Rs.20 crore, against a net profit of Rs.45.6 crore in the same year. The immediate impact on the SmithKline Beecham Consumer Healthcare stock was drastic, as the stock price fell by almost Rs.100 from Rs.365 in Feb 1997 in just 10 days, reflecting a loss of about 27% or about Rs.275 crore in terms of market capitalization. Here, the main issue for investors was whether royalty payment needed to be paid to the parent company at all. Although the Indian company does not own the brand and is only its licensed user, it has nevertheless spent a huge amount on brand promotion and advertisement expenses for Horlicks, over the last four decades, and approximately Rs, 175 crores over the past 10 years. Critics feel that the company could have used this money to promote a brand of its own, with considerable success. Philips On 1st December 2001, the parent company of Philips announced that it wanted to buy out the other shareholders of its 51% subsidiary Philips India, and delist it from the stock markets. It offered to pay Rs. 105 for each share. The deadline for accepting the offer was 14th December. The beauty of the strategy was that Philips did not need to persuade every individual shareholder to sell to achieve its goal. According to the SEBI regulations, Philips needed to increase its shareholding to 90% in Philips India to apply for delisting the latter. Since Philips owned 51% shares, it needed to pick up only 39% more. When the offer opened, three financial institutional – GIC, LIC and UTI – together held 22% of the shares, while another 27% were held by the minority shareholders. Within days of the announcement, most minority shareholders started worrying about what would happen to anyone who did not sell their entire stake, Philips would need to pick up only another 17% of the shares to reach a level of 90%. So, if Philips managed to pick up only 90% of the shares, all those who held out would be trapped. They would agree to buy them after the deadline was over, provided it already had the 90% it needed. 132 Only for Private Circulation
  • 133. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran This fear reportedly led to many minority shareholders selling out, even though the FIs had not announced their decision. Finally the FIs did announce that they too were taking up the offer. A major factor influencing their decision was that, if enough minority shareholders sold out, the liquidity of the Philips India stock would be drastically reduced. In that case, they would find it impossible to sell later because there would not be enough buyers. For a majority of the shareholders, the offer price was not the critical factor in their decision to sell. In fact, many of them thought the price was too low and that Philips had timed its offer cleverly. Royal Philips had strictly followed SEBI guidelines which state that the offer price should not be less than the average price of the past six months, Philips made sure that most shareholders would sell out even if it was not the most attractive option. CRITICISM OF MULTINATIONALS IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES 1. They do not give enough importance to the society in which they operate. An example in Union Carbide, which did not show concern for the people of Bhopal. In South Africa, HIV medicines are sold at an expensive price irrespective of the cost. When people die out with these dreaded diseases in some region then MNCs consider that place as a huge potential for business prosperity. 2. While many Indian companies, such as the Tatas and Birlas allocate funds for charitable works like hospitals, temples and scholarships for higher studies, not many MNCs do so, though they generate huge revenue. 3. They generate profits when the situation is favourable, but will close their business if any risk is anticipated. E.g., many multinationals pulled out of South East Asia during the currency crisis, especially in Thailand and Indonesia. 4. Active participation is needed in developing countries for infrastructure, especially roads, ports, power plants etc. They enjoy but do not contribute. However, most multinationals in India deal in non-essential products such as soaps, shampoos, lotions and other consumer products. Whether 133 Only for Private Circulation
  • 134. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Uniliver, Johnson & Johnson, Colgate or Ricket & Coleman, their contribution is not for the welfare except revenue generation. Hardly any multinational is getting involved in developing activities such as infrastructure. 5. There is a misconception that MNCs generate employment. However the managerial cadre and the sales force personnel do not represent real employment in developing countries. 6. Due to aggressive promotion and money power, MNCs can venture into small towns in all parts of the country, leading to the decline of small industries. 7. One Union Carbide could cost the life of thousand of living beings in Bhopal due to sheer negligence and disrespect for the pollution control norms. It shows that just for earning money such a multinational never had a concern for valuable human lives. FOREIGN COMPANIES A foreign company is one that has been incorporated outside India and conducts business in India. These companies are required to comply with the provisions of the Indian Companies Act, 1956 as far as the Indian operations are concerned. Foreign companies can set up their operations in India by opening liaison offices, project offices and branch offices. Such companies have to register themselves with the Registrar of Companies (ROC), New Delhi within 30 days of setting up a place of business in India. The Indian entity may be a subsidiary of the foreign company in India or it may be a joint venture company with an Indian partner. As an Indian Company A foreign company can commence operations in India by incorporating a company under the provisions of the Indian Companies Act, 1956. Foreign equity in such Indian companies can be up to 100% depending on the business plan of the foreign investor, the prevailing investment policies of the Government and receipt of requisite approvals. For registration as an Indian company and its incorporation, an application has to be filed with the Registrar of Companies (ROC). Once a company has been duly registered and incorporated as in Indian company, it will be subject to the same Indian laws and regulations that are applicable to other domestic Indian companies. 134 Only for Private Circulation
  • 135. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Joint Venture with an Indian Partner Foreign companies can set up their operations in Indian by forgoing strategic alliances with Indian partners. Setting up operations through a joint venture entails the following advantages for a foreign investor:- 1. The Indian partners have an established distribution/marketing setup. 2. The Indian partner has available financial resources. 3. The established contacts of the Indian partner help to smoothen the process of setting up of operations. Even before independence, India had so many multinationals in the field of engineering, chemicals, Pharma and consumer goods. Metal Box, Spencer, Uniliver, Colgate Palmolive, Sandoz, Pfizer, Siemens and Bayer entered and prospered due to their monopoly in their respective field. Currently indigenous organizations have proved that they are nowhere inferior to them. The current decade is the era of Indian MNCs to operate every part of the world. 135 Only for Private Circulation
  • 136. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 8.GLOBALISATION- CONCEPT AND PRACTICE Soon after the independence the slogan of the business community was “export or perish”, after 50 years of independence, we have modified it as “globalize or perish”. It is ringing on the ears of every corporate board room right from the TATAS, BIRLAS, MITTALS, MALLYAS and MAHINDRAS. Learning value: On completion of this chapter, reader will have a complete idea on: 1. Meaning of globalization 2. Driving forces of globalization 3. Competitiveness in globalization 4. India as global player 5. Role of global managers 6. Stages of building globalization Globalization is a way of life. The countries are not far off, business partners are not away, goods could be manufactured anywhere, and barriers are broken. The whole world is on the table. What is required for global players is a “global mindset”. The global village has now shrunk to global table. WHAT IS MEANT BY GLOBALISATION? Globalisation is the “strategy of optimizing” the resources available in various countries and catering to customers throughout the world with internationally standardised products, at competitive prices. It advocates that the nation or a company or product involved should be global. A global man is one who is born in India, studies in the UK, wears Reid & Taylor, shops in Marks & Spencer, drives a Lexus, acquires a steel plant in Kazakhstan 136 Only for Private Circulation
  • 137. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran and ships his hot rolled coil to China. Thus, he becomes a part of globalisation process. Liberalisation, the rise of developing countries, new technology and falling trade barriers are changing the economic landscape profoundly, and contributing to fast track globalisation in many countries. Increasingly we are living in a global world. In practical terms, this means that a steel company in the United States will consider other countries as well as the US when deciding where to locate a new $ 1 billion steel mill. Other examples are automobile manufacturers such Fort Motors, who entered emerging markets such as China or India with modified versions of existing cars, rather than designing a new car from scratch and Mazda, which designs its sports car in California, produces components in Tokyo, makes prototypes in Worthington, and finally assembles the car in Mexico in order to market it in North America at a very low price. China sources its fibre from South Korea, uses funds from Macauk and a labour force in Beijing and finally markets its soft toys all over the world. The economic landscape is not the same as it was twenty years ago, nor is the pace of global economic change expected to slacken in the next twenty years. This will have an effect on everybody from the highest to the lowest. India’s finance minister will have to view the integration of India’s economy with the rest of the world as fundamental to the country’s transformation into an economic superpower, and a junior manager in a firm will have virtually no chance of making it into the top ranks of the company unless he or she combines superb qualities and skills in job performance with extensive international experience. Financial MAZDA Resources TOKYO Design California North America MIATA MEXICO (Assembly) CAR South America Prototype BRAND Europe Worthington Assembly Low Cost Units TOKYO 137 Only for Private Circulation
  • 138. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran GLOBALISATION TRENDS Globalisation can be defined in several different ways depending on the level we choose to focus on. The philosophy is “the whole world is my market; wherever the opportunity arises I will tap it irrespective of location, standard of economy, ethnic relations and all other parameters.” “Cross border customers are my neighbours; I will be close to them at any time” – a slogan of a global manager. “Globalisation is a mindset rather than physical pharmaceutical giant in India. At a worldwide level globalisation refers to the growing economic interdependence among countries, which is reflected in the increasing cross- border flow of goods, services, capital and know-how. Clear evidence of this is offered by the following trends: Between 1989 and 200, cross-border trade in goods and services grew at an average annual rate of 6.4 percent. This is almost twice as fast as the average annual growth rate of 3.2 percent in the world’s GDP during the same period. From 1980 to 2000 foreign direct investment grew from 4.8 percent to 10 percent of the world’s GDP. Destinations for flow of funds have changed drastically. It has increased to 18% till the first half of 2007. In 1970 cross-border transactions in bonds and equities, as a ratio of GDP, stood at under 5 percent in the US, Germany and Japan. By 2001, the respective figures for these countries had soared to 152 percent, 197 percent and 83 percent respectively. After 2001 every year it witnesses more than 15% in all those three countries. At the level of a specific country, globalisation refers to the ability of the country to expand its trade and aggressively dominate in other parts of the world; by motivating its entrepreneurs by investing, manufacturing and marketing. 138 Only for Private Circulation
  • 139. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Despite the fact that globalisation is taking place very rapidly, all the countries are not equally integrated into the global economy still. Some key indicators to measure the global integrated into the global economy still. Some key indicators to measure the global integration of any country’s economy are exports and imports as a ratio of GDP, inward and outward flow of foreign direct investment and portfolio investment, and flow of royalty and know-how payments associated with technology transfer. The growths of China and India with respect to some of these indicators during the last two decades ensure that they will emerge as major global players. At the level of a specific industry globalization refers to the strength of a company in the face of international competition. The more global an industry, the greater is the face of international competition. The more global an industry, the greater is the advantage that a company can derive from leveraging technology, manufacturing and brand names. Specific industries which are on the verge of globalization co-ordinate their strategic actions across countries. For example, the athletic footwear industry is dominated by the firms of Nike, Reebok and Adidas. In the same way Armani, Versace and Vanity Fair are looking at global markets and strategizing their activities with new vigour. Currently Wal-Mart, Mark & Spencer and TESCO chains are integrating by cost effective sourcing. The current aggressiveness of Vodafone to dominate in the communication area especially in Asia is daring and expensive globalization in non conventional sector. SOME LESSONS FROM GLOBAL COMPANIES Toyota is a good example of a highly globalised company. At the end of 1995 one-third of Toyota’s global output came from wholly or partially owned affiliates located in twenty-five foreign countries spread over North and South America, Europe and Asia. Furthermore, Toyota exported 38 percent of its domestic production from Japan to foreign markets and engaged in significant intro-firm flows among its affiliates. Within its South East Asian regional network Toyota exported diesel engines from Thailand, transmissions from the Philippines, steering gears from Malaysia and engines from Indonesia. In effect units were set up by Toyota in the whole of South East Asia, to assemble different automobile parts, depending on the competency and resources of the country. 139 Only for Private Circulation
  • 140. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Key indicators of the globalisation of a company are international dispersion of its sales revenue and asset base, intra-firm trade in intermediate and finished goods, and intra-firm flows of technology. These all lead to its physical presence, scattered investments, global image, brand promotion and building borderless customer patronage. FREE MARKET IDEOLOGY RISE OF DEVELOPING ECONOMIES CROSS BORDER FLOW OF: TECHNOLOGY GOODS ADVANCES GLOBALISATION SERVICES INVESTMENTS TECHNOLOGY HUMAN RESOURCES NEW BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY DUE TO WTO CHEAP LABOUR FORCE HUGE INVESTMEN TS IN INFRA 140 Only for Private Circulation STRUCTURE
  • 141. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran DRIVING FORCES OF GLOBALISATION DRIVING FORCES FOR GLOBALISATION Globalisation occurs because specific managers in specific companies make decisions that result in increased cross-border flow of capital, goods and known-how. Managers are increasingly making such decisions because globalization is becoming more feasible and desirable. The following trends lie at the core of these developments. 1. An ever-increasing number of countries are embracing the free-market ideology, Economic policy makers in industrialized and industrializing nations have shifted from a ‘planning’ mentality to a ‘market’ mentality, which has been well documented. Since the end of the second world war, the rising tide of free-market ideology that started with developed economies has swept up South Korea, Taiwan, Hong Kong, Singapore and other South East Asian economies, and is now moving into China, India, Brazil, parts of Africa and central and eastern including Russia. As per BRIC report, four countries will surpass the developed nations in terms of growth and prosperity. 2. The economic centre of gravity is shifting from the developed to developing countries. Economic liberalization promotes competition, efficiency, innovation, new capital investment and faster economic growth. Today’s market mechanisms have allowed the developing economies to start catching up with the advanced economies, so that China, India, South Korea, Taiwan, Indonesia and Thailand are emerging as major players in the global market. In fact Taiwan, Hong Kong and Singapore, which were amongst the world’s poorest countries in the 141 Only for Private Circulation
  • 142. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 1950s are already listed as advanced economies. Despite short-term growth for the region are still valid. Their shares in global markets are eating slowly the shares of developed countries especially in plastic, rubber, medical and electronic components. Larger economies, notably China are advancing rapidly. Having sustained an annual GDP growth rate above 10 percent since 1980, China has already transformed itself into the third largest economy in the world at least on a purchasing power parity basis and seems poised to overtake Japan in the near future. These numbers indicate that the world’s economic centre of gravity is shifting. Today, any company that seeks to grow has little choice but to go where the growth is. For the vast majority of the world’s top 500 industrial corporations, such growth can only take place globally as the home markets are saturated. 3. Technological advances are constantly improving. The cost of air transportation, telecommunications and computers has declined sharply over the past two decades. The decline in transportation costs, especially, has motivated companies to explore new avenues and new countries. In the case of computers and telecommunications, the consistent decline in costs, and the recent widespread adoption of technologies such as video conferencing and electronic mail have made operations simple, effective and fast. By combining these trends with mobile telephones, video telephones, the Internet and increasingly powerful computers, one can optimize a real-time coordination of globally dispersed activities. This will lead to a further increase in the intensity of global competition and an even greater search for the best locations for the discrete activities in company’s value chain. 4. The main hidden principle of WTO is to generate new business opportunities throughout the world. The opening of borders to trade, investment and technology transfers not only creates new market opportunities for companies but also enables competitors from abroad to enter the home markets. 5. The availability of cheap labour has caused many companies to shift their manufacturing units to locations where a competent work force is available at much lower rates. Increasing competition forces competitors to offer better global services, to capture economies of scale, to exploit the cost reducing or quality-enhancing potential of optimal locations and 142 Only for Private Circulation
  • 143. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran to tap technological advancements wherever they may occur. This has resulted in an accelerated growth of globalization. 6. All the countries are vigorously developing their airports, seaports, energy sources and social amenities. Singapore, Malaysia, South Korea and India facilitate companies by assuring. ORGANISATION AND GLOBALISATION Due to the increased rate of globalization, the global economic landscape will undoubtedly look very different 20 years from now. Companies will need to adapt to this changing landscape and those that choose to move first will have a better chance of turning these changes into competitive advantage. The author regards three fundamental changes in the global economic landscape as inevitable. These are described below. Developing countries will essentially dominate the world economy in the future Given the commitment of the post-Deng Chinese leadership to economic reform, China is likely to remain in the most successful economic story. Its status as a super power is visible in innumerable fields like textiles, garments, chemicals, silk, soft toys and ceramics. Despite its rapid growth since 1979, China’s economy has attracted attention, only during the last few years. China is not alone. As the economies of other countries such as India, Brazil, Mexico and Russia continue to gather momentum, they will increasingly become major contributors to the creation of new wealth. It is expected that in 20 years, China’s economy will be larger than that of the U.S. and India’s will be as big as that of Japan. The regional composition of the world’s largest corporations will change radically, spreading, over the developing countries, rather than just being limited to the U.S. and Europe, where the majority of them are situated today. As a consequence intra- industry competition will intensify. As an example from India, consider the case of the loosely held Tata Group, a group of companies involved in a number of businesses, such as steel, cement, engineering, chemicals, tea, construction, IT, hotels and 143 Only for Private Circulation
  • 144. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran trucks. The group’s intention is to triple its sales by 2010 and to achieve this target it has narrowed down the group’s portfolio and increased control over the individual companies. It is inevitable that the Tata Group will emerge as a global power through cross border alliances and strategic moves. In the field of steel it acquired larger unit, Corus as compared to its own Tata steel. Similar strategic moves are taking place in many business houses in India, like Reliance, the Aditya Birla group and Murugappa. The same trend is visible in the economies of Indonesia, Brazil, Mexico and Malaysia. Ranbaxy, a pharmaceutical major has multiplied its operations in all the continents in the world and aiming at achieving Rs.20, 000 crores by 2008. LN Mittal group has emerged as a global steel giant, probably one amongst the top richest three in the world in near future. CRITERIA FOR GLOBAL ORGANISATIONS Assuming that the trends described here are inevitable the following issues need serious consideration by any medium-sized or large company that is inclined to go global. 1. Size of the market: How extensive do you want your markets to be, particularly the major emerging markets for your products and services? How should you build a necessary global presence? 2. Location advantage: To what extent do you want to capture the cost reducing and quality enhancing potential of locations around the world for the execution of various activities in your company’s value chain? How should you deal with the problem of suboptimal locations currently in use? 3. Global competitiveness: How effective do you want to be in exploiting global presence and turning it into a true global competitive company as opposed to global mediocrity? How should you eliminate the existing shortcomings and impediments? 4. Management efficiency and mindset: 144 Only for Private Circulation
  • 145. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Is the mindset of your company’s top management sufficiently global? As the world around you changes and new opportunities open up in various parts of the world, is your company generally a leader or a laggard in identifying and exploiting these opportunities? How should you create the needed global mindset? 5. Vision and long term objective: Does your company have vision? Is it there with everyone? Whether proper road-map is in place. Is it only for generation of money or for leadership? 6. Right human resource to handle: Do you have sufficient HR, especially technical? Or yet to be appointed in the location of operation? Once a company has selected the country or countries that will serve as a launch vehicle for its products, it must determine the appropriate mode of entry. This issue rests on two fundamental questions: • To what extent will the company rely on exports versus local production in the target market? Here the firm has a range of choices as follows. (i) 100 percent export of finished goods, (ii) export of components but localized assembly, (iii)100 percent local production. • To what extent will the company exercise ownership and control over the activities carried out locally in the target market? Again, it faces a range of choices as follows: (i) 0 percent ownership by licensing or franchising, (ii0 partial ownership such as joint ventures or collaboration, (iii) 100 percent ownership as a wholly owned subsidiary. Local production would be appropriate under the following conditions: 1. Longer local production: The local market is larger than the minimum efficient scale of production. The larger the local market, the more local production will translate into scale economies while holding down tariff and transportation costs. An example is the entry of the Japanese tyre group Bridgestone into the US market by acquiring the local production base of Firestone instead of exporting tyres from Japan. 2. Cost of logistics and tariffs: Shipping and tariff costs of exporting to the target market are so high that they neutralize any cost advantages of manufacturing the product at any place other than the target market. This 145 Only for Private Circulation
  • 146. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran is the main reason why cement companies such as Cemex and Lafarge Coppe engage heavily in local production in all the countries they enter. 3. Localization and customization of products: The need to customize the product to suit local requirements is high. Customization of a product requires a deep understanding of local market needs and the ability to incorporate this understanding into which products to market and their design. Localising production in the target market area significantly enhances a firm’s ability to respond to local market needs. 4. Requirement for local production: There is a strong requirement for local production by the host country. This is one of the major reasons why foreign automobile companies rely heavily on local production in markets such as the European Union, China and India. The Hyundai Corporation has strengthened its production base in India and components are procured in India. Besides the above criteria, the strategic approach for successful companies could be on the following lines: a. Product focus, i.e. Bic pens and Ray ban. b. Human Resource focus, i.e. Infosys and Wipro. c. Technology focus, i.e. Microsoft and Singapore airlines. d. Service focus, i.e. FEDEX and Singapore airlines. They are going in their respective business with complete focus. The Extent of Ownership Control over Locally Performed Activities Entering the market via an alliance permits a company to share the costs and risks associated with market entry and allow rapid access to local know- how. However it also has the potential for various types of conflict. Alliance based entries are often more appropriate under the following conditions: 1. The company is short of capital. In the 1950s, Xerox Corporation decided to enter the European market through an alliance with the United Kingdom’s Rank Organisation. Rank’s goodwill and presence in the UK benefited the Xerox Corporation immensely. 2. There are large physical, linguistic and cultural differences between the host and the home country. The more dissimilar and unfamiliar the target market, the greater is the need for a firm to rely on a local partner to network and provide local know how. Given a choice the company would prefer to obtain these assets through an acquisition. However, in unfamiliar markets, a firm’s ability to manage an acquired subsidiary is often very limited, and hence the involvement of a local partner becomes inevitable. 146 Only for Private Circulation
  • 147. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 3. A subsidiary would not be able to integrate its operations easily with the other multinational operations and hence puts major constraints on a firm’s ability in the initial stages of operations. 4. In a typical joint venture, the two partners pool different but complementary know-how. They interact regularly through their core operations and understand each other’s working. Both partners learn the other’s know-how and often if one firm learns faster than the other it may sooner or later seek to dissolve the alliance. 5. Government regulations stress upon local equity participation. Historically, several countries with a very large market potential such as China and Brazil have been successful in imposing joint ventures. STAGES OF GLOBAL ORGANISATIONS Globalization process does not take place instantly. It is a deliberate and cautious move for several companies. Nike and Addidas took more than a decade to move to other countries from their origin. Apple, HP and Dell are fast globalizing their operations due to technology advantages. if they are not quick then technology obsolescence will crop up and finally they have to lose their current status to their competitors. However, in the normal process, a complete globalization has to pass through several stages as described in the following table: Stages Purpose Action End Result Make the presence One market established. Physically export and feel – the move Trial and errors are Stage # 1 establish one strong for product or overcome, confidence is contact overseas service built Study the whole Find out a right partner. Awareness is created in nation and explore Jointly promote the one territory. The demand Stage # 2 the avenues for product/s. establish brand level is known for the production in one market. production. Identify location or Set up production Becoming close to the develop a complete Stage # 3 facility with a customer at a reduced cost network. Reduce the cost local or alone and part of the local and service the market. Expanding to Take the products from The whole region is Stage # 4 neighboring areas the unit and spread in aware. Loyalty is built. 147 Only for Private Circulation
  • 148. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran through nearby countries and build The network members production brand name become patrons. Analyse the potential in Review all the various regions. Evaluate Comparing and selection Stage # 5 pitfalls and gear the partners, investment of right locations, right up to other regions climate and Socio- partners and right markets Cultural background Global production Produce, distribute, invest Emerging as Global investments Stage # 6 and build corporate image global enterprise Global brand name and face competition Status of global company SPEED OF GLOBAL EXPANSION Having begun the journey towards globalization, a company must still address the question as to how fast it should expand globally. Rapid globalization enables a firm to grow aggressively but it can also spread managerial, organizational and financial resources quickly. The absence of one of these resources can jeopardize a company’s ability to perform. Faster global expansion is more appropriate under the following condition: A. It is easy for competitors to replicate a firm’s recipe for success. This possibility is obvious for fast food and retailing companies such as Kentucky Fried Chicken and Starbucks. Once the concept has been created in a market, competitors can come in and easily replicate it with relatively low investment. B. The scale of economies is extremely important. Mass production through cost reduction leads to rapid success. Firms which come in later may lose out in a specific sector. This is the reason why tyre manufacturers such as Goodyear, Michelin and Bridgestone, which went global at rapid rate now have considerable advantage over other firms such as Pirelli and Continental, which were slower in entering the global market. 148 Only for Private Circulation
  • 149. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran C. The management is highly capable of managing global operations. For example, consider the case of global companies such as Anglo Dutch conglomerate Unilever or the Swedish-Swiss company ABB. If these companies successfully introduce a new product line in one country, it is relatively easy, and also logical, for them to globalize this line rapidly. THE ROLE OF GLOBAL MANAGERS – CRITERIA FOR SUCCESS The management, which may be very successful domestically may not be able to maintain the same level of performance level in its global operations. Global operations require the investment of extremely large sums of money and the managers have to live up to high expectations. To handle business in a global context and make an organization successful, the managerial team requires certain unique qualities. 1. They should have a strong information base. 2. They should possess multi-lingual skills. 3. The managerial cadre should be adaptable in its approach. 4. They should understand the strategies of their competitors. 5. Cost management should be meticulous. 6. The persons should be highly innovative and be able to identify new avenues. 7. They must be able to understand and implement all the organizational policies. 8. The leader must be acceptable, not only to his team, but also to institutions like banks, which support the company. In short, the managerial team should consist of personnel who are multi- lingual, multi-cultural, adaptable, informative, multi-functional, efficient and enthusiastic. Only then will a company be able to succeed in its global operations. 149 Only for Private Circulation
  • 150. STAGES FOR GLOBALIZATIONBusiness- AN Chandran International FOR Dr. R. ENTERPRISE Stages Objective Action Plan Anticipated risks and End Result hurdle “Physical (i) Identify one (i) Local resistance for (i) Entry into one movement of country. bringing. country- successful. goods and (ii) Focus on one (ii) Technical and (ii) Learning Stage:1 services from product or services. commercial barriers. experience in a the country of (iii) Explore (iii) Competitive forces country outside. its origin”. opportunity for from local and exports. imported goods. “Strengthen (i) Build a strong (i) Local competitors (i) Strengthen one and stabilize relation in one pose threats. country by one overseas market. (ii) Price war is overcoming all the market.” (ii) Promote brand inevitable. hurdles. Stage:2 name with (ii) One or few customers and importers extend channels. cooperation and support for constant flow of goods. “Establish (i) Narrow down to (i) Competitors (i) Local production manufacturing one local partner. increase their brings down the cost. base in the (ii) Locate an ideal production capacity. (ii) The enterprise Stage:3 importing place for (ii) Local regulations becomes close to the country”. production. on labour, transaction customers. (iii) Workout for and infrastructure may (iii) Brand loyalty is financially together. trouble the operation. built. “Spread the (i) Develop fast (i) Every part of the (i) Access in the distribution and network in the region works whole region. increase neighbouring differently. (ii) Easy to production in countries. (ii) Rules are not experiment in other Stage:4 the region”. (ii) Setup uniform. regions. warehouses / sub- (iii) Demand level is (iii) Revenue is dealer network in not similar in every increased. the region. country. “Move to other (i) Set up (i) Cross cultural (i) Global take off regions by subsidiaries. complexities. assured. investing and (ii) Develop strong (ii) Local adaptability. (ii) The enterprise has producing”. systems. (iii) Promotional a competency in skill (iii) Induct right barriers. and knowledge to go Stage:5 people with global. performance. (iv)Flexible to local environment. 150 Only for Private Circulation
  • 151. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran “Global (i) Organization to (i) Challenge on (i) Global investment. mindset, be global. governance. (ii) Global customer (ii) Investment to be (ii) Ethical standards. competency. orientation and global. (iii) Concern for the (iii) Global branding. constant (iii) Technology to locals. (iv)Global Stage:6 innovation”. be global. (iv) Human Resources. Organization. (iv) Real optimization of resources takes place. 151 Only for Private Circulation
  • 152. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 9.WORLD TRADE ORGANISATION (WTO) Transparent, free and rule-based trading system Provide common institutional framework for conduct of trade relations among members Facilitate the implementation, administration and operation of Multilateral Trade Agreements Rules and Procedures Governing Dispute Settlement Trade Policy Review Mechanism Concern for LDCs and NFIDCs Concern on Non-trade issues such as Food Security, environment, health, etc. Learning value: Chapter deals with: 1. GATT & WTO 2. WTO overview 3. Developments in WTO 4. Environmental issues 5. Dilemma of developing countries 6. Impact of WTO on Indian Businesses The roots of the World Trade Organisation (WTO) lie in the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) which was established in 1948 by 23 original founders, India being one of them. The 8th round of talks under GATT (1986-1994), KNOWN AS THE Uruguay Round, led to the birth of the WTO on 1st January 1995. In the Uruguay Round, new agreements such as the General Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS) and the Agreement on Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) and Trade Related Investment Management System (TRIMS) were negotiated. All the three major agreements along with their associate agreements now rest under the umbrella organization, namely the WTO. 152 Only for Private Circulation
  • 153. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran The WTO, which has its headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland, has a membership of 150 countries. More than 98% of the global trade is transacted among the members. As the only regulatory body of world trade, the WTO’s objective is to ensure a freer, more transparent and more predictable trading regime in the world. The WTO is based on a sound legal system and its agreements are ratified by the parliaments of member countries. No one country controls the WTO; wherein the top decision makers are the designated ministers of member countries. The WTO agreements cover: • Goods, e.g., all industrial products, FMCGs etc. • Services, e.g., banking, insurance, consultancy etc. • Intellectual property, e.g., patents, copyrights, designs and trademarks etc. Two important principles that underline most agreements are: a) Most Favoured Nation Clause: No discrimination among member countries. b) National Treatment Clause: Equal treatment to imported and domestic products. These agreements broadly address three concerns: Same rule for all: It restricts governments or organisations from ‘distorting’ normal trade by way of subsidising, dumping or discriminatory licensing policies. Government policies are framed to eliminate distorting effects. The WTO allows exports to be relieved of all indirect taxes such as excise, sales tax etc. since they have a cascading effect on the cost of the product. Administration of agreements: It has detailed guidelines as to how the agreements should be administered at a national level. These apply to anti- dumping proceedings, standardization, sanitary and phytosanitary measures, or settlement of disputes. Fair deal to businesses: It ensures rights for the business community e.g., the right to information, the right to present evidence etc. For example, the Agreement on Customs Valuation allows the importer to justify the value of 153 Only for Private Circulation
  • 154. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran imported goods or requires the customs to give written reasons for rejecting the value disclosed. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN GATT AND THE WTO • GATT signifies two aspects – GATT as a body and GATT as a formulator of agreements. • GATT – the body no longer exists; it was merged with the WTO on 1st Jan, 1995. • GATT – the agreement rests in the WTO along with other agreements. • The WTO now includes GATT, GATS, TRIPS and the Dispute Settlement body. GATT covered trade in goods only, whereas the WTO covers trade in goods, services, and intellectual property rights as well. • Throughout its duration, from 1948 to 1994, GATT was ad hoc and provisional; WTO and its agreements are permanent. • GATT has contracting parties, whereas the WTO has member nations. • The WTO is an inherently superior system as compared to GATT, as it has a sound legal basis; even its agreements are ratified in the members parliament. • WTO has two significant functions, which GATT did not have. These are: (i) Trade Policy Review Mechanism – a periodic process to examine a country’s trade policies and to note changes and (ii) an in-built mechanism to settle disputes, which cannot be overlooked by anyone. • The WTO is more democratic in character. If decisions cannot be reached by consensus, the matter is decided by putting it to vote; each WTO member having one vote. In the case of GATT, it was controlled by a power lobby. WTO: THE ORGANISATION The World Trade Organisation (WTO) monitors global trade. Its decisions are absolute and every member must abide by its rulings. Extra powers given to the WTO are supposed to ensure that disputes are settled in harmony with international trade principles. It is located in Geneva, Switzerland. At its head is the Director General, who serves a term of four years. Its staff is made up of 500 persons of varying nationalities. 154 Only for Private Circulation
  • 155. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran The Decision Making Process The Ministerial Conference, comprising designated ministers of the member nations is the supreme decision making forum. The ministers meet at least once in two years. The Ministerial Conference can take decisions on ‘all matters’ under any of the multilateral agreements. Second level The day-to-day work is handled by the General Council, which also acts as The Dispute Settlement Body and The Trade Policy Review Body. The General Council acts on behalf of the Ministerial Conference and meets under these three different terms of reference. Third level Three more councils, each handling a different broad area of trade, report to the General Council: the Council for Trade in Goods, the Council of Services and the Council for TRIPS. Fourth level Each of the higher-level councils has subsidiary bodies. The Council for Trade in Goods, for example, has 11 committees dealing with specific subjects such as agriculture, subsidies etc. Four Principles The WTO has 145 members and makes decisions on a basis of unanimity. No country has a power of veto. The four principles which members abide by are: 1. Extending trade concessions equally to all WTO members. 2. Aiming for a freer global trade with lower tariffs everywhere. 3. Making trade more predictable through the use of rules. 4. Bringing about more competition by cutting subsidies. 155 Only for Private Circulation
  • 156. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran The definition of ‘trade’ has steadily expanded and now includes intellectual protection, investment, trade in services and agriculture as well as trade in manufactured goods. In its short life the WTO has already become the focus of intense controversy. Heralded by the richer nations as the ticket to world prosperity, to many others it’s looking more and more like another Trojan horse in the citadel of international development. ‘Freeing up’ trade- GATT’s Uruguay Round concluded at the end of 1993, basically ‘freed up’ world trade. This meant doing away with barriers which had prevented developing countries from exporting their goods to the richer countries of the North. It also opened up all countries to foreign penetration in completely new areas, such as service industries and intellectual property rights. This offered richer nations and multinational corporations a golden opportunity to take over new sectors in countries that were previously able to protect their own smaller industries. The WTO has the task of policing this new world order, and is beginning to make its presence felt. Fairer trading provisions, which guarantee protection to producers in the developing world, have already come under fire. The USA, on behalf of the American MNC Chiquita, has challenged arrangements whereby bananas from the Windward Islands are marketed in Europe under the protection of the European Union’s Lome Treaty. Dismantling such arrangements would bring Chiquita greater profits, but would prove disastrous to the farmers and the economies of the Eastern Caribbean. The WTO has upheld the US complaint. It was perceived that the WTO is controlled by the industrialized nations, just as they control the World Bank and the IMF. At the conference held in Singapore in December 1996, delegates from developing countries complained at being excluded from ‘behind the scenes’ discussions. The charge was accepted by Renato Ruggier, who was the WTO’s Director General at that time. While the WTO claims that its rules-based system is a means of protecting smaller nations from the larger trading powers, many of those smaller nations have complained of being bullied by the very countries, which set the rules in the first place. International resistance - While some developing countries, particularly Latin America and East Asia, may be able to compete in the world trade, the world’s least developed countries are predicted to lose out. Even in richer countries, the expansion of MNCs has a negative impact on smaller 156 Only for Private Circulation
  • 157. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran businesses, labour standards and basic freedom. A growing international movement is forming in protest against the WTO and its expanding ‘free trade’ agenda. Multilateral negotiations, known as ‘rounds’, held in Seattle and Doha. Qatar made the representation of developing countries stronger than before especially regarding issues related to agricultural subsidies and labour legislation. In many ways the advanced countries appear to have double standards. This approach has been challenged and the influence of the advanced countries in the WTO is gradually diminishing. Developments • The agenda of the WTO, the implementation of its agreements, and the much-praised dispute settlement system all serve to advance interests of developed countries, sidelining those of the developing countries. • The Least Developed Countries (LCDs) are marginalized in the world trade system, and their products continue to face tariff escalations. • Rules uniformly applied to WTO members have brought about inequalities because each member has different economic circumstances. Compared to GATT, the WTO is much more powerful because of its institutional foundation and its dispute settlement system. Countries that do not abide by its trade rules are taken to court. Historically, GATT enforced phased-in tariff reductions worldwide. Until the Uruguay Round, which ended in 1994, the trade negotiations focused on nonagricultural goods, mainly because the U.S. wanted to protect its farm sector. Over the years, as the corporate interests of the developed countries expanded, they also lobbied for more issues to be incorporated into the WTO. Changes in rules come about mainly through multilateral negotiations or “rounds”. Each round offers a package approach to trade negotiations, in which many issues are negotiated together and trade-offs between different issues are made. Between the rounds, negotiations on single issues take place. One of the commonly used yardsticks to measure the success of the WTO is the volume of world trade. The results seem excellent in this respect, with world trade up by 25% in the last four years. But the benefits of increased trade are not widely shared. For example, the LDCs represent 20% of the 157 Only for Private Circulation
  • 158. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran world’s population, but they generate a mere 0.03% of the trade flows. Developing countries have little power within the WTO framework for the following reasons: 1. Although developing countries make up three-fourths of the WTO membership and can in theory influence the agenda and outcome of trade negotiations, they have never used this to their advantage. Most developing country economies are in one way or another dependent on the U.S., the EU, or Japan in terms of imports, exports, aid, security, etc. Any obstruction of a consensus at the WTO might threaten the overall well-being and security of dissenting developing nations. 2. Mutual give and take policies with tariff reduction exist between countries. This type of bartering benefits the large and diversified economies, because they can get more by giving more. For the most part, negotiations and trade-offs take place among the developed countries and some of the richer or larger developing countries. 3. Developing countries have discovered that seeking recourse in the dispute settlement system is costly and requires a level of legal expertise that they may not have. Nelson Mandela, commenting on the negotiations said: “The developing countries were not able to ensure that the rules accommodated their realities. It was mainly the preoccupations and problems of the advance industrial economies that shaped the agreement.” He added that rules applied uniformly are not necessarily fair because of the different circumstances of members. “Trade and labour standards” is a highly sensitive issue. To date, a clause of labour standards has not been included in the policies framed by the WTO. The issue has been raised by some industrial nations, who feel that the subject should be studied by the WTO as a first step towards bringing the matter of “core labour standards” into the organizations. There is a great divide between most of the industrialized nations and the developing countries on the subject. Developing countries like India are most very vocal on labour issues. They feel that developed nations try to annihilate the comparative advantage they have of cheaper labour, and argue that the International Labour Organisation (ILO) is the right platform to discuss the issue and not the WTO. 158 Only for Private Circulation
  • 159. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Environmental Issues The WTO has no specific agreement on environment; it has a “Trade & Environment Committee’, which plays a limited role. There is increasing pressure by environmentalists on the WTO to take proactive measures to protect the environment. The US banned import of tuna fish from Mexico in accordance with its Marine Mammals Law, which has the mandate like dolphins. At that time Mexico appealed to GATT whose verdict went against the USA. Trade experts fear that free trade will be undermined in the guise of protecting the environment, if such issues find a place and are emphasized in the WTO. There are more than 200 Multilateral Environmental Agreements (MEAs) on various aspects of the environment. Twenty of these include provisions that can affect trade e.g., the Montreal Protocol for Protection of the Ozone Layer, the Basel Convention on Trade or Transportation of Hazardous Goods. The WTO is off the view that the most effective way of dealing with environmental issues is through international agreements. Dilemma of Developing Countries- Exports from developing countries continue to face significant market access impediments. Recent UN studies confirm that tariff peaks and tariff escalation still hamper developing country exports and their attempts to export new products such as beef, cigarettes, clothing, footwear and wooden articles. To gain access to new markets in developing countries, the developed counties are acting in the interests of transnational corporations. They have rapidly imposed new agreements in telecommunications, information technology, and financial services. The Millennium Round talks paved the way for further economic liberalization in both the traditional and new sectors, which is contrary to the interests of developing countries. For example, Washington has interpreted WTO agreements to protect key industries. For example the U.S. has selectively opened its markets in the field of textiles and clothing, but this liberalisation has proved of little benefit to the developing nations. Similarly, the U.S. has misused the measures designed to safeguard domestic industries from a sudden increase in imports. It has also introduced its own Rules of Origins, rules used to identify where textiles or clothing products come from, changing the 159 Only for Private Circulation
  • 160. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran conditions of competition and adding to the restrictions against the low-cost textile exports from other countries. New rules regarding information on plants will have both agricultural and medical implications. The Trade Related Intellectual Property Rights Agreement (TRIPS) fiercely protects the rights of corporations but easily allows the shared knowledge of indigenous communities to be patented by others. When fully implemented, developing countries will lose billions of dollars to the richer countries, as MNCs will continue to control virtually all the patents of developing countries. The agreement between the U.S. and China, stipulated the terms on which China would join the WTO. This is the most significant deal between the two countries since diplomatic relations were established more than two decades ago. The Clinton administration hoped that this would pave the way for Congress to now vote permanent Normal Trade Relations (NTR) (also known as Most Favored nation), thereby giving China the same trading privileges now enjoyed without an annual review, by almost every other U.S. trading partner. The only other nations denied NTR status by the U.S. are: Afghanistan, Cambodia, Cuba, Laos, North Korea, an Yugoslavia, China has enjoyed NTR since 1980, but only by an annual vote of Congress. Only if the U.S. Congress approves permanent NTR for China can the November agreement be implement. WTO membership for China and permanent NTR status will clear the way for Taiwan to join the WTO. IMPACT OF WTO AGREEMENTS ON INDIAN BUSINESSES: AT A GLANCE AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS General Prohibits: actions India started Import on all Agreement on of Govt/ reforms during manufacturers, Tariffs & Trade organizations that GATT negotiation traders and service (GATT) distort normal period (86-94) providers trade; • Import duties • Competition to discrimination down form intensify as more between member peak 300% to imported nations and 15%. Already products finds discrimination complies WTO easy access. 160 Only for Private Circulation
  • 161. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS between domestic binding on Around half of and lawfully most tariff the products imported foreign lines. reserved for goods. Set • Committed to Small Industries guidelines for remove all already in OGL. implementation of QRs Removal of QRs agreements and (Quantitative set to further settlement of Restrictions) accelerate import disputes. by 2003* i.e. of all products. import • WTO led restrictions/ external licenses to go. liberalisation • Committed to speedily done; create freer Half baked trade regime as internal per GATT liberalization to agreement; hurt domestic already industries’ amended host competitiveness of legislation, severely; more to follow industry suffers from poor *India’s plan of infrastructure, phasing our QRs absence of VAT, (chiefly obsolete labour restrictions in laws, lack of import through coordination negative lists) is among ministries contested by US. and non- Recently WTO availability of panel economical, recommendations quality services- have gone against Banking, India, i.e. it could Insurance, inland mean early phase transport etc. out, even before 2003. It will affect 161 Only for Private Circulation
  • 162. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS consumer goods, agricultural, textiles and petroleum products etc. - Availability of economical, quality services-Banking, insurances, in land transport etc. • Ignorance among SMEs on WTO shockingly high; set to attract injuries from sudden spurt in unfair imports. • Reassessment of comparative advantage required. Many will have to change businesses; rigid legislation and rules would be a big stumbling block in the way. • Only those businesses, whether producing for domestic market or for foreign markets, who have 162 Only for Private Circulation
  • 163. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS international vision will survive and grow (in most of the product categories) 1.a. Agreement on Requires countries India has amended • India has Implementation to follow the its law in amended its law of Article VII of agreement for conformity with in conformity GATT (94) valuation of agreement by with agreement (valuation of imports to check notification 26 by notification 26 Goods) arbitrary decisions (NT) 24.04.95; (NT) 24.05.95; Customs Customs Act. Customs Act. • Importers and exporters to benefit from more transparent regime. While rejecting the value given by importer, Customs will have to give reasons in writing. Clear guidelines provided for computing value. 1.b. To check arbitrary (India does not use • Indian companies Agreement on ways of PSI service of PSI exporting to the Preshipment companies in companies) countries using Inspection valuation of goods PSI companies (PSI) (Around 30 (such as SGS, countries use them) Bureau Veritas etc) to benefit 163 Only for Private Circulation
  • 164. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS form improved systems. Arbitrary actions of PSI companies in computing Export value to be checked. 1.c. Agreement To check misuse of Bureau of Indian • Indian exporters on Technical mandatory product Standards (BIS) is of electrical Barriers to Trade standards by following the machinery, (TBT) countries. agreement (most consumer Recommends Indian Standards articles, countries to base are base on Intl. pharmaceuticals, their standards Standards) detergents, around Intl. BIS is also to serve automobiles, Standards. as an enquiry point household Requires countries electric/ to establish electronic ‘enquiry points gargets, insecticides, hazardous chemicals, fertilizers, toys etc to benefit from the agreement as import of these products are subject to Mandatory product Standards. • Enquiry points to help in accessing the information • Threat: The 164 Only for Private Circulation
  • 165. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS agreement also covers PPM (Process and Production Methods). That could be used for discrimination against Indian exports for agri/food/pharma products. 1.d. Agreement • Same as above • Most of India’s • Companies on Sanitary and except that standards are at exporting Phytosanitary MFN rule- par with the fresh/processed Measures (SPM) countries can Intl. standards fruit/ vegetables/ deny import (Implementatio juices, meant from certain n to improve) dairy products region/ country etc should due to fear of understand the spread of Mandatory pests/disease Standards. They should follow the developments taking place at various Intl. Organisations as FAO, Codex Alimanatrius etc. which have serious implications for their businesses in agri, process food, and dairy products. 1.e. Agreement • To ensure • System • Improved system on Import 165 Only for Private Circulation
  • 166. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS Licensing transparency in progressively within India and Procedures issuance of improved, in other countries import licenses though still far will have a and also from being positive tall out prescribes time perfect. Delays for small limits for & misuse of businesses that licenses to be discretionary are usually at the issued powers receiving end of frequent. EDI restrictive policy being put in environment. place. 1.f. Rules • Allows export • Foreign Trade • Exporting applicable on product to be Policy provides companies have Exports. relieved to schemes to right to demand indirect taxes neutralize the from Govt. such (e.g. Excise) incidence of schemes that prohibits direct indirect taxes* neutralize the tax benefits e.g. DEPB*, incidence of (e.g. Income Adv. License, indirect taxes on Tax waivers on Spl. Imp. the export export earnings License etc & product. In • Also allows Draw Back. absence of such countries to • Govt provides schemes Indian levy duties on IT waver# on products will be exports for export earnings at serious controlling it, if (80HHC of IT disadvantage situation so Act) internationally as demands, but • e.g. Customs all countries have prohibits other duty on import such schemes in restrictions contents used place. (except in few in export • The IT waiver on cases) product, excise, export earnings is sales tax/VAT temporary etc. Few measure; countries have • According to an launched EXIM Bank 166 Only for Private Circulation
  • 167. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS complaint study, Indian terming it as exports suffer ‘subsidy’ from cost #prohibited as disability of per GATT 16.3% over their overseas counterparts due to absence of VAT, inadequate financing and infrastructure bottlenecks. 1.g. Agreement • Prohibits export • India may have • Business will on Subsidies and subsidies; scrap IT waiver have to Countervailing allows on export understand what Measures (SCM) permissible earnings by is permissible subsidies 2003. Foreign and what is not. • Requires Trade Policy is E.g. subsidies developing following the given by Govts. countries to GATT to small phase them out directives businesses are by 2003 (with cautiously in usually some introducing the permissible (non- exceptions) and Duty actionable) or to freeze their Exemptions given for R&D or level and schemes and is for adaptation to coverage during suitably new environment transitional modifying requirements. period. them to make • Even during them WTO transition period compatible (upto 2003). Importing Also see : Indian countervail Imports Regime to ‘subsidies’ by be further increasing duties. liberalized • Export subsidies 167 Only for Private Circulation
  • 168. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS on import sensitive products (textiles, leather products etc.) can be maintained by importing countries. 1.h. Agreement • Allows • The required • If undue spurt in on Safeguard countries to take system is put in imports causing Measures action against place in ‘injury’ to undue import Commerce domestic surge injurious Ministry manufacturers, to domestic measures can be manufacturers taken during the during the transition period transition period (initially for 4 years extendable upto 10 years. From Jan’95) through raising duties (beyond bound rates) or by imposing QRs; for new as well as for development of existing industries. 1.i. Agreement • Allow countries • Directorate of • Most important on Antidumping to take Anti-Dumping for domestic Measures (ADP) measures established in manufactures. A against Commerce number of imported goods Ministry sectors have been benefiting from • Anti-dumping hurt by ‘unfair ‘unfair trade duties already import’ 168 Only for Private Circulation
  • 169. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS practices’. been imposed • Actions have in more than 30 been taken cases, against such provisional import in many duties on few cases. Mostly • Also see : Is large units have you industry been operating in hurt by excess these sectors. No import action so far for those sectors hurt, in which small businesses are predominant because of their ignorance 1.j Trade Related • Currently • Direct impact • Currently 5 types Investment prohibits on Govt’s of TRIMS Measures countries form FOREX & (investment (TRIMS) imposing 5 Industrial conditions) are types of policies. prohibited out of investment Foreign 24 already conditions on investment identified. Issue investors permissions. comes up again in year 2000 • Allows export performance requirement, majority stakes for locals etc. 1.k. Market • Different • Reduced duties • Massive increase Access negotiations are on most tariff in competition Negotiations taking place lines for domestic with developed successively to manufacturers countries and comply with • The reduction in developing the agreement duties in countries by • Peak rate of developed 169 Only for Private Circulation
  • 170. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS keeping low duty is down countries not to tariff rate in from 300% to have much mind. 15% for goods impact, these and services have already except luxury been very low. items. The actual benefit for India will come from removal of QRs in these countries (a) Agreement on • Multi Fibre • (Impact on • Opportunity: Textiles & Agreements and Textiles/ Important Clothing other QRs Garments development for usually imposed Export) textiles/ by developed Also see : Impact Garments countries to be of act on Indian Exports from phased out by textile India. Quotas year 2005 (in 4 will be phased phases) out in 2005. • Threat: the level of competition will be manifold. • Countries imposing quotas authorized to take safeguard measures. Punitive actions already taken against India in few cases (b) Agreement on • The subsidies • No obligation • Removal of Agriculture on agriculture to of India to distortions like be removed and reduce subsidy high subsidies converted in given to and QRs will ‘tariffs’; 36% farmers (AMS expand market 170 Only for Private Circulation
  • 171. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS reduction of calculations for Indian tariffs by reveal it is Agriculture developed, 24% taxed than products. E.g. by developing. subsidized). closed markets as Min. market Sets high tariffs Japan will have access in closed 100% on to procure rice markets primary min 3% of home products, 150% consumption on processed • QRs imposed by food. 300% on India on variety edible oils. of agri products • No could be phased commitment out by 2003 or regarding before (through market access some bilateral 9being under agreements with balance of Austr4alia. NZ, payment EU etc. It has Cover, though already been disputed) started competition to hot up. 1.1 Agreement • MFN & • (India is not a • Govts. are large on Govt. National party to the buyers (often Procurement Treatment on agreement) purchasing 10- the purchase of 15% of their goods as per GNP) India is not their a party to the commitments agreement, hence GOI could exercise its right to purchase from domestic manufacturers even at higher cost. This right is to come under 171 Only for Private Circulation
  • 172. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS severe pressure in coming negotiations. If gone against, it will have ser8ious fall out on almost all domestic manufacturers supplying to Govt./PSUS. • Indian exporters of goods and services can export to the countries that signed this agreement. Only the US disallows. *Chiefly of Textiles, footwear, computer hardware & Software, telecom equipment, electrical machinery, Pharma products, agri-food products, vehicles/spares, paper/stationery etc. 1. Agreement on • Recommends • Restructuring • Currently the State Trading that STEs of STEs like agreement has Enterprises conduct their MMTC, STC limited scope. In activities etc. the coming commercially Commercializa negotiations it is • WTO to be tion on of their likely that informed of activities monopoly/canali zing agency 172 Only for Private Circulation
  • 173. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS their activities status like that of Public P0etroleum companies will be broken. 2. General • All services • Foreign Trade • Services Agreement on come under Policy constitute 45% of Trade in Services GATS (12 incorporates GDP, State (GATT) sectors). services monopolies in all Require chapter for the the major sectors countries to first time; same (banking, ensure MFN status as to insurance, principle, merchandise transport-rail transparency, • Committed to etc). mutual open 10 sectors Liberalization in recognition of • Partial the sectors will qualifications liberalization in be extremely etc. Banking sector, beneficial to • Lists Telecom sector Indian companies liberalization (TRAI in competing commitments of established in domestically as countries line of SEBI), well as • Further insurance (IRA internationally. negotiation by established) etc • Huge potential 2005 Also see : what is for export of service, India the services as world service accountancy, provider date processing & software mgmt, consultancy, legal services, feasibility studies. See also ; what is service, India the world service 173 Only for Private Circulation
  • 174. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS provider • E-commerce and internet will fuel export of services further 3. Trade Related • Provide • Immediate • Impact will be on Intellectual protection to change all businesses Property Rights IPRS as Patents, required in • Main source of (TRIPS) copyrights, Patents Act technology for Trade marks, (1970), Trade SMEs reverse Ind..Designs, and engineering will Layout designs Merchandise be difficult, with for ICs, Marks Act the stricter IPR Geographical (1958), Regime and in indications and Designs Act new regime Undisclosed (1957) etc. ‘ignorance of law information • TRIPS will be no • National and agreement will excuse’ (the MFN Treatment also trigger burden of proof • Developing changes in is on infringe.) countries to certain • The Transfer of implement provisions of Technology cases within 5 years. Contract Act may increase (1872), Law of however on Torts, commercial Companies terms as Act(1961), IT counterfeit trade Act (1961), will have MRTP Act effective (1969) etc. deterrent • New Acts to be (amended laws) enacted. • India’s own R&D institutions could reap benefits within India as well as 174 Only for Private Circulation
  • 175. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS abroad. • Also see : New Patent Laws. The IPR Regime. 8. Patents • Patents to be • Patents Act • Immediate given for amended impact on process as well (1999). Now Pharma, Agri- as products allows product chemicals and • Life 20 years patents in food; patented • Compulsory pharmaceutical products cannot licensing on s, agri- be manufactured case to case chemicals and without license basis food. Patent • India has • Microorganisms life increased transition period to be patented to years 20, granted till 1st Jan and protection micro- 2005. (with the of plant organisms condition that varieties by made applicant would patents or sui patentable. be given generic system • New law for Exclusive or both plant varieties Marketing Rights being drafted (EMR) for 5 years form 1st Jan 1995 till grant/rejection of patent, whichever ends earlier) b. Copyrights • Definition 7 • The new • Would benefit scope amendment bill Indian Software, broadened. Now contains Music and Film includes changes as per Industry besides Software, TRIPS authors and Sound agreement publishing recordings, companies films etc. • Min. protection 175 Only for Private Circulation
  • 176. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS 50 years (25 years for photographic works) c. Trademarks • Covers Trade as • New • Impact on well as Service amendment bill counterfeit Marks- to cover TRIPS Trade-Care Protection for 7 promulgation should be years (renewals exercised in indefinitely) choosing names of the companies of products e.g. other “Brand names cannot be sued as Company’s name (name as Maruti, Reliance, Usha etc used by other businesses will be contested ) d. Industrial • Covers new and • New • Implications for Design & Layout original amendment bill Indian Designers Industrial contains as well as designs & changes as per Garment/ Layout agreement; Textiles Industry includes using protected service marks designs and manufactures of Ics. e. Undisclosed • Does not • Impact on • Employees, information & demand it to be know-how consultants, Trade Secrets intellectual agreements, licensees, sub- property but Contract Act contractors, etc. stipulates their etc. restrained form protection divulging 176 Only for Private Circulation
  • 177. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran AGREEMENTS OBJECTIVE OF IMPACT ON BUSINESS AGREEMENT INDIAN IMPLICATIONS POLICY/ LAWS through confidential contractual information obligations • Provisions on Undisclosed Test Data, submission of which is required by Govts before grant of permission (e.g. in pharma products) stipulates adequate protection. f. Geographical • Prohibits • No specific law • Major impact on indications countries to on Agri-food permit Geographical products. trademarks indication yet; Benefits from containing Being drafted improved system misleading • Taking up • Our not having information on membership of law on GIs has geographical Paris led to origin of goods Convention and controversies on other important Basmati, Treaties as Darjeeling Tea, Lisbon Treaty Alphanso for GIs. Mangoes etc. CONTRIBUTIONS OF THE WTO It is a tribute to human civilization that sovereign nations have agreed to subordinate their freedom (to act) and have agreed to work within the framework of rules to promote global trade. The Uruguay Round of negotiations resulted in formation of a rule based system, which is expected to lead to smooth and orderly international trade. 177 Only for Private Circulation
  • 178. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • The WTO and its agreements have an impact on every economic activity, be it agriculture, trading, service or manufacturing. • World markets are opening up due to lowering of tariffs and dismantling of other restrictions in developed and developing countries to benefit from their comparative advantages. • Domestic markets will be increasingly threatened because of lowering of tariffs leading to freer entry of foreign goods and because of foreign companies’ establishing local manufacturing bases. • Whereas the developing countries will have greater opportunities in sectors in which they have cost bases comparative advantages e.g., textiles, agriculture etc., the developed countries benefit due to the opening of the service sector and tightening of Intellectual Property Regime. • Export markets will become more difficult because of competition among developing countries with similar comparative advantages. • Products from developing countries will face higher quality standards in developed markets particularly in the areas where they have comparative cost advantage. • Every company, whether serving the domestic or international market, will have to undertake an internal exercise to identify factors affecting its international competitiveness in terms of cost as well as quality. It will need to study whether it can remain competitive once the product can be imported freely or tariffs are further lowered or both. • The WTO regime will be of greater benefit to those countries that show ability and skill in the ongoing dialogue. The governments that are in constant touch with their industries and affected groups will be able to clearly determine how and what should be negotiated at multilateral negotiations to the best of their advantage. • International trade is becoming increasingly trade, deregulation and privatization of internal economy have now been strengthened and legalized under the WTO. Countries have no option but to follow this direction. Countries that have understood this have moved swiftly in fine- tuning their domestic and international trade policies, to create a winning 178 Only for Private Circulation
  • 179. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran environment for industry and business. Those who are still debating the issue or do not understand it clearly will be left behind. 179 Only for Private Circulation
  • 180. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 10. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS Human brain is a powerful creator, executor and controller of every function in the world, if optimum utilized. By converting its efforts one becomes world renowned, others remain common. Invent, Create and beyond, Commercialise. Learning value: On going through this chapter reader will understand: 1. The concept and importance of IPR 2. Classification of IPR 3. Methods of protecting IPR 4. Procedure to file IPR What would have happened if Stevenson had not invented steam engine, Edison had not invented gramophone, Graham Bell had not invented telephone, Albert & Wilbert had not invented airplane and finally Einstein had not propounded three laws of gravitational force? Every product/s we use or enjoy is an outcome of known and unknown intellectuals. They continue to invent for the society and future. “It is intangible, sometimes perishable, infringeable and intrudable property of mind could be encashed by anyone if it is not legally protected”. Intellectual property refers to ideas, discoveries and inventions that can be commercially exploited. At one time, intellectual property was manipulated by smart business. They could take ideas from innovations and inventors and make fortune. Currently, such inventions can be owned, protected and marketed by the inventor himself. Such legal protection is scheduled as a part of the WTO agreement. In some sectors like the pharmaceutical, chemical, engineering and manufacturing sectors ‘Intellectual Property Rights’ has become common parlance. 180 Only for Private Circulation
  • 181. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran The term Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) is often shortened further to Intellectual Property (IP). Intellectual property is a series of legal rights that afford, in most cases temporary protection for different types of inventions, designs, brand names or original creations. The legal rights given are the rights to prevent unauthorized use of the invention, design, brand name or creation for the period of protection. The right given can be an absolute monopoly right or simply a right to prevent reproduction. The legal rights in intellectual property can be transferred between parties, licensed to other parties and can even mortgage or used as security. IP only comes into existence after an application has been made and/or registration has been obtained. Alternatively, it may come into existence automatically upon creation of an original design or other work or upon the creation of a reputed brand name, with most forms of intellectual property, the temporary protection afford expires after a finite term. However, this is not true for all forms protection, some of which can last forever. The various forms of intellectual property are given briefly below. Components of IPR in current context Patents: New and inventive technical innovations can enjoy an absolute monopoly for twenty years. Supplementary Protection Certificate: This is an extension of up to five years on the absolute monopoly given by a patent, where the invention consists of a medicinal product for which approval by the relevant authority has yet to be given. Trademarks: The owner of a trademark has an absolute monopoly for ten years. The legal protection of any brand name has the title of trademark and it is shown on any product as TM. Designs: This is an absolute monopoly for twenty-five years, given for a new design of a manufactured article. Unregistered Design Right: This prevents reproduction of an original design, which lasts for a maximum of fifteen years. Copyright: Copyright prevents reproduction of an original literary, artistic, musical or dramatic work. It is valid for a period of seventy years after the death of the author. 181 Only for Private Circulation
  • 182. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Confidentiality and Trade Secrets: This prevents misuse of confidential or secret information. Plant Variety Right: This relates to a new horticultural genus or species. It gives the monopoly rights of the new variety of plant to the scientist. Trade Marks Patents Designs Intellectual Property Copy Plant Variety Rights Rights Trade Secrets Intellectual property rights legally prevent unauthorized use of ideas and designs. Thus if a patent exists for a product, other persons are prevented from making or selling that product. If a brand name is registered as a trademark then using the same or similar brand name amounts to infringement of that registration and is illegal. Thus intellectual property rights have obvious commercial benefits as they enable a company to maintain a monopoly in a particular area of business to the exclusion of competitors. 182 Only for Private Circulation
  • 183. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran However, it may become necessary or advisable to join forces with other parties to exploit the protected area of business. This is permitted under intellectual property rights if the other parties, the licenses, pay a lump sum or royalties to the primary party. Thus if there is a big market, which a single party cannot, or does not wish to exploit alone, one or more licenses can be appointed who can also take advantage of the market and the main party will receive royalties on their income. Alternatively, it may be desirable for the party to simply sell the intellectual property rights at an appropriate price. This is possible since the rights can be assigned (ownership transferred) to other parties. Suppose a party develops a product in an area in which it has no commercial interest, then the party may consider selling that invention to another party who operates in that area, as an alternative to licensing the party to exploit the invention. Intellectual property rights can thus be used to avoid competition or to derive an income through licensing of selling the rights. The existence of intellectual property rights also provides a useful tool for monitoring the activities of competitors. Published patent application, registered designs and applications for registration of a trademark can indicate the technical and commercial direction a competitor is taking, or thinking of taking. For example, published patent applications contain technical information relating to inventions and can indicate the area of technology that is currently of interest to the applicant or proprietor. An application for a new trademark may indicate a new line of business or change of corporate identity for a company. All this material is available for public inspection and can be a valuable source of commercial information as it is unavailable elsewhere. THE PROCEDURE TO OBTAIN IPR PROTECTION Intellectual property rights can be obtained in one of two ways, by application or by automatic derivation. Where an application procedure is involved, it usually follows the steps set out in the following sequence: 1. File application 2. Search carried out to ascertain originality 3. Examination carried out 183 Only for Private Circulation
  • 184. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 4. Objections raised/No objections raised 5. Dealing with objections 6. Grant/Registration It is a simple six step procedure that anyone can follow. Where an application procedure is involved, the protection ultimately obtained is usually an absolute monopoly, patents registered designs and registered trademarks fall into this category. Intellectual property rights arise automatically if an original work, such as a drawing, design document, or prototype is created. These rights are usually limited to preventing any form of reproduction of misinterpretation. Copyrights, unregistered design rights (including semiconductor topography rights) and unregistered trademarks fall into this category. CONCEPT AND MEANING OF IPR Patents Patent protection can be obtained for many types of technical innovations. For example, a new piece of apparatus or machinery to carry out a particular operation, a method or process for performing an operation or making a product or the use of a piece of equipment or product for a particular purpose. In order to determine if patent protection can be obtained, it is necessary to consider whether the technical innovation is both novel and innovative. Both these terms have a legal definition. It is usually relatively straightforward to determine if a technical innovation is novel or not. The determination is based upon whether the innovation is different from that which existed previously. It is more difficult to assess if an innovation is inventive. This determination is based upon whether it will be obvious, given what existed previously, to arrive at the invention. Unfortunately this is a legal definition, which cannot be applied without knowledge of the concerned body of case law on the subject. Patent protection is not available for every type of innovation. It is excluded in the case of innovations that are artistic and not technical innovations, and innovations that are not applicable in industry. Once again these are strict legal definitions and a thorough knowledge of case law is needed to accurately assess whether an invention is an excluded invention. Patents are obtained via an application procedure that involves a search and 184 Only for Private Circulation
  • 185. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran an examination. Once any objections raised are dealt with, the application can proceed to grant the patent. Once the patent has been granted, it remains in force for 20 years, subject to payment of annual renewal fees to keep the patent in force, and a granted patent provides a patentee with an absolute legal monopoly which can be used to prevent unauthorized use of the patented invention. Generally speaking, patents are territorial and it is necessary to obtain a patent in each country in which protection is required. A patent in a particular country does, however enable a patentee to prevent importation into that country of an infringing product from wherever that importation takes place. Therefore, it is common for patentees to protect their inventions in the countries which constitute either their major markets, or which contain their major competitors’ manufacturing sites. Whilst patents are essentially territorial, there are a number of international conventions that make the process of applying for international patent protection more simple and cost effective than filing a national patent application in all the countries of interest. The most important these international conventions are the European patent Convention and the patent Cooperation Treaty. Trademarks Traditionally trademarks were any word or logo that serves to designate the origin of goods or services. In recent years the law has come to recognize that there are many other ways of designating the origin of goods or services, e.g. advertising jingles, smells and the shape of goods or packaging. Nowadays, therefore, these are also recognized as trademarks. For registration, a trademark must be capable of distinguishing the goods or services of one party from those of other parties. Furthermore, trademarks that consist of anything other than words or logos must be capable of being represented graphically. Any sign that does not satisfy these requirements cannot be registered as a trademark. Signs which are inherently non – distinctive or descriptive or which consist of words or symbols, things that traders in the same area of business may wish legitimately to use to identify the origin of their gods may be excluded from registration. For example surnames and geographical locations would not be allowed as trademarks. In some countries, for example the United Kingdom, rights can be obtained on a trademark simply by using a symbol or sign extensively enough, so that it is identified with the product. In these circumstances, the person or company using the trademark has legal resources through an 185 Only for Private Circulation
  • 186. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran action for ‘Passing Off or Unfair Competition’, against other parties who are attempting to misrepresent themselves by using a similar trademark. Most countries however provide a statutory registration procedure for registration of trademarks and it is always advisable to register a trademark, where possible, since infringement of a registered trademark is a strict liability offence and is not dependent upon proving a reputation or any misrepresentation. Furthermore, in certain circumstances, infringement of a registered trademark can be a criminal offence and is punished accordingly. A registered trademark is obtained by filling an application with the Trade Marks Registry, which is then searched and examined. Once any objections raised are overcome, the mark is advertised in order to allow any interested party to object to the registration should they have grounds to do so. Subject to no objection being raised, the mark is then entered into the Register of trademarks. Once registered, a trademark can usually be kept in force for as long as is required. Subject only to the payment of renewal fees. Copyright Copyright, as its name suggests, is a right to prevent copying of an original artistic, musical, literary or dramatic work. Because copyright is only a right to prevent copying of the original work, there is no absolute legal monopoly and copyright cannot therefore be used to prevent the independent production of an identical or similar work without any reference to the original work. From 1st January 1997, the copyright lasts for a period of 70 Years from the death of the original author of the work. Copyright is given on a national basis in the country in which the original work created but may be enforceable internationally by virtue of the Berne Convention or universal copyright convention. In some countries, copyright can be used to prevent unauthorized application of the original work to a manufactured article and thus similar protection to that given by Unregistered Design right in the United Kingdom is afforded. However, a notable exception to this is the United States of America. Confidentiality and Trade Secrets There are laws that protect confidentiality of information. Companies or individuals may wish to keep commercial or technical information confidential. If this information is made public in breach of that confidence 186 Only for Private Circulation
  • 187. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran then it is possible to bring an action or breach of confidence against the offending party. For example, an employee has an obligation to keep all information, which is given to him or her by the employer, confidential. If confidential information is disclosed to a third party out of choice then the obligation of confidentiality also passes to the third party. It should be ensured that the third party is aware of the fact that they are expected to treat the information as confidential and they agree to do so. In particle terms this agreement should be given in writing in case there is ever any dispute as to what was agreed. There is an exception to the protection of confidential information in circumstances where the dissemination of the information is deemed to be in the public interest. This is allowed, notwithstanding any obligation of confidence. The current decade has witnessed innumerable inventions in India in the field of biotechnology, agro chemicals, telecommunications, pharmaceuticals, electronics, agriculture, food processing and natural herbal medicines. Biocon, Bharat Serum, Ranbaxy, Gharda Chemicals, Cadila, United Phosphorous and Glen Mark afford to employ separate invention team and protect another team with legal expertise. PATENT COOPERATION TREATY The original Patent cooperation Treaty was signed in Washington in 1970 but it has been modified many times since. The convention only came into force on 1st June 1978. This convention provides a mechanism whereby protection can be ultimately obtained in all. Or selected countries that have signed the treaty. This is carried out through a procedure which involves the filling of a single application that is subjected to a single international search and an international preliminary examination. At the end of the international preliminary examination an examination report is produced which sets out an opinion on the patentability of the invention described in the application. After completion of the examination report, the applicant has the option of proceeding with the application, or allowing the application to lapse, if the examination report is dismissive of possibilities for protection. If the applicant wishes to proceed further, the application is split into separate national applications in the countries of interest and may be subjected to a further national search and examination. The national offices function independently and may place as much weight as they wish on the opinion of the international authority, which was set out in the international preliminary examination report. Attitudes vary widely from country to country as to the 187 Only for Private Circulation
  • 188. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran weight attached to the contents of the international preliminary examination report. For Example, an applicant in the United Kingdom, Should know that the Japanese and united States patent offices will often ignore the contents on the report and will carry out a full search and examination, just as if the application had not previously been searched or examined by the international authorities. ROLE OF PATENT AND TRADEMARK ATTORNEYS Patent and trademark attorneys are generally speaking, professional advisors who are qualified by an examination in the Law of Intellectual Property. However, it is important to note that the term, ‘Patent and Trademark Attorney’ may also be used by a solicitor, who may not have experience, or relevant qualifications, in intellectual property rights. Knowledgeable patent and trademark attorneys are qualified to give advice on infringement or exploitation of intellectual property rights and can also carry out searches to ascertain the patent, design and trade mark activities of competitors or any other person or company. They are fully experienced in the procedures for obtaining forms of intellectual property rights and can offer advice on the forms available for any particular innovation or idea, and the procedures necessary to obtain the best protection. Innovators and inventors in any field are required to consult a knowledgeable attorney prior to filing their applications. Following strict procedures and also keeping documentary evidence at all stages will enable the applicant to protect his intellectual property. Internationally renowned research organizations like Genentech, BioRad, Hoffkins, E-Merck and Pfizer are retaining attorneys permanently as a part of management team in the organization for this purpose. 188 Only for Private Circulation
  • 189. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 11. TRADE BARRIERS Diamond will not glitter without going through tedious process; Vessels cannot sail all the time without resistance; And even on fertile soils the plant has to out grow the harmful weeds to give yields. Learning Value: After completing the chapter one will understand: 1. The importance of barriers 2. Types of trade barriers 3. Impact of barriers in international business 4. Benefits to home and host countries 5. Relevance of trade barriers in the current decade A trade barrier is defined as “any hurdle, impediment or road block that hampers the smooth flow of goods, services and payments from one destination to another”. They arise from the rules and regulations governing trade either from home country or host country or intermediary. Trade barriers are man-made obstacles to the free movement of goods between different countries, and impose artificial restrictions on trading activities between countries. Despite the fact that all international organisations such as GATT, WTO and UNCTAD advocate reduction or elimination of barriers, they still continue in different forms. Free and fair international trade is an ideal situation as it is beneficial to all countries. However, different countries impose various types of barriers. The contribution of GATT in removing such trade barriers has not been satisfactory as even now, both developed and developing countries, present such trade barriers. Such barriers are usually imposed by the country that 189 Only for Private Circulation
  • 190. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran imports the goods, but they adversely affect the volumes of both imports and exports. The volume of exports is reduced due to such trade restrictions and the tariff results in an escalation in prices. OBJECTIVES OF TRADE BARRIERS 1. To protect domestic industries from foreign goods. 2. To promote new industries and research and development activities by providing a home market for domestic industries. 3. To maintain favourable balance of payment, by restricting imports from foreign countries. 4. To conserve foreign exchange reserves of the country by restricting imports from foreign countries. 5. To protect the national economy from dumping by other countries with surplus production. 6. To mobilize additional revenue by imposing heavy duties on imports. This also restricts conspicuous consumption within the country. 7. To counteract trade barriers imposed by other countries. 8. To encourage domestic production in the domestic market and thereby make the country strong and self-sufficient. Since trade barriers are harmful for the growth of free trade, efforts were made to reduce such trade barriers, and international organisations initiated collective efforts of all countries involved in trade. WTO ministerial conferences held in concern or Doha Qatar or Hong Kong are focused on breaking barriers of trading in different forms. TYPES OF TRADE BARRIERS Broadly, Trade barriers are classified as tariff barriers and non-tariff barriers. They are now an inseparable part of global business and the location of a business operation and pricing decisions are determined by tariffs. A country may use both tariff and non-tariff barriers order to restrict the entry of foreign goods. 190 Only for Private Circulation
  • 191. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Tariff Barriers A tariff barrier is a levy collected on goods when they enter a domestic tariff area (DTA) through customs. Tariff refers to the duties imposed on internationally traded commodities when they cross national boundaries and may be in the form of heavy taxes or custom duties (operated through a price mechanism) on imports, so as to discourage their entry into the home country for marketing purposes. Tariffs enhance the price of the imported goods, thereby restricting their sales as well as their import. Governments impose tariffs only on imports and not on exports as they are interested in export promotion. Only a few exported items of any country are taxed. The aim of a tariff is thus to raise the prices of imported goods in domestic markets, reduce their demand and thereby discourage their imports. Tariff barriers are major determinant factor to build or get away from the business. In India, over the past ten years the prime import duty has been reduced to 15% from 100% on many consumer durables and electrical items. Classification of Tariffs A) On the basis of origin and destination of the goods crossing national boundaries 1. Export duty: An export duty is a tax levied by the country of origin, on a commodity designated for use in other countries. The majority of finished goods do not attract export duty. Such duties are normally imposed on the primary products in order to conserve them for domestic industries. In India, export duty is levied on oilseeds, coffee and onions. 2. Import duty: An import duty is a tax imposed on a commodity originating in another country by the country for which the product is designated. The purpose of heavy import duties is to earn revenue, to make imports costly and to provide protection to domestic industries. Countries impose heavy import duties to restrict imports and thereby remove the deficit in the balance of trade and balance of payment. 3. Transit duty: A transit duty is a tax imposed on a commodity when it crosses the national frontier between the originating country and the country which it is cosigned to. African and Latin American nations impose such transit duties at any point of time. Sri Lanka is another country enjoying such benefits from Indian companies. 191 Only for Private Circulation
  • 192. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran B) On the basis of quantification of tariffs 1. Specific duty: A specific duty is a flat sum collected on physical unit of the commodity imported. Here, the rate of the duty is fixed and is collected on each unit imported. For example, Rs. 800 on each TV set or washing machine or Rs. 3000 per metric ton on cold rolled steel coils. 2. Ad-valorem duty: This duty is imposed at a fixed percentage on the value of a commodity imported. Here the value of the commodity on the invoice is taken as the base for calculation of the duty, e.g., 3% ad- valorem duty on the C&F value of the goods imported. In the ad-valorem duty, the percentage of the duty is decided but the actual amount of the duty changes as per the FOB value of a product. 3. Compound duty: A tariff is referred to as compound duty when the commodity is subject to both specific and ad-valorem duty. C) On the basis of the purpose they serve 1. Revenue tariff: It aims at collecting substantial revenue for the government, but does not really obstruct the flow of imported goods. Here, the duty is imposed on items of mass consumption, but the rate of duty is low. 2. Protective tariff: Protective tariff aims at giving protection to home industries by restricting or eliminating competition. Protective tariffs are usually high so as to reduce imports. However, if the protective duties are too high, it may hurt consumers, as imports will stop, leading to shortages in the consumer market. 3. Anti-dumping duty: Dumping is the commercial practice of selling goods in foreign markets at a price below their normal cost or even below their marginal cost so as to capture foreign markets. Many countries follow dumping practices. It is international practice which has a “do or die” instinct associated with the company’s policy. It is harmful to less developed countries where the cost of production is high. 4. Countervailing duty: Such duties are similar to anti-dumping duties but are not so severe. Countervailing duties are imposed to nullify the benefits offered, through cash assistance or subsidies, by the foreign country to its manufacturers. The rate of such duty will be proportional to the extent of cash assistance or subsidy granted. 192 Only for Private Circulation
  • 193. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran D) On the basis of trade relations 1. Single column tariff: Under this system tariff rates are fixed for various commodities and the same rates are made applicable to imports from all other countries. 2. Double column tariff: Under this system two rates of duty are fixed on all or some commodities. The lower rate is made applicable to a friendly country or to a country with which the importing country has a bilateral trade agreement. The higher rate is applicable to all other countries. 3. Triple column tariff: Here, three different rates of duties are fixed. They are general tariff, international tariff and preferential tariff. The first two categories have minimum variance but the preferential tariff is substantially lower than the general tariff and is applicable to friendly countries where there is a bilateral relationship. Mutual understanding of products and tariffs is concluded through a cartel. It is also called preferential tariff. Benefits of tariff to the home country 1. Imports from abroad are discourage or even eliminated to a considerable extent. 2. Protection is given to the home industries and manufacturing sector. This facilitates an increase in domestic production. 3. Consumption of foreign goods is reduced to a minimum and the attraction for imported goods is brought down. 4. Tariff brings in substantial revenue to the government. In addition it also creates employment opportunities within the country, by promoting domestic industries. 5. Tariffs aim to reduce the deficit in the balance of trade and balance of payment of a country. 193 Only for Private Circulation
  • 194. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Trade Barriers Tariff Non-Tariff Barriers Barriers On the basis On the basis On the basis On the basis 1. Quota of origin of of purpose of relations 2. Licensing 1. Export Quantification 1. Revenue 1. Single 3. Consular Duty 1. Specific tariff column formalities Duty 2. Import 2. Ad-Valorem 2. Protective 2. Double 4. Trade blocs Duty Duty tariff column 5. Customs 3. Transit 3. Compound 3. Anti 3. Triple Regulations Duty Duty Dumping column 6. State Trading 4. Counter- 7. Forex veiling Regulations 8. Health & Safety 9. Miscellaneous Non -tariff Barriers Along with tariff barriers, non-tariff barriers are imposed by countries in order to restrict free trade at a global level. Non-tariff barriers are quantitative restrictions as they directly restrict the entry of foreign goods over and above a specific limit fixed by the government. Other forms of non-tariff barriers are licenses, exchange control, complicated documentations, technical certifications etc. Non-tariff barriers are useful for reducing the total quantity of goods that are imported from abroad, but they do not affect the price of imported goods. However, the net effects of tariffs and non-tariff barriers are more or less the same. The impact of non-tariff barriers is more direct and faster. 194 Only for Private Circulation
  • 195. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Types of non-tariff barriers 1. Quota system: The quota system is an important non-tariff barrier. Under this system, the quantity of a commodity permitted to be imported from various countries during a given period is fixed in advance. Such quotas are usually administered by requiring importers to have licenses to import a particular commodity. Imports are not allowed over and above a specific limit. This suggests that tariffs restrict imports indirectly while quotas restrict imports directly. Developing countries may use quotas in place of tariffs. The quota system acts as a barrier to international trade as it restricts the flow of goods in an artificial manner. There are different types of quota and a country can introduce any type of quota as per the need of the situation. The types of quotas are: Tariff quota: A tariff quota combines the features of the tariff as well as the quantity. Here, the imports of a commodity up to a specified volume are allowed duty free or at a special low rate of duty. Imports in excess of this limit are subject to a higher rate of duty. Unilateral quota: In a unilateral quota system, a country fixes its own ceiling on the import of a particular item. Bilateral quota: In a bilateral quota, the quantity to be imported is decided in advance, but it is the result of negotiations between the country importing the goods and the country exporting them. Mixing quota: Under a mixing quota, the producers are obliged to utilise a certain percentage of domestic raw material in manufacturing the finished products. 2. Import Licensing: Import licensing is an alternative to the quota system. It is useful for restricting the total quantity to be imported. In this system, imports are allowed under license. Importers have to approach the licensing authorities for permission to import certain commodities. Foreign exchange for imports is provided against the license. Such import licenses are the practice in many countries. This method is used to control the quantity of imports. Import licensing may be used separately or along with the quota system. 3. Consular formalities: Some importing countries impose strict rules regarding the consular documents necessary to import goods. Such documents include import certificate, certificates of origin and certified consular invoices. Penalties are imposed for non-compliance of such documentation formalities. The purpose of consular formalities to restrict 195 Only for Private Circulation
  • 196. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran imports to some extent and prevent free imports of commodities that are not necessary. 4. Preferential treatment through trading blocs: Some countries form regional groups and offer special concessions and preference to member countries. As a result trade is developed among the member countries and allows advantages to all member countries. On the other hand, it can cause a considerable loss to non member countries, as a trading bloc acts as a trade barrier. Even trade agreements and joint commissions are used as trade barriers as they restrict free movement of goods at the international level. 5. Customs regulations: Customs regulations and administrative regulations are very complicated in many countries. There are a number of ‘Commodities Act,’ pertaining to the movement of drugs, medicines, minerals, bullion etc. Restrictions under such acts are useful to curtail imports. Tax administration also acts as barrier to free marketing amongst countries. 6. State trading: State trading refers to import-export activities conducted by the government or a government agency. Stat trading is useful to restrict imports, as the final decision is taken by the government. Such state trading acts as a barrier, restricting the freedom of private parties. 7. Foreign exchange regulations: Countries impose various restrictions on the use f the foreign exchange earned through exports. Such restrictions have the following objectives. a) To restrict the demand for foreign exchange and to use the foreign exchange reserves in the best possible manner. b) To check the flow of capital. c) To maintain the value of exchange rates. Under such regulations the foreign exchange earned should be surrendered to the government. The government provides foreign exchange to the businessmen as per priorities that are fixed periodically. 8. Health and safety measures: Many countries have specific rules regarding health and safety regulations, which are mainly applicable to raw materials and food items. Imports are not allowed if the regulations are not followed properly. 9. Miscellaneous non-tariff barriers: Such barriers include prior import duties such as deposits, embargoes and import restrictions due to environmental regulations, provision of subsidies to domestic industry, canalization of imports of some commodities and technical and administrative regulations. All such measures act as non-tariff barriers as they restrict the free flow of goods and services between countries. 196 Only for Private Circulation
  • 197. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 12. INTERNATIONAL INSTITUTIONS AND ROLE IN INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS Learning Value: 1. World bank 2. IDA & IFC 3. IMF 4. ADB 5. IMO 6. ILO An international organisation must be established by a treaty (constituent instrument) providing it with legal recognition. International organizations so established are subjects of international law, capable of entering into agreements among themselves or with states. Purpose of International organizations International Organizations exist to increase international relations, promote education, health care, economic development, environmental protection, human rights, and conflict resolution throughout a region. GLOBAL REGIONAL ORGANISATIONS ORGANISATIONS 1. United Nations 1. European Union 2. World Trade 2. Asia Co-operation Organization Dialogue 3. International 3. Common wealth of Hydrographic Organization Independent States 4. International Seabed 4. African Union Authority 5. APEC 5. Organisation for the 6. Organization of American Prohibition of Chemical States Weapons 197 Only for Private Circulation
  • 198. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 198 Only for Private Circulation
  • 199. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran World Bank The World Bank (the Bank), a part of the World Bank Group (WBG), was formally established on the 27 December 1945 following the ratification of the Bretton Woods agreement. The concept was originally conceived in July 1944 at the United Nations Monetary and Financial Conference in July 1944. The World Bank Group (WBG) is a family of five international organizations responsible for providing finance and advice to countries for the purposes of economic development and eliminating poverty. The Bank came into formal existence on 27 December 1945 following international ratification of the Bretton Woods agreements, which emerged from the United Nations Monetary and Financial Conference (1 July – 22 July 1944). The World Bank Group consists of • the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD), established in 1945, which provides debt financing on the basis of sovereign guarantees; • the International Finance Corporation (IFC), established in 1956, which provides various forms of financing without sovereign guarantees, primarily to the private sector; • the International Development Association (IDA), established in 1960, which provides concessional financing (interest-free loans or grants), usually with sovereign guarantees; • the Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (MIGA), established in 1988, which provides insurance against certain types of risk, including political risk, primarily to the private sector; and, • the International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID), established in 1966, which works with governments to reduce investment risk. 199 Only for Private Circulation
  • 200. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran The Bank’s mission is to aid developing countries and their inhabitants achieve the MDGs (Millennium Development Goals), through the alleviation of poverty, by developing an environment for investment, jobs and sustainable growth, thus promoting economical growth and through investment in and empowerment of the poor to enable them to participate in development. The World Bank sees the four key factors necessary for economic growth and the creation of a business environment as: 1. Capacity Building – Strengthening governments and educating government officials 2. Infrastructure creation – implementation of legal and judicial systems for the encouragement of business, the protection of individual and property rights and the honoring of contracts 3. Development of Financial Systems – the establishment of strong systems capable of supporting endeavors from micro credit to the financing of larger corporate ventures 4. Combating corruption – Eradicating corruption to ensure optimal effect of actions Areas of operation • Agriculture & Rural Development • Conflict & Development • Development Operations & Activities • Economic Policy • Education • Energy • Environment • Financial Sector • Gender • Governance • Health, Nutrition & Population • Industry • Information & Communication Technologies • Information, Computing & Telecommunications • International Economics & Trade • Labor & Social Protections • Law & Justice 200 Only for Private Circulation
  • 201. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • Macroeconomic & Economic Growth • Mining • Poverty Reduction • Poverty • Private Sector • Public Sector Governance • Rural Development • Social Development • Social Protection • Trade • Transport • Urban Development • Water Resources • Water Supply & Sanitation WORLD BANK IDA IFC IFC Purpose of IFC is to: • Promote open and competitive markets in developing countries • Support companies and other private sector partners • Generate productive jobs and deliver basic services • Create opportunity for people to escape poverty and improve their lives IFC promotes sustainable private sector development in developing countries. Our particular focus is to promote economic development by encouraging the growth of productive enterprise and efficient capital markets in our member countries. 201 Only for Private Circulation
  • 202. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran IFC invests in enterprises majority-owned by the private sector throughout most developing countries in the world. Developing regions include: • Sub-Saharan Africa • East Asia & the Pacific • South Asia • Europe & Central Asia • Latin America & the Caribbean • Middle East & North Africa The International Finance Corporation has 179 member countries. To join IFC, a country must: • Be a member of the World Bank (IBRD); • Have signed IFC's Articles of Agreement; and • Have deposited with the World Bank Group's Corporate Secretariat an Instrument of Acceptance of IFC's Articles of Agreement. Products and Services of IFC IFC is a dynamic organization, constantly adjusting to the evolving needs of our clients in emerging markets. We are no longer defined predominantly by our role in providing project finance to companies in developing countries. We have also: • Developed innovative financial products; • Broadened our capacity to provide advisory services; and • Deepened our corporate governance, environmental and social expertise. Financial Products • Loans for IFC's Account • Syndicated Loans • Equity Finance • Quasi-Equity Finance • Equity & Debt Funds • Structured Finance • Intermediary Services • Risk Management Products 202 Only for Private Circulation
  • 203. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • Local Currency Financing • Municipal Finance • Trade Finance IDA The International Development Asso- ciation (IDA) is the part of the World Bank that helps the world’s poorest countries. Established in 1960, IDA aims to reduce poverty by providing interest-free loans and grants for programs that boost economic growth, reduce inequalities and improve people’s living conditions. IDA complements the World Bank’s other lending arm—the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD)—which serves middle- income countries with capital investment and advisory services. IBRD and IDA share the same staff and headquarters and evaluate projects with the same rigorous standards. IDA is one of the largest sources of assistance for the world’s 80 poorest countries, 39 of which are in Africa. It is the single largest source of donor funds for basic social services in the poorest countries. IDA lends money (known as credits) on concessional terms. This means that IDA credits have no interest charge and repayments are stretched over 35 to 40 years, including a 10-year grace period. Eligibility for IDA support depends first and foremost on a country’s relative poverty, defined as GNI per capita below an established threshold and updated annually (in fiscal year 2007: US$1,025). Some countries, such as India, Indonesia and Pakistan, are IDA-eligible based on per capita income levels, but are also creditworthy for some IBRD borrowing. They are referred to as “blend” countries. Eighty-two countries are currently eligible to borrow from IDA. Together, these countries are home to 2.5 billion people, half of the total population of the developing world. An estimated 1.5 billion people there survive on incomes of US$2 or less a day. 203 Only for Private Circulation
  • 204. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran FY06 Top Ten IDA Borrowers ($million) Pakistan 1183 Vietnam 768 Tanzania 751 Ethiopia 505 India 500 Bangladesh 462 Nigeria 422 Congo (DRC) 365 Ghana 355 Afghanistan 240 New IDA Lending by Region: Sub-Saharan Africa.............50% South Asia............................27% East Asia/Pacific..................11% Europe/Central Asia...............5% Middle East/North Africa.........4% Latin America/Caribbean........3% New IDA Lending by Sector: Social sector........................28% Public admin and law...........24% Industry...............................22% Infrastructure......................15% Agriculture..........................11% 204 Only for Private Circulation
  • 205. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran INTERNATIONAL MONETARY FUND The IMF is an international organization of 185 member countries. It was established to promote international monetary cooperation, exchange stability, and orderly exchange arrangements; to foster economic growth and high levels of employment; and to provide temporary financial assistance to countries to help ease balance of payments adjustment. The purposes of the International Monetary Fund are: • To promote international monetary cooperation through a permanent institution which provides the machinery for consultation and collaboration on international monetary problems? • To facilitate the expansion and balanced growth of international trade, and to contribute thereby to the promotion and maintenance of high levels of employment and real income and to the development of the productive resources of all members as primary objectives of economic policy. • To promote exchange stability, to maintain orderly exchange arrangements among members, and to avoid competitive exchange depreciation. • To assist in the establishment of a multilateral system of payments in respect of current transactions between members and in the elimination of foreign exchange restrictions which hamper the growth of world trade • To give confidence to members by making the general resources of the Fund temporarily available to them under adequate safeguards, thus providing them with opportunity to correct maladjustments in their balance of payments without resorting to measures destructive of national or international prosperity. • In accordance with the above, to shorten the duration and lessen the degree of disequilibrium in the international balances of payments of members 205 Only for Private Circulation
  • 206. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran IMF LENDING A core responsibility of the IMF is to provide loans to countries experiencing balance of payments problems. This financial assistance enables countries to rebuild their international reserves; stabilize their currencies; continue paying for imports; and restore conditions for strong economic growth. Unlike development banks, the IMF does not lend for specific projects. A member country may request IMF financial assistance if it has a balance of payments need—that is, if it cannot find sufficient financing on affordable terms to meet its net international payments. An IMF loan eases the adjustment policies and reforms that a country must make to correct its balance of payments problem and restore conditions for strong economic growth. An IMF loan is usually provided under an "arrangement," which stipulates the specific policies and measures a country has agreed to implement to resolve its balance of payments problem. The economic program underlying an arrangement is formulated by the country in consultation with the IMF, and is presented to the Fund's Executive Board in a "Letter of Intent." Once an arrangement is approved by the Board, the loan is released in phased installments as the program is carried out. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE: IMF technical assistance supports the development of the productive resources of member countries by helping them to effectively manage their economic policy and financial affairs. The IMF helps these countries to strengthen their capacity in both human and institutional resources, and to design appropriate macroeconomic, financial, and structural policies. 206 Only for Private Circulation
  • 207. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran ASIAN DEVELOPMENT BANK The work of the Asian Development Bank (ADB) is aimed at improving the welfare of the people in Asia and the Pacific, particularly the 1.9 billion who live on less than $2 a day. Despite many success stories, Asia and the Pacific remains home to two thirds of the world's poor. ADB is a multilateral development financial institution owned by 67 members, 48 from the region and 19 from other parts of the globe. ADB's vision is a region free of poverty. Its mission is to help its developing member countries reduce poverty and improve the quality of life of their citizens. ADB's main instruments for providing help to its developing member countries are • policy dialogue • loans • technical assistance • grants • guarantees • Equity investments. ADB's annual lending volume is typically about $6 billion, with technical assistance usually totaling about $180 million a year. INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANISATION The Convention establishing the International Maritime Organization (IMO) was adopted in Geneva in 1948 and IMO first met in 1959. IMO's main task has been to develop and maintain a comprehensive regulatory framework for shipping and its remit today includes safety, environmental concerns, legal matters, technical co-operation, maritime security and the efficiency of shipping. Specialized agency of the United Nations with 167 Member States and three Associate Members, IMO is based in the United Kingdom with around 300 international staff. 207 Only for Private Circulation
  • 208. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran MEASURES OF IMO IMO's specialized committees and sub-committees are the focus for the technical work to update existing legislation or develop and adopt new regulations, with meetings attended by maritime experts from Member Governments, together with those from interested intergovernmental and non-governmental organizations. Firstly, measures aimed at the prevention of accidents, including standards for ship design, construction, equipment, operation and manning - key treaties include SOLAS, the MARPOL convention for the prevention of pollution by ships and the STCW convention on standards of training for seafarers. Secondly measures which recognize that accidents do happen, including rules concerning distress and safety communications, the International Convention on Search and Rescue and the International Convention on Oil Pollution Preparedness, Response and Co-operation. Thirdly, there are conventions which establish compensation and liability regimes - including the International Convention on Civil Liability for Oil Pollution Damage, the convention establishing the International Fund for Compensation for Oil Pollution Damage and the Athens Convention covering liability and compensation for passengers at sea. INTERNATIONAL LABOUR ORGANISATION The International Labour Organization (ILO) is devoted to advancing opportunities for women and men to obtain decent and productive work in conditions of freedom, equity, security and human dignity. Its main aims are to promote rights at work, encourage decent employment opportunities, enhance social protection and strengthen dialogue in handling work-related issues. In promoting social justice and internationally recognized human and labour rights, the organization continues to pursue its founding 208 Only for Private Circulation
  • 209. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran mission that labour peace is essential to prosperity. Today, the ILO helps advance the creation of decent jobs and the kinds of economic and working conditions that give working people and business people a stake in lasting peace, prosperity and progress. International Telecommunication Union The ITU is a specialized agency of the United Nations and is the world's oldest international organization.25 In general, the ITU seeks "to promote, at the international level, the adoption of a broader approach to telecommunications issues in the global information economy and society."26 ITU decisions are made on a one nation, one vote basis;27 therefore, each member-nation has equal authority in the ITU decision- making process. In part due to this voting policy, developing countries view the ITU as an important organization to provide assistance and aid infrastructure development in these nations 209 Only for Private Circulation
  • 210. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 13. INTERNATIONAL LOGISTICS Logistics is defined as a “system of handling the physical movement of goods and services from the place of origin to the destination as fast as possible at a low cost and with safety and security.” Logistics provides the means for the actual transfer of goods or services from the seller to the buyer. Once a product or service has been marketed and ordered, it is necessary to employ logistics to pack, deliver and manage the items for delivery. In order to be effective, logistics must address the following issues. Distribution has always been an important and inevitable function, but it is only relatively recently that it has been recognized as a major function in its own right. The main reason for this lapse was probably been the natur4e of distribution itself. It is a function made up of many sub-function and sub- systems, each of which has been, and may still be, treated as a distinct management operation. Both the academic and the business world now accept that there is a need to understand all the operations in a global perspective in order to see how they are interrelated. Logistics primarily involves three broad areas of functions. Logistics = Supply + Materials Management + Distribution (L = S + M + D) Logistics is an art and science of determining business success. Acquiring goods, distributing and finally maintaining them to win the goodwill of the customer is the major responsibility of logistic management. Importance of Logistics Management In advanced countries a large part of the final price of a product often goes towards logistics. In the case of bulk cargoes like sulphur, Bitumen, grains, iron ore and crude, the cost of logistics is the main factor in fixing the price. Major turnkey projects, can be completed provide the right materials are supplied in the right time. During an emergency, thousands of lives may be lost if medicines do not reach in time. Therefore, logistics is the management of cost and time. Hence, the UK Institute of Logistics and Transport has defined logistics as “the positioning of resources at the right time, in the right place, at the right cost and in the right quality”. Logistics is an important activity making extensive use of human and material resources that affect the national economy. 210 Only for Private Circulation
  • 211. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran A study indicated that about 30 % of the working population in the United Kingdom is associated with work that is related to logistics. Another such study undertaken by Michigan State University in the USA and reported in the Financial Times indicated that logistics alone represented between 10 % and 15 % of the gross domestic product of most important element at 46%, followed by storage/warehousing at 22 %, inventory carrying at 20 %, and administration at 12 %. Cost of Logistics for key countries in comparison to GDP LOGISTICS COUNTRIES GDP GDP% ($M) North America Canada 585.105 70.191 12.00 Mexico 334.726 49.753 14.86 US 7576 795.265 10.50 Sub total 8495.931 915,209 10.77 Europe Belgium/Luxemburg 286.383 32.573 11.37 Denmark 174.237 22.440 12.88 France 1537.582 171.230 11.14 Germany 2353.472 306.264 13.02 Greece 122.870 15.269 12.43 Ireland 67.392 9.611 14.26 Italy 1214.272 137.027 11.28 Netherlands 392.550 44.495 11.33 Portugal 101.182 12.871 12.72 Spain 581.565 67.022 11.52 UK 1151.348 122.344 10.63 Sub total 7981.853 941.146 11.79 Asia/Pacific Hong Kong 153.068 20.992 13.71 Japan 4599.706 522.982 11.37 Korea 484.777 59.764 12.33 Singapore 94.063 13.074 13.90 Taiwan 273.440 35.686 13.05 211 Only for Private Circulation
  • 212. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Sub total 5605.072 652.498 11.64 ELEMENTS OF LOGISTICS AND DISTIBUTION 1. Storage, Warehousing and Handling of Materials Warehousing Warehouses Depots Order Processing Location of warehouses Number & Size of distribution depots Type of operations Order processing 2. Transport Transport Mode Delivery Loading Route Schedule 212 Only for Private Circulation
  • 213. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Mode of transport Type of delivery operation Load planning Route schedule 3. Inventory Inventory Product Location of Quantity of Stock stock Stock What to stock? Where to stock? 213 Only for Private Circulation
  • 214. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 4. Inventory Channel SUPPLIERS BULK DELIVERY RAW MATERIALS INVENTORY TRANSFER PRODUCTION TRANSFER WORK IN PROGRESS INVENTORY & ASSEMBLY FINISHED GOODS INVENTORY TRANSFER 214 PRIMARY Only for Private Circulation DISTRIBUTION
  • 215. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran How many intermediaries are required? How much will it cost? How long will it take to reach various centres? 5. Information and Control Information & Control Designing Procedure Forecasting System Design of systems Control procedures Forecasting 6. Packaging and Unitization 215 Only for Private Circulation
  • 216. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Packaging Unit Total Handling Packing Packaging System Unit load Protective packaging Handling systems Logistics and Interrelationship with other functions Value addition Attitude towards distribution and logistics has changed over the past two decades. For a long time the view prevailed that various elements within logistics created additional cost for companies. Although there is a cost associated with the movement and storage of goods, it is now recognised that distribution and logistics contribute to the value of a product. This is due to the fact that logistic operations provide the means by which the product reaches the consumer or end user in an appropriate condition at the required location. Dell supplies a laptop within sixty minutes in the US, from the moment order is placed. Honda Motors delivers car in Europe and North America i9n ten hours. Many mail order companies use logistics as a major weapon to win the market today. It is therefore, possible for companies to compete on the basis of providing a product either at the lowest possible cost so that the customer will by it, because it is the least expensive or at the highest possible value to the customer. Few companies may try to achieve both these objective such as Hyundai Motors, LG in rural India and Electrolux in Europe. This is particularly important today as there are many products that are not sold on the basis of their brand name alone, but also on the basis of availability or 216 Only for Private Circulation
  • 217. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran price. This applies to many food products as well as technical products such as mobile phones and personal computers. Sony, Hitachi and Samsung are very strong in adding value through low cost of distribution. The role of depots and warehouses Companies like Sony, Johnson & Johnson, Asian Paints, HP and Sansui have succeeded through establishing depots and warehouses wherever they operate. There are many reasons why depots and warehouses are required; the main reasons are given below: • To keep down production costs by allowing long productions runs, thus minimising the time spent on machine set-ups. • To match demand and requirements with production capabilities, to smoothen the flow and assist in operational efficiency. • To enable large seasonal demands to be catered for more economically. • To provide good customer service. • To allow trade off with the transport systems • To facilitate order assembly. In addition, it should be noted that there are a number of different types of depots each of which might be considered in the planning of the physical distribution structure. These might include: • Finished goods depots/ warehouses – these hold the stock from the factories. • Distribution centers which might be central, regional or national or local depots – all of these will hold stock to a greater or lesser extent. • Transshipment depots or stockless, transit or cross decking depots –by and large, these do hold stock but act as intermediate points in the distribution operations and selected orders to customers. • Seasonal stock holding depots. • Overflow depots. Asian Paints emerged as a market leader in India by setting up warehouses all over the country, which led to effective distribution. Other well-known companies like ICI, Berger, Shalimar, Nerolac etc. compete with Asian Paints. Cost relationships 217 Only for Private Circulation
  • 218. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran The major cost relationships are discussed, starting with storage and warehousing. The major cost breakdown is outlined below, with the percentage values indicating the approximate relative importance of the different factors based on conventional warehouses. Percentage I. Building costs including rent, furnishing and depreciation 24 II. Building services, such as heating and lighting 16 III. Equipment related 13 IV. Labour overheads 38 V. Management, supervision and security 9 Procurement Procurement is one of the key links in the supply chain. It can have a significant influence on the overall success of the organisation. Ensuring that there is a sufficient supply of raw materials of the required quality, at the right price, in the right place at a right time is obviously crucial to any manufacturing plant. Over the years many organizations have developed large departments to deal with the sheer weight of supplier transactions. Recently, many companies have reduced the number of suppliers in order t reduce the cost of transactions. Single entity takes the responsibility and committed to supply many product lines required by customers. In addition to supplier reduction programmes many companies have moved away from the traditional adverse relationship with suppliers. Companies practice cooperation and coexistence concept wherein the buyer is also part of supplier. This style of relationship recognizes that both the parties need to make a profit to survive. Procurement is not just about raw materials. The following goods and services also need to be acquired: 1. Utilities like gas, water, electricity and telephones 2. Fuel including diesel and petrol 3. Capital assets such as machinery, vehicles and buildings 4. Stationery 5. Consultancy services 6. Outsourced services such as distribution contracts, IT services etc. 7. IT equipment, e.g., hardware, software and support systems. Very large sums of money are involved in the above areas. Depending on the nature of business of the organization concerned, emphasis will be 218 Only for Private Circulation
  • 219. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran placed on different elements. For a transport company, fuel may represent as much as 35% of the total operating budget, but for a manufacturing plant the major costs may be running costs of the plant. These costs need to be carefully managed. TRANSPORT MODE AND CHARACTERISTICS Sea Freight There are two main container loads in sea freight namely (i) the conventional load (ii) unit load. Both are applicable in the present practice. The main features in conventional sea freight are: (i) Conventional Load Cost For some products, the most economic means of carriage remains that of conventional sea freight. This particularly applies to bulk goods like rock phosphates, boilers and transmission equipments that are being transported to large distances. Where speed of service is unimportant, the lower cost of sea-freight makes it very competitive. Flexibility: There are many liners and tramp ships available in many ports in the world. In addition to this, sailings are quite frequent making sea transport quite flexible in terms of the alternatives that are quite open. Availability: Liner services are widely advertised and extensively categorised and most types of cargo are categorised. Speed: Sea freight tends to be slow for several reasons, which include the turnaround time in the port and inefficient handling methods. This is especially true when compare to the more conventional “through transport” systems with which sea freight must compete. The problem is particularly apparent on some of the short sea routes. (ii) Unit Load (Container System) Container is a metal box having the unit 1 x 20 feet. These boxes ensure safety, security, reliability and easy mobility during transit and at the time of handling both at the port of discharge and destination. Container systems can now be viewed as a specialised mode of freight transport although the container is now a fundamental feature of all major 219 Only for Private Circulation
  • 220. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran national and international transport modes, whether rail, sea, road or air. Containers facilitate what is known as the ‘intermodel’ system of freight transport enabling the smooth movement of goods in bulk, from one transport mode to another. The main attributes of containers and containerization are as follows: • They enable a number of small packages to be consolidated into large single unit loads. • There is a reduction in the handling of goods as they are distributed from the point of origin to the point of destination. • There is a reduction in individual packaging requirements, depending on the load within the container. • There is a reduction in damage to products caused by other cargo. • Insurance charges are lower due to the damage potential is reduced. • Handling costs at the docks and other modal interfaces are reduced. • Turnaround time is faster for all types of transport used. Port utilization also improves. • The all round delivery time is faster and hence service levels are better. • Documentation is much simpler – this applies to both company and custom documentation. • The concept of ‘through transit’ become feasible and allows a truly integrated transport system to be developed. • The systems that were developed in the early days of containerisation, have been integrated across the different modes. This has considerably improved transportation in recent years. • There is a need for special facilities and handling equipment, which are expensive. Thus, only a limited number of transfer points are feasible. • The initial cost of the containers is quite high. • Trade is seldom evenly balanced. Very often return loads may not be available and so the cost increases. • Containers may leak, thereby causing damage due to rain or sea water. • Loads may be affected by the position in which they are stowed, e.g., above or below deck. Sea freight container details Container Outside Dimensions Type 6.045m 20’ day 2.438m 2.438m 220 Only for Private Circulation
  • 221. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 6.045m 20’ dry 2.438m high cube 2.591m 6.045m 20’ 2.438m refrigerated 2.438m 6.045m 20’ open top 2.438m 2.438m 6.045m 20’ flat rack 2.438m 2.438m 6.045m 20’ open side/top 2.438m 2.438m 12.192m 40’ dry 2.438m 2.591m 12.192m 40’ dry high cue 2.438m 2.896m 12.192m 40’reefer 2.438m 2.743m 12.192m 40’ reefer high cube 2.438m 2.743m 12.192m 40’ open top 2.438m 2.438m 13.716m 45’ dry high cube 2.436m 2.896m Storage System Ways to classifying storage systems are given below: • Bulk storage for solids such as silos, bunkers and stockpiles. • Loose items storage, e.g. casting and fabrications held loose on the floor. 221 Only for Private Circulation
  • 222. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran • Pallet storage systems • Small item storage for individual items or small unit loads. • Non-standard unit loads such as loads. Stock Location The location of stock within a store is an important aspect of stock management and can be considered at different levels. For example, the placement of stock within a warehouse will affect the effort required to move material in and out of the warehouse. I twill also affect the efficiency of selecting orders, as this depends on the distance employees have to travel to get the required stock. At another level, it is important to locate certain stocks so that they can be easily lifted and handled by the operator. For example, items that have to be lifted mechanically should be stored at ground level for lifting and using material handling equipments. Fast moving product lines that have to be accessed frequently located at a level for optimum operator arm movement, i.e. neither too high or too low. 222 Only for Private Circulation
  • 223. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 14. INTERNATIONAL TRADE THEORIES To build a large mansion and an action plan, a strong foundation is a prerequisite. To establish a large international business, conceptual base is important. Trade theories and their impact in every aspect of operation are widely viewed as major inputs by organizations around the world. Learning Value: On going through this chapter the reader will learn: 1. Importance of trade theories in the economy 2. Classical theories and their implications 3. Competitive advantages of nations Their limitations in globalised era International Trade Theories Many renowned economists have carried out considerable research on scale of economies, productivity of the work force and advantages of resources, which certain countries are endowed with. The theories formulated by them were accepted by the contemporary economies. European industrialization, the emergence of the United State as a major power and rapid colonisation were the three major international developments during the era of classical economic theories. Today, these factors have lost their relevance. The revolution taking place in communications, transportation and banking makes every country resourceful if they formulate proactive policies. The diminishing importance of borders between countries has enabled many entrepreneurs to shift their manufacturing base anywhere in the world, invest their money in safe destinations and explore the resources at any point of time. Therefore, the theories of absolute advantage, comparative advantage are not really applicable in current international business operations. 223 Only for Private Circulation
  • 224. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran However, it is important to understand, interpret and modify these concepts and apply them to current practices in business, especially the functions of labour productivity, resource exploration and demand forecasting. THE THEORY OF ABSOLUTE ADVANTAGE The classical theories of international trade that were propounded by Adam Smith, David Ricardo, John Stuart Mill and others were based mainly on differences in the cost of labour between different nations. Among the classical theories, the most discussed theory was the theory of ‘Absolute Advantages’ put forward by Adam Smith, which was widely accepted and relevant during his contemporary era. Adam Smith was a champion of free trade and he claimed that free trade always leads to better division of labour and thereby encourages specialization both in national and international markets. He advocated that every country is specialized in certain production function and ultimately will be able to enjoy the benefits. Countries can exchange the products they produce at a lower cost with each other. He remarked that, “it is the wise decision of every prudent master never to make goods at home, which will cost him more, but to buy them, which is cheaper”. For example a cobbler does not attempt to make his own shoe, but he buys them from the shoemaker and vice versa. An individual select the occupation for which he thinks himself best fitted. Similarly, every country tries to specialise in the production of those commodities, in which it enjoys greater advantages e.g, Malta produces glass. China produces soft toys, South Korea produces synthetic fibres, and India produces metal ware and Myanmar produces good quality timber, The theory of absolute advantage can be explained with the help of an example, consider two countries A and B, each in which produces two different types of goods, namely X and Y. With one unit of labour, country A can produce either 20 units of commodity X or 10 units of commodity Y. On the other hand, with one unit of labour, country B can produce either 10 units of X or 20 units of Y. This clearly shows that country A has an absolute advantage in the production of goods of the type X and country B has an absolute advantage in the production of goods of the type Y. In this case, trade between countries A and B will be mutually beneficial, as with two units of labour, A can produce 40 units of X and B can produce 40 units of Y, i.e 80 units of X and Y between them. On the other hand without international trade, they can produce only 60 units of X and Y between them with the same amount of labour. Thus country A should specialize in the 224 Only for Private Circulation
  • 225. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran production of X by using all the available labour, which country B should devote its labour for the production of commodity Y. In China one unit of labour produce three soft toys per day, whereas, in India, one unit of labour can produce only 1.5 soft toys per day, At the same time one unit of labour in India cuts and polishes 10 carats of diamond a day whereas in China it is possible to achieve only 6 six carats a day with the same amount of labour. In the above example the main factor is labour, In today’s era of inventions and innovations, automation, outsourcing and cost reduction, and mass production, the theory of absolute advantages does not have much relevance. The major drawback of the theory of absolute advantage is that it fails to explain the fact that even less developed countries, which have no real absolute advantage in any commodity are engaged in the export of goods. The limitations and shortcomings of this theory are given below: 1. It has not advocated quality, premium and brand aspects of a product. 2. It has restricted itself only to considering the maximum to labour force. 3. It has failed to take into account the fact that many cost reduction techniques are adopted in mass production. 4. There are many duties applicable when goods enter into other countries, which have not been accounted for. 5. The nature of the commodity may incur huge transportation costs, which may be even greater than the cost of the labour. The theory of international trade, based on absolute cost difference is not fully applicable in the current century, although it was an acceptable concept during the period when industrialization was catching up in Europe during the time of Adam Smith. Another theory, the theory of comparative cost advantage was therefore evolved as the basis for international trade. THE THEORY OF COMPARATIVE COST ADVANTAGE It was David Ricardo, one of the prominent classical economists, who propounded the theory of comparative cost advantage or the theory of comparative advantage. He argued that it was the comparative difference in cost that led to trade between two nations. According to him, each country would specialize in the production of a commodity in which it has a comparative advantage in cost. The country should export these 225 Only for Private Circulation
  • 226. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran commodities and import those commodities that it produces at a higher comparative cost. The theory of comparative advantage is based on certain underlined assumptions given below: a) There should be two countries that produce the same two commodities. b) Labour is the only factor applied in production. It is assumed that the supply of labour is given and fixed. Also, the labour force is assumed to be homogeneous. c) Cost of labour, i.e, wages determine the price. d) Production is subject to the law of constant returns. e) There is no change in taste and preference of the people. f) No change in technology in expected. g) Factors of production are perfectly mobile within two countries but are not freely mobile between the countries. h) There is no transportation cost. i) There is full employment of factors in both the countries. j) There is homogeneity in consumption, buying behaviour and affordability. Based on the above assumption, Ricardo showed that two countries could indulge in trade even when one of them has an absolute advantage in production of one of the two commodities vis-à-vis the other country. Ricardo explained the theory of comparative advantage with the help of the example given below. Suppose the two countries viz. England and Portugal produce two different types of goods say wine and cloth, whose labour costs in terms of man hours required for unit of production are as follows: Country Wine Cloth England 120 100 Portugal 80 90 It is very clear from the table that Portugal has to expand less labour as compared to England in the production of both the commodities. Thus Portugal has an absolute cost advantage in both the goods while England has an absolute cost disadvantage in both of them. But Portugal would benefit by producing wine and exporting it to England in return for cloth as it has a comparative advantage in the production of wine. This is due to the fact that the relative cost of producing a unit of wine (80/120), is less than the relative cost of producing a unit of cloth (90/100). On the other hand, England has 226 Only for Private Circulation
  • 227. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran the least comparative disadvantage in the production of cloth, whose relative cost (100/90) is less than relative cost of wine (120/80). Thus Portugal should concentrate more on the production of wine whereas England should concentrate on cloth, thus benefiting both countries. Ricardo explained the principle of comparative cost in international trade, but did not explain the determination of the terms of trade i.e. the rate at which one commodity will be exchanged for the other. Since the ration of exchange, say wine for cloth would be the same for both the countries after they enter into trade, it must be somewhere between domestic exchange ratios of the two goods within each country. Since wine is costlier in England than cloth, as it takes more Labour to produce wine than cloth, the exchange ratio in England would be 1 unit of wine = 120/100 = 1.2 units of cloth. On the other hand, cloth is costlier in Portugal as it takes more labour to produce cloth than wine. The exchange ratio would be 1 unit wine = 80/90 = 0.89 units of cloth. So the international rate of exchange of wine for cloth would thus be settled somewhere between 1 unit of wine = 1.2 units and 0.89 units of cloth. Assuming that the rate is established at 1 unit of cloth = 1 unit of wine, England would gain because at home the ratio was 1.2 units of cloth for 1 unit of wine. Portugal would also gain because at home it could produce only 0.89 units of cloth for 1 unit of wine. Thus, with international trade both the countries will benefit. On the same lines Spain produces chicken and Chile produces wine at lower cost; Australia produces wool made ups and Singapore produces edible oil at relatively low cost; Malaysia produces rubber products at a low cost compared to knit wear, which Indonesia produces at a lower cost compared to rubber. In the latter case both countries are situated close to each other and hence it would be a distinct advantage for Malaysia to focus on rubber and supply it to Indonesia and for Indonesia to focus on knit wear and export it to Malaysia. An important implication of theory of comparative cost is based on the principle of complete specialization. According to above example, England should specialize in the production of cloth and Portugal in the production of wine. Each country would produce only goods in which it has a comparative advantage and trade the surplus of production with other countries. The underlying basis of complete specialization is that the comparative advantage is permanent, irrespective of the scale of production in both countries- Ricardo assumes the production is subject to the law of constant returns i.e. the cost per unit of output would remain the same whatever be the scale of production. He also assumes that a permanent supply of raw material and other consumables associated with the product are available, 227 Only for Private Circulation
  • 228. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran e.g., if wine is to be produced, grapes should be available all the times with no price fluctuations. Obviously, this cannot be the case and the availability of raw material (in this case grape) would affect the cost of the end product. This aspect of the theory has been criticised as the comparative advantage may only exist for a given range of production, sooner or later the law of increasing costs will come in to operation and the advantage may turn in to a disadvantage. Hence, countries do not specialize completely and specialization also changes in many countries due to multifarious reasons. The major limitations of the theory are as follows: 1. Theory of comparative advantage is based on the value of the labour. It considers labour as the only factor of production and assumes that all labour is homogeneous. However, labour does not alone produce goods; there are other factors, such as availability of raw materials that have been ignored. Further, labour units are not homogeneous as there are different grades such as skilled, unskilled, semi skilled, efficient, less efficient etc. hence the whole theory is unrealistic. 2. The assumption that labour is used in same fixed proportions in production of both the goods in both the countries is too simplistic. In fact, labour is used in varying conditions in producing different goods, as some goods are more labour intensive than others, e.g., cotton becomes yarn, yarn becomes grey; grey becomes fabric and fabric is turned in to garments. It is difficult to verify the cost of labour at each stage. 3. The theory assumes constant labour costs even output of goods increases due to specialization under international trade. But in reality the cost may either increase or decrease as a greater quantity of goods are produced in the wake of trade. If costs decline with increased production, comparative advantage will be larger and vice versa. The theory does not takes in to account these changes in costs. 4. Ricardian theory is based on the assumption that factors of production are mobile within the country but are immobile internationally. The theory advocates uniform wages in a particular country. Practically, however wages differ between one region and another in the same country and between one industry and another within the same country. Within the country, wages are very high in urban areas and lower in the interior areas. In USA, India and Australia, local transportation costs are than freight rates to neighbouring countries. These costs are not considered in the Ricardian theory. 228 Only for Private Circulation
  • 229. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 5. The theory is one sided as it considers only the production costs, i.e., only the supply side. The demand factors that affect the price of goods and through them the prices of the factors of production are not taken in to account. This negligence of demand factors renders the theory incomplete and liable to providing wrong conclusions. However, in spite of these weaknesses, Ricardo’s theory of comparative advantage is accepted as the basis of international trade. This is due to the fact that the theory provides a sound rationale for exchange of goods between two trading nations. Improvements have no doubt been made in the theory, but these mainly related to the factors that give rise to comparative advantage. The basic principle of trade viz, that a country should export goods in which it has comparative advantages and import those goods where its comparative advantage is the least, still holds good. MODERN THEORY OF INTERNATIONAL TRADE: THE HECKSCHER-OHILIN THEORY The classical theory of comparative advantage was based on a model where labour was the only factor considered in production and differences in labour productivity were regarded as the cause for differences in comparative cost and international trade. In 1993, Heckscher and Ohilin took the Ricardian model and conceptualized further by thinking the source of a country’s comparative advantage through the endowment of its factors of production. It was Eli-Heckscher who put forward the idea that international trade results from the fact that different countries have different factor endowments i.e., a few countries have more capital than labour while others have more labour than capital. These differences in factor endowments are the cause of comparative cost differences. Bertil Ohilin further refined this theory and formulated what are known as the ‘general equilibrium theory’, ‘factor proportion theory’, which is commonly known as the ‘modern theory of international trade’. The theory states that the production patterns and trade among various countries are determined by the difference in factor endowments. The country that has abundant capital will produce and export capital intensive goods, and the countries with abundant supply of labour will produce and export labour intensive commodities. The main cause of differences in relative availability of factors of production or the difference in factor endowments. 229 Only for Private Circulation
  • 230. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Assumptions of Heckscher-Ohilin Theory 1. The theory is based on a 2 × 2 × 2 model. It takes in to consideration that there are two countries, two commodities and two factors of production. 2. Transport costs or other impediments to trade are not taken in to account. This assumption applies that the prices of commodities under trade will be the same in both the countries. 3. The Theory assumes the existence of perfect competition in both the commodity and factor markets. This implies that both capital and labour are perfectly mobile in respective country, and would move from low paying industries in to high paying ones. Perfect competition in the commodity market implies that neither a monopolistic nor oligopolistic environment prevails. 4. All production factors are homogeneous in degree, specially it expects returns to scale in production of each commodity in each country. For example a 10 percent increase in factor inputs in each industry results in exactly 10 percent output in that industry. 5. The production functions are such that the two commodities show different factor intensities. This means that different combinations of factors or production techniques are used in different industries. The goods ‘Y’ may be capital intensive while the goods ‘X’ may be labour intensive. Goods that are labour intensive will always remain labour intensive irrespective of relative changes in the price of labour. 6. The production function differs between two commodities but nevertheless remain same in both the countries. Thus the production techniques and factors intensity used in producing goods ‘Y’ in country A is the same as that is used in producing goods ‘X’ in country B. the same is true about production function for goods ‘X’ in country A and B. This implies that the best available techniques are known to both the countries and are used in the price of labour. 7. The theory assumes that full employment resources exists in both the countries so that production takes place on the same point on the production possibility curve and not somewhere below it. 8. It also assumes that preferences and technology levels do not change. Practically, technology has become accessible to anyone both indigenous and internationally. Germany, Japan and USA have proved their high levels of technology in medical equipments, entertainment electronics and chemicals & drugs respectively. Today, productivity is 230 Only for Private Circulation
  • 231. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran directly proportionate to technology. Based upon these assumptions, the Heckscher-Ohilin theory demonstrates the proposition that capital rich countries export capital intensive goods and labour rich countries export labour intensive goods. There are two alternative ways of defining whether a country is capital or labour intensive. The first way, known as capital abundance is based on factor prices and states that a country A is capital rich as compared to country B if capital is relatively cheaper in country A than in country B. Thus the abundance or scarcity of a factor is identified on the basis of factor price. The second way compares the overall physical amount of labour and capital in two countries. For example, country A is said to be capital rich if ratio of capital to labour is larger the ratio in country B. Logically, country B will be labour rich if its ratio of labour to capital is larger than in country A. a. Capital abundance – based on factor price ratio orientation; According to the criterion of factor price, country A is abundant in capital compared to country B if, PAK < PBK where; PAL PBL PAK – price of capital in country A PAL – price of labour in country A PBK – price of labour in country B PBL – price of labour in country B The above equation shows that capital is relatively cheap in country A and labour is relatively cheap in country B. Hence we can say that country A is a capital rich and country B is a labour rich one. According to the Heckscher-Ohilin theory, the capital rich country A would export capital intensive goods and labour rich country B would export labour intensive goods. This proposition can be explained by following diagram; 231 Only for Private Circulation
  • 232. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Y Y A B C E A R X1 P C A Y P F C I T Y G X K H M O S Q L N A C B X LABOUR In the figure, we have two isoquants YY and XX showing the production of one unit each of goods ‘Y’ and goods ‘X’ in each one of the two countries. These isoquants are common to both countries showing that production functions are same in both countries. According to these isoquants, goods ‘Y’ are capital intensive and goods ‘X’ are labour intensive. Country A is rich in capital and hence capital here is cheaper relative to labour, which is shown by the relative factor price line AA. On the other hand, country B is labour rich and hence the relative price of labour is low, a fact shown by the relatively flatter factor price line BB. 232 Only for Private Circulation
  • 233. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Consider country A whose factor price line AA is tangential to the isoquant YY at the point E. Since the isoquant YY represents one unit of goods ‘Y’, we find that in country A, one unit of goods ‘Y’ can be produced with OR of capital and OS of labour, the factor price ration line shows the rate at which one factor can be exchanged for the other. Thus on the factor price line AA, with points A and E being on the same line, OS of labour is worth RA of capital and OR of capital is worth SA of labour. As we have seen, the cost of producing one unit of goods ‘Y’ is equal to OR of capital plus OS of labour. It is found that OS of labour, we find that the cost of producing one unit of goods ‘Y’ is equal to OR of labour SA of labour which has been substituted for OR of capital which is equal to OA of labour. By the same reasoning, the cost of producing one unit of goods ‘X’ in country A is OK of capital plus KA of capital (because OL of labour is worth KA of capital) and hence equal to OA of capital. In terms of labour alone, this cost is equal to OL of labour plus LA of labour (because OK of capital is worth LA of labour) and hence equals OA of labour. Now, let us examine the cost of producing one unit of both types of goods in country B. Since country B is labour rich and therefore labour is relatively cheaper here, the factor price ratio line BB is flatter than AA. This price line BB is tangential to the isoquant YY at the point F. This shows that the cost of producing one unit of ‘X’ in country B in terms of capital alone. To find this we draw a price line CC parallel to and below the price line BB in such a way that it is tangential to the isoquant XX at point the H. The price line CC represents the same factor price ratio as the line BB as the two are parallel. At point H the cost of producing one unit of ‘X’ in country B is OM of capital plus ON of labour. Since on this price line CC, ON of labour corresponds to MC of capital, the price of one unit of ‘X’ is equal to OC of capital in country B. Thus, in country B the cost of producing one unit ‘Y’ is OB in terms of capital while for ‘X’ it is OC in capital alone. Hence in country B it is more expensive to produce ‘Y’ than to product ‘X’ in the same quantities as OV>OC. The above analysis shows that country B has a cost advantage in production of ‘X’ and it is relatively cheaper to produce ‘Y’ in country A. This fact establishes the Heckscher-Ohilin theory, that a country abundant in capita will export capital intensive goods and a country abundant in labour will export the labour intensive goods. One of the major drawbacks of this analysis is that it defines factor abundance in terms of factor prices. This is not free from flaws due to the fact that factor prices do not depend on abundance or scarcity of factor supplies alone, but they are also influenced by demand factors. It is 233 Only for Private Circulation
  • 234. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran therefore, not possible to say anything about factor prices on the basis of factor endowments alone. It would thus be more fruitful to study factor abundance in terms of physical amounts of the factors available in two countries. b) Suppose country A has more capital than labour, and country B has more labour than capital. Taking into consideration the differences in factor endowments, we can draw a production possibility curve of these two countries (AA1 of country A and BB1 of country B) with respect to the goods ‘X’ and ‘Y’ of which ‘X’ is labour intensive and ‘Y’ is capital intensive. This is shown in the following diagram. Y R P1 A P1 YB S1 S O X A1 P1 P2 Y The resources endowment in county A is such that with the given total resources of labour and capital, it can produce more of capital intensive goods of ‘Y’ over ‘X’. Similarly, country B can produce more of labour 234 Only for Private Circulation
  • 235. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran intensive goods ‘X’ than capital intensive goods ‘Y’ and thus has an advantage in the production of ‘X’. The production possibility curve AA1, of country A shows relative abundance of capital while the production possibility curve BB1 of country B shows relative abundance of labour. Thus country A will have a bias towards the production of capital intensive goods ‘Y’ while country B will be more inclined to produce labour intensive goods ‘X’. The nature of this bias is illustrated in the diagram. If both countries produce both the goods in the same proportion, it will be represented by the ray OR. The production of country A will be represented by the point S while that of country B will be represented by point S’ on their respective production possibility curves. The slope of country A’s production possibility curve at S’ is steeper than the tangent P1P1 than the slope of the production possibility curve of country B at point S shown by the tangent P2P2. This implied that good Y is cheaper in country A than in country B and that good X is cheaper in country B than in country A. As it is clear from the respective price lines P1P1 and P2P2, the operating cost of expanding production of goods Y is lower in country A than country B and vice-versa for good X. This shows that the capital rich country A has a bias in favour of capital intensive goods Y and the labour abundant country B has a bias in favour of prevailing Labour intensive goods X. Comparison of Ricardian and Factor Endowment Trade Models Ricardian Heckscher-Ohilin Two factor model One factor model (labour) (labour and capital) Comparative advantages on the basis Comparative advantage is of production conditions along with determined by the production the market demand pattern of goods, condition alone and it leads to because the price determined the export. demand for goods may not always lead to export Heckscher-Ohilin theory regards Classical theory of international international trade as arising from trade is totally different from internal differences in factor endowments and trade and hence requires a separate deals with it specific to international theory to explain the causes the trade trade Ricardian theory does not take factor More realistic theory as it is based on 235 Only for Private Circulation
  • 236. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran prices in to account. It takes the price relative factor prices, which of goods as being determined by the influence the relative prices of goods. production condition alone It takes no note of production factor It assumes a linear homogeneous in the two countries production function of one degree PURCHASING POWE PARITY AND IPACT ON TRADE The estimates of per capita income in various countries are not strictly comparable because they are based on conversion of per capita income of a country as measured in its local standard money unit (the rupee in India) to a common currency denominator (US $ in this case), the conversion being based on the official exchange rates. The official exchange rates do not reflect the purchasing power of different countries in their respective counties. Thus, India may have had a low per capita income e.g., US $ 420 in 2002 can buy in the USA due to relatively lower prices in India. Hence, the comparison of national and per capita incomes do not reflect the true value or purchasing power or command over goods and services in their respective countries. A change in exchange rate will also change the per capita income of a country as expressed in foreign currency. For example, when India devalued its currency against the US dollar, even when there was no change in the economy. This is illustrated by the following example: In India in 1990: INR 21 = US $1 After devaluation in march-April 1992: INR 29 = US $1 After 10 years, in 2002: INR 46 = US $1 After 5 years in 2007: INR 40 = US $ 1 The practice of devaluation and depreciation of local currency against the US $ was very common in all developing countries and less developed nations, over the past two decades. Surprisingly, for the first time, Indian rupee is appreciating against dollar in 2007. The competitive advantage of Nations 236 Only for Private Circulation
  • 237. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Competition is a challenge posed by any goods or service with equal or extra benefits, which cause the company or country to lose its share of business. Competition may come from the home country, host country or a third country. It may come from the same range of products or through outstanding technology or cost effective substitutes. Many companies devote considerable time and energy facing or managing competitors. As far as nations are concerned, they consolidate their resources and move ahead, withstanding competitors and prospering in international trade. To prove such consolidating forces Michael Porter developed a model, which was applicable during the second half of twentieth century. He conducted a comprehensive study of ten nations to learn about the factors that lead to success and the “five forces” influencing strategy. None of the five forces were new and were in fact known to people around the world. Porter advocated the conversion of these five forces in to a main competitive force that would enable a country to succeed in world trade. By ‘success’ he means that a country should be the centre of production for a particular item. This implies that for a given quality of goods, production costs must be the lowest. However, he does not believe low production costs are solely due to comparative advantage. Sustaining comparative advantage depends on the ability to produce more with a given level of inputs. This in turn is based on innovation and upgrading of products, production processes and management. Forces influencing Competitiveness This model determines the competitive environment as being determined by the following forces: 1. The power of buyers, and how much leverage they have in determining the price. 2. The power of suppliers, and the competition among suppliers which determines the price of inputs to the firm. 3. The threat from potential new entrants in to the industry i.e. the degree of market contestability. 4. The threat from substitute products. 5. The degree of competition (rivalry) in the industry. Porter’s Diamond – Four Determinants of National Competitive Advantage 237 Only for Private Circulation
  • 238. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 1. Factor conditions: The basic factors are labour, land, natural resources, capital and infrastructure. Porter argues that advance factors including communications, infrastructure, sophisticated and skilled labour, research facilities and technological know how are created and most important for competitive advantage. 2. Demand conditions: The character of the home market demand shapes the way in which a company responds to the needs of the buyer. Nations can gain competitive advantage if sophisticated and demanding buyers provide a clear picture of buyer needs and demand innovations and product improvement. 3. Related and supporting industries: The existence or absence of internationally competitive suppliers. Their existence provides: a. Lower transportation costs b. Lower communication costs c. Firm strategy, structure and rivalry 4. Inferences: No single management system is universally appropriate. Domestic Competition spurs innovation. The diamond as a system: The points on the demand constitute a system and are self re-in forcing. 1. Domestic rivalry stimulates the production of specialized intermediate goods. Suppliers of these goods can grow and realize economies of scale, and may become potential competitors of the firms they supply. They will enhance inter-firm rivalry. 2. Domestic rivalry also leads to specialized pools of labour, e.g., computer scientists in Silicon Valley. 3. Keen domestic competition leads to more sophisticated consumers who come to expect innovation and up gradation. It facilitates the development of supplier industries. The diamond promotes geographic clusters of competitive industries. 4. This leads to localized industries with numerous final goods producers, supporting firms and specialized labour. Positive feedback flows throughout. How the Diamond Works: the Italian ceramic industry 238 Only for Private Circulation
  • 239. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Italian producers located near the small town of Sassuolo accounted for 30% of the total world production of ceramic tiles and 60% of their exports, constituting an industry of US $ 10 billion. Rebuilding and reconstruction activities after World War II led to a strong demand for tiles, especially in Italy as they were well suited to the climate and taste of the people. This led to the following steps: 1. A local pool of trained workers; engineers, designers, technician and maintenance workers etc, was formed. 2. Companies producing kilns and presses were started to replace imported items with local products. This was facilitated by the local need to modify imported equipments. 3. Retail outlets and specialized showrooms were established throughout Europe. 4. The Italian market was the most sophisticated due to familiarity with the product. This led to demand for better products by the customers. 5. Intense rivalry was fueled by geographic proximity. 6. Disadvantages in labour costs led to continuous process, production and automation. 7. Exports were facilitated by the existence of an industry association that promoted the product abroad. Advertising by the individual companies also promoted a positive image. The same kind of competitiveness can be seen in the following countries with respect to specific products: 1. Cut flowers – Netherlands 2. IT – India 3. Soft Toys and ceramics – China 4. Rubber products – Malaysia 5. Glasses – Malta Implications for business 1. Locations Implications: One direct implication is that firms should concentrate production in the country with the best diamond in the industry. This seems to rule out geographic separation of assembly and manufacture of parts, (the diamond works when these two ‘points’ are in same country). However, Porter acknowledges that a 239 Only for Private Circulation
  • 240. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran firm may want to source some materials and some components overseas. 2. First mover advantages: There are a number of advantages associated with early entry in to an industry. The firm that enters first are likely to gain customers loyalty and access to distribution channels. Moreover, first mover may enjoy economies of scale. To the extent that diamond is mutually reinforcing, early advantages might snowball. Implications for the government 1. An early lead in an industry is reinforced through the dynamics of the diamond. 2. The government should also focus on creating specialized factors such as education, apprenticeship, promotion, support for basic research, high quality infrastructure etc. 3. The government should limit direct cooperation among industry rivals. A recent trend is cooperative research ventures. While these may provide benefits for developing broad-based technology on a limited basis, they will blunt the motivational force of strong rivalry. 4. The government should enforce strong domestic snit-trust policies. While strategic alliances and mergers have become popular, they undermine vigorous competition. If we supply this model to the Indian automobile industry, IT industry, gem and jewellery industry, we will see the current advantages and the decisions necessary to be taken, for them to have a competitive edge over their competitors in the world. 240 Only for Private Circulation
  • 241. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Firm Strategy, Structure and Rivalry Factor Demand Conditions Conditions Related and Supporting Industries PURCHASING POWER PARITY The PPP was formulated by Gustan Cassel in the year 1920, when inflation was high. It represents a synthesis of the work done by economists like David Ricardo, Wheatley and Henry Thorton in the nineteenth century. The theory puts forward the idea that when currencies are exchanged among nations, their purchasing power is only transferred. This means that we should be able to buy the same amount of goods in either country, when expressed in either country’s currency because people value currencies for what they pay. The theory suggests that the principle determinant of exchange rate is the difference in National Inflation Rates. This means, a country, where costs and prices are relatively less than other country will find its currency appreciating. The sole focus on inflation differentials among countries is the dominant factor that explains the movements in the exchange rates and also indicates why the spot rate is what it is at a given point of time. The law of one price is usually the basis to interpret the theory. According to this law, after making allowances for tariff and transport costs, the price of 241 Only for Private Circulation
  • 242. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran the goods in one country should not significantly differ from that in another country. Mathematically, this can be expressed as: P = e.P* -------------- (1) Where, P is the price of a product in the domestic country. P* is the price of the same product in foreign country. E is the domestic currency price of the foreign currency. Thus if an item costs USD 1 in USA and its price in India is Rs. 45.50 then thus the exchange rate is 45.50 to USD 1. Equation (1) can be written as e = P/P* Further if P and P* can be interpreted as the domestic and foreign index, representing the respective inflation figures; the exchange rate becomes a ratio of the (relative) price level (or inflation rates) in the two countries. An important application of the PPP theory is that the nominal exchange rate must be adjusted significantly and sufficiently so as to reflect/compensate the underlying inflation difference. Once this happens, the international competitiveness of any country’s product in the world market shall be maintained. Thus the PPP theory tries to restore the real exchange rate, which is relevant for international business. Foreign Price Index Real Exchange Rate (R) = Nominal Exchange Rate × Domectic Price Index The above equation is explained with following numerical example: Suppose the nominal exchange rate is Rs. 40= USD 1, the foreign price index is 100 and the Indian domestic price index increase to 110 due to inflation. If the Indian authorities fail to adjust the nominal exchange rate what happens to the Real Exchange Rate (R)? 242 Only for Private Circulation
  • 243. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran R= 44 ×100 = Rs. 40 110 The real exchange rate thus appreciates to Rs. 40 although the nominal exchange rate is Rs. 44/USD. This will adversely affect the exporter’s ability to compete globally due to the fact that is a U.S. buyer pays US$ 1 for a product, the Indian exporter will get Rs.44 due to nominal exchange rate, which is worth only Rs.40 in real terms because of the effect of inflation in India. The supporters of PPP theory insist that the nominal exchange rate should be depreciated by 10% [the difference between Rs.44 and Rs.40] and the nominal exchange rate should be depreciated by 10% to Rs.48.40 per US$ so as to restore the old exchange rate; in which case R will become: R = 48.40 x 100 = Rs.44 which is the odd nominal exchange rate 110 prior to inflation Thus if nominal exchange rate is adjusted to inflation differentials then the exchange rate will be constant in terms of purchasing power. The essence of theory is that one must export to a country whose inflation rate is higher than the domestic rate. In the case of imports the strategy should be reversed as nominal exchange rates are not adjusted on a real time basis. However the PPP theory does not take into account actual practice factors such as current account performance, portfolio decisions, interest rates, economic growth, and the central bank’s intervention, which have an effect on the variations in exchange rates. Thus relative price level differences alone cannot explain exchange rate movements exhaustively. Further, the law of one price which is the basis of PPP theory has also been empirically challenged by absolute advantage theory and Factor Endowment theory. Studies have shown that there are significant and persistent differences among the relative prices of narrowly defined domestic and foreign manufactured products. 243 Only for Private Circulation
  • 244. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran The floating exchange rate regime of 1970s and 1980s clearly showed that exchange rates over short periods depend significantly on asset market considerations rather than price movements. The other issues associated with PPP theory are those of index numbers, inconsistency in the basket of products considered for inflation calculations and the weight age procedures adopted. However the theory holds well in long run. Empirically when prices gets affected by a large number of variables the exchange rate may overshoot the value postulated by the PPP theory. Thus, there is more to exchange rates than what is stated in PPP theory. The deviations of exchange rates from those postulated by the theory are fairly persistent in countries with unstable monetary policies. The PPP theory plays a significant role in describing exchange rates in the long run or when inflationary forces are significant. Whether or not the PPP theory provides a tool to determine real exchange rate or prices in international markets is a moot point that continues to be debated. This is the reason why the PPP theory failed to explain volatility of exchange rates, which was a prominent feature of the floating rate experience during late 1990s. Current account performance and the monetary aspect of exchange rates are a simplified approach to study exchange rate variations. The view put forward by Keynesian Balance of Payment (BOP); dominate analysis during the 1950s because capital movements were minimal. The influence of asset markets and portfolio preferences of investors plays an important role in the present context of exchange rate determination and the PPP theory only supports the exchange rate variations in long run. THEORY OF PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE Theory of international product life cycle propounded by Raymond Vernon emphasizes that every product has to pass through different stages. Conceptually, the life cycle consists of four stages- introduction, growth, maturity and decline. 244 Only for Private Circulation
  • 245. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran To understand the concept very clearly the international product life cycle starts from the location where the products originates. The introduction stage is marked by innovation. Innovation is an outcome of research and development. According to product life cycle theory, the production location for a specific product moves from one country to another at different stages. Generally, the life cycle movement starts from advanced countries where considerable amount is spent for research and development. Many occasions failures may occur. Still they pursue innovation. Out of ten innovations, two may be commercially viable for which they do not hesitate to spend money other eight innovations. 1. Introductory Stage New products are generally developed after observation of demand, utility and benefits a group of a group of customers enjoy in a given market. It is a normal practice that Japanese company develops a new product for Japanese market first and US Company develops a product for US market first. The Research and Development group creates a new product and predominantly the company concentrates on the domestic market and gradually starts export to other countries. By way of getting constant market feed back the company modifies or alters or adds new features to match international markets. Importance of innovation and decision of locations Over the past 50 years all the new products have been developed either in US or in Europe or in Japan. The industrialized countries are having advantage of research, technological infrastructure, and manpower. Companies like Merck, Siemens, Sony, Honda motors, General motors, Matsushita allotted huge funds for such development. Those companies are capable of taking the risk on new product development in anticipation of long term gainful results. Innovations are taking place in such companies on continuous basis. Few companies concentrate more on technological innovative products. Few companies are making improvements in the existing products. Few companies modify methods of manufacturing and process. Even though the debate is going on that developing countries and less developed countries have lacunae in research capabilities currently innumerable innovations are taking place in developing and less developed countries also. In future, the industrialized countries will locate innovation centers or R&D intensive operations in developing countries. Movement of labour and products 245 Only for Private Circulation
  • 246. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran In the first stage of the product life cycle a minimum percentage of the total production may be exported. Labors intensive items are not standardized in the initial stage. Rapid change in the production process may not take place. Obviously, production with standardization will be a Herculean task. At the same time, since cost of production is not known to the customer, there is a possibility of adding comfortable margins. For example, entertainment electronic items innovated by Sony made a windfall gain right from the beginning. Dell is enjoying the same kind of benefits for its laptops. The major challenge in this stage is to educate and enhance the skill levels of labors force until the standardization is achieved. Once the labors force is trained and competitive, the organization can perform well. 2. Growth stage Growth stage has few salient features: 1. It increases in export to many countries by which the company generates huge revenue. 2. More competitive forces crop up from a country by innovation, country of entry and any other third country. 3. The organization becomes high capital intensive. 4. The innovator resorts to foreign production units in order to bring down the cost and come closer to customer. Since the customers are aware of the products and the demand is likely to grow substantially, setting up manufacturing units become inevitable. While Sony products have huge demand in South East Asia and Middle East, the company started manufacturing products in Malaysia. Hewlett Packard started setting up units in South East Asia due to rapid growth in sales in the whole region. The innovating company will increase its quantum of exports and is prepared to incur small loss in the export markets where the manufacturing subsidiary unit will commence its operations. 3. Maturity stage This stage has following features: 1. There is a gradual fall in quantum of exports from innovating country. 2. Standardization and quality aspects are pre-requisites. 3. Sophisticated machineries are used, hence is huge. 4. Price war is inevitable due to many players. 5. Production facilities are available in many developing countries at a low labors cost. 246 Only for Private Circulation
  • 247. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Though the demand is growing in few countries, especially in the less developed ones it declines in all the developed and few developing countries. Cost cutting is the only strategy available for the innovator to sustain. Few of the companies shifted their focus to get products manufactured wherever per unit cost is low. It is a general trend that innovating countries no longer enjoy production advantage. Since many physical, fiscal and infrastructural incentives are offered by the developing countries, such innovators are lured and increase there production in developing countries. Today, we see such manufacturing units in Indonesia, Thailand, Malaysia and Brazil. India is also emerging as a strong production centre for automobiles, health care and consumer products. 4. Declining stage 1. The main feature of the declining stage is that maximum production takes place in less developed countries. 2. The innovating country starts importing from other countries. 3. The days of keeping high margins are over. 4. It is the stage of survival and no prosperity for the innovator. 5. The innovator may completely deviate from a specific product and go in for a completely new product. The industrial countries disappoint the innovator because the affluent customer demands more and more. New products are flooded in the market with so many features. Since cost factor is the only weapon, production from less developed countries will win. The innovator of the product cannot depend on the first production unit which gave the first product for launching. 247 Only for Private Circulation
  • 248. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Maturity Production in Developing Countries: Cost cutting Growth Declining Exports and Import from Overseas LCDs; Production For survival Expansion Introduction Country of origin: Innovation. Limitations of Product Life Cycle The theory is having application in few specific sectors such as entertainment, electronics and certain medicinal items. The movement of production centres from different stages may not be applicable in the following circumstances; 248 Only for Private Circulation
  • 249. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 1. A vast majority of the products are having very short life cycle such as computers, tape recorder, musical discs and fashion items. Shifting production from one country to another country may not achieve cost reduction. The very nature of product itself is subject to obsolescence. 2. Cost involved in perfumes, cosmetics and other essential oils which fail under luxury category do not make any impact on the customer because brand is important to them. 3. Wherever costs of logistics are high the export is minimal at any stage. At the same time, few countries are producing certain essential bulk cargo. Irrespective of life cycle stages, they export all the time. Articles like bitumen from Iran, sulphur from Jordan and coal from China. They cannot shift production facilities to other countries. 4. Many MNCs are using aggressive marketing promotion such as advertising, personal selling and sales promotion. Any other competition will not be a great concern for such products. 5. Few products are very much associated with outstanding services and specialized knowledge. More than product life cycle stages, customers need assured technical support. Lifts and escalators will be accepted by customers provided service is given top priority. Same concept is applicable to life saving medical equipments produced in Germany. Irrespective of the types of products the companies are all the time introducing new products simultaneously, both in the domestic and international markets. It is obvious that in the globalization era, companies develop different products to different segments and different prices. They cannot wait for an opportunity to start in the domestic market first and going to other markets later on. Multi domestic operations are very common among MNCs. Innovations are carried out to launch products in many countries at a time especially health care items and industrial consumables. Hence, product life cycle theory has very limited applications in the current globalised era. 249 Only for Private Circulation
  • 250. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 15. CROSS CULTURAL COMMUNICATION The major challenges to do international business are not only managing people, money and resources. To trigger all those resources and succeed one has to understand two areas: 1. CULTURE 2. COMMUNICATIONS Learning Value: On completion of this chapter the reader can: 1. Understand the complexities of culture 2. General characteristics of culture 3. Implications of culture in business operations 4. Different nations and different methods to deal 5. Challenging cultural elements in the current era A unique set of traits, behaviours, values, habits, norms and ethics innovated and practiced in the past and forwarded to the future generation for day to day practice is culture. Culture is the essence of life. For many nations it is the basis of their identification and countries are often identified by their cultural inheritance. The culture of the country affects the way people behave, and often explain why they behave the way they do. In general, we often talk about oriental culture, western culture and material culture, but these terms are not explicit and can have a number of connotations. The pattern of behaviour in different cultures will reflect in business deals, working conditions, productivity levels and whether a company is accepted in different countries. 250 Only for Private Circulation
  • 251. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran When business firms operate in different nations, different cultures come together to do business. More than anything else they have to respect the cultural sentiments of each other. Often, businesses fail not because of logistical shortcomings, but due to the erroneous evaluation or total lack of understanding of the other party’s cultural values. As stated above the culture determines an individual’s actions or behaviour. The society that people grow up in shapes their basic beliefs, values and norms. They absorb, almost unconsciously, a world view that defines their relationship to themselves, to others, to nature and to the universe. A society’s beliefs, values and norms are influenced by their family and by the social, educational, and religious systems of a country. What people buy, why they buy, when they buy and how much they buy, are all primarily determined by the typical culture of each country. Cultural attitudes vary considerably among countries, so it is difficult to find general patterns amongst them. For examples, despite the fact that their economic levels are similar, the French and Germans are culturally quite different. The French are somewhat hostile to frozen food, but the Germans welcome it. Thus, for a frozen food exporter, both these countries hold different importance. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CULTURE Culture is a distinctly human capacity for adapting to circumstances and transmitting these coping skills and knowledge to subsequent generations. Culture gives people a sense of belonging and shapes their behavioural pattern. Culture impacts behaviour morals and productivity at work and includes values and patterns that influence company operations and actions. Corporate culture affects the way in which an organization copes with competition and change, whether in technology, economies or people. The way people do business is different in different countries. In Japan employees are extremely loyal to their employers and will not easily leave their jobs. The Japanese have great respect for protocol and even the way a person presents his visiting card may determines his compatibility to initiate business discussions. The Indian business community strongly believes in the concept of a family business, with the line passing from father to son. In France it is usual to work five days week, starting early in the morning. In Germany, serious business discussions do not call for humour. Delaying, often for weeks, to get a better bargaining strength, is an 251 Only for Private Circulation
  • 252. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran integral part of Chinese business. In Brazil, no major business decisions will be taken the carnival. Characteristics Self-identity and appreciation of others can manifest as a humble bearing in one country and egoistic behaviour in another. Independence and creativity are countered in other cultures by group cooperation and conformity. Americans keep their distance in business negotiations, while this is not so in Latin America and Vietnam. Communication and Language In addition to the multitude of different languages, some countries have hundreds of dialects, spoken amongst their different communities and geographic units. Furthermore, even though body language is universal, the meanings given to gestures often differ in different cultures. Dress and Appearance This includes garments and adornments as well as body decorations that are distinctive of different cultures. For example the Japenese Kimono, the African head dress, the Englishman’s hat and the Indian saree. Food and Eating Habits The manner in which food is selected, prepared, presented and eaten often differs in different cultures. Americans love beef, yet it is forbidden to Hindus. Both, Moslem and Jewish cultures forbid pork, which is consumed extensively by the Chinese. Many restaurants cater to diverse foods and offer national dishes to meet varying cultural tastes. Eating habits also differ from one country to another, from hands and chopsticks to a full set of cutlery. Even when cultures use cutley such as a fork, one can distinguish a European from an American by the hand in which he holds a fork or spoon. Relationships Cultures fix human and organizational relationships by age, gender, status and degree of kindness, wealth, power and wisdom. The family unit is the most common expression of these characteristics. In a Hindu household a joint family lives under one roof. In some cultures, the authoritarian figure in 252 Only for Private Circulation
  • 253. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran the family is the head male and this fixed relationship is then extended from home to community. Values and Norms Value systems vary in different cultures Persons who are barely surviving, place importance on food and shelter. Richer persons need security while that with high security needs, value material things, money and position as well as law and order. The younger generation in many and position as well as law and order. The younger generation in many countries concentrates on quality of life, self-fulfillment and status. In some Pacific island cultures, the more one gives away or shares, the more he or she is recognized. Beliefs and Attitudes One of the most difficult tasks in carrying out international business understands the beliefs and attitudes of people in different countries and cultures. People in all cultures seem to have a concern for the supernatural that is evident in their religions and religious practices. Western culture is largely influenced by judeo-Christian traditions, while East Asian cultures are dominated by Buddhism. Confucianism, Taoism and Hinduism. The Japanese also believe in Shintoism, which is an off-shoot of Buddhism, which originated in India. Religious beliefs can play an important role in political and legal aspects. This is especially true of Muslim countries like Saudi Arabia, Kuwait and Qatar, where business operations are strongly influenced by religious beliefs. Mental Processes and Learning The way people think and the process of learning vary from country to country. The British will enter into any business only after doing their home work thoroughly and follow strict documentation procedures; they also expect their counterpart to do the same. The Germans have a preconceived notion that they are technically superior and can produce perfect items, and lay great stress on logic, while the Japanese reject the western idea of logic. Learning is much respected in the whole of Europe. Europeans are never adverse to learning new things and they generally will not enter into discussions without a strong information base. The Americans spend a lot of time on documentation. Some cultures favour abstract thinking and conceptualization while others prefer strong base and continuous learning. 253 Only for Private Circulation
  • 254. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Work Habits and Practices Another dimension for examining a group’s culture is its attitude towards work. In some countries, the culture is oriented towards work, and holidays are minimum. An example is China, except for ten continuous days holiday during the Chinese New Year. A work ethic in which all members are excepted to engage in a desirable and worthwhile activity in the same culture For some cultures, the worthiness of the activity is narrowly measured in terms of income produce and the worth of he individual is assessed in terms of job status. In Japan, the culture lies in family which is transferred to the organization that employs the person and the quality of ones performance is expressed in work group participation, communication and consensus. Global Culture – A Rationale Today, there is an increasing need for an uniform culture across different countries, however it is not entirely possible. The main reason for this is the close bond with traditions and beliefs, which has been carried over generations. Time and space have largely divided the world into diverse forms and patterns, and cultural differences an evident even within a country. India itself is a land of varied cultures and beliefs. So is Canada, which is divided between English speaking and French speaking cultures. Even though cultures vary, our need to interact remains and it is essential to adapt to a new country and its culture. This is especially important in the exchange of commerce and persons doing business across the world have constantly felt a need for this. Many corporates fail because they did not take cultural differences into account. An American cannot sell port to a Muslim. This shows that there is a strong need to understand diverse cultures, for business to succeed. CULTURE AND BUSINES ACROSS THE GLOBE United States of America The fourth largest nation in the world, the USA has been considered a melting pot of diverse cultures. An overview of the dominant culture of the USA reveals the following traits: 1. Highly achievement-oriented. 2. Highly organized and institutionalized. 254 Only for Private Circulation
  • 255. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 3. Freedom loving and self-reliant. 4. Work-oriented and efficient 5. Friendly and informal 6. Competitive and aggressive Doing business and negotiating with Americans 1. Basic concept of negotiation: Conflict and confrontation seen as an opportunity to exchange views. 2. Selection of negotiators: American negotiators are usually chosen based on their past record of success and their knowledge and expertise. 3. The role of individual aims: Americans encourage individual aims and achievements. 4. Complexity of language: Americans are low context communicators Messages are not overridden by non-verbal communication. 5. Value of time: For most Americans time is money. They set schedules are appointments and tend to priorities events. 6. Risk taking propensity: Americans are willing to take risks. 7. Form of satisfactory agreement: American culture is legalistic. American prefers and expects detailed contractual agreements to formalize negotiations. Canada Canada is a bilingual and multicultural country. Throughout Canada, the family is the center of the society and homes are often passed from one generation to another. Canada has one of the world’s highest standards of living and the people are very industrious. Canadians are friendly but conservative and tend to observe formalities and rules of etiquette. They are patriotic and law abiding and confident of their future and welcome foreign business. 255 Only for Private Circulation
  • 256. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Doing business and negotiating with Canadians 1. Basic concept of negotiations: They focus on points of disagreement as they work through a problem by a linear process. This process involves identifying the problem/opportunities, the objectives, the alternatives, the decision and finally the plan of action. 2. Selection of negotiators: Canadian negotiators are usually chosen based on their past record of success and their knowledge and expertise. 3. Role of individual aims: Canadians are expected to put the objectives of the firm/country ahead of their personal aims. 4. Complexity of language: English speaking Canadians are low context communicators, whereas French speaking Canadians are high context communicators. 5. Value of time: Promptness in both beginning and ending a meeting is appreciated. They are rigidly bound by their schedules and deadlines. People’s Republic of China The Chinese have always held themselves in high esteem. They see themselves and their country and culture as the center of civilisation. Negotiating in China China is a group-oriented society and any negotiations must cover the interests of many different parties. The Chinese will examine their counterpart’s attitude and speech and apply it to solving the problem. The following points should be taken into account when doing business with China: 1. The Chinese are interested in long range benefits. 2. They stand by their word, and emphasis is placed on trust and mutual connection. 3. They prefer to negotiate through intermediates. 4. They will not compromise on their goals. 256 Only for Private Circulation
  • 257. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Japan Language and communication The Japanese prefer ambiguous terminology to direct and specific references. Sentences are frequently left incomplete. All business and negotiations are extremely polite and formal, but informality is seen during socialising. Often, negotiations are carried out during business entertainment. Dress and appearance Neat, orderly and conservative dress is recommended for executive staff, Blue collar workers and students generally wear a distinctive uniform and even a company pin which executives may also wear. Colours have considerable significance in the Japanese culture. Food and eating habits Eating is ritualistic, communal and time consuming, Businessmen avoid taking their wives to a business dinner even if invited. Time and age consciousness The Japanese are punctual, but they expect the other party to wait for group decisions that may take time. In negotiating a licensing agreement, the final decision may take up to three years but once the decision is taken, production may be started within a few weeks. Their planning is long term and implemented quickly. They give respect to seniority and the elderly. Reward and recognition There is a tendency to accept only group appreciation and not individual rewards,. Great emphasis is put on security as well as a social need for belonging. Money if given to Japanese should be in an envelope or else it is considered to be an insult. Relationships They are group oriented rather than individualistic. They are sensitive to what others think or expect and have a sharp sense of right and wrong. Attitudes and beliefs They are extremely adaptable. They do not resist change and are open to automation and new technology. The Japanese are hard working, both for the family and business. They are cooperative with the management. 257 Only for Private Circulation
  • 258. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Europe The three large markets in the EU are Great Britain, Germany and France. In doing business with the EU the following points are to be considered. 1. Customer service is the key to success. 2. Price lists should be published in the local currency and not in any foreign denomination. 3. Sales personnel must know their products. Europeans are sophisticated buyers of foreign products. 4. Europeans gauge the commitment of the company by the way they treat their sales representatives. 5. Europeans value personal contact and mementos, so a token gift may create a favourable impression. Australia Australians are generally easy going and friendly. Australians speak directly and frankly; they dislike pretensions of any kid and will not shy away from disagreement. It is necessary for men to shake hands before and after meetings, but not necessary that women should do the same. The basic rules of etiquette in Australia are that: 1. Men should never wink at women, even if they are friends. 2. Yawning in public is rude. 3. Eye contact is important, especially in business meetings. CONCLUSION The international business community is constantly expanding its activities in different part of the world. The business executives and managers are required to interact with society, customers, and bureaucrats. Handling the work force is a major challenge even to multinationals. This has led to any transnational companies taking the advice of experts in a chosen field prior to entering a country. 258 Only for Private Circulation
  • 259. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 16 . GLOBAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT Human being is the only intangible asset which will bring an unimaginable quantum of tangible output provided the asset is identified, nurtured and groomed to shoulder global business responsibilities. Learning Values: 1. Discuss the role culture that plays in determining the effective use of human resource management. 2. Identify critical HRM issues faced by multinational and global organizations. 3. Discuss human resources as core competent tools for Global organizations 4. Define Global HR planning and process. 5. Specify four important HR benchmarking measures. 6. Evaluate human resource information system (HRIS). Human Resources as a Prime Mover Strategic Human Resources Management deals with Organizational use of employees to gain or keep a competitive advantage against competitors. Core Competency is a unique capability in the organization that creates high value and that differentiates the organization from its competition. 259 Only for Private Circulation
  • 260. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Possible HR Areas for Core Competencies in Global Market Outstanding Service Unusual Innovation Quality GLOBAL HRM Special Productivity Skills HR-Based Competencies 260 Only for Private Circulation
  • 261. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 1. Organizational Culture a. The shared values and beliefs of the workforce 2. Productivity a. A measure of the quantity and quality of work done, considering the cost of the resources used. b. A ratio of the inputs and outputs that indicates the value added by an organization. 3. Quality Products and Services a. High quality products and services are the results of HR- enhancements to organizational performance. Global Customer Service Dimensions Service Excellence Physical Facilities and Equipment Care and Concern Confidence in Employees Knowledge Dependable and Accurate Performance Timely Assistance Key Terms in Global Human Resource Management 261 Only for Private Circulation
  • 262. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Culture shock The feelings of frustration and confusion that result from being constantly subjected to strange and unfamiliar cues about what to do and how to get it done when trying to live in a new culture. Many MNCs struggle hard at operational level due to their inability to overcome cultural shocks, especially in developing countries. Ethnocentric HRM Perspective A view of HRM whereby an organization thinks that the way of doing things in the parent country is the best way, no matter where business is done. Imposing ethnic or parent company’s norms and operation styles will lead to detriments. Expatriate manager A manager who is on assignment in a country other than the parent country of the organization. This person is also called a parent country national (PCN). Such a manager has to be so quick in adopting the culture of his working domain if he wants to be an effective manager. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act of 1977 (FCPA) A law that makes it illegal for an American organization to pay bribes to foreign officials for the purpose of getting a competitive advantage in doing business. Geocentric HRM Perspective A view of HRM whereby nationality is ignored and managers are hired on the basis of qualifications. Merit and performance are the key criteria for HRM. They are highly respectable and capable of handling any turbulent situation. Global Corporation (GC) A corporation with a geocentric HRM perspective. National boundaries are ignored and HRM is viewed as a way of integrating operations all over the world. Global Human Resource 262 Only for Private Circulation
  • 263. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran The policies and practices related to managing people in management an internationally oriented business. Host Country National (HCN) An employee of an international organization who is from the local workforce rather than being from the parent country of the organization. Parent Country National (PCN) An employee from the corporation’s home country is on assignment in another country. Generally the investing companies are prone to such a syndrome to bring key human resources from home country which may enkindle hatred amongst the people in the country of operation. Sullivan Principles Reverend Sullivan was the first African-American to serve on the Board of General Motors. The tenets of his principles were designed to eventually eliminate oppressive racism in South African business. Third Country National (TCN) An employee working for an international organization who is from a country other than the parent country of the organization or the host country in which the assignment is located. Global organizational move Challenges 1. Foreign direct investment (FDI) flows Driving force for globalization 2. Cross-border inter-firm agreements 1. Satisfied employees 2. Competitive products and services 3. Searching for new or broader markets Organizations expand beyond domestic 4. Acquiring new, more efficient boundaries to achieve manufacturing technology 5. Large, inexpensive labor forces Global human resource management 1. “people challenge” the most difficult for (GHRM) includes the same functions as firms becoming international domestic HRM, plus several aspects 2. Most critical to success, acquiring a unique to international management competent workforce (survey of top 263 Only for Private Circulation
  • 264. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran execs.) 1. Finding suitable candidates 2. Intercultural understanding 3. Career management 4. Employee retention The top HR challenges include 5. Adjusting to environment 6. Partner dissatisfaction 7. Relocation reluctance 1. Individualism versus collectivism The cultural nature of global human 2. Power distance resource management 3. Uncertainty avoidance cultural differences 4. Masculinity versus femininity 1. Fit (congruence among HR policies, firm’s plan & values of foreign culture) 2. Internal fit (HR policies that allow for The concept of "fit" in global human smooth work flow: HQ & local) resource management 3. External fit (HR to consider the local cultural/socioeconomic environment) 1. Early stages of internationalization strategy Multinational Corporation (MNC) - HRM 2. Ethnocentric orientation - PCN hires Philosophy 3. Adapting products and services to local markets 1. National boundaries disappear 2. Geocentric orientation – TCN hires Global Corporation (GC) - HRM 3. The world is the market for its products & Philosophy services 1. Finding competent expatriate managers 2. To capitalize on the diversity of a global workforce without suppressing each The real challenge nation’s desire to maintain its cultural identity 264 Only for Private Circulation
  • 265. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 1. Host Country Nationals (HCNs) Three sources of employees for 2. Parent Country Nationals (PCNs) international assignments include 3. Third Country Nationals (TCNs) 1. Complex & sensitive task 2. Technical competence 3. Self image: self-confidence, self-esteem, stress coping Selecting the expatriate manager 4. Interaction skills: interpersonal style, sensitivity to nonverbal communication perceptual orientation: open-mindedness, tolerate uncertainty accept cultural differences 1. Fascination 2. Culture shock Stages of reaction to foreign experience 3. Adaptation 1. Select managers who desire/want foreign assignments (where possible) Effective measures to deal with culture 2. Language fluency shock 3. Preparation for cultural differences 1. Provide intercultural training – improves chances for success 2. How much & type of training depends on level of contact with host culture 3. Degree of dissimilarity between home & Training the expatriate manager host cultures 4. Training to differ/vary at different phases of expatriate’s assignment (ex. pre-departure, overseas assignment, repatriation) 1. Expensive proposition 2. Pay expatriate premium, COLAs, allowances Compensating the expatriate manager 3. Financial (education, home leave) 4. Social adjustment (language, cross cultural training, locate home) 5. Family support (child care, trailing 265 Only for Private Circulation
  • 266. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran spouse, schools) 1. Less expensive 2. Have distinct advantages in cultural sensitivity, understanding local employee needs/motivation strong reservations exist in using HCNs: 3. Concern that locals will not adopt PC culture & management system 4. Level of commitment to organization Host Country Nationals and the Global may not be high Corporation 5. Don’t have the expertise or requisite skills that PCNs/expatriates possess 6. Communication between HQ and host offices will be less effective 7. Most problems can be eliminated by careful recruitment, selection, and training of HCNs When recruiting try to use the same recruitment methods as local businesses & HCNs - Recruitment other successful GCs 1. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act – (1977) forbids in conducting to give the firm an unfair advantage 2. There exists varying degrees of employment discrimination in other The legal and ethical climate of global countries which may cause human resource management problems/dilemmas for PCNs managers 3. Civil Rights Act of 1991 applies to US firms’ operations overseas 4. Sullivan Principles FACTORS AFFECTING GLOBAL HR PLANNING 266 Only for Private Circulation
  • 267. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Strategy of Culture of Competitive / Current the the Financial Organization Environment organization organization Situation Need for Human Available resources: Financial Quantity and Resources Skill Levels HR policies and Plans for: • Recruiting • Selection • HR development • Compensation • Performance Management • Staffing Adjustments Linkage of Organizational and HR Strategies 267 Only for Private Circulation
  • 268. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran Global HR Planning Process Benefits of Global HR Planning 268 Only for Private Circulation
  • 269. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 1. Better view of the HR dimensions of business decisions abroad 2. Lower HR costs through better HR management. 3. More timely recruitment for anticipate HR needs 4. More inclusion of protected groups through planned increases in workforce diversity. 5. Better development of managerial talent Scanning the External Environment 1. Environmental Scanning a. The process of studying the environment of the organization to pinpoint opportunities and threats. 2. Environment Changes Impacting HR a. Governmental regulations b. Economic conditions c. Geographic and competitive concerns d. Workforce composition Internal Assessment of the Organizational Workforce 1. Auditing Jobs and Skills a. What jobs exist now? b. How many individuals are performing each job? c. How essential is each job? d. What jobs will be needed to implement future organizational strategies? e. What are the characteristics of anticipated jobs? 2. Organizational Capabilities Inventory a. HRIS databases—sources of information about employees’ knowledge, skills, and abilities (KSAs) b. Components of an organizational capabilities inventory • Workforce and individual demographics • Individual employee career progression • Individual job performance data Assessing HR Effectiveness 269 Only for Private Circulation
  • 270. International Business- Dr. R. Chandran 1. Diagnostic Measures of HR Effectiveness a. HR expense per employee b. Compensation as a percent of expenses c. HR department expense as a percent of total expenses d. Cost of hires e. Turnover rates f. Absenteeism rates g. Worker’s compensation per employee 1. HR Audit a. A formal research effort that evaluates the current state of HR management in an organization b. Audit areas: i. Legal compliance (e.g., EEO, OSHA, ERISA, and FMLA) ii. Current job specifications and descriptions iii. Valid recruiting and selection process iv. Formal wage and salary system • Benefits v. Employee handbook vi. Absenteeism and turnover control vii. Grievance resolution process viii. Orientation program ix. Training and development x. Performance management system 270 Only for Private Circulation